Reference 2010 (UK) by Routledge Taylor & Francis Group

Routledge

New Titles and Key Backlist

Reference

2010

www.routledge.com/reference

www.routledge.com/reference Welcome to the Routledge

Reference Catalogue New Titles & Key Backlist 2010 International Library Philosophy of Education

Page 1

Page 25

Page 30

COMPLETE CATALOGUE This catalogue only includes a selection of our titles in Reference. Our online catalogue gives you the power to search for any book currently in print by title, ISBN or full text. All the entries have a description of the book’s content. www.routledge.com/reference

THE EASY WAY TO ORDER Ordering online is fast and efficient, simply follow the on-screen instructions and your order will be sent to our distributors for immediate dispatch.

E-UPDATES Register your email address at www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates to receive information on books, journals and other news within your area of interest.

EBOOKS – MARKED AS ‘eBook’ IN THIS CATALOGUE Thousands of our titles are available as eBooks – in Adobe, Microsoft Reader and Mobipocket formats or available to browse online.

Page 33

Page 48

Page 66

CONTENTS Annual Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Anthropology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Archaeology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Architecture and Urban Planning . . . .7 Asian Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Biographical Reference . . . . . . . . . .14 Economics, Business and Law . . . . . 16 Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Geography and the Environment . . .31 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 History of Science . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Library and Information Science . . .36 Linguistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Media and Cultural Studies . . . . . . .50 Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 58 Politics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Religion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Sociology & Health Studies . . . . . . .82 Sport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Order form . . . . . . .Back of Catalogue

www.eBookstore.tandf.co.uk

Trade customers’ representatives, agents and distribution For a list of all trade customers’ representatives, agents and distributors for UK, Rest of World, North America and South America visit: http://www.routledge.com/representatives

Page 68

Page 81

CONTACTS MARKETING ENQUIRIES Adam White Marketing Manager Tel: +44 (0)20 7017 6649 Email: adam.white@tandf.co.uk

Guide to Symbols

Annual Title

Major Work

Routledge Revival

RLE

Routledge Library Edition Available within online database Available as eBook

ANNUAL TITLES

NEW

50TH EDITION

The Europa World Year Book 2009

NEW

Africa South of the Sahara 2010

Globally renowned for its accuracy, consistency and reliability, the Europa World Year Book provides detailed country surveys containing the latest analytical, statistical and directory information available for over 250 countries and territories. International Organizations Over 1,900 international and regional organizations are included. All the featured organizations are listed in a comprehensive index. • Provides extensive coverage of the United Nations and its related agencies and bodies; and covers in depth a further sixty major international organizations. These entries provide in-depth articles on the activities of each organization and the programmes they run, a list of member states, and information covering the structure of the organization. Contact details, publications and information on finance are also included. • The third section lists some 1,750 other international organizations, listed by area of activity. Contact details and publications are listed for each entry, as well as a description of activities. Organizations featured include the United Nations Environmental Programme, the European Union, the International Organization for Migration, the Criminal Court, the World Trade Organization, and the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries. Country Surveys More than 250 countries and territories are covered by an individual chapter. These chapters contain: Introductory Survey The Introductory Survey includes essays covering recent history, economic affairs, government, defence, education and public holidays. Extensively updated and revised annually, these provide an excellent introduction to the country. Statistical Survey This section provides tables giving the latest available figures on area and population; health and welfare; agriculture; forestry; fishing; mining; industry; finance; trade; transport; tourism; the media; and education. Statistics are sourced from official local or national bodies, or from international organizations where appropriate. Directory Section A comprehensive directory section lists names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers, e-mail and internet addresses, plus other useful facts about organizations from the fields of government; election commissions; political organizations; diplomatic representation; judicial system; religions; the press; publishers; broadcasting and communications; banking; insurance; trade and industry; development organizations; chambers of commerce; industrial and trade associations; utilities; trade unions; transport; and tourism. June 2009: 279x211: 5,134pp Hb: 978-1-85743-511-5: £765.00

39TH EDITION

’A well-balanced, welljudged and remarkably comprehensive volume.’ – Times Literary Supplement

NEW

Central and South Eastern Europe 2010 ’This is an impressive reference work providing an impartial and invaluable guide to the politics, economy and history of the region’ – European Access Plus

A definitive one-volume guide to all sub-Saharan African countries, providing invaluable economic and directory data. It includes: • over 1,500 pages of economic and demographic statistics, wideranging directory material and authoritative articles • contributions from over fifty leading experts on African affairs • incisive analysis of the latest available information. General Survey • Thoroughly revised and updated analytical articles written by acknowledge d experts covering the issues affecting the area as a whole, including: Economic Trends in Africa South of the Sahara; Health and Medical Issues in Sub-Saharan Africa; State Failure in Africa; A Century of Development; China’s Expansion into Africa; European Colonial Rule in Africa; Peace and Security Architecture and The Threat of Organized Crime to West Africa.

10TH EDITION

• A comprehensive survey of the countries and territories of Central and South Eastern Europe, incorporating coverage of the latest economic and political developments • includes expert analysis of questions of regional importance, up-to-date statistics, extensive directories, and biographical information • provides an impartial discussion of the politics and economy of the region. General Survey

Country Surveys

• Thoroughly revised and updated analytical articles written by acknowledged experts covering issues of regional interest, including: Central and SouthEastern European Economies; Minorities in Central and South-Eastern Europe; Environmental Governance and EU Enlargement; The Baltic Sea Region; Bosnia and Herzegovina since Dayton; The Impact of EU Integration on Social Policy Reforms in Central and South-Eastern Europe; plus appendices on the religions of the region and on the Russian Baltic territory of Kaliningrad.

Individual chapters on every country incorporating:

Country Surveys

• an introductory survey, containing essays on the physical and social geography, recent history and economy of each country

• Detailed individual chapters for each country include a description of physical and social geography; a chronology; essays on the history and economy; and a statistical survey. Each chapter also includes a comprehensive directory of names, addresses, and contact details, together with information on: the Constitution, national and local government, political organizations, diplomatic representation, the judicial system, religion, the media, finance, telecommunications, trade and industry (including major companies), transport, tourism, culture, education, social welfare, the environment and defence. There is also a select bibliography.

• A political map of contemporary Africa and a chronological list of the dates of independence of African countries.

• an extensive statistical survey of economic indicators, which include area and population, health and welfare, agriculture, forestry, fishing, mining, industry, finance, trade, transport, tourism, media and education • a full directory containing names, addresses and contact numbers for key areas such as the government, political organizations, diplomatic representation, the judiciary, religion, the media, finance, trade and industry, tourism, defence and education • a useful bibliography, providing sources for further research. Regional Information Detailed information on the following: regional organizations; major commodities; calendars, time reckoning, research institutes concerned with Africa and select bibliographies of books and periodicals. October 2009: 279x211: 1,536pp Hb: 978-1-85743-527-6: £445.00

• This edition includes newly commissioned essays on the history and economy of Kosovo. Regional Information • Provides detailed information on selected regional and international organizations; a list of research institutes; and select bibliographies of both books and periodicals. • Biographical details on more than 180 of the region’s leading political figures. August 2009: 279x211: 852pp Hb: 978-1-85743-524-5: £410.00

US $1,395.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

ANNUAL TITLES

FORTHCOMING

10TH EDITION

Eastern Europe, Russia and Central Asia 2010

FORTHCOMING

Far East and Australasia 2010

• a systematic survey of the countries of East and South-East Asia, Australia and New Zealand, along with twenty-three Pacific Islands

• incisive analysis by acknowledged experts • the latest statistics on the major economic indicators and population

• keeps up to date with current economic and political developments.

• invaluable directory material.

General Survey

Written by acknowledged authorities on the Pacific Rim, this collection of essays forms an impartial overview of the area as a whole. Topics include: the Rise of China, the USA’s relations with the AsiaPacific region, Regional Security Issues, Human Rights, and Environmental Issues of the Asia Pacific Region.

Country Surveys

Country Surveys Individual chapters on each country containing: • essays on geography, history and the economy

• an introductory survey, containing essays on the geography, recent history and economy of each country, which includes a map and chronology

• an economic and demographic survey of the latest available statistics on population, health and welfare, agriculture, forestry, fishing, mining, industry, finance, trade, transport, tourism, communications and education

• a directory of names, addresses and contact details covering the constitution, government, legislature, judiciary, political organizations, diplomatic representation, religion, the media, finance, trade, industry, tourism, defence and education

• a full directory containing names, addresses, and contact details for the following areas: the constitution, the government, legislature, local government, political organizations, diplomatic representation, the judiciary, religion, the media, finance, trade and industry, transport, tourism, culture, education, social welfare, the environment and defence

• a select bibliography.

• in-depth coverage of autonomous, sovereign and separatist territories, including comprehensive information on the constituent units of the Russian Federation

• a directory of research institutes specializing in the region

• a bibliography, providing sources for further research.

• an index of regional organizations.

Individual chapters on every country containing:

Regional Information

56TH EDITION

Middle East and North Africa 2010 • Covers the Middle East and North Africa from Algeria to Yemen • Includes topical contributions from acknowledged experts on the region

Now in its forty-first edition

• essential for anyone with a professional interest in the region

• Leading authorities on the region analyze topics of regional importance including: Implications of the International Economic Crisis on the Countries of the Region; International Relations of Russia and the CIS; The Politics of Energy in the Caspian Sea Region; Poverty and Social Welfare; The Politics of Water in Central Asia; Separatism and Islamist Military in the north Caucasus and Environmental Degradation.

NEW

’An excellent reference work which no library should be without.’ – International Affairs

’Eastern Europe, Russia and Central Asia is an important new guide to the region.’ – Reference Reviews Extensive coverage of the political, economic and social affairs of the region. This impartial up-to-date survey of the countries and territories that make up the region includes:

41ST EDITION

• Accurately and impartially records the latest political and economic developments • Provides comprehensive data on all major organizations in the region. General Survey • Introductory essays cover topics relating to the region as a whole, including: Arab–Israeli Relations 1967–2009; The Jerusalem Issue; Documents on Palestine; Nuclear Proliferation in the Middle East; The Islamist Movement; Oil; Natural Gas; Islamic Banking and Finance; and The Religions of the Middle East and North Africa. Country Surveys Individual chapters on each country incorporating: • essays on the physical and social geography, recent history and economy of the country • an extensive statistical survey of economic indicators, which include area and population, health and welfare, agriculture, forestry, fishing, mining, industry, finance, trade, transport, tourism, communications media and education • a full directory with names, addresses and contact details covering the constitution, government, legislature, judiciary, political organizations, diplomatic representation, religious groups, the media, finance, trade and industry (including petroleum and natural gas), tourism, defence and education, and a bibliography, providing suggestions for further research. Regional Information

Regional Information • includes all major international organizations active in the region, their aims, activities, publications and principal personnel • a detailed survey of major commodities in Asia and the Pacific

• Includes all major international organizations active in the region, research institutes specializing in the region; and select bibliographies of books and periodicals covering the Middle East and North Africa. October 2009: 279x211: 1,440pp Hb: 978-1-85743-530-6: £445.00

• select bibliographies of books and periodicals covering the Far East and Australasia November 2009: 279x211: 1,536pp Hb: 978-1-85743-533-7: £445.00

• Detailed information on the following: regional organizations; research institutes; a select periodicals bibliography and a select books bibliography. • Biographical details of more than 160 of the leading political figures in the region. November 2009: 279x211: 780pp Hb: 978-1-85743-531-3: £410.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

ANNUAL TITLES

NEW

18TH EDITION

South America, Central America and the Caribbean 2010 ’Remains an exemplary reference work for students of the area.’ – International Affairs This latest eighteenth edition of South America, Central America and the Caribbean is scrupulously revised and updated, bringing you impartial and comprehensive coverage of this vast area. Key Features:

NEW 7TH EDITION

South Asia 2010

FORTHCOMING

12TH EDITION

USA and Canada 2010

Now in its seventh edition, South Asia 2010 provides an in-depth library of information on the countries and territories of the region. Exhaustively researched by Europa’s experienced editorial team, this title includes a vast range of up-to-date economic, political and statistical data. Combining impartial analysis with facts and figures, South Asia 2010 provides a unique overall perspective on this increasingly important region.

’USA and Canada 2010 should be essential desk furniture for government and business. And, of course, a permanent feature of library reference shelves.’ – Reference Reviews This renowned reference title provides essential statistical and directory material on these vast North American nations and the issues surrounding them. Completely revised and updated, this eleventh edition brings together statistical, factual and directory information on these two vast nations and their constituent states, provinces and territories.

• an unrivalled survey on the countries and territories of this immense region

The book is divided into three sections:

• includes contributions from acknowledged authorities who examine topics of regional importance.

• Containing introductory essays by key specialists providing impartial coverage of issues of regional importance including security and religion. Essays include: Globalization and Human Development in South Asia; Corruption and Governance in South Asia; Current Security Issues in South Asia; Forced Migration in South Asia; India as a Superpower; Gender Issues in South Asia; the Religions of South Asia; The Rise of Islamic Extremism in South Asia and Population and Environmental Issues in South Asia.

Key Features:

Country Surveys

• Each country is dealt with in greater detail within its own section. Part Two: USA, Part Three: Canada

General Survey Thoroughly revised and updated analytical articles written by acknowledged authorities of the area; subjects covered include: Latin America in the Global Economy; The Continuing Dominance of the Left in Latin America; Gender and Development in Latin America; Trade Preferences and Caribbean Economies; Gangs of Central America; The Politics of Energy in Latin America; Caribbean Overseas Territories in a Changing World. Country Surveys Individual chapters on each country and territory incorporating: • an introductory survey, containing essays on the history and economy of each country, as well as physical and social geographies of each country, including maps • an extensive economic and demographic survey of the latest available statistics on area and population, health and welfare, agriculture, forestry, fishing, mining, industry, finance, trade, transport, tourism, communications media and education • a full directory section with names, addresses, contact numbers and e-mail and internet addresses covering the constitution, government, legislature, judiciary, political organizations, diplomatic representation, religious groups, the media, finance, trade and industry, tourism, defence and education

General Survey

• detailed coverage of the eight countries of South Asia: Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, The Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan and Sri Lanka • up-to-date statistical surveys including the latest available figures on population and area, agriculture, industry, trade, transport, communications, media and education • a directory section of essential contact names, postal addresses and e-mail and internet addresses. Regional Information • a biographical section profiling prominent figures in the South Asian region • directory details of research institutes studying the area and a select book and periodicals bibliography. October 2009: 279x211: 768pp Hb: 978-1-85743-534-4: £380.00

• introductory essays • leading experts on the area analyze topics of interest and importance to the region as a whole, including: North America and Climate Change and North America and the BRICs. Country Surveys

Each country chapter includes: • introduction • essays, including: US Foreign Policy; the Politics of Oil Dependency in the USA; the Role of Religion in US Politics; the US Electoral System; the USA and the Global Financial Crisis; the USA and International Organizations; Health and Social Welfare Policy in the USA; Diversity and Equality in the USA; the History of Canada post-1980; Federal Energy Policy in Canada; and Canada’s Foreign Relations • directory and statistics. December 2009: 279x211: 624pp Hb: 978-1-85743-536-8: £445.00

FORTHCOMING

The Europa Regional Surveys of the World Set 2010

Regional Information

September 2009: 279x211: 1,128pp Hb: 978-1-85743-525-2: £445.00

• contributions from acknowledged regional experts.

9-VOLUME SET

• a select bibliography, containing suggestions for further research. • Includes full details of all major international organizations active in the region; a detailed survey of major commodities in Latin America; a directory of research institutes specializing in the region; select bibliographies of books and periodicals and an index of regional organizations.

• comprehensive geographical, historical, economic and political information

ONLINE! EUROPA WORLD

This nine-volume set covers each of the major world regions. As well as covering the region as a whole, each volume provides a vast range of background information, statistics, directory information and analysis of the social, political and economic situation for each of the individual countries within that region. December 2009: 279x211 Hb: 978-1-85743-545-0: £3,485.00

(see central section for details)

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

ANNUAL TITLES

FORTHCOMING

12TH EDITION

Western Europe 2010

NEW

The Europa World of Learning 2010

’Excellent, authoritative, valuable.’ – Reference Reviews A comprehensive survey of the countries and territories of Western Europe, which comprises expert analysis and commentary and includes upto-date statistical and directory information. Key features: • contributions from around forty acknowledged experts • thoroughly revised directory and statistical information on each country and territory. General Survey • introductory articles by leading authorities cover issues of regional importance. Topics include developments in the European Union, the politics of migration, environmental issues, the challenges surrounding Western Europe's defence policies, relations with the developing world, Islam in Western Europe and an economic survey of the region. Country Surveys •Individual chapters on each country, which comprise: • an introductory survey, containing essays on the geography, history and economy of each country, which includes a full chronology and map • an extensive economic and demographic survey of the latest available statistics on area and population, health and welfare, agriculture, forestry, fishing, mining, industry, finance, trade, transport, tourism, communications media and education • a full directory section with names, addresses, contact numbers and e-mail and internet addresses covering the constitution, government, election commissions, political organizations, diplomatic representation, religious groups, the media, finance, trade and industry, tourism, defence and education • a select bibliography, containing suggestions for further research. Regional Information includes a directory of research institutes specializing in the region and bibliographies of books and periodicals covering Western Europe. November 2009: 279x211: 888pp Hb: 978-1-85743-535-1: £445.00

60TH EDITION

A comprehensive Directory and guide to the organizations and institutions throughout the sphere of higher education and learning. Profiling some 30,000 academic institutions and over 200,000 staff and officials, this highly esteemed work covers the whole of the higher education and learning spectrum. Available in both print and online editions, there is no other source that provides such comprehensive, international coverage. Now in its sixtieth edition, The Europa World of Learning has become established as one of the world’s leading reference works. Meticulously updated to the highest editorial standards, entries are sourced from the organizations themselves to ensure accurate and reliable information. This edition has a special emphasis on the Middle East, reflected in three of the introducing five chapters: Islam, Modernity and Education in the Arab States; the Higher Education of Women in the Arabian Gulf; and the Quality Challenge in Iran’s Higher Education. Every type of academic institution is covered, including over:

NEW

11TH EDITION

Europa Directory of International Organizations 2009 An extensive and unequalled one-volume guide covering some 1,900 international and regional entities, this title provides detailed and accurate information on a wide spectrum of international organizations from the World Health Organization to OPEC. New for this edition is an essay on the international economic system, its institutions and governance. Features include: • introductory articles: An Introduction to International Organizations; The International System in the Early 21st Century; and Governing the World Economy. • a chronology charting the historical development of international organizations • texts of significant international charters, treaties and documents • lists of key UN Security Council and General Assembly resolutions, plus information about peace-keeping activities • biographical details of leading officials within international organizations

• 6,600 research institutes

• information on each organization includes contact details, membership, leading officials, activities, finance, publications and subsidiary organizations

• 3,000 museums and art galleries

• an extensive index.

• 5,300 learned societies

July 2009: 279x211: 816pp Hb: 978-1-85743-522-1: £260.00

• 6,200 universities and colleges

• 3,500 libraries and archives • 26,000 publications. This highly acclaimed resource also includes a separate section detailing more than 500 international organizations concerned with higher education and scholarship, such as UNESCO, the International Association of Universities and ERASMUS. Other key features include: • truly international coverage • separate chapters for every country; from Afghanistan to Zimbabwe • completely revised and updated every year • easy-to-use format, including a 100-page index of institutions for quick reference • also available online at www.worldoflearning.com September 2009: 279x211: 2,916pp Hb: 978-1-85743-529-0: £550.00 US $1,025.00

US $490.00

NEW

6TH EDITION

International Directory of Government 2009 The International Directory of Government is the definitive guide to people in power in every part of the world. All the top decision-makers are included in this one-volume publication, which brings together government institutions, agencies and personnel in every country and dependency in the world. Each chapter offers information about: • the country’s system of government • the head of state • the legislature • government ministers and ministries • the election commission • the judiciary • state-related agencies and other institutions arranged by subject heading. July 2009: 279x211: 744pp Hb: 978-1-85743-538-2: £380.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $760.00

www.routledge.com/reference

ANNUAL TITLES

NEW

18TH EDITION

The Europa International Foundation Directory 2009 Now in its eighteenth edition, the Europa International Foundation Directory provides an un-paralleled guide to the foundations, trusts, charitable and grant-making NGOs, and other similar not-for-profit organizations of the world. It provides a comprehensive picture of third sector activity on a global scale. Presenting names and contact details for over 2,550 institutions world-wide, this new edition has been revised and expanded to include the most comprehensive and up-to-date information on this growing sector. Part One Essays provide valuable background information on the sector, giving an introductory overview of foundation activity world-wide, as well as detailing the direction in which foundations and NGOs are moving in the 21st century.

NEW

The Military Balance 2009

The Military Balance is the International Institute for Strategic Studies’ annual assessment of the military capabilities and defence economics of 170 countries worldwide. It is an essential resource for those involved in security policymaking, analysis and research.

The tenth edition of this well-informed and comprehensive Encyclopedia and Directory charts the European Union’s development. Thoroughly updated, this extensive reference source provides in-depth information on all matters relating to the European Union: the expansion of the EU under the Nice Treaty is covered, and the future of the union is addressed. A glossary of key terms, a statistical survey and a directory section provide a unique guide to the workings of the EU as well as up-to-date contact details of MEPs and other EU officials.

The book is a region-by-region analysis of the major military and economic developments affecting defence and security policies, and the trade in weapons and other military equipment. Comprehensive tables detail major military training activities, UN and non-UN deployments, and give data on key equipment holdings and defence-expenditure trends over a ten year period. This new edition of The Military Balance provides a unique compilation of data and information enabling the reader to access all required information from one single publication.

Key features:

January 2009: 246x189: 488pp Pb: 978-0-415-49846-3: £234.00

• an up-to date chronology of the EU (from 1947 to present)

US $412.00

NEW

Entries are arranged alphabetically, and are listed within individual country chapters. Over 2,500 entries are listed, providing the following details:

Edited by International Institute for Strategic Studies

• foundation centres and co-ordinating bodies are listed in a separate section at the start of each chapter. These include CAF (Charities Aid Foundation, UK), Civil Society International (USA) and the Association internationale des charités (Belgium). Entries listed include: Polish-Czech-Slovak Solidarity Foundation, The Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, Rowan Charitable Trust, Marie Curie Cancer Cure and Médecins sans Frontières. Part Three Indexes are provided, listing foundations alphabetically, by geographical region of concern (e.g. the Middle East, Western Europe, Central and South America and the Caribbean, etc.) and by main areas of activity. May 2009: 279x211: 728pp Hb: 978-1-85743-523-8: £270.00

10TH EDITION

European Union Encyclopedia and Directory 2010

Strategic Survey 2009

• full details of the date of establishment and the aims and function of the organization are listed where appropriate, as well as its principal activities: projects and programmes, etc. Restrictions on grants are listed along with the geographical area of activity, finances, key executives and trustees of the organization

FORTHCOMING

Edited by International Institute for Strategic Studies

Part Two

• directory information, including the name of the organization, postal address, e-mail and internet addresses as well as telephone and fax numbers

The Strategic Survey opens with ’Perspectives’, an assessment of the effect of major events and trends on the strategic landscape. Next, particular strategic policy issues, such as terrorism and weapons of mass destruction, missile defence and the future of peacekeeping, are examined in separate chapters. Another eighteen to twenty chapters of similar length, written along thematic rather than merely chronological lines, cover developments in particular regions or countries. The Strategic Survey concludes with ’Prospectives’, an essay setting forth strategic priorities for the coming year. Also included are thirty-two pages of maps depicting strategically important activity and political change—such as piracy and Russia’s new federal districts—globally, regionally and locally. The interplay of political developments and the actual or potential use of military force remains Strategic Survey’s chief concern. Nevertheless, since the end of the Cold War and of the first distinct post-Cold War period, the Institute has recognised that any survey of matters strategic needs to broaden its scope to embrace economic September 2009: 279x211: 400pp Pb: 978-1-85743-526-9: £109.00

US $192.00

• an A-Z section contains concise definitions and explanations of organizations, acronyms and terms, and articles on each member state. Comprising over 1,000 entries compiled by acknowledged experts, terms listed include: the European Convention; the Rapid Reaction Mechanism; the Charter of Fundamental Rights; the Laeken Declaration; enlargement; and immigration policy • a series of introductory articles provide an overall view of the policies and activities of the EU. Essay subjects include: defence policies of the EU; the EU economy; European Monetary Union; the governance, legal and social frameworks of the EU; enlargement; external relations, migration and asylum policy • an extensive directory of key names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers, e-mail and internet addresses of all major European Union institutions and their official bodies. This information is supplemented by summaries of important treaties; details of information sources in the EU; and details of EU-level trade and professional associations. Also in this section, details of MEPs and the political groups and national parties contributing to the European Parliament • a statistical survey provides tables covering areas such as: population, employment, agriculture, energy and mining, industry, finance, trade, transport and communications, tourism, health and welfare, and education across the EU. This title will prove invaluable to academic and public libraries, politicians and government agencies and the media, as well as to all those in need of accurate and reliable information on the European Union.

US$495.00

November 2009: 279x211: 780pp Hb: 978-1-85743-532-0: £410.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $750.00

ANTHROPOLOGY

ARCHAEOLOGY

Anthropology and Ethnography

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Titles from the biological/physical side of anthropology will be reprinted, although the main emphasis will be on works in social and cultural anthropology which are international in scope and authorship.

The Byzantine World

The Routledge Handbook of the Peoples and Places of Ancient Western Asia

2004: 216x138 Hb: 978-0-415-32556-1: £7,500.00

US $15,000.00

VOLUME 54

International Bibliography of the Social Sciences

Anthropology: 2008 Compiled by the British Library of Political and Economic Science First published in 1952, the International Bibliography of the Social Sciences (anthropology, economics, political science, and sociology) is well established as a major bibliographic reference for students, researchers & librarians. • An essential resource in the social sciences for researchers and librarians. • Includes extensive coverage of the Developing World and Eastern European publications. • All materials are organized alphabetically by controlled subject keywords providing an excellent means of browsing. November 2009:234x156: 650pp Hb: 978-0-415-55466-4: £295.00

Whilst students of Greek history enjoy Plutarch’s biographies of Athenian statesmen, they often feel overwhelmed by the detail and are puzzled by questions of reliability, sources and purpose. Plutarch and Athens responds to the needs of both teachers and students by giving a clear up-to-date presentation of Plutarch’s portraits in the Athenian context. US $110.00

FORTHCOMING

Companion to Urban Design Edited by Tridib Banerjee, University of Southern California, USA and Anastasia Loukaitou-Sideris, University of Los Angeles, USA Today urban design has emerged as an important area of intellectual pursuit, with applications at many different scales—ranging from the block or street scale to the scale of metropolitan and regional landscapes. The field interfaces with many aspects of contemporary public policy—multiculturalism, economic development, climate change, energy conservation, sustainable development, community liveability, and related issues. The Companion includes original contributions from a select group of internationally renowned scholars and practitioners.

ORDER NOW!

The Byzantine World presents the latest insights of the leading scholars in the fields of Byzantine studies, history, art and architectural history, literature, and theology. Those who know little of Byzantine history, culture and civilization between AD 700 and 1453 will find overviews and distillations, while those who know much already will be afforded countless new vistas. Each chapter offers an innovative approach to a wellknown topic or a diversion from a well-trodden path. Readers will be introduced to Byzantine women and children, men and eunuchs, emperors, patriarchs, aristocrats and slaves. They will explore churches and fortifications, monasteries and palaces, from Constantinople to Cyprus and Syria in the east, and to Apulia and Venice in the west. Secular and sacred art, profane and spiritual literature will be revealed to the reader, who will be encouraged to read, see, smell and touch. The worlds of Byzantine ceremonial and sanctity, liturgy and letters, Orthodoxy and heresy will be reconnoitred. Ultimately, the expert reader, as all will now be, will find insights into the emergence of modern Byzantine studies and of popular Byzantine history. January 2010: 246x174: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-44010-3: £150.00

Hubert Martin, University of Kentucky, USA

June 2010: 246x189: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-55364-3: £128.00

Series: Routledge Worlds

US $270.00

$450.00

Plutarch and Athens

July 2010: 234x156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-29908-4: £60.00

Edited by Paul Stephenson, University of Durham, UK

FORTHCOMING

Handbook for Classical Research David Schaps, Bar-Ilan University, Israel A basic Handbook for every student of classics that provides instruction in how to research all areas of classical studies, from undergraduate dissertation upwards. It will also be of assistance to scholars and complements standard reference books by concentrating on ’how-to’ topics. Selected Contents: 1. The Nature of the Field; General Rules of Research 2. The Stages of Research 3. Bibliography 4. Sources and How to Use Them 5. Book Reviews 6. Lexicography 7. Grammar 8. Linguistics 9. Textual Criticism 10. Literary Criticism 11. Oratory and Rhetoric 12. Philosophy 13. History 14. Archaeology 15. Papyrology 16. Numismatics 17. Mycenaean Studies 18. Sociology, Anthropology, Economics and Ecology 19. Ancient Religion 20. Ancient Science 21. Art History 22. Ancient Dance and Music 23. Law 24. The Classical Tradition 25. History of Classical Scholarship 26. Reconstructing the Ancient World 27. Translation March 2010: 234x156: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-42522-3: £75.00

US $135.00

eBook

The Near East from the Early Bronze Age to the fall of the Persian Empire Trevor Bryce, University of Queensland, Australia This reference work provides the most comprehensive general treatment yet available of the peoples and places of the regions commonly referred to as the ancient Near and Middle East—extending from the Aegean coast of Turkey in the west to the Indus river in the east. It contains some 1,500 entries on the kingdoms, countries, cities, and population groups of Anatolia, Cyprus, Syria-Palestine, Mesopotamia, and Iran and parts of Central Asia, from the Early Bronze Age to the end of the Persian Empire. Five distinguished international scholars have collaborated with the author on the project. Detailed accounts are provided of the Near/Middle Eastern peoples and places known to us from historical records. Each of these entries includes specific references to translated passages from the relevant ancient texts. Numerous entries on archaeological sites contain accounts of their history of excavation, as well as more detailed descriptions of their chief features and their significance within the commercial, cultural, and political contexts of the regions to which they belonged. The book contains a range of illustrations, including twenty maps. It will serve as a major, indeed a unique, reference source for students as well as established scholars, both of the ancient Near Eastern as well as the Classical civilizations. It will also appeal to more general readers wishing to pursue in depth their interests in these civilizations. There is nothing comparable to it on the market today. Selected Contents: List of Maps. List of Figures. Abbreviations. Maps. Introduction. Historical Overview. Alphabetical Entries. Appendices I—General Chronology II—The Major Royal Dynasties III—Urartian Chronology IV—Greek and Roman Authors Glossary. Bibliography. Index. July 2009: 246x174: 944pp Hb: 978-0-415-39485-7: £160.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87550-6

US $260.00

Encyclopedia of Ancient Greece Edited by Nigel Wilson 2005: 832pp Hb: 978-0-415-97334-2: £100.00

US $160.00

US $230.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

ARCHITECTURE AND URBAN PLANNING

FORTHCOMING

eBook

ASIAN STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

Landfill Engineering

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Geoffrey B. Card

Urban Regeneration and Renewal

Routledge Handbook of Indian Politics

Environmental pressures have forced a major rethink on the management and use of landfill. The engineering questions are considerable, and have not been discussed much in the literature to date. This new work provides an up to date Handbook on the engineering of landfill materials from design and construction of new facilities to the re-use and development on closed landfill sites.

Edited by Andrew Tallon, University of the West of England, Bristol, UK

Edited by Atul Kohli and Prerna Singh, both at Princeton University, USA

Series: Critical Concepts in Urban Studies

India’s growing economic and socio-political importance on the global stage has triggered an increased interest in that country. Scholars, policy analysts, students and the curious layperson alike are keen to gain a basic understanding of the ways in which the world’s largest democracy functions.

Following the EU Landfill Directive and in response to pressure, the UK now needs to comply with the diversion and separation of biodegradable domestic waste from hazardous waste and to give greater emphasis to the recycling of waste materials. This will change the character of landfills in the future as the materials changes. The engineering properties of landfill materials are a function not only of their physical characteristics but also of the chemistry of degradation. Additionally, increasing government pressure to redevelop brownfield land is driving the reuse of landfill. This is making engineers rethink the techniques of disposal of wastes in new landfill to ultimately allow safe redevelopment of these sites. It also prompts the understanding of the characteristics of existing landfills to develop safe engineering solutions. This book provides a reference to landfill characteristics, measurement, analysis and modelling landfill behaviour, recycling materials and engineering design. It presents the background science and engineering methods to solve these issues. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Landfill Characterisation 3. Chemistry of Waste Materials 4. Engineering Properties of Waste Materials 5. Design of New Landfills 6. Maintenance and Reuse of Existing Landfills 7. Development on Landfills July 2010: 216x138: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-37006-6: £60.00 eBook: 978-0-203-03003-5

This new title in the Routledge series, Critical Concepts in Urban Studies, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the explosion in research output on regeneration and renewal as a significant historical and contemporary urban process of economic, social, cultural, and political importance. Edited by a leading scholar, this Routledge Major Work brings together in four volumes the canonical and the best cutting-edge scholarship on the topic. Selected Contents: Volume I: Part 1: Cities in Transition Globalization and Urban Competitiveness. From Managerialism to Urban Entrepreneurialism. Social Capital, Exclusion, Cohesion, and Diversity. Urban Governance and the Post-Fordist City. Volume II: Postmodernism and Urban Space: Part 2: Responses to Urban Change from National Governments Postwar Physical Redevelopment and Area-Based Social Welfare Projects. Entrepreneurial and Property-Led Regeneration. Economic Competition in Urban Policy. Combining Economic Development and Social Justice in Urban Policy. Evaluating National Government Urban Regeneration and Renewal Policies. Volume III: Part 3: City Responses to Urban Change Place Marketing. Expanding the Leisure and Cultural Economies. Creative Cities and Creative Industries. Sport and Regeneration. City Centre Retail Regeneration. Volume IV: Housing-Led Regeneration and Gentrification Community Involvement in Urban Regeneration Partnerships. Urban Sustainable Development and Sustainable Communities. February 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47506-8: £650.00

US $1,295.00

As a result, there is at present an unprecedented need for a ready reference that provides a concise but comprehensive introduction to the central themes of Indian politics and this Handbook fills this niche. Chapters are structured along the themes of state, society, and the politics that links the two in the context of post-Independence India. In the section entitled ‘The State’ a spectrum of India’s leaders; institutions, such as political parties and federalism; economic growth and social development; and politics in different states are examined. The section on ‘Society’ analyzes identity politics; the relationship between religion and society; and various aspects of civil society. The final section – ‘International Perspectives’—analyzes India’s foreign relations as well as a selection of national security issues. The contributions are written by experts in their respective field, and consequently, the Handbook offers an invigorating initiation into the seemingly daunting and complex terrain of Indian politics. It is targeted primarily towards academics, policy analysts, researchers and graduates as well as undergraduate students. June 2010: 246x174: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-77685-1: £95.00

US $120.00

For more information about our eBooks in Archaeology, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $190.00

ASIAN STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Handbook of Japanese Politics

Routledge Handbook of Central Asian Politics

Routledge Handbook of the Israeli–Palestinian Conflict

Edited by Alisa Gaunder, Southwestern University, USA

Edited by Reuel R. Hanks, Oklahoma State University, USA

The Routledge Handbook of Japanese Politics is an advanced level reference guide which surveys the current state of Japanese Politics, featuring both traditional topics and cutting edge research.

Written by experts on the region’s complex politics, this Handbook provides an in depth understanding of political issues in the five states of Central Asia. It is structured along the themes of security and stability, development of political institutions and national integration, issues in political economy and international relations.

Edited by David Newman, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, Israel and Joel Peters, Virginia Tech University, USA

The volume is divided into five sections covering domestic politics, civil society, social policy, political economy and international relations/security. The first four sections begin with an overview chapter that provides historical background information on the section’s overarching topic. The chapters that follow explore more specific topics in the sub-area. In the final section, historical background information is contained in the individual chapters which cover the diverse areas of international political economy, security and foreign policy. Offering a complete overview of the full spectrum of Japanese politics, the Handbook is an invaluable resource for academics, researchers, policy analysts, graduate and undergraduate students studying this ever-evolving field. Selected Contents: Part 1: Domestic Politics 1. The ’1955 System’, Reform in the 1990s and the Current Institutional Landscape of National Politics 2. The Liberal Democratic Party: An Explanation of its Continued Dominance 3. The Democratic Party of Japan: Party Leadership, Organization and Ideology 4. The Dynamics of Coalition Government in Japan 5. Prime Ministerial Leadership: Did Koizumi Institutionalize a Strong Prime Ministership and Cabinet or Does Strong Prime Ministerial Leadership Remain Idiosyncratic? 6. The Effects of the Lower House Electoral System (post-1994) on Political Party Organization, Voting and Electioneering 7. Electioneering in Japan: The Role of Personal Support Organizations and Local Branch Offices and/or the Strategies of Individual Politicians 8. Money and Politics: The Effects of the New Political Funding Regulations Over the Last 15 Years 9. Law and Politics: The Role of Courts in Policy Making 10. Local Politics Part 2: Civil Society 11. An Overview of the Landscape of Civil Society in Japan 12. NPOs and Judicial Reform 13. Civil Society and the Internet 14. The Labor Movement 15. The Rightist Movement 16. The Women’s Movement Part 3: Social Policy 17. Overview of the Japanese Welfare State 18. Policies for an Aging Society (Pension and Healthcare) 19. Policies Addressing the Emerging Income Gap 20. Gender Related Policies 21. Immigration Policy 22. Environmental Policy Part 4: Political Economy 23. Institutional Changes in the Japanese Model of Capitalism 24. The Dynamics of the PostBubble Economy 25. The Debate Over Economic Reform 26. The Politics and Implications of Postal System Reform Part 5: International Relations and Security 27. Japan and East Asian Economic Regionalism 28. Japan’s Security Policy in East Asia 29. The Politics of Constitutional Revision 30. Japan-U.S. Relations 31. Japan-China Relations 32. Japan-EU Relations 33. Japan as a ’Soft Power’ Superpower and/or Japan’s Response to International Norms October 2010: 246x174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-55137-3: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter US $170.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

Selected Contents: Introduction. Part 1: Security and Stability 1. The Politicization of Islam 2. The Status of Minority Populations and Interethnic Conflict 3. Border Issues Between Central Asian States 4. Water Resources and Stability. e.g Military Power and Capacity Part 2: Development of Political Institutions and National Integration 5. Development of Institutions/Civil Society 6. Democratization of Political System 7. Construction of National Identity 8. Corruption, Patronage and Clan Politics 9. Role and Development of Media 10. Educational Reform Part 3: Issues in Political Economy 11. Economic Development and Political Issues 12. The Drug Trade 13. Human Trafficking and the Status of Women 14. Internal and External Migration 15. Environmental Degradation 16. Infrastructure and Communications Part 4: International Relations 17. Geopolitics and International Organizations 18. Relations with Russia 19. Relations with the U.S. 20. Relations with South Asia (Afghanistan, Pakistan, India) 21. Relations with China 22. Relations with the EU 23. Geopolitics of Oil and Energy June 2010: 246x174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-77676-9: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

This Handbook provides an overview of the most contentious and protracted political issue in the Middle East. The editors have gathered together a range of the top experts on the Palestinian–Israeli conflict. They tackle a range of topics from historical background, through to peace efforts, domestic politics, critical issues such as refugees and settler movements, and the role of outside players such as the Arab states, US and EU. Selected Contents: Introduction—Israel and the Palestinians: One Land Two Peoples Part 1: Origins and Background 1. Palestinian Nationalism 2. Zionism Part 2: History of Conflict 3. 1948 War: Origins and Consequences 4. 1967 War: Origins and Consequences 5. Israel and the Occupied Territories 1967-93 6. The Palestinian Intifadah Part 3: Seeking Peace 7. International Efforts: 1967–1993 8. The Oslo Accords 9. The Oslo Process 10. The Camp David Summit 11. Track II Diplomacy 12. International Efforts: 2001–2008: From the Road Map to Annapolis Part 4: Domestic Politics and Actors 13. Israeli 14. The Israeli Settler Movement 15. Palestinian Citizens of Israel 16. Palestinian Politics 17. The PLO 18. Hamas Part 5: Critical Issues 19. Refugees 20. Jerusalem 21. Borders and Territory 22. Water 23. Settlements 24. Disengagement, Separation and Israeli Security Barrier 25. Terrorism Part 6: International and Regional Involvement 26. United States 27. Europe 28. The Arab World 29. International Donor Assistance 30. International Invention and Peacekeeping. Conclusion: Prospects for Peace and the Two State Solution December 2009: 246x174: 424pp Hb: 978-0-415-77862-6: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter US $155.00

Politics of Modern Iran Edited by Ali M. Ansari, University of St Andrews, UK Series: Critical Issues in Modern Politics A quarter of a century on from the revolution of 1979 there is an ongoing political struggle within Iran between traditionalists and modernists, with the ever-younger average age of the population playing a dynamic role. And on the international stage, the big issues remain Iran’s hostility towards Israel and the development of nuclear power in the face of US and international opposition. This is all in addition to the oil question and the strategic interest of Russia, an issue which harks back to the nineteenth century but remains unresolved, as well as Iran’s concern about the proper stewardship of the holy places of Mecca, Medina, and Jerusalem. This four-volume collection brings together for the first time the very best and most influential scholarship on the politics of modern Iran. It is an invaluable source of reference for both scholars and students alike, and will allow those developing an interest in Iran quickly and easily to access the highest quality scholarship in the field. Any understanding of modern Iran must be founded on a firm grasp of the historical context and some of the conceptual issues which underwrite contemporary Iranian politics. Selected Contents: Volume I: History & Theory Volume II: Politics & History Volume III: Political Economy Volume IV: International Relations May 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-40911-7: £650.00

+44 (0)1235 400524

US $1,295.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

ASIAN STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of South Asian Culture and Society

Routledge Handbook of Japanese Culture and Society

30 VOLUME-SET

Edited by Veena Das, John Hopkins University, USA

Edited by Theodore C. Bestor and Victoria Bestor, both at Harvard University, USA

Series: Routledge Library Editions

The Routledge Handbook of South Asian Culture and Society presents key issues on culture and society in the South Asian context. Written by experts in their respective areas, the Handbook introduces the reader to the field. Emphasizing the significant changes that have been taking place in South Asian societies in light of globalization and the critical responses this has generated, the chapters capture the new kinds of themes across the domains of religion, politics, economics, and kinship. Taking into account economic and political changes in the different South Asian societies, the contibutors provide invaluable insight into the cultural life of the region. Thereby, a ‘history of the moment’ of South Asian culture and society is presented. This comprehensive reference work will be an invaluable source of information to students and academics interested in cultural studies, anthropology and sociology and South Asian studies. Selected Contents: 1. Institutional and Cultural Framework 2. Modernity: Its Promises and its Threats 3. Gender 4. Geography, Environment, Population and Urban Studies 5. Religion 6. Literature, Theatre, Music and the Arts 7. Popular Culture March 2010: 246x189: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-77557-1: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of Political Islam Edited by Shahram Akbarzadeh, University of Melbourne, Australia This Handbook provides a multidisciplinary overview of one of the key political movements of our time. Drawing on the expertise from some of the top scholars in the world it examines theoretical and historical backgrounds, terrorism, strategy, case studies of Islamist movements in the developing world and the West, and the relationship with democracy and gender issues. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Shahram Akbarzadeh 2. Political Thoughts of Seyyed Qutb Ahmad Moussalli 3. The Emerging Political Philosophy of Contemporary Islamism Muqtedar Khan 4. The Muslim Brotherhood Barbara Zollner 5. Hamas’ Flirtation with Electoral Rule Mohammed Hafez 6. The Iranian Islamic Revolution Nikki Keddie 7. Hizbullah and Lebanese Nationalism Lara Deeb 8. Hizb ut-Tahrir Suha TajiFarouki 9. Emergence of Political Islam in Central Asia Shahram Akbarzadeh 10. Preserving Muslim Identity under Secular Rule in Turkey Hakan Yavuz 11. Merging Islam and Democracy in Iran? Anoush Ehetshami and Ali Pedram 12. Limits of Islamic Legitimacy in Saudi Arabia Bernard Haykel 13. Islamic Radicalism in Indonesia Robert Hefner 14. The Significance of the Arab Israeli Conflict Beverley Milton-Edwards 15. Radicalism in the United Kingdom Tahir Abbas 16. Islamic Education as Incubator of Radicalism? Mark Halstead June 2010: 234x156: 424pp Hb: 978-0-415-48473-2: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter US $155.00

The Routledge Handbook of Japanese Culture and Society is an interdisciplinary resource that focuses on contemporary Japan and the social and cultural trends that are important at the beginning of the twenty-first century. This Handbook provides a cutting-edge and comprehensive survey of significant phenomena, institutions, and directions in Japan today, on issues ranging from gender and family, the environment, race and ethnicity, and urban life, to popular culture and electronic media. As such, it is an invaluable reference tool for anyone interested in Japan’s culture and society. Selected Contents: Japan at Mid-Century: From Radio Tokyo to the Tokyo Olympics Peter Duus. Cultural Approaches to Political Identity and Discourse David Leheny. Politics, Language and Society Nanette Gottlieb. Religion in Contemporary Japanese Lives Mark Mullins. War and Memory Alexis Dudden. Identity and Status Social Class and Identity David Slater. The Politics of Gender Robin Le Blanc. The Japanese Family in Flux Merry White. Race, Ethnicity and Minorities in Japan Richard Siddle. Life on the Margins: The Homeless, Migrant Workers, and the Disabled Carolyn Stevens. Queer Culture Mark McLelland. Mizushobai and Sex Industries Haeng-ja Sachiko Chung. Aging and Social Welfare Leng Leng Thang. Urban Landscapes Paul Waley. Architecture and the Built Environment Bill Coaldrake. Cultural Flows: Japan and East Asia Koichi Iwabuchi. Japanese Education Roger Goodman. Law and Society Lawrence Repeta. The Rise of the Civil Sector Akihiro Ogawa. Popular Japanese Literature and the Culture of Publishing Stephen Snyder. Japanese Manga and Anime Susan Napier. Japanese Film and Television Aaron Gerow. Music Culture Ian Condry. Sports Culture William Kelly. Japanese Cuisine and Food Culture Theodore Bestor and Victoria Bestor February 2010: 246x174: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-43649-6: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter US $190.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Confucian Studies Edited by Xinzhong Yao, University of Wales, Lampeter, UK and Tu Weiming, Harvard University, USA Series: Critical Concepts in Asian Philosophy Scholars tend to see Confucianism as a historical and yet living tradition containing elements of philosophy, religion, politics, morality and education, continuing to hold a swinging power over the way and value of life in East Asia.

RLE

Iran Routledge Library Editions: Iran will re-issue works originally published between 1890 and 2005. Volumes will be available to purchase individually, or as sub-disciplinary mini-sets focussing on economics as well as the history, politics, sociology, literature and linguistics of Iran. September 2010: 234x156: 15, 884pp Hb: 978-0-415-57033-6: £2,500.00

US $4,385.00

FORTHCOMING 3-VOLUME SET

The Tale of Genji Edited by Richard H. Okada, Princeton University, USA The monumental Japanese fictional narrative known as The Tale of Genji (Genji monogatari) appeared during the first decade or so of the eleventh century, CE. This vast narrative—which spans three-quarters of a century, and is made up of fifty-four chapters and 795 poems—has been attributed to a woman known only as Murasaki Shikibu. It has often been celebrated as ‘the world’s oldest novel’. The Tale of Genji has generated a huge scholarly literature, and this new collection, co-published by Routledge and Edition Synapse, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to help researchers and students navigate and make sense of it. The collection is made up of three volumes which bring together the best and most influential canonical and cutting-edge research. The first volume (‘Cultures of Reading The Tale of Genji’) assembles the key work in narratology, aesthetics, and poetics. A narrative that can—and has—been read primarily as a ‘romance’ has much to say about the history, culture, and society of its time, and Volume II (‘Sexual Politics in The Tale of Genji’) is organized around often contested themes such as gender, genre, and politics. The scholarship in the final volume (‘The Tale of Genji and its Others’), meanwhile, gathers the best work on topics including Noh, visual art, ‘China’, and later literature. With a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the material in its historical and intellectual context, The Tale of Genji is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital onestop research resource. May 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47900-4: £495.00

US $825.00

With more and more universities and colleges offering courses on or relating to Confucian philosophy, ethics, religion and politics, there is an urgent need for a source book in contemporary Confucian studies. This is a major reference work of essential importance to undergraduates, postgraduates and academics in Confucianism, East Asian history, philosophy and religion. Selected Contents: Volume I: Confucianism in History. Volume II: Confucian Philosophy and Ethics. Volume III: Confucian Education and Politics. Volume IV: Confucian Religion.

For titles in Religion, please see page: 78

December 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-45215-1: £650.00 US $1,295.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

ASIAN STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

The Politics and International Relations of Modern Korea Understanding the Politics and Economics of the Republic of Korea (ROK) and the Democratic Peoples’ Republic of Korea (DPRK) Edited by John Swenson-Wright, University of Cambridge, UK Series: Critical Issues in Modern Politics As the locus of Great Power rivalry in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, the battleground for the first ‘hot’ conflict of the early Cold War, and — in the case of the contemporary challenge of a nuclear North Korea—one of the most potentially destabilizing threats to regional security, the Korean peninsula is critical in understanding the history, politics, and international relations of Asia. However, Korea’s importance is not confined to issues of security and international conflict. The dramatic growth of South Korea, propelling it from the status of an underdeveloped and war-ravaged country to the world’s eleventh largest economy in the space of some thirty years, has been the subject of intense scrutiny by economists, political scientists, and sociologists. Understanding its rapid economic growth is important not only in assessing the nature of modern capitalism, but also in realizing the lessons of development that potentially can be applied to the economic challenges and opportunities faced by the developing world. Modernization is not merely an economic concept. South Korea’s experience of political transition from authoritarian military-led rule to a democratic system of government in the late 1980s arguably represents one of Asia’s most important twentieth-century political success stories. To political scientists, the South Korean political case raises fascinating questions about the nature of political legitimacy, as well as revealing potential contradictions. If political change has been a dominant theme in recent developments in South Korea, political stasis appears to be the norm in North Korea, where the cult of the leader and the dynastic rule of the Kim family have arguably restricted political activity to the informal and non-transparent competition for influence among those close to the leadership. Both Koreas find themselves confronting a rapidly changing and fluid international environment. For South Korea, salient issues include how to manage its core alliance relations, most notably with the United States and how far it should move closer to China’s economic and political orbit. For North Korea, the key diplomatic challenge is managing the post-Cold War erosion of its old alliance partnerships, while finding a mechanism for engaging with the wider world. Selected Contents: Volume I: Conflict on the Korean Peninsula. Volume II: Economic Development in North and South Korea. Volume III: Political Systems, Legitimacy and the State in the Two Koreas. Volume IV: The Foreign Relations of Contemporary Korea July 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-46291-4: £650.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Politics of Modern Central Asia Edited by Bhavna Dave, School of Oriental and African Studies (SOAS), University of London, UK Series: Critical Issues in Modern Politics The study of contemporary Central Asia has acquired significant scholarly attention since the collapse of the Soviet Union in the early 1990s. Central Asian Studies (which focuses on the five post-Soviet states of Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, and Uzbekistan) is a burgeoning addition to the established field of Area Studies, as well as to the broader discipline of Development Studies. Offering comprehensive coverage of the political, economic, sociocultural, as well as security, concerns and foreign relations of Central Asia within a welldefined historical and conceptual framework, this new Routledge title is a timely and much-needed contribution to the existing materials on the region. The focus encompasses the region as a whole, as well as each individual country, comprising the Soviet legacy, cultural and social institutions, modern economic and political transition, and geopolitics and security. The collection is fully indexed, and has a comprehensive introduction by the editor which outlines the analytical framework and the historical context, within which the selected texts are placed, and highlighting how scholarship in this field has evolved, as well as pointing to future trajectories. Politics of Modern Central Asia is an essential work of reference. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers—as well as policymakers—in the field of post-Soviet and Central Asian Studies as a vital resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Encounters with Modernity: Russian and Soviet Rule Part 1: From Russian Empire to Soviet Socialism Part 2: Forging Nations, Building Socialism Part 3: Battle against Islam: Accommodation and Resistance Part 4: Women: Transformation without Emancipation Part 5: Elites and Entitlements Part 6: Reflections on Soviet Modernity Volume II: State–Society Relations: Stability and Transformation Part 1: Decolonization: Nations and State Building Part 2: State-building, Conflicts, and Borders Part 3: Ethnic and Cultural Revival Part 4: Nations, Minorities, Diasporas Part 5: Islam Volume III: Post-Soviet Institutions: Continuities and Transformation Part 1: Economic Reforms, Markets, and Transition Part 3: Civil Society, Democratic Promotion, and International Actors Part 4: Stability and ‘Colour Revolution’ Part 5: Gender in Post-Soviet Context Volume IV: The Changing Geopolitical Context Part 1: (Re)Locating Central Asia Part 2: Regional Actors and Structures Part 3: Encounters Between Western Norms and Regional Interests Part 4: The Caspian Region: Energy Security and Pipelines

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

China’s International Relations in Asia Edited by Li Mingjiang, S. Rajaratnam School of International Studies, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore Series: Critical Issues in Modern Politics The startling growth of China’s economic and military power, as well as its cultural influence, is having a huge impact on the rest of the world. The key region to observe this impact is, of course, Asia and the past decade has witnessed significant and multi-faceted changes in China’s policy toward its Asian neighbours and in the relations between them. The strategic dimension of China’s approaches to Asian international relations is increasingly a focal point in the scholarly community and policy-making circles. However, views on the strategic impact of China’s rise on Asia’s political and security future are polarized, with some believing that China’s regional policy is an intentional attempt to challenge the US supremacy in Asia, or who are simply suspicious of China’s long-term regional ambitions. China’s International Relations in Asia is fully indexed and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. Selected Contents: Volume I: China and the Changing Strategic Dynamics in Asia Part 1: China’s Regional Strategic Environment Part 2: China and Strategic Interactions in Northeast Asia Part 3: China’s Strategic Role in Southeast Asia Part 4: China’s Strategic Involvement in South Asia Part 5: China and the Strategic Game in Central Asia Conclusion Volume II: China and Non-Traditional Security in Asia Part 6: NonTraditional Security: the Contemporary Context Part 7: China’s Energy Security Part 8: China’s Economic Security Part 9: China and Environmental Issues Part 10: Social Dimensions of China’s Non-Traditional Security Volume III: China and Asian Regional Multilateralism Part 11: Historical and Contemporary Contexts Part 12: Continuity and Changes in Chinese Approach Part 13: China’s Regional Economic Multilateralism Part 14: Greater China and East Asian Regionalism Part 15: China and the Prospect of East Asian Integration Volume IV: East Asia Responds to a Rising China Part 16: Contentions over Historical Memory and Identity Part 17: Big Powers, Small Powers, Variegated Responses to China Part 18: The Economic Impact of China’s Rise Part 19: China and Asia’s Emerging New Order December 2009: 234x156: 1,625pp Hb: 978-0-415-47691-1: £650.00 US $1,075.00

December 2009: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-46826-8: £650.00 US $1,075.00

US $1,295.00

•Special Pre-pub Price: £575.00 US $1,150.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication)

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

ASIAN STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Allen Hicken, University of Michigan, USA

India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal

Series: Critical Issues in Modern Politics

The Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics examines key issues in politics of the five independent states of the South Asian region: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal. Written by experts in their respective areas, it introduces the reader to the politics of South Asia by presenting the prevailing agreements and disagreements in the literature.

Edited by Yongnian Zheng, Yiyi Lu, both at University of Nottingham, UK and Lynn T. White III, Princeton University, USA

4-VOLUME SET

Politics of Modern Southeast Asia

Southeast Asia offers a rich tapestry of comparatively under-studied countries that shed light on political dynamics and political economy within developing states. Some countries manage rapid economic development while others do not; Southeast Asia is home to some of the fastest growing economies in the last forty years (e.g. Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, and later Indonesia) alongside economic basket cases (e.g. Burma) and chronic under-performers (e.g. the Philippines). In addition, there are abundant examples of political transitions to or from democracy to be found in the region, along with countries that seem to function stably somewhere between democracy and autocracy. (Indonesia’s experiment with democracy is a critical case study in the compatibility of Islam with democracy.) This new four-volume collection from Routledge represents a unique compilation of the best work on modern Southeast Asian politics, and as such will be an invaluable resource for students and instructors interested in the region. It will also appeal to those interested in the politics of the developing world more generally and who are looking to the experiences of the countries that form Southeast Asia for invaluable case studies that resonate in a wider political and economic context. April 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-45061-4: £650.00

US $1,295.00

Edited by Paul R. Brass, University of Washington, USA

In the first two sections, the Handbook provides a comprehensive introduction to the modern political history of the states of the region and an overview of the independence movements in the former colonial states. The other sections focus on the political changes that have occurred in the postcolonial states since independence, as well as the successive political changes in Nepal during the same period, and the structure and functioning of the main governmental and non-governmental institutions, including the structure of the state itself (unitary or federal), political parties, the judiciary, and the military. Further, the contributors explore several aspects of the political process and political and economic change, especially issues of pluralism and national integration, political economy, corruption and criminalization of politics, radical and violent political movements, and the international politics of the region as a whole. This unique reference work provides a comprehensive and up-to-date survey of the state of the field and is an invaluable resource for students and academics interested in South Asian Studies, South Asian Politics, Comparative Politics and International Relations.

Politics of Modern China

Series: Critical Issues in Modern Politics After nearly three decades of rapid economic development, China is now a major power whose actions can significantly affect other countries, from America to Zimbabwe. As a result, China Studies has grown exponentially. In particular, there is a growing interest in studies of Chinese politics, not least because of the considerable uncertainties that remain over the country’s future political direction. This new Routledge title is a comprehensive collection of the best classic and cutting-edge scholarship. Politics of Modern China is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editors, which places the material in its historical and intellectual context. In addition to the general introduction, there is a thematic introduction to each volume. Selected Contents: Volume I: Policy-making and Policy Implementation Part 1: Faction and Elite Politics Part 2: Bureaucratic Authoritarianism Part 3: Central–Local Relations, Local Politics, and Policy Implementation Volume II: Political Economy Part 4: Dynamics of Development Part 5: Economic Performance and Political Corruption Part 6: Institutional Reform and State Building Volume III: Political Sociology Part 7: Reform and Social Changes Part 8: Collective Action and Contentious Politics Part 9: State Responses Volume IV Democratization Part 10: The Development of Democracy Part 11: Organizations, Institutions, and Democracy Part 12: Economic Development, Legitimacy, and Democracy September 2009: 234x156: 1,788pp Hb: 978-0-415-44151-3: £650.00 US $1,075.00

September 2009: 246x174: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-43429-4: £110.00 before publication £125.00 thereafter eBook: 978-0-203-87818-7 US $180.00

For titles in Politics, please see page: 59

For more information about our eBooks in Asian Studies, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

ASIAN STUDIES

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Regionalism in Asia

Modern Indian Culture and Society

Women in Asia

Edited by See Seng Tan, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore

Edited by Knut A. Jacobsen, University of Bergen, Norway

Series: Critical Issues in Modern Politics

Series: Critical Concepts in Asian Studies

Edited by Louise Edwards, University of Technology, Sydney, Australia and Mina Roces, University of New South Wales, Australia

Especially since the end of the Cold War, research on and around the international relations of Asia has grown exponentially and, to make sense of what is now a vast and unwieldly corpus of scholarly literature, this new four-volume collection from Routledge’s Critical Issues in Modern Politics series brings together the best and most influential work in the field.

Research on Indian culture and society has been conducted from a dizzying range of perspectives. However, in recent decades it has been particularly characterized by a change in focus from the past to the present; from the worldview of the élites to that of the subalterns; from philosophy to everyday life; and from hierarchy to the critiques of hierarchy and the sources of equality in Indian culture.

With a full index, together with a comprehensive introduction newly written by the editor which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, this Routledge collection is an essential work of reference. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers of Asian international relations, politics, history, and current affairs as a vital resource.

More dramatic than the changes in the focus of research are the changes in Indian society itself. Urbanization, the liberalization and globalization of the economy, the IT revolution, the success of the global Indian diaspora, the affirmation of religious identities and reaffirmation of ancient world views, reinterpretations of history, new medias and transnational megagurus, and new political landscapes denote some of these processes.

Selected Contents: Volume I: International Relations Theory and ASEAN Part 1. Studying Southeast Asia Part 2. Explaining ASEAN: Competing/Congruent Theories Part 3. Is ASEAN a Security Community? Part 4. Rationalism vs. Constructivism Volume II: ASEAN and Regional Security of Southeast Asia Part 5. ASEAN Evolution: From ‘Pre-birth’ to ‘Adolescence’ to ‘Young Adulthood’ to ‘Mid-Life’ Part 6. ASEAN Regionalism: The ASEAN Way Part 7. ASEAN Enlargement: Challenges and Prospects Part 8. ASEAN Conflict Prevention: The Search for Peace Part 9. ASEAN Extra-regionalism: Engaging the Great Powers Volume III: Regional Order and Architecture in Asia Part 10. Regional Environment of Asia Part 11. Multilateral Ideas and Institutions in Asia Part 12. Debating the ARF Part 13. Debating the AFTA, APEC, and ASEAN+3 Volume IV: Non-official Diplomacy and Activism in Asia Part 14. Regional Security Discourse in Asia Part 15. ‘Track 2’ Contributions to Regional Security Part 16. ‘Track 3’ Contributions to Regional Security Part 17. State: Civil Society Dilemmas June 2009: 234x156 Hb: 978-0-415-47523-5: £650.00

US $1,075.00

This new title from Routledge makes sense of these changes by bringing together the very best scholarly work on India’s contemporary transformation. As the world’s largest democracy emerges as an economic and cultural superpower, there is a pressing need for a more sophisticated and nuanced understanding of Indian culture and society. This four-volume collection answers that need and will be welcomed as a vital one-stop research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Identity 1. Freedom, Partition, and Aftermath 2. The Past in the Present 3. Democracy and Development 4. Violence 5. Social Movements Volume II: Society 6. Work, Economy, and Globalization 7. Caste 8. Gender Volume III: Religion 9. Secularism 10. Religious Traditions Volume IV:Culture 11. Food 12. Urban and Natural Environment 13. Literature 14. Cinema 15. Television 16. Music, Folklore, and Beauty Pageants 17. Cricket and Sports June 2009: 234x156: 1,795pp Hb: 978-0-415-45219-9: £650.00

Series: Critical Concepts in Asian Studies The academic study of women in Asia developed in the 1970s as a result of the convergence of the then emerging disciplines of Asian Studies and Women’s Studies. Initially, work on women in Asia grew from traditional branches of learning such as history, anthropology, politics, and literary studies. More recently, it has incorporated cutting-edge areas of academic endeavour, including critical theory and new thinking on sexuality, labour, health, media, and material culture. As research in and around the area flourishes as never before, this new fourvolume collection from Routledge meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of scholarly literature. Drawing together in four volumes the key research which has shaped the dynamic academic field that explores women’s lives in the Asian region over the past four decades, and edited by two leading scholars, Women in Asia provides users with a comprehensive survey of all the major issues relating to women in the world’s fastest changing and most culturally diverse region. Women in Asia is fully indexed and each of the four volumes has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editors, which provides extended reading lists and places the material in its historical and intellectual context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students—as well as policy-makers and community activists—as a vital one-stop research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Women and Political Power Volume II: Redefining Working Women Volume III: Health and Sexuality Volume IV: Constructions of the Feminine

US $975.00

March 2009: 234x156: 1,704pp Hb: 978-0-415-44525-2: £650.00

US $1,295.00

For other titles in Cultural Studies, please see page: 51

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

ASIAN STUDIES

2-VOLUME SET

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Contemporary Chinese Society and Politics Edited by Andrew Kipnis, Luigi Tomba and Jonathan Unger, Contemporary China Centre, Australian National University, Australia Series: Critical Concepts in Asian Studies Chinese society and its political system are predicated on traditions of governing that are deeply alien to most readers from liberal, Western powers. Chinese governance reflects both a long, indigenous tradition of statecraft and the Leninist legacies of the People’s Republic’s ruling Communist Party. As China becomes ever more powerful— economically, diplomatically, militarily, and culturally—it becomes increasingly important to understand its governing dynamics. But to what extent can social-science theories of political rule, hierarchy and power, class formation, economic development, urbanization, and demographic and family transition, which were developed in Western contexts, explain China’s societal and political dynamics? What sorts of theoretical language have emerged from the study of Chinese society and politics, and how might these theories enable social scientists to view social and political dynamics in other parts of the world in a new light? Contemporary Chinese Society and Politics is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editors, leading academics in the field, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research and pedagogic resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: The Maoist Era 1. The Maoist Era 2. The Political System 3. The 1950s and Early 1960s 4. Cultural Revolution Upheaval (1966-68) and the Maoist ‘70s 5. Social Order and Hierarchy under Mao 6. Social and Gender Relation Volume II: Politics and Social Institutions 1. Theories of Culture and Power in the PRC 2. Governing after Mao 3. Changing Economic and Administrative Institutions 4. The Legal and Policing Systems 5. Nationalism 6. Authoritarianism and Democratization Volume III: Urban China 1. Governing Urban Spaces 2. The Chinese Mass Media and Internet 3. Social and Economic Mobility 4. Public Opinion 5. Urban Workers 6. Rural/Urban Migration 7. The Urban Family and Sexuality Volume IV: Rural China in the Reform Era 1. Rural Politics 2. Farming in a Post-socialist Age 3. The ‘Peasant Burden’, Rural Protests, and the Poor 4. Family and Relationships in Village China 5. Teachings: Schooling and Religion 6. China’s Rural Ethnic Minorities January 2009: 234x156: 1,872pp Hb: 978-0-415-45748-4: £650.00

US $1,295.00

2-VOLUME SET

Present-Day Impressions of Japan

The History, People, Commerce, Industries and Resources of Japan and Japan’s Colonial Empire, Kwantung, Chosen, Taiwan, Karafuto Edited by W. H. Morton-Cameron and W. Feldwick This is a facsimile reprint of the 1919 edition published by Globe Encyclopedia in London and Chicago in two volumes with over 1,500 photographs. It is a major visual work of reference which explains Japanese modernization. The entries include all modernized cities (Tokyo, Yokohama, Nagoya, Kyoto, Osaka, Kobe, Shimoseki, Nagasaki, etc.) and Japanese colonies in Manchuria, Taiwan, and Karafuto. The wide-ranging thematic articles cover subjects including history, culture, education, religions, ethnicity (ainu), budo, medicine, law, politics, military, diplomacy, economics, finance, industry, mining, agriculture, forestry, publishing, transport, and labour. The set also includes rare and important photographs (to be found only in this publication) of early twentieth-century streets and buildings before the Kanto earthquake of 1923 destroyed the Tokyo and Yokohama region. Business data and various statistics are provided by the governor and the chamber of commerce of each city, and the texts are contributed by distinguished scholars like Shibasaburo Kitasato, Yosaburo Takekoshi, Shosuke Sato, I. Bryan, W. B. Mason, an J. Batchelor. An indispensable tool for any academic and educational institutions with collections on the history of Japan and East Asia. January 2009: 2,700pp Hb: 978-4-86166-094-8: £640.00

US $1,025.00

4-VOLUME SET

Early Biographical Sources on MW Lafcadio Hearn Edited by Junko Umemoto This is a facsimile reprint of ten titles bound in four volumes. Much scholarly work on Lafcadio Hearn, the most important figure in the cultural relationship between the West and Japan, has already been published. However, how he was actually regarded and accepted by contemporary Western society is still an underexplored area. To answer the needs of researchers attempting to address this question, Early Biographical Sources on Lafcadio Hearn brings together eight biographies by his contemporaries, together with two pamphlets from conferences which were organized to commemorate his contribution to the Western understanding of Japanese culture. January 2009: 2,700pp Hb: 978-4-86166-102-0: £625.00

US $995.00

MW Cyclopaedia of Modern Travel: A Record of Adventure, Exploration and Discovery Edited by Bayard Taylor This work is comprised of narratives by the most distinguished nineteenth-century travellers. It is embellished with fine engravings on steel by Buttre, and illustrated by over forty wood engravings by Orr, with thirteen authentic maps by Schonberg. It is a facsimile reprint of the revised and enlarged edition published in two volumes by Moore, Wilstach, Keys in New York in 1860. Published in 1860, this is one of the very early encyclopedias on the history of travel and travel writings. Compiled by Bayard Taylor, popular travel writer and journalist in late nineteenth-century America, it covers all major travels and exploration by westerners to non-western countries from the beginning of nineteenth century, when ‘the age of exploration and discovery’ started. Including maps and illustrations, this Encyclopedia is an easy-to-use tool for scholars and students to research the history of travel and western encounters of other cultures. January 2009: 2,700pp Hb: 978-4-86166-101-3: £340.00

US $545.00

Songs and Tales for Children: A Collection of Chapbooks in 19th-Century Britain

Edited by Okiko Miyake This collection is a reprint of forty-three titles bound in one volume. The Chapbook was a popular publication in Britain, sold cheaply, at a penny or so. As publishing became a prosperous business at the end of the eighteenth century, adult readers took to new media like magazines or newspapers and the Chapbook decreased in popularity. However, the Chapbook for children became popular and survived until the end of the nineteenth century. Local publishers selected suitable subjects for children and made various series. Often, expensive, well-known books published in London turned up as cheaper abridged versions in Chapbook form in regional towns. Nursery rhymes, traditional tales, folklore, riddles, and street cries were published in this format with many woodcuts for illustrations. Among many printers and publishers which came into existence in local towns or villages in the early nineteenth century because of technical innovations, a few earned the reputation for a good selection of Chapbooks for children. This collection offers twenty Chapbooks, each of two leading children’s books publishers of the time, J. Kendrew in York and J. G. Rusher of Banbury, Oxfordshire, along with three titles by other publishers to show the variety of typographies and the size of books. Eight of the inclusions are in uncut sheets to show how original Chapbooks are printed and sold. January 2009: 2,700pp Hb: 978-4-902454-40-6: £150.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $240.00

ASIAN STUDIES

BIOGRAPHICAL REFERENCE

5-VOLUME SET

MW An Official Guide to Eastern Asia: Trans-continental Connections between Europe and Asia, Prepared by Imperial Japanese Government Railways Edited by Yoshinobu Oikawa This is a facsimile reprint in five volumes of the first editions. The most important publication which the imperial Japanese government published to promote Japan to the West. This official guide to Japan and East Asia was planned by Shimpei Goto (a leading statesman in the early twentieth century) when he was the first director of South Manchuria Railway Company in 1906 after he had discovered the incompleteness and inaccuracy of the information in the Japanese and Asian guides produced by Western publishers like John Murray and Baedeker. When he became Minister of Communications and the head of the Railway Bureau (Tetsudoin), the imperial government provided a huge sum for this publishing project and employed many journalists, authors, and photographers. It took nearly ten years to complete the five-volume series. The series soon acquired an international reputation for its accuracy and the extent of the descriptive information of all Japanese regions and East/SouthEast Asia, and for their lavish illustrations, and excellent maps. This reprint edition includes all illustrations (some in colour) and maps (in over 100 foldouts). The original format (published in a portable small format with very thin fragile papers) has been enlarged by 30% for ease of use in today’s libraries. January 2009: 2,700pp Hb: 978-4-86166-087-0: £895.00

US $1,435.00

6-VOLUME SET

Book of Trades: A Collection of the Nineteenth-Century Handbooks

The Japan Weekly Mail: A Political, Commercial, and Literary Journal, 1870–1917

In association with Yokohama Archives of History, this is the first ever facsimile reprint of the leading English newspaper published in Yokohama throughout the Meiji era. Playing an important role for the Meiji Japan’s exchange with the western society, it covers not only articles on politics, commerce and economics, but also on cultural activities of early Japanologists and Asiatic Society of Japan. Selected Contents: Sample articles from the 1871 Issues: Army Reform. American Minister on Japan. China. Christian Question. Concert for the Relief of the French Wounded. Corean Expedition. Custom House Administration. Departure of Sir Harry Parkes. Epidemics and How to Avert Them. Fire Engines for Yokohama. Gas Companies. Genji Yume Monogatari. Japanese Newspaper. Japanese Post Office. Japanese Vanity. Hunting Ladies. Letters from Baba Bunyei to Nakamura Tekkei. Memorial of the Protestant Missionaries in China. Morality in Yokohama. Notes on Art. Opening of the Mint. Races. Railway Case. Revision of Treaties. Sericulture in Japan. Silk Question. Tales of Old Japan. Terms of Peace. Trade in China. 2006: 234x156: 5,400pp Hb: 978-4-86166-020-7: £1,850.00

US $2,975.00

NEW

73RD EDITION

The International Who’s Who 2010 Published annually since 1935, the International Who’s Who is now in its seventythird edition. Providing hardto-find biographical details for over 22,000 of the world’s most prominent and influential personalities, this outstanding reference work records the lives and achievements of men and women from almost every profession and activity – from heads of state to sporting greats. The editorial team aims to include all those who have risen to the top of their field or profession – from the headline makers to the unsung experts whose achievements and talents guarantee their inclusion. Entries are taken from across the world and from a broad sweep of professions, to include the leading figures from the worlds of science, medicine, business, finance, politics, international affairs, diplomacy, law, art, music, entertainment and fashion, to name but a few. There is also a separate section that details reigning royal families.

11-VOLUME SET

Also available online at www.worldwhoswho.com.

Arthur Waley: Collected Writings on China

June 2009: 279x211: 2,482pp Hb: 978-1-85743-510-8: £395.00

Arthur Waley’s place as one of the finest translators, literary men and sinologists of the twentieth century is undeniable: his meticulous research, based on original source material and fresh translations with extensive introductions and explanatory notes continue to provide the best resources for understanding Chinese literature and poetry, history and philosophy. Routledge here re-issues eleven of his most significant works on China as they were originally published and as Waley himself intended to see them in print.

26TH EDITION

2005 Hb: 978-0-415-36259-7: £950.00

Edited by Akio Kobayashi With the onset of the Industrial Revolution, various modern trades were born and the need to employ young workers expanded. To improve comprehension of many of the new trades and practices required by the emerging industries, various guidebooks and handbooks aimed at a young readership started to appear in the early nineteenth century, and this is a reprint collection of eight books published in different decades of the nineteenth century.

US $1,875.00

US $745.00

International Who’s Who in Classical Music 2010

’So good as to be indispensable.’ – Opera The International Who’s Who in Classical Music 2010 is an unparalleled source of biographical information on singers, instrumentalists, composers, conductors and managers. The directory section lists orchestras, opera companies and other institutions connected with the classical music world.

Entries include individuals involved in all aspects of the world of classical music: composers, instrumentalists, singers, arrangers, writers, musicologists, conductors, directors and managers. Key features: • over 8,000 detailed biographical entries • covers the classical and light classical fields • includes both up-and-coming musicians and well-established names. This book will prove invaluable for anyone in need of reliable, up-to-date information on the individuals and organizations involved in classical music.

US $1,435.00

March 2010: 279x211: 975pp Hb: 978-1-85743-553-5: £260.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

Each biographical entry comprises personal information, principal career details, repertoire, recordings and compositions, and full contact details where available. Appendices provide contact details for national orchestras, opera companies, music festivals, music organizations and major competitions and awards.

Including numerous illustrations of the tools and machines, and people at work using them, the collection is a crucial source of both textual and visual data about Victorian social and industrial history. The gathered materials also provide vivid background information to enable a deeper understanding of Victorian culture and literature. January 2009: 2,700pp Hb: 978-4-902454-48-2: £895.00

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

BIOGRAPHICAL REFERENCE

12TH EDITION

International Who’s Who in Popular Music 2010

The International Who’s Who in Popular Music 2010 provides biographical details on some of the most talented and influential artists and individuals from the world of popular music. Now in its twelth edition, it includes over 7,000 biographies charting the careers and achievements of pop, rock, folk, jazz, dance, world and country artists throughout the world. Key features: • each entry includes full biographical information: principal career details, recordings and compositions, honours and contact information where available • spans the full range of the popular music industry, from rock to jazz and dance to country • provides information on established names as well as up-and-coming artists • a directory section provides details of music festivals, awards, organizations within the industry, and digital music sources • for ease of reference, the book includes an index of music group members. In one accessible volume the International Who’s Who in Popular Music 2009 provides the most comprehensive collection of information on the most famous and influential people in the popular music industry. March 2010: 279x211: 670pp Hb: 978-1-85743-554-2: £235.00

6TH EDITION

NEW

Who’s Who in International Affairs 2009

25TH EDITION

This sixth edition of Who’s Who in International Affairs provides, in one volume, biographical information on nearly 6,000 people prominent in the fields of international politics, diplomacy, law and economic affairs throughout the world. As well as politicians and diplomats, the book also includes academics, think tank analysts, and journalists, among others, who are active in, or relevant to, the world of foreign affairs. Who’s Who in International Affairs is thus an invaluable guide to the lives and careers of the most important figures in international affairs today. Each entry is clearly laid out, with the international figure’s personal details, education, career, publications and contact information conveniently divided into sections. In addition to the biographical information, an extensive index section is included, where entrants are listed once by nationality and for many by selected organizations for which they work. Also provided is the Directory of Diplomatic Missions appendix that lists by country all embassies and diplomatic missions to other countries around the world, including missions to the United Nations. Listings include contact information and names of ambassador or head of mission. 2008: 279x211: 924pp Hb: 978-1-85743-479-8: £350.00

US $420.00

Combining the International Who’s Who in Classical Music and the International Who’s Who in Popular Music, this two-volume set provides a complete view of the whole of the music world. For more details, please contact reference@routledge.com

NEW

The International Who’s Who of Authors and Writers 2010 provides an invaluable and practical source of biographical information on the key personalities and organizations of the literary world. Now in its twenty-fifth edition, the book is revised and updated annually by our editorial team and covers the most important authors and writers at work today. This title will prove an invaluable acquisition for journalists, television and radio companies, public and academic libraries, PR companies, literary organizations and anyone needing up-to-date information in this field. Entries: Biographical details are listed for writers of all kinds, including novelists, playwrights, essayists, editors, columnists, journalists, as well as literary agents and publishers. Each entry provides personal information, career details, works published, literary awards and prizes, memberships and contact information, where available. Key features: • almost 8,000 entries

• entries for established writers, as well as for those who have recently risen to prominence

7TH EDITION

International Who’s Who of Women 2010

• hundreds of new entries are included in this edition.

’Valuable and unique, this work promises to be useful to academic, public, and business libraries, and to corporations, the media, and organizations and associations.’ – Choice

August 2009: 279x211: 864pp Hb: 978-1-85743-528-3: £250.00

The most influential and distinguished women throughout the world are brought together in this unique single volume publication.

International Who’s Who in Poetry 2009

Listing nearly 7,000 entries from a variety of backgrounds, this new seventh edition reflects the significant role of women in modern society. A onestop research tool making reference quick and easy, recognizing established personalities as well as women who are rising to prominence.

The fifteenth edition of the International Who’s Who in Poetry is a unique and comprehensive guide to the leading lights and freshest talent in poetry today. Containing biographies of more than 4,000 contemporary poets world-wide, this essential reference work provides truly international coverage. In addition to the well known poets, talented upand-coming writers are also profiled.

Key features: • each entry includes: nationality, date and place of birth, education, family details, career, awards and publications, leisure interests, address and telephone numbers, and email and internet addresses where available

Our Biographical Reference titles are available online at: www.worldwhoswho.com

International Who’s Who of Authors & Writers 2010

• a directory section, including detailed lists of major international literary awards and prizes, principal literary organizations literary festivals and national libraries

US $595.00

2-VOLUME SET

International Who’s Who in Classical/ Popular Music Set 2010

• comprehensive biographies of women from all occupational fields are included: politics, finance, business, academia, science, literature, the media, fashion, the arts, medicine, sports and many more. October 2009: 279x211: 972pp Hb: 978-1-85743-537-5: £375.00

US $460.00

15TH EDITION

Key features: • each entry provides full career history and publication details • appendices section lists International prizes, organizations and poetry publications • the career profile section is supplemented by lists of Poets Laureate. 2008: 279x211: 424pp Hb: 978-1-85743-483-5: £210.00

US $650.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $390.00

ECONOMICS, BUSINESS & LAW

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of International Criminal Law

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by William Schabas and Nadia Bernaz, both at National University of Ireland, Galway

Edited by Gail L. Cramer, Louisiana State University, USA

International criminal law has developed extraordinarily quickly over the last decade, with the creation of ad hoc tribunals in the former Yugoslavia and Rwanda, and the establishment of a permanent International Criminal Court. This book provides a timely and comprehensive survey of the major topics in international criminal law. Featuring new, specially commissioned papers by a range of international contributors, each chapter is written by a leading expert in the field, and provides a critical assessment of the most significant areas within international criminal law.

Series: Critical Concepts in Economics

Agricultural Economics

Selected Contents: Part 1: Historical and Institutional Framework Part 2: The Crimes Part 3: The Practice of International Tribunals Part 4: Key Issues in International Criminal Law September 2010: 246x174: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-55203-5: £95.00

2-VOLUME SET

Philip Kotler Edited by John C. Wood, Managing Director, University Division, Navitas and Michael C. Wood, Professor of Management, University of Notre Dame, Australia Steeped in economics, mathematics, and behavioural science, Philip Kotler (b. 1931) has been described by Management Centre Europe as ‘the world’s foremost expert on the strategic practice of marketing’. His early intellectual work included model-building to understand how marketing works. Later, he developed new concepts for marketing theory and practice, such as ‘demarketing’, ‘social marketing’, and ‘synchromarketing’. Supplemented with the editor’s expert introduction, which places the gathered work in its historical and intellectual context, this new two-volume collection from Routledge brings together the best and most influential critical writing on Kotler. May 2010: 234x156: 800pp Hb: 978-0-415-32575-2: £325.00

US $650.00

Edited by Lars Magnusson, Uppsala University, Sweden

The application of the principles of economics to the production of crops and livestock—and to land usage more generally—is a well-established and flourishing area of research and study, and this new four-volume collection in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Economics, meets the need for an authoritative, up-to-date, and comprehensive reference work synthesizing its voluminous literature. Indeed, the sheer scale of the research output—and the breadth of the field— makes this collection especially welcome. It answers the need for a comprehensive collection of classic and contemporary contributions to facilitate ready access to the most influential and important scholarship from a wide range of theoretical and practical perspectives.

Series: Critical Concepts in Economics

Agricultural Economics is edited by Gail L. Cramer, a leading scholar in the field. The collection is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the material in its intellectual context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research resource.

The collection is organized into ten principal parts. Part One explores general methodology and the role of economic history as either an alternative to mainstream economics, or as a ‘help discipline’. Part Two gathers the key research on the role of institutions in economic development. The third and fourth parts cover the causes and social consequences of industrial revolutions in different countries, while Part Five brings together the best and most influential work on the causes of global inequality. Part Six explores mercantilism and trade wars as the basis of modern capitalism. Part Seven deals with free trade, protectionism, and empire. Part Eight collects research on world economic history, while the ninth part examines the slave economy. The final part collects the crucial scholarship on the economic history of taxation.

June 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-54745-1: £650.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

US $1,095.00

VOLUME 57

International Bibliography of the Social Sciences

Economics: 2008 First published in 1952, the International Bibliography of the Social Sciences (anthropology, economics, political science, and sociology) is well established as a major bibliographic reference for students, researchers & librarians. • An essential resource in the social sciences for researchers and librarians. • Includes extensive coverage of the Developing World and Eastern European publications. • All materials are organized alphabetically by controlled subject keywords providing an excellent means of browsing. November 2009:234x156: 720pp Hb: 978-0-415-55464-0: £295.00

ORDER NOW!

4-VOLUME SET

Twentieth-Century Economic History

US $155.00

FORTHCOMING

+44 (0)1235 400524

The study of economic phenomena over time is a well-established and flourishing area of research and study, and this new four-volume collection in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Economics, meets the need for an authoritative, upto-date, and comprehensive reference work synthesizing the voluminous literature on twentiethcentury economic history. Indeed, the sheer scale of the research output—and the breadth of the field— makes this collection especially welcome. It answers the need for a comprehensive collection of classic and contemporary contributions to facilitate ready access to the most influential and important scholarship from a wide range of theoretical and practical perspectives.

Twentieth-Century Economic History is edited by Lars Magnusson, a leading scholar in the field. The collection is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the material in its intellectual context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research resource. June 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49607-0: £650.00

US $1,140.00

$450.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

ECONOMICS, BUSINESS & LAW

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Experimental Economics Edited by K. Vela Velupillai, National University of Ireland, Galway Series: New Trends and Frontiers in Economic Analysis Experimental Economics may be said to have come of age in 2002 with the award to Vernon Smith of the Nobel Memorial Prize. As the Award Committee noted, economics had long been viewed as ‘a nonexperimental science that had to rely exclusively on field data’, a view that was perceived by many as ‘an obstacle to the continued development of economics as a science’. Unless, it was argued, ‘controlled experiments could be carried out, tests of economic theory would remain restricted’ since, solely on the basis of field data, ‘it is difficult to decide whether and when a theory fails, and to pinpoint the aspects responsible for this failure. The feedback channel between theory and observation under controlled circumstances—where new experimental findings suggest new theories and new theories suggest new experiments—seemed to be largely unavailable to economics.’ Designed to meet the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subdiscipline’s enormous literary corpus and the continuing explosion in research output, Experimental Economics is the first title in a new Routledge Major Works series, New Trends and Frontiers in Economic Analysis. Edited and introduced by a leading scholar in the field, it is a four-volume collection of foundational and the best cutting-edge research.

FORTHCOMING

eBook

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Social Entrepreneurship

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by William D. Schulte, Jr., Shenandoah Univerisity, Virginia, USA and Ana Maria Peredo, University of Victoria, Canada

Edited by Costas Douzinas, Birkbeck, University of London, UK and Colin Perrin

Social Entrepreneurship in its many forms – whether it be the use of entrepreneurial strategies and techniques to develop and manage organizations with social and community aims, or operating forprofit enterprises that have as their mission community betterment and concern for global wellbeing – has captured the interest and imaginations of scholars, practitioners, governments, and the general public since the early 1990s. The sharp increases in academic research and university courses in SE and funding for social entrepreneurs has left scholars, students, and practitioners hungry for quality resources on the topic. Representing the first comprehensive survey of the emerging field of social entrepreneurship, this edited volume will disseminate the numerous streams of research and theory in social and sustainable entrepreneurship to educators, libraries, scholars, non-profit researchers, public policy makers, practitioners, graduate students, and any organization or person interested in staying abreast of advances in this area. It is an important reference book for teachers, students and faculty interested in conducting research or teaching social entrepreneurship.

Critical Legal Theory has conventionally been traced to the social, political, and philosophical movements of the 1960s and, before that, to the earlytwentieth-century ‘realist’ critique of modern jurisprudence. In truth, however, its origins go back to classical and pre-modern thought, and to their acknowledgement of the centrality of law in attempts to conceive of the good life, or the just polity—a centrality that is, moreover, also discernible in the recent gravitation of a number of contemporary philosophers and theorists (such as Habermas, Derrida, Agamben, Luhmann, Latour) towards law.

Critical Legal Theory

July 2010: : 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-80521-6: £100.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87287-1 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY US $185.00

With comprehensive introductions to each volume, newly written by the editor, which place the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Experimental Economics is an essential collection destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Classics, Foundations and Individual Decision Making Volume II: Games, Bargaining, Auctions and Voting Volume III: Markets, Mechanisms, Learning and Information Volume IV: Public Goods, Industrial Organization and Institutions

Series: Critical Concepts in Law

Against the ‘restricted’ and ‘conservative’ character of modern jurisprudence, Critical Legal Theory constitutes a return to this more general interest in law and legality. Exceeding (if not exploding) the limits of jurisprudence, it has, moreover, drawn upon the most ancient and most contemporary traditions of critical thought in order to pursue new ways of understanding, living, and imagining the law. Critical Legal Theory is now an established—if heterogeneous and controversial—field of study, represented by numerous international journals, regional organizations, and global conferences. As the field continues to flourish as never before, this new title in Routledge’s Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Law, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of literature. Indeed, it is a landmark collection of Critical Legal Theory’s principal sources, orientations, movements, and themes. Supplemented with a full index and comprehensive introductions, newly written by the editors, which situate the collected material in the context of more general theoretical traditions, as well as in critical relation to jurisprudence, Critical Legal Theory is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers as a vital resource.

September 2011: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-45127-7: £725.00 US $1,450.00

February 2011: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48673-6: £650.00

For more information about our eBooks in Economics, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $1,140.00

ECONOMICS, BUSINESS & LAW

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Economic Reform in Modern China

Urban and Regional Economics

Edited by Wei Zhang, University of Cambridge, UK

Edited by Philip McCann, University of Reading, UK

Series: Critical Concepts in Economics

It is more than three decades since China initiated its economic reform and opening door policies. During that period, China has successfully transformed itself from an inefficient centrally planned economy to a fast growing market oriented economy. To the rest of the world, China has emerged from the condition of a poor and completely isolated nation to become the most powerful engine of global economic growth. China’s dynamic economic transition and development, especially its performance in the current world financial crisis, have attracted considerable worldwide interest.

Urban and regional economics encompasses both the economics of geography and spatial economics to focus on the growth, behaviour, and economic performance of cities and regions. Over the last two decades, urban and regional economics has grown dramatically—both as a taught subject and as an active research area—and as work in the subdiscipline flourishes as never before, this new four-volume collection from Routledge meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output.

There is currently a huge gap in the market for a reference work that helps academics and students to gain a better understanding of the history and development of Chinese economic reform. These articles selected here form the best classic and cutting-edge scholarship, covering a wide range of critical issues in the modern Chinese economy, with the particular focus on the period after 1978 when China embarked on economic reform and integration into the global economy. Economic Reform in Modern China is supplemented with a full index and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers as a vital research resource. September 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-56068-9: £650.00 US $1,250.00

The collection, part of Routledge’s Critical Concepts in Economics series, is edited by Philip McCann, author of the leading textbook in the field. He has carefully organized the collection to give users not only a thorough understanding of current ideas, but also a detailed exploration of the origin and development of these critical concepts to situate them within a number of rich analytical research traditions. The four volumes are divided into six principal sections, each of which is built around a common theme: 1. Urban and Regional Labour Markets; 2. Urban Economics; 3. The Location of Industry; 4. Urban and Regional Growth; 5. Regional Modelling; and 6. Regional Knowledge, Trade, and Policy. Each of the six themes is further divided into subsections on particular core topics or modes of analysis. Urban and Regional Economics is fully indexed and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor. It is an essential collection destined to be valued by urban and regional economists—and those working in cognate areas— as a vital research resource. March 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48774-0: £725.00

FORTHCOMING

6-VOLUME SET

Women’s Economic Writing 1760–1900 Edited by Janet Seiz, Grinnell College, Iowa, USA and Michele Pujol Series: Critical Concepts in Economics A comprehensive and fascinating set, this collection presents six volumes of significant economic writing by women between the mid-eighteenth and early twentieth centuries. With writings organized thematically, key topics discussed include: • political economy for the masses • women’s economic lives • poverty and the condition of the working class • slavery, race and empire • socialism. June 2011: 234x156: 2,400pp Hb: 978-0-415-34039-7: £975.00

US $1,950.00

FORTHCOMING

RLE

5-VOLUME SET

Adam Smith Various Series: Routledge Library Editions This five-volume Routledge Library Editions set is dedicated to the life and work of Adam Smith, the founding father of modern economics and pioneer of free markets. With individual volumes originally published between 1974 and 1988, this five-volume collection looks to determine Smith’s impact and significance by placing his work within the context of the historical development of economic thought. These volumes also consider Smith’s scientific approach to the study of morality and the sociological foundation of his economic theory, whilst offering pioneering insights into his life and the context of the society in which he lived.

US $1,225.00

Selected Contents: Volume I: Adam Smith’s Economics Volume II: Adam Smith Volume III: Adam Smith’s Science of Morals Volume IV: Adam Smith’s Sociological Economics Volume V: Human Documents of Adam Smith’s Time December 2009: 216x138: 1,222pp Hb: 978-0-415-56194-5: £325.00 US $570.00

For more information on Europa World, an online source of Statistical and Directory information on Economics, Business and Law, please visit: www.europaworld.com

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

ECONOMICS, BUSINESS & LAW

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Environmental Law

Feminist Economics

Islamic Banking and Finance

Edited by Stuart Bell, Nottingham Trent University, UK and Donald McGillivray, University of Kent, UK

Edited by Drucilla Barker, University of South Carolina, USA and Edith Kuiper, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands

Edited by Amer al-Roubaie, Ahlia University, Bahrain and Shafiq Alvi, Concordia University, Canada

Series: Critical Concepts in Economics

Edited by a leading scholar in the field, this is a new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Economics. It is a four-volume collection of historical and contemporary work in the flourishing field of feminist economics, an innovative and dynamic area of scholarship that broadens the scope of economic inquiry and allows a richer and more complex view of the ways in which economies function. The first two volumes of the collection consist of work done before the founding of the International Association for Feminist Economics in 1991 and are organized historically. The final two volumes consist of cutting-edge contemporary work in feminist economics and are organized thematically.

Islamic banking refers to a financial system which is consistent with principles of Islamic law (or ‘sharia’) and guided by Islamic economics. In particular, Islamic law prohibits ‘riba’ or usury, the collection and payment of interest. Additionally, Islamic law prohibits investing in businesses considered unlawful (‘haram’) or contrary to Islamic values. In recent years, a number of Islamic banks have been created to cater to the growing demand, driven by globalization and the vast wealth of some Muslim states in the Middle East and Southeast Asia, and Islamic finance has moved from a niche position to become a mainstream component of the global banking system.

Series: Critical Concepts in Law Since at least the latter part of the twentieth century there has been a crescendo of concern for the environment, and environmental law is increasingly recognized as an important component of any meaningful collective response to the harmful consequences—both actual and threatened—of environmental degradation. Research about and around environmental law flourishes as never before. Moreover, the theoretical framework within which the subject sits has become increasingly sophisticated as the principles and concepts which have emerged especially over the last thirty years or so (such as the ‘precautionary’ and the ‘polluter pays’ principle and the goal of sustainable development) are refined and clarified. This new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Law, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of this rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of literature. As well as bringing together the finest work of legal scholarship, this four-volume collection places environmental regulation in a multidisciplinary context and includes vital work from economists, political scientists, philosophers, ethicists, historians and natural scientists to illuminate the many different perspectives which inform and influence law’s response to environmental problems. The material contained in the four volumes of Environmental Law covers global themes, crosses jurisdictional borders, captures different theoretical perspectives and elucidates numerous substantive areas of the subject both to provide an intellectual justification of the foundations of environmental law and to stake out the boundaries of this once amorphous topic. It is destined to be valued by scholars and students of environmental law—as well as those working in allied areas—as a vital one-stop research resource. June 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-44264-0: £650.00

US $1,295.00

This new Routledge title, edited by two leading scholars, is a four-volume collection of canonical and the very best cutting-edge work in feminist economics, an innovative and dynamic area of scholarship that has broadened the scope of economic inquiry and has allowed a richer and more complex understanding of the ways in which economies function. Fully indexed and with a comprehensive introduction to each volume newly written by the editors, and an invited introduction to the final volume written by Gillian Hewitson, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Feminist Economics is an essential reference work. It is destined to be valued by scholars and students of economics—as well as those working in allied disciplines such as women’s and gender studies—as a vital research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Early Conversations, 1800–1960 Part 1: Economic Literacy Part 2: On Gender Equality, the Family and the Economy Part 3: On Household Production and Consumption Part 4: On Women’s Education, Work and Wages Part 5: Feminist Economic History Part 6: Feminist Economic Proposals or Change Volume II: Households, Labour, and Paid Work Part 7: Household Labour and Reproductive Labour Part 8: Caring Labour Part 9: Economics of the Family Part 10: Discrimination, Occupational Segregation, and the Wage Gap Volume III: Engendering Development and Economic Well-Being Part 11: Women and Development Part 12: Feminization of the Labor Force, Structural Adjustment, and Economic Transformation Part 13: Gender and Economic Well-Being Volume IV: Epistemological and Methodological Considerations Part 14: Methodology Part 15: History of Thought Part 16: Postcolonial and Postmodern Critical Perspectives December 2009: 234x156: 2,010pp Hb: 978-0-415-43916-9: £650.00 US $975.00

A large amount of research has been undertaken into this subject (much of which highlights the institutional aspects of Islamic social, economic, and financial arrangements) and this new four-volume collection from Routledge meets the need for a one-stop collection of the best scholarship. Its scope extends from the time of the creation of Islamic institutions in accordance with Quranic principles to the present day. And while Islamic Banking and Finance surveys the historic evolution of Islamic financial institutions over the last 1,400 years, it also illustrates the directions in which the subject is moving, including its role in the new world order, good governance, and transparency, and how the gaps can be bridged between Islamic and conventional financial systems. With a full index, together with a comprehensive introduction newly written by the editor which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Islamic Banking and Finance is an essential work of reference. It is destined to be valued by economists—as well as by scholars, students, and researchers of Islamic Studies, Middle East Studies, and Business Studies—as a vital resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Pre- and Early Islamic Finance 1. Pre-Islamic Financial Setup 2. Early Islamic Financial System 3. Islamic Economic Philosophy Volume II: Evolution of the Islamic Financial System 4. Islamic Finance: Evolution and Institutions 5. The Discourse on Interest: Religious Context 6. Islamic View of Interest 7. Secular (Modern) View of Interest Volume III 8. Current Islamic Finance 9. Capitalization of Islamic Institutions 10. Markets and Design of Financial Instruments 11. Operations and Control of Islamic Banks Volume IV: Future Islamic Finance 12. Prospects for Islamic Finance 13. Challenges Facing Islamic Finance Globalization of Islamic Financial System February 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48576-0: £695.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $1,140.00

ECONOMICS, BUSINESS & LAW

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Public Sector Economics Edited by Richard W. Tresch, Boston College, USA Series: Critical Concepts in Economics How does government taxing and spending affect an economy, and how can we determine whether government policies promote a society’s economic objectives? What economic activities should governments undertake? Should they do less? How should an optimal tax system be designed? What information is required to determine the best possible distribution of income? And what are the advantages (or otherwise) of a federalist structure of government? These are the kind of dizzying questions addressed by those working in public sector economics, and this new title in the Routledge series, Critical Concepts in Economics, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subdiscipline’s vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output. Edited by Richard W. Tresch, author of a leading graduate textbook in the field, and a proponent of the mainstream theory of the public sector, this new Routledge Major Work brings together in four volumes the foundational and the very best cuttingedge scholarship to provide comprehensive coverage of many of the subdiscipline’s most important topics. Fully indexed and with a useful introduction to the collection, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Public Sector Economics is an essential work of reference. It is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Public Expenditures Volume II: Taxation Volume III: Distribution Volume IV: Federalism October 2009: 234x156: 1,914pp Hb: 978-0-415-44836-9: £650.00

NEW

eBook

An Assessment of Current Practice and Challenges

Edited by Tony Lawson and Hashem Pesaran, both at University of Cambridge, UK

Edited by Martin Larch and João Nogueira Martins

Series: Routledge Revivals

Based on the proceedings of a workshop organized by the European Commission’s Directorate-General Economic and Financial Affairs, the book’s contributions from leading experts will be of particular value to individuals and institutions involved in the fields of national and international economics and finance. Key features: • chapters are arranged within three main sections: Long-term sustainability; Measurement of the underlying budgetary position and discretionary fiscal policy; Reliability of fiscal indicators • edited by Martin Larch and João Nogueira Martins • expert contributors include António Afonso, Fabrizio Balassone, Fernando Ballabriga, Roy Barrell, Peter Brandner, Peter Claeys, Leopold Diebalek, Per Eckefeldt, Jonas Fischer, Daniele Franco, Jagadeesh Gokhale, Ian Hurst, Walpurga Köhler-Töglhofer, György Kopits, Martin Larch, Carlos Martinez-Mongay, James Mitchell, João Nogueira Martins, Jan in ’t Veld, Stefania Zotteri • bibliography and index.

Law of International Business Charles Chatterjee, London Metropolitan University, UK

Supplemented with the editor’s introduction, which places the gathered work in its historical and intellectual context, this new four-volume collection from Routledge brings together the best and most influential critical writing on Porter. September 2009: 234x156: 1,568pp Hb: 978-0-415-32584-4: £650.00 US $975.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

It: • brings the most important aspects of international business law into one work • discusses issues from a truly international, rather than a comparative, perspective • deals with topics such as sovereignty, risks, regulatory aspects of international business, transfer of technology and turn-key contracts. Familiarizing students with negotiating techniques for international contracts, this concise volume is the perfect introduction and handy reference to international business law. September 2009: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-383-8: £75.00

+44 (0)1235 400524

US $131.00

NEW

eBook

Reappraising J. A. Hobson

Humanism and Welfare

J. A. Hobson was one of the most influential social, economic and political theorists of late nineteenthand early twentieth-century Britain. In this volume, first published in 1990, eight scholars reassess the importance and relevance of his work today and affirm him as a major British thinker.

Written in an accessible and non-technical style, this text is an important guide to international business law. It will benefit lawyers and businesses, students and researchers alike.

US $170.00

ORDER NOW!

July 2009: 216x138: 270pp Hb: 978-0-415-55299-8: £75.00

NEW

Edited by John C. Wood, Managing Director, University Division, Navitas and Michael C. Wood, Professor of Management, University of Notre Dame, Australia

Michael Porter (b. 1947) has been described by The Economist as ‘the doyen of living management gurus’. Boldly introducing the language and concepts of economics into management theory, his work has focused on how a firm (or a region) can build a competitive advantage and develop a competitive strategy.

Selected Contents: 1. Methodological Issues in Keynes’ Economics: An Introduction Tony Lawson and Hashem Pesaran 2. Persuasion, Expectations and the Limits to Keynes Geoff Hodgson 3. Animal Spirits and Rationality Alexander Dow and Sheila Dow 4. Expectations in Keynesian Econometric Models Simon Wren-Lewis 5. The Slippery Transition Johannes J. Klant 6. Are Popperian Criticisms of Keynes Justified? John Pheby 7. Keynes, Prediction and Econometrics Tony Lawson 8. Keynes on Econometrics Hashem Pesaran and Ron Smith 9. Keynes on Cause, Chance and Possibility Anna Carabelli 10. The Foundations of Keynes Methodology: The General Theory Lawrence A. Boland 11. Time and the Wage-Unit in the Method of The General Theory Victoria Chick 12. Keynesianism In Germany Juergen Backhaus

Series: Routledge Revivals

Michael Porter

Series: Critical Evaluations in Business and Management

First published in 1985, this title includes contributions from leading economists and addresses many seminal aspects of Keynes’ work and methods. This revival will be of particular interest to lecturers and advanced students of economics.

Edited by Michael Freeden

September 2009: 246x174: 250pp Pb: 978-92-79-11451-9: £40.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86645-0

4-VOLUME SET

Methodological Issues

This book examines key aspects of the measurement of fiscal policy making in the EU fiscal surveillance framework, highlighting strengths and weaknesses of current assessment practice.

US $50.00

NEW

Keynes’ Economics

• text amply supported by charts and tables

US $1,295.00

NEW

Fiscal Policy Making in the European Union

These original studies place Hobson in context by explaining his intellectual antecedents: Cobden, Ruskin, nineteenth-century social and psychological theories and economic thought. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Hobson, Ruskin and Cobden 3. Variations on a Famous Theme: Hobson, International Trade and Imperialism, 1902-1938 4. Hobson’s Evolving Conceptions of Human Nature 5. The Conservative Aspect of Hobson’s New Liberalism 6. Hobson and Keynes as Economic Heretics 7. J. A. Hobson as a Macroeconomic Theorist 8. Rewriting the Confessions: Hobson and the Extention Movement 9. Hobson and Internationalism July 2009: 216x138: 196pp Hb: 978-0-415-55765-8: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09233-0

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $113.00

www.routledge.com/reference

ECONOMICS, BUSINESS & LAW

4-VOLUME SET

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Ecological Economics Edited by Clive Spash, Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization (CSIRO), Australia Series: Critical Concepts in the Environment Edited by a leading scholar in the field, this new four-volume Routledge Major Work brings together canonical and cutting-edge research in ecological economics. In tracing both the development of thought in the field, as well as exploring the most recent scholarship, diverse elements of the rapidly expanding literature are brought together for the first time, providing an overview of—and vision for—ecological economics. While the roots of ecological economics can be traced back to the late 1800s the modern movement developed from diverse writings in the following century. The field became fully established and institutionalized in the late 1980s. This collection shows how research questioning the basis of mainstream economics combined with a concern for environmental degradation and limits to growth to produce ecological economics. There are also many academics who, while not calling themselves ecological economists, have ideas which are directly of relevance. Besides identifying and collecting seminal works, the editor has also chosen pieces for their ability cogently to summarize and explain developments and ongoing thinking. Ecological economics is now a vibrant and dynamic field, but it has to date lacked a coherent guide to its rapidly expanding literature. Aided by the collection’s thematic organization and the editor’s newly written general and volume introductions, this Routledge Major Work will enable users to make sense of the wide range of approaches, theories, and concepts that have informed research in ecological economics to date. It is an essential collection destined to be valued as a vital research resource by all scholars and students of the subject. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Development of Ecological Economics Part 2: Beyond Standard Economic Theory Part 3: Connecting Economics with Biology and Ecology Part 4: Thermodynamics, Entropy and Economics Part 5: Economic Growth, Sustainability and the Environment Part 6: The Consumer Society Part 7: Concern for Future Generations Part 8: The Environmental Valuation Problem Part 9: Lessons in Valuation for Ecological Economists Part 10: Environmental Ethics Part 11: Policy Analysis Part 12: Learning from Ecosystems: Constraints and Management Part 13: Irreversibility, Uncertainty and Ignorance Part 14: Group Norms, Values and Motivation Part 15: Participation, Representation and Deliberation June 2009: 234x156: 2,080pp Hb: 978-0-415-43145-3: £650.00

US $1,295.00

Feminist Legal Studies Edited by Joanne Conaghan, University of Kent, UK Series: Critical Concepts in Law

A close engagement with law has long been a core dimension of feminist activism. However, it is only since the late twentieth century that a distinct and vital body of academic literature addressing the nature, effects, and limits of that engagement has emerged. In particular, from the 1980s onwards, a critical mass of scholarship has accumulated, establishing feminist legal studies not just as a recognizable subdiscipline, both of law and of feminist or women’s studies, but also as a terrain of substance and complexity, the exploration and understanding of which requires increasingly sophisticated navigation skills. As research in and around the area flourishes as never before, this new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Law, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of literature, and to provide a map of feminist legal studies as it has emerged, developed, and diverged over the last thirty years. There are many ways of classifying feminist thinking within and beyond law. A typical method is to divide work into competing political or theoretical camps (such as liberal feminism, socialist feminism, and radical feminism). Another way, more common in law, is to organize feminist perspectives around issues such as abortion, equal pay, and pornography. A third treatment would be to focus on epistemologies (for example, feminist empiricism, standpoint theory, and postmodernism). However, the editor of this reference work, an internationally renowned scholar, eschews these increasingly sterile approaches and instead offers a view of feminist legal studies as a dynamic process of engagement with law which takes different forms and emphases at different points and contexts. Feminist legal studies does not, she argues, comprise a static set of ideas; it is rather an ongoing conversation. For this reason, the material gathered here in this four-volume collection is, to a considerable extent, organized chronologically, starting with the key feminist issues and interventions of the early 1980s. The collection then progresses thematically to reflect the shifts and turns of feminist legal thought. The content of the material is explicitly interjurisdictional, and reflects the global nature of feminist legal scholarship and, in particular, current thematic preoccupations. With a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the material in its historical and intellectual context, Feminist Legal Studies is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students of feminist law—as well as those working in allied areas—as a vital one-stop research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Evolution Volume II: Neoliberal Encounters Volume III: Legal Method, Legal Reason, and Legal Change Volume IV: Challenges and Contestations January 2009: 234x156: 1,864pp Hb: 978-0-415-44746-1: £650.00

Chris Argyris

MW Edited by John C. Wood, Managing Director, University Division, Navitas and Michael C. Wood, Professor of Management, University of Notre Dame, Australia Series: Critical Evaluations in Business and Management Chris Argyris (b. 1923) was one of the key figures in the Human Relations Movement in the 1960s and 1970s; he is widely regarded as the founding father of the learning organization. His work has made substantial contributions to the understanding of organizational behaviour, organizational learning, and action research, and has deepened significantly our comprehension of experiential learning. Supplemented with the editors’ introduction, which places the gathered work in its historical and intellectual context, this new collection from Routledge brings together in one volume all the best and most influential critical writing on Argyris. April 2009: 234x156: 560pp Hb: 978-0-415-32560-8: £175.00

US $275.00

Alternative Dispute Resolution A Practical Guide Charles Chatterjee, London Metropolitan University, UK The Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) system provides an opportunity whereby the deficiencies, and costs, of court and arbitration proceedings may be avoided. In this work, the author: • discusses the requirements of an effective ADR system for settling disputes • compares the merits and weakness of court proceedings and arbitral proceedings in achieving agreed settlements • provides a useful guide for students and practitioners to the legal roles within ADR, and the stages to expect during a mediation process. National and international mediation systems are examined, including those of the Centre for Effective Dispute Resolution, the World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) and the International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID). The WIPO Mediation Rules and the ICSID Convention, Regulations and Rules are reproduced and discussed. A chapter focuses on the role of ADR and arbitration in national and international sport. This title will be of use to both students and practitioners with an interest in ADR systems for settling disputes, be they domestic or international in nature. 2008: 234x156: 208pp Hb: 978-1-85743-370-8: £100.00

US $1,295.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $170.00

ECONOMICS, BUSINESS & LAW

EDUCATION

Building the Financial Foundations of the Euro

Legal Aspects of Trade Finance

FORTHCOMING

Charles Chatterjee

Experiences and challenges

2006: 234x156: 224pp Hb: 978-1-85743-389-0: £100.00

Handbook of Child and Adolescent Behavior Disorders

Edited by Lars Jonung With contributions from a range of leading experts in this rapidly changing field, the book will be of particular value to economists, national and international institutes, banks and other financial institutions and the academic world. For ease of reference, the text is supported with charts and tables, and there is a complete index. 2008: 246x174: 464pp Pb: 978-92-79-05295-8: £35.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88635-9

International Law and Diplomacy Charles Chatterjee, London Metropolitan University, UK 2007: 234x156: 440pp Hb: 978-1-85743-384-5: £100.00

Documents in International Economic Law Edited by Francis Botchway 2005: 279x211: 952pp Hb: 978-1-85743-209-1: £320.00

The Directory of Trade and Professional Associations in the European Union

A Dictionary of Civil Society, Philanthropy and the Third Sector 2005: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-166-7: £120.00

104-VOLUME SET

RLE

Various Series: Routledge Library Editions Re-issuing books originally published between 1920 and 1986, from the Routledge, Allen & Unwin, Routledge & Kegan Paul, Methuen and Hutchison imprints, this landmark series charts the history and evolution of economics through the writings of some of the greatest names in the subject area, including several Nobel Prize winners.

Grants and Projects Involving Non-Governmental Organizations

Names such as Friedrich Hayek, Nicholas Kaldor, W.A. Lewis, M. Kalecki, Fritz Machlup, D. N. McCloskey, James Meade, Lèon Walras, Joseph A. Schumpeter and G. L. S. Shackle are just a few of the eminent economists whose work is represented. To suit individual requirements, these volumes are available as a whole set, mini-sets or as individual volumes. 2007: 216x138 Hb: 978-0-415-44069-1: £7,500.00

ORDER NOW!

US $15,000.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

US $180.00

International Organizations Funding Directory

2004: 234x156: 504pp Hb: 978-1-85743-247-3: £152.00

Richard Morris, University of Arizona, USA and Thomas Kratochwill, University of Wisconsin/ Madison, USA Even though research in the fields of school psychology, child clinical psychology, and child psychiatry has grown exponentially over the past twenty-five to thirty years, no single volume has attempted to comprehensively organize and describe these findings. That is the mission of this forty chapter Handbook, which is organized into the following sections: 1) Assessment; 2) Diagnosis and Classification; 3) Characteristics, Etiologies, and Interventions; 4) Prevention; 5) Ethics, Standards, and Policies; 6) Professional Training and 7) Research Methods

US $320.00

Helmut K. Anheier

US $170.00

Economics

US $630.00

5TH EDITION

2004: 297x210: 400pp Hb: 978-1-85743-285-5: £165.00

US $70.00

US $170.00

US $370.00

Selected Contents: 1: Introduction and Overview Introduction and Overview to the Book 2: Assessment Neuropsychological Assessment of Behavior Problems 1. Behavior Rating Scales, Inventories, and Checklists 2. Personality Assessment 3. Behavioral Assessment Techniques 4. Diagnostic Interviewing Techniques 5. Cultural Issues in Assessment of Behavior Disorders 3: Diagnosis and Classification 6. Issues in Classification of Childhood Psychopathology 7. Categorical Approaches to Diagnosis 8. Developmental Approaches to Diagnosis 9. Multivariate Approaches to Diagnosis 10. Family Systems Perspectives to Diagnosis 4: Characteristics, Etiologies, and Interventions 11. Attachment Disorders 12. Obsessive Compulsive Disorder 13. Fears and Related Anxieties 14. Child and Adolescent Depression 15. Posttraumatic Stress Disorder 16. Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder 17. Conduct Disorder 18. Juvenile Delinquency 19. Somatic Disorders 20. Autism Spectrum Disorders 21. Mental Retardation 22. Sexual and Physical Abuse Victimization 23. Substance Abuse 24. Eating Disorders 25. Biploar Disorder 26. Academic Problems 27. Family Violence 5: Prevention 28. Early Childhood Prevention Models 29. Building Competence/Resilience; Positive Psychology Movement 6: Ethical Practices, Standards, and Policy Issues 30. Ethical Issues, Standards, and Laws Related to the Delivery of Mental Health Services to Minors 31. Licensing and Certification – Protecting the Public 32. Cultural and Diversity Issues in Providing Psychological Services to Children and Adolescents 7: Education and Training of Child/Adolescent Therapists 33. Training Models 34. Internship and Post-Doctoral Residency Programs 8: Research Methods Issues 35. Research Issues in Assessment 36. Research Issues in Intervention December 2010: Hb: 978-0-8058-6109-9: £130.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87482-0

+44 (0)1235 400524

eBook

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $195.00

www.routledge.com/reference

EDUCATION

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Educational Assessment and Evaluation Edited by Harry Torrance, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK Series: Major Themes in Education Assessment and evaluation are crucial aspects of any educational system and rarely can they have been so central to educational policy-making and the reform of schooling as at the present time. (The introduction of the National Curriculum and Testing system in the UK and the test-based ‘No Child Left Behind’ legislation in the USA are but two highprofile examples.) Assessment processes interact with curriculum and teaching methods to frame the student experience of education, and the outcomes of assessment are crucially important in determining individual educational progression and socioeconomic futures. Equally, assessment is used by policy-makers to focus instruction on core elements of educational provision, and the aggregate outcomes of assessment are employed to measure the quality and effectiveness of an educational system. Good quality assessment is vital to individual student life-chances and to issues of parental choice, school reputation, government policy evaluation, and long-term economic development. Poor quality assessment can disrupt all of these elements of an effective school system by, for example, narrowing what is taught and learned to only the limited range of skills and abilities examined through paper-andpencil tests. As serious thinking about and around assessment and evaluation continues to flourish and develop, this new title in Routledge’s Major Themes in Education series meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output. With comprehensive introductions to each volume, newly written by the editor, which place the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, this Routledge Major Work is an essential work of reference. It is destined to be valued by specialists in assessment and evaluation and scholars working in related areas—as well as by educational policy-makers and professionals—as a vital one-stop research tool. November 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48972-0: £650.00 US $1,075.00

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Adolescent Transition Education

The Routledge International Handbook of Creative Learning

Edited by Michael L. Wehmeyer and Kristine W. Webb

Edited by Julian Sefton-Green, Independent Education Consultant, UK, Pat Thomson, University of Nottingham, UK, Liora Bresler and Ken Jones

’My overall reaction to the project is positive. I was very satisfied with the topics covered as well as the organization of the text. I especially like the inclusion of information for students and parents as well as the chapters on disability specific transition supports as there are many unique concerns based on disability levels and type. I think one of the strongest aspects of this proposed text is the quality of the contributors. They are outstanding scholars in this area. Very strong!... Yes, I agree with the authors about the current lack of competing Handbooks. I am not aware of similar books published in the last 10 years’ – Charles Hughes Pennsylvania State University, USA Transition from secondary education to adulthood represents a period during which adolescents with disabilities face multiple responsibilities and changing roles that include establishing independence, attending postsecondary education or training, developing social networks, choosing a career, participating in their communities, and managing healthcare and financial affairs. Sponsored by the Division of Career Development and Transition (DCDT) of the Council of Exceptional Children, this Handbook will serve as a comprehensive resource to the communities of educators, related service and agency personnel, families, caretakers, counselors, and other stakeholders who facilitate these complex transitions to adulthood for adolescents with disabilities. October 2010: 234x156: 600pp Hb: 978-0-415-87278-2: £140.00

Series: Routledge International Handbooks of Education The concept of creative learning extends far beyond Arts-based learning or the development of individual creativity. It covers a range of processes and initiatives throughout the world that share common values, systems and practices aimed at making learning more creative. This applies at individual, classroom or whole school level, always with the aim of fully realising young people’s potential. Until now there has been no single text bringing together the significant literature that explores the dimensions of creative learning, despite the work of artists in schools and the development of a cadre of creative teaching and learning specialists. Containing a mixture of newly commissioned chapters, reprints and updated versions of previous publications, this book brings together major theorists and current research. Comprising of key readings in creative education, it will stand as a uniquely authoritative text that will appeal to those involved in initial and continuing teacher education, as well as research academics and policy specialists. Sections consists of: • a general introduction to the field of creative learning • arts learning traditions, with sub-sections on discrete art forms such as drama and visual art • accounts of practice from artist-teacher partnerships

US $295.00

• whole school change and reforms

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

• curriculum change • assessment

Women and Education

• evaluative case studies of impact and effect

Edited by Jane Martin, University of London, UK and Joyce Goodman, University of Winchester, UK Series: Major Themes in Education If a primary objective of feminism is to expose and challenge the social relations of power embedded in all spheres of life, then an exploration of the issues attached to female education is a vital aspect of such a project. Indeed, ‘women and education’ is now an established—and flourishing—domain of study. And as academic thinking continues to develop, this new title in Routledge’s acclaimed series, Major Themes in Education, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output.

• global studies of policy change around creative learning. June 2010: 246x174: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-54889-2: £110.00

With a full index, together with a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editors, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Women and Education is an essential work of reference. It will be welcomed as a crucial database permitting rapid access to less familiar—and sometimes July 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-54939-4: £650.00

US $1,075.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $170.00

EDUCATION

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Encyclopaedia of UK Education, Training and Employment

The Routledge Doctoral Student’s Companion

The Routledge Doctoral Supervisor’s Companion

Getting to Grips with Research in Education and the Social Sciences

Supporting Effective Research in Education and the Social Sciences

Edited by Pat Thomson, University of Nottingham, UK and Melanie Walker

Series: Companions for PhD and DPhil Research

There are a burgeoning number of books available to support doctoral research – doing-it guides and advice books, methods books, philosophy, ethics, analysis, getting published, and so on. There are countless methodology and methods texts in particular. However, this extensive literature is difficult for doctoral students to navigate and thus will not necessarily take them forward in their projects. Uniquely, this book is a companion to the many catalogues of texts now available for doctoral purchase.

This book accompanies the Routledge Doctoral Student’s Companion. It is not yet another book on competing teaching paradigms, nor a guide to how to hand-hold students to do a piece of doctoral work from beginning to end, nor a view of the doctorate which comprises ‘tips and tricks’, nor approaches to ‘writing up’ a thesis, or set of researcher biographies. Rather The Routledge Doctoral Supervisor’s Companion places at its centre the interwoven questions of what it means to be a doctoral student in the social sciences, what is involved in becoming and being a researcher and clearly shows how the role of the supervisor is key to the student’s personal development. It further details what research capabilities are key to confidence, quality and success.

Edited by John P. Wilson, University of Sheffield, UK The Encyclopaedia will be a comprehensive description of all the main labour market initiatives which combine education and employment in the UK. It is also a historical source tracking initiatives that began with the Guilds and the Statute of Artificers in 1563, all the way through to the present day. The cross-referencing and use of bibliographic and internet sources will make this a widely used reference for all those involved in education, training, learning, employment etc. The Encyclopaedia includes: • descriptions in detail of all the major government initiatives connecting education, training and employment • documentation covering England, Northern Ireland, Scotland and Wales; and also initiatives in Ireland up to Irish independence • all major public agencies and qualifications • a detailed bibliography • an extensive glossary of acronyms • related items that are cross referenced to facilitate research • historical compilation and referencing of the items, enabling the tracing back of organisations and initiatives which have occupied similar responsibilities and niches. Many items that have been rarely recorded or are only to be found in documents relatively inaccessible to the public and those involved with education and training. Although current governmental documents are now to be found online many historical records are not available. This Encyclopaedia crosses these knowledge boundaries, and will appeal to all involved in UK education, training and employment. May 2010: 246x174: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-55822-8: £100.00

US $165.00

Becoming a researcher involves engaging with a range of ideas and issues mediated through a particular research project. ‘Getting’ the doctorate is always much more than simply completing the research – in reality it is about becoming and being, and this process is integral to becoming part of the scholarly community. Doing a quality doctorate in contemporary times requires more than the technical skills required of a research process; it involves coming to see oneself as a researcher and to take on a confident researcher identity. This book works by exploring how identity/knowledge formation happens together. It addresses a set of interlocking and overlapping big questions that ‘sit’ behind the plethora of doctoral advice texts and run through the practice of knowledge/identity work. With contributions from many of the key names involved in the international education arena, this book will enable students to navigate their way through the vast library of doctoral and research books by bringing together questions and solutions which are generally scattered through a plethora of texts and will help all full and part-time students undertaking doctorates in education and other cognate disciplines become efficient researchers. March 2010: 246x174: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-48411-4: £85.00

US $170.00

For more information on Europa World of Learning Online, with Directory Information on Higher Education Institutions, see centre pull out section.

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

In each chapter, having provided a framing for the question under discussion, given some history of the debates, and offered a helpful lexicon through which to understand the topic, The Doctoral Supervisor’s Companion provides information about helpful resources and methodological and method support. In this way, it acts as a road map to the international literatures and best practice. This, together with the diverse range of writers in the book, will ensure an international readership for the text. This book will be a vital tool both for beginning and established supervisors and has the potential to be a key text for all education and cognate disciplines. It is not focused on methods and methodologies (other texts do that amply well) but addresses the sorts of questions that need to be taken up by developing researchers, debated and argued, as well as providing pragmatic and practical thinking about how to aid students’ research/scholarly careers and identities. Nor is this a simple question and answer text. The questions and issues raised are fundamental to the doctorate and ones which the academic audience finds itself discussing repeatedly. While there is no one solution to ideal supervision, this wide-ranging text offers proven solutions that will help supervisors develop their own personal style of effective supervision. Ideal for all supervisors whether assisting the increasing number of part time doctoral researchers who have less access to supervision and campus based courses and resources or assisting traditional full-time students, it is also highly suitable for helping academics to support international students who must adapt to Western doctoral traditions: this text will help both supervisor and student to understand why things are as they are. March 2010: 246x174: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-48413-8: £85.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $170.00

www.routledge.com/reference

EDUCATION

FORTHCOMING

eBook

Handbook of Research in the Social Foundations of Education Edited by Steven Tozer, University of Illinois, Chicago, USA, Bernado P. Gallegos, National University, Los Angeles Campus, USA, Annette M. Henry, University of Illinois, Chicago, USA, Mary Bushnell Greiner and Paula Groves-Price Since the 1930s, scholars in the SFE have influenced the field of education in two major ways: first, through professional preparation and development of teachers and school leaders, and second, through research into the social contexts of education, teaching and learning. Whether in professional preparation programs or research, social foundations scholarship has historically demonstrated three distinguishing characteristics: • it seeks to critically analyze the social contexts within which educational institutions, processes, and ideals operate • it applies evolving multidisciplinary perspectives— from History, Philosophy, and Sociology in the 1930s to Cultural Studies, Post-Colonial Studies and Environmental Studies today—to the critical interpretation of educational phenomena • it uses democratic ideals as a framework for interpreting and evaluating educational institutions. Parts 1 and 2 of this fifty-five chapter volume present the theoretical lenses used to study the social contexts of education. These include longestablished foundations disciplines such as sociology of education and philosophy of education as well as newer theoretical perspectives such as critical race theory, feminist educational theory, and cultural studies in education. Parts III, IV, and V demonstrate how these theoretical lenses are used to examine such phenomena as globalization, media, popular culture, technology, youth culture, and schooling. This groundbreaking volume helps readers understand the history, evolution, and significance of this wide-ranging, often misunderstood, and increasingly important field of study. January 2010 Hb: 978-0-8058-4211-1: £140.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87483-7

US $295.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge International Handbook of English, Language and Literacy Teaching

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Dominic Wyse, University of Cambridge, UK, Richard Andrews, Institute of Education, UK and James Hoffman, University of Texas at Austin, USA Edited by three authorities in the field, this Handbook presents contributions from experts across the world who report the cutting-edge of international research. It is ground-breaking in its holistic, evidence-informed account that aims to synthesize key messages for policy and practice. A comprehensive collection, the Handbook focuses on the three key areas of reading, writing, and language, and issues that cut across them. The international emphasis of all the chapters is extended by a final section that looks directly at different countries and continents. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Reading Social and Cultural Influences on Children’s Motivation for Reading. Literature for Children. Approaches to Teaching Literature. Reading and Teaching Short Stories, Based on Process Studies and Experimental Research. Comprehension Instruction: Merging Two Historically Antithetical Perspectives. The Genre-Specific Nature of Reading Comprehension. Morphological Knowledge and Learning to Read in English. Phonological Development Across Different Languages. Interaction and Learning to Read: Towards a Dialogic Approach. Part 2: Writing Facilitating Writing Development. Writing in the Early Years. The Ontogenesis of Writing in Childhood and Adolescence. Composition Across Levels of Schooling: Cognitive, Textual and Social Dimensions. Rhythm And Blues: Making Textual Music with Grammar and Punctuation. Linguistic Foundations of Spelling Development. Handwriting and Writing. Part 3: Language Orality, Literacy, and Culture: Talk, Text, and Tools in Ideological Contexts. Understanding Language Development. Bilingualism and English Language Teaching. Drama–Teaching, Learning, Language and Literacy. Classroom Discourse: Towards a Dialogic Pedagogy Part 4: Teaching English, Language and Literacy Critical Approaches to Teaching Language, Reading and Writing. Culturally Responsive Teacher Preparation: Learning in Field Experiences for Prospective Literacy Educators. The Text Environment and Learning to Read: Windows and Mirrors. Shaping Literate Lives. The Relationship Between Home And School. Literacy Practices. Gender and the Teaching of English. An Outward, Inward, and School-ward Overview of Interactive Communication. Technologies Across the Literacy Landscape. Multimodality, Literacy and School English. A Very Long Engagement: English and The Moving Image. Reading, Writing and Speaking Poetry . Teaching Shakespeare. Difficulties in Learning Literacy. Classroom Assessment. Initial Teacher Preparation for Reading Instruction. Part 5: English, Language and Literacy Teaching: Countries as Contexts International Comparisons of Literacy: What have they revealed? Globalisation and the International Context for Literacy Policy Reform. A Tale of the Two Special Administrative Regions (SARS) of China - An Overview of English Language Teaching Developments in Hong Kong and Macao. Bilingual Educational Programmes in Indian Schools: Addressing the English Language Needs of the Country. English in Scandinavia - A Success Story? Sub-saharan Africa Recent Federal Education Policy in the United States. English Teaching in Australia and New Zealand. English in England and Wales: Knowledge and Ownership. Part 6: Conclusion Recommendations for Practice, Policy and Research. December 2009: 246x174: 552pp Hb: 978-0-415-46903-6: £110.00

Islam and Education Edited by Tahir Abbas, University of Birmingham, UK Series: Major Themes in Education Volume I of this new Routledge collection focuses on theories of education. The gathered materials explore and analyse the impact of the classical Islamic period in history and the developments in education which have emanated from it. Volume II focuses on education in Eastern Europe and Muslim Asia, capturing the essential issues in each of the countries studied, and how they vary across a vast region. The impact of culture and modernization on traditional societies, as well as the ways in which westernized modes of education are introduced, and the aspirations of youth are in turn determined. Volume III looks at education in the Middle East and Muslim Africa. Islam has its origins in the Middle East, and today many of the challenges Muslims face in relation to Islam and education are concentrated in this region. Volume IV explores the education of Muslims in North America and Europe, and of minorities in advanced liberal secular democracies. Islam and Education is fully indexed and includes a comprehensive introduction newly written by the editor. May 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47845-8: £650.00

US $1,140.00

FORTHCOMING 24-VOLUME SET

International Library of the Philosophy of Education Various International Library of the Philosophy of Education reprints twenty-four distinguished texts published in this field over the last half-century and includes works by authors such as Reginald D. Archambault, Charles Bailey, Robin Barrow, Norman J. Bull, D. E. Cooper, R. F. Dearden, Kieran Egan, D. W. Hamlyn, Paul H. Hirst, Glenn Langford, D. J. O’Connor, T. W. Moore, D. A. Nyberg, R. W. K. Paterson, R. S. Peters, Kenneth A Strike, I. A. Snook, John and Patricia White, and John Wilson. Themes discussed include: Liberal education, moral education, the aims of education, the education of teachers, adult & continuing education and the philosophical analysis of education. December 2009: 234x156: 15,884pp Hb: 978-0-415-55946-1: £1,500.00 • Special Pre-pub Price £1,250.00 US $1,175.00

(Valid until 3 months after publication)

US $180.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $2,631.00

EDUCATION

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Asian Education

Handbook of Bullying in Schools

Yong Zhao, Michigan State University, USA This comprehensive and authoritative Handbook describes educational practices in Asia and explains and interprets these practices from cultural, historical, and economic perspectives. It documents the accomplishments and achievements of Asian education and also discusses the challenges it faces. Each section offers one chapter on the challenges education faces and what efforts are underway or planned to meet them, and one chapter on how immigrants from each civilization have come to live in the West, how they are educated, and how they are adapting to their new homes. Handbook of Asian Education: A Cultural Perspective: • offers a novel and sensible approach to capture the essence of the diverse educational systems and practices in Asia • is written from an angle to inform readers in the U.S. and other Western cultures about Asian education and the education of Asian immigrants • uniquely combines description and interpretation of educational practices in Asia.

eBook

Handbook of Research on Children’s and Young Adult Literature

An International Perspective Edited by Shane Jimerson, University of California, Santa Barbara, USA, Susan M. Swearer and Dorothy L. Espelage The Handbook of Bullying in Schools: An International Perspective provides a comprehensive review and analysis of what is known about the worldwide bullying phenomena. It is the first volume to systematically review and integrate what is known about how cultural and regional issues affect bullying behavior and its prevention. It draws on insights from scholars around the world to advance our understanding of... • theoretical and empirical foundations for understanding bullying • assessment and measurement of bullying • research-based prevention and intervention methods. November 2009: : 640pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6392-5: £160.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86496-8

US $295.00

This volume is directed to education researchers and graduate students in international and comparative education, globalization and education, multicultural education, sociocultural foundations of education, Asian studies; educational administrators and education policy makers.

FORTHCOMING

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Asian Education: A Cultural Perspective Section 1: Sinic Education 2. Cultural Overview of Education in Sinic Civilization 3. Education Governance and Management 4. Curriculum and Assessment 5. Teachers and Teaching 6. Learners and Learning 7. Home and Community 8. Challenges and Future Directions 9. Education of Immigrants from Sinic Civilization Section 2: Japanese Education 10. Cultural Overview of Education in Japanese Civilization 11. Education Governance and Management 12. Curriculum and Assessment 13. Teachers and Teaching 14. Learners and Learning 15. Home and Community 16. Challenges and Future Directions 17. Education of Immigrants from Japanese Civilization Section 3: Hindu Education 18. Cultural Overview of Education in Hindu Civilization 19. Education Governance and Management 20. Curriculum and Assessment 21. Teachers and Teaching 22. Learners and Learning 23. Home and Community 24. Challenges and Future Directions 25. Education of Immigrants from Hindu Civilization Section 4: Islamic Education 26. Cultural Overview of Education in Islamic Civilization 27. Education Governance and Management 28. Curriculum and Assessment 29. Teachers and Teaching 30. Learners and Learning 31. Home and Community 32. Challenges and Future Directions 33. Education of Immigrants from Islamic Civilization Section 5: Buddhist Education 34. Cultural Overview of Education in the Buddhist Civilization 35. Education Governance and Management 36. Curriculum and Assessment 37. Teachers and Teaching 38. Learners and Learning 39. Home and Community 40. Challenges and Future Directions 41. Education of Immigrants from Buddhist Civilization

Edited by Tony Bertram, John Bennett, Philip Gammage and Christine Pascal

December 2009: : 912pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6445-8: £170.00

US $260.00

The Routledge International Handbook of Early Childhood Education Edited by four leading experts in the field of early childhood education, this book provides a cutting edge overview and discursive summaries of current research, main debates in the field and future trends. The entire landscape of early childhood education is surveyed through a collection of specially commissioned articles including the following themes: • child & society • policy and politics • development and learning • diversity, learning and access • professionalism and parents • new developments. This Handbook will be an essential work of reference for any student of early childhood education, elementary education, child development, education policy and social work at both undergraduate and graduate level. Selected Contents: Section 1: Child & Society: Constructions of Childhood; Children, Family & Community; Individual & Globalisation; Community-led Services, Investment, Work/Life Section 2: Policy & Politics: Policy & Financing; Poverty, Equality & Outcomes; Citizenship and Participatory Practice, Governance and Monitoring Section 3: Development & Learning: Child Development; Pedagogy & Curriculum; Quality Improvement & Evaluation Section 4: Diversity , Inclusion & Access: Race, Special Needs, Gifted & Talented and Gender Section 5: Professionalism & Parents: Workforce Development; Multi-Agency; Parenting & Practice Section 6: New Developments: Integrated Services, Birth to Three, Role of the State, Research Paradigms, Accession Countries, Asia January 2010: 234x156: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-47951-6: £110.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

FORTHCOMING

Shelby Wolf, University of Colorado, USA, Karen Coats, Illinois State University, USA, Patricia Encisco, Ohio State University, USA and Christine Jenkins, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA This multidisciplinary Handbook is the first attempt to pull together in one volume the research on children’s and young adult literature which is currently scattered across three intersecting disciplines: education, English, and library and information science. The book’s organization reflects the special interests of each of these disciplines. Section one focuses on readers, the province of education; section two on the analysis of text, the province of English and literature; and section three looks at the social contexts surrounding and influencing the intersections of readers and texts. Selected Contents: Section 1: The Reader Defining Children and Youth as Readers 1. Children as Readers in Society 2. Imagining Children and Reading at Home 3. Immigrant Youth Reading in Schools and Communities 4. Interpreting Literature and Identities in an After-School Program Supporting GLBT Youth 5. International Communities Building Places for Youth Reading 6. Public Libraries and the Transformation of Readers and Reading 7. School Libraries and the Transformation of Readers and Reading 8. Reading Literature in Elementary Classrooms 9. Reading Literature in Secondary School Classrooms 10. Imagining a Writer’s Life: Extending the Connection Between Readers and Books 11. A book becomes a home: Becoming a reader across a lifetime Section 2: The Book 12. History of Children’s and Young Adult Literature 13. Through the Looking Glass: Critical Lenses for Analyzing Books for the Young 14. Novelties within the Novel 15. Culture and Narrative Variety 16. Folklore and its Discontents 17. On the Trail of the Fairy Tale 18. Understanding New Paradigms for Adolescent Identity through Young Adult Literature 19. The Art of the Picture Book 20. The Voices of Children’s Poetry 21. Nonfiction: Going After the Facts. 22. Comics and Graphic Novels 23. Intending Authors and Producing Authorship 24. Ideology and Children’s Books Section 3: The World Around 25. The Business of Books for the Young 26. Spinning Off: Toys, Television, and Tinsel Town 27. Censorship: Taking Books Out of the Hands of Young Readers 28. Awards: Valuing and Distinguishing Books for Young Readers 29. Journals: Studying, Evaluating, and Promoting Books for Young Readers 30. Electronic Resources Devoted to Children’s and Young Adult Literature 31. Museums Devoted to Children’s and Young Adult Literature 32. Archives and Special Collections Devoted to Children’s and Young Adult Literature 33. Community-based Events Devoted to Children’s and Young Adult Literature December 2009: : 640pp Hb: 978-0-415-96505-7: £130.00

US $195.00

US $170.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

EDUCATION

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Mathematics Education Edited by Alan Bishop, Monash University, Australia Series: Major Themes in Education Mathematics education is one of the most publicized and contested fields of endeavour in the area of education more generally. The entrails of international comparative mathematics achievement surveys are pored over by the media, politicians and educators alike; and, while for the last fifty years at least it has been assumed by most everyone in modern societies that mathematics should be a compulsory subject in all schools, parents and scholars alike argue furiously about whether traditional teaching and rote practising of mathematical skills is better or worse for pupils than conceptual teaching based on children’s own constructed ideas. University mathematics professors tend either to deplore the dropping of standards in their students, and thus the dropping of standards in teachers, or heartily embrace the new learning techniques made possible through careful use of the new technologies. With comprehensive introductions to each volume, newly written by the editor, which place the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, this Routledge Major Work is an essential work of reference. Selected Contents: Volume I: Mathematics, Mathematics Education, and the Curriculum Part 1: Mathematics and Mathematics Education (a) Histories of Mathematics (b) Conceptions of Mathematics from an Educational Standpoint (c) Culture, Mathematics, and Mathematics Education (d) Society, Technology, and Mathematics Education Part 2: Education and the Mathematics Curriculum (e) Goals of Mathematics Education (f) Mathematics Curricula in Schools (g) Mathematics Curricula at Tertiary and Vocational Levels (h) Assessment, Evaluation, and the Mathematics Curriculum Volume II: Mathematics Teachers and Teaching Part 1: Mathematics Teachers (a) Mathematics Teachers’ Knowledge (b) Mathematics Teachers’ Beliefs, Attitudes, and Values (c) Pre-Service Mathematics Teacher Education (d) Mathematics Teachers’ Professional Development Part 2: Teaching Mathematics (e) Issues in Teaching Mathematical Topics (f) Pedagogical Theories and Practices (g) Classroom Cultures and Interactions (h) Teaching and Assessing (i) Teachers as Researchers Volume III: Mathematics Learners and Learning Part 1: Mathematics Learners (a) School Learners (b) Adult Learners (c) Disadvantaged and Marginalized Learners (d) Gifted Learners (e) Gender Issues (f) Cultural Issues Part 2: Learning Mathematics (g) Issues in Learning Mathematical Topics (h) Theories of Learning Mathematics (i) Language, Visualization, and Mathematics Learning (j) Beliefs and Affective Aspects of Learning Mathematics Volume IV: The Contexts of Mathematics Education Part 1: Societal and Cultural Contexts (a) Parental and Community Aspects (b) Numeracies and Mathematics Education (c) Technologies and Mathematics Education (d) International Comparisons of Mathematics Achievement Part 2: Research and Theoretical Contexts (e) Developments in Research Approaches (f) Histories of Mathematics Education (g) Philosophies of Mathematics Education (h) Theories in Mathematics Education (i) International Cooperation in Mathematics Education Research (j) Globalization, Post-Colonialism, and Critical Perspectives

NEW

FORTHCOMING

The Cambridge Primary Review Research Surveys

The Routledge International Handbook of the Sociology of Education

Edited by Robin Alexander, Christine Doddington, John Gray, Linda Hargreaves, and Ruth Kershner, all at University of Cambridge, UK The Cambridge Primary Review Research Surveys is the companion volume to Children, their World, their Education. It contains, re-edited and updated, the twenty-eight surveys of published research which were specially commissioned for the Cambridge Primary Review from seventy academics in twenty-one universities in four countries. It is probably the most comprehensive survey of research in primary education yet undertaken. Alongside the careful assessment of the significance and implications of over 3,000 published sources, The Cambridge Primary Review Research Surveys makes extensive use of international and comparative evidence. Selected Contents: Part 1: Children’s Lives and Voices: School, Home and Community Part 2: Children’s Development, Learning, Diversity and Needs Part 3: Aims, Values and Contexts for Primary Education Part 4: The Structure and Content of Primary Education Part 5: Outcomes, Standards and Assessment in Primary Education Part 6: Teaching in Primary Schools: Structures and Processes Part 7: Teaching in Primary Schools: Training, Development and Workforce Reform Part 8: Policy Frameworks: Governance, Funding, Reform and Quality Assurance September 2009: 246x174: 750pp Hb: 978-0-415-54869-4: £250.00

Edited by Michael W. Apple, University of Wisconsin, USA, Stephen J. Ball, Institute of Education, University of London, UK, and Luis Armando Gandin, Federal University of Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil This collection brings together many of the world’s leading sociologists of education to explore and address key issues and concerns within the discipline. The chapters draw upon theory and research to provide new accounts of contemporary educational processes, global trends, and changing and enduring forms of social conflict and social inequality. The Routledge International Handbook of the Sociology of Education examines the ways in which the sociology of education has responded to these two political agendas, addressing a range of issues which cover three key areas: • perspectives and theories • social processes and practices • inequalities and resistances. The book strongly communicates the vibrancy and diversity of the sociology of education and the nature of ‘sociological work’ in this field. It will be a primary resource for teachers, as well as a title of major interest to practising sociologists of education.

US $350.00

December 2009: 246x174: 472pp Hb: 978-0-415-48663-7: £110.00

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Latinos and Education Theory, Research, and Practice Edited by Enrique G. Murillo Jr., California State University, San Bernadino, USA, Sofia A. Villenas, Ruth Trinidad Galván, Juan Sánchez Muñoz, Corinne Martínez and Margarita Machado-Casas Providing a comprehensive review of rigorous, innovative, and critical scholarship relevant to educational issues which impact Latinos, this Handbook captures the field at this point in time. Its unique purpose and function is to profile the scope and terrain of academic inquiry on Latinos and education. Presenting the most significant and potentially influential work in the field in terms of its contributions to research, to professional practice, and to the emergence of related interdisciplinary studies and theory, the volume is organized around five themes: • history, theory, and methodology • policies and politics • language and culture • teaching and learning • resources and information. November 2009: 768pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5839-6: £165.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86607-8

US $265.00

December 2009: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-43874-2: £650.00 • Special Pre-pub Pric £575.00

For more information about our eBooks in Education, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

US $1,295.00

US $170.00

eBook

US $1,150.00

(Valid until 3 months after publication)

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

EDUCATION

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Research on Reading Disabilities

Handbook of School-Family Partnerships

Edited by Richard Allington and Anne McGill-Franzen

Edited by Sandra L. Christenson, University of Minnesota, USA and Amy L. Reschly, University of Georgia, USA

This comprehensive Handbook is the first attempt to present the full range of overlapping paradigms and perspectives (sociological, historical, cultural, psychological, and linguistic) whose research informs the world of reading disability. It explores the relation of reading disabilities to language and learning, poverty and prejudice, and instruction and schooling. In addition to examining theoretical perspectives (and associated research), the contributors present their material within the framework of a classroom teacher struggling to develop instructional practices that meet the learning needs of their lowest achieving readers. Throughout the book, learning to read proficiently is conceptualized as a long-term developmental process involving many interventions of various kinds – all keyed to individual developmental needs. Selected Contents: Section 1: Pespectives on Reading Disability 1. Political Contexts of Reading Disability 2. Historical Contexts for Understanding Reading Disabilities 3. Poverty and Reading Disabilities 4. Ethnicity and Reading Disabilities 5. Home Language and Reading Disabilities 6. Cognitive Profiles and Reading Disabilities 7. Biological Characteristics and Reading Disabilities 8. Neurosciences and Reading Disabilities 9. Language Development and Reading Disabilities 10. Socio-cultural Aspects of Reading Disabilities 11. Critical Theory and Reading Disabilities 12. Opportunity to Learn and Reading Disabilities Section 2: Causes and Consequences of Reading Disabilities 13. Individual Differences and Reading Disabilities 14. Home Differences and Reading Disabilities 15. Summer Setback and Reading Disabilities 16. Persistence of Reading Disabilities 17. Gender and Reading Disabilities 18. Drug Exposure and Reading Disabilities 19. Aliteracy, Agency, and Identity Section 3: Assessing Reading Proficiency 20. Beliefs and Reading Assessment 21.Assessments for Different Goals 22. Reading Ability as Developing Expertise 23. Traditions of Reading Diagnosis 24. Assessing Reading Disabilities in ELL Student 25. Culturally Relevant Assessment of Reading Disabilities Section 4: Developmental Patterns of Reading Proficiency and Difficulties 26. Emergent Literacy 27. Word Recognition and Fluency 28. Vocabulary 29. Self-regulation 30. Comprehension 31. Writing 32. Discussion 33. Motivation Section Five: Developmental Interventions 34. Expert Classroom Instruction 35. Extended Learning Beyond the Classroom 36. Interventions to Develop the Phonological Systems 37. Interventions to Develop Decoding Proficiencies 38. Interventions to Enhance Fluency and Rate of Reading 39. Interventions to Enhance Vocabulary Development 40. Interventions to Enhance Narrative Comprehension 41. Interventions to Enhance Informational Text Comprehension 42. Interventions to Develop e-text Learning Section 6: Studying Reading Disabilities 43. Teacher Research 44. Single-subject and Case Study Designs 45. Experimental Research 46. Observational Research 47. Interpretive Research 48. Large Database Analyses 49. Survey 50. Metaanalysis November 2009: 234x156 Hb: 978-0-8058-5333-9: £130.00

ORDER NOW!

US $250.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

eBook

Family-school partnerships are increasingly touted as a means of improving both student and school improvement. This recognition has led to an increase in policies and initiatives that offer the following benefits: 1) improved communication between parents and educators 2) home and school goals that are mutually supportive and shared 3) better understanding of the complexities impinging on children’s development and 4) pooling of family and school resources to find and implement solutions to shared goals. This will be the first comprehensive review of what is known about the effects of home-school partnerships on student and school achievement. It provides a brief history of home-school partnerships, presents evidence-based practices for working with families across developmental stages, and provides an agenda for future research and policy. Key Features include: • provides comprehensive, cross-disciplinary coverage of theoretical issues and research concerning family-school partnerships • describes those aspects of school-family partnerships that have been adequately researched and promotes their implementation as evidencebased interventions • charts cutting-edge research agendas & methods for exploring school-family partnerships • charts the implications such research has for training, policy and practice especially regarding educational disparities.

FORTHCOMING

eBook

Handbook of Research on Schools, Schooling and Human Development Edited by Judith Meece, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, USA and Jacquelynne Eccles, University of Michigan, USA Children spend more time in school than in any social institution outside the home. And schools probably exert more influence on children’s development and life chances than any environment beyond the home and neighborhood. In spite of this, there has never been a comprehensive Handbook that attempted to assemble the widely dispersed body of research on the developmental effects of schools and schooling. That is the mission of this book. Topical coverage ranges from historical/theoretical foundations to investigative methodologies and from classroom-level influences such as teacher-student relations to broad, impersonal influences such as school and societal organizational patterns and educational policy. By bringing together critical findings from this looselycoupled, cross-disciplinary field of study, this thirtyone-chapter book provides a much-needed centerpiece around which the field can continue to grow in an organized and interdisciplinary manner. March 2010: 276x219: 658pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5948-5: £170.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87484-4

US $250.00

Handbook of Prevention Science

eBook

Edited by Beth Doll, University of Nebraska at Lincoln, USA, William Pfohl and Jina Yoon

Handbook of Formative Assessment

The Handbook of Youth Prevention Science describes current research and practice in mental health preventive interventions for youth. Traditional prevention research focused on preventing specific disorders, e.g., substance abuse, conduct disorders, or criminality. This produced “silos” of isolated knowledge about the prevention of individual disorders without acknowledging the overlapping goals, strategies, and impacts of prevention programs. This Handbook reflects current research and practice by organizing prevention science around comprehensive systems that reach across all disorders and all institutions within a community. Throughout the book preventive interventions are seen as complementary components of effective mental health programs, not as replacements for therapeutic interventions.

Edited by Heidi Andrade, University at Albany, SUNY, USA and Gregory J. Cizek, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, USA

February 2010: 234x156 Hb: 978-0-8058-6331-4: £130.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86641-2

This book is appropriate for researchers, instructors, and graduate students in the following areas: school counseling, school psychology, educational psychology, school leadership, special education, and school social work. It is also appropriate for the academic libraries serving these audiences. October 2009: 246x174: 552pp Hb: 978-0-415-96375-6: £200.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87604-6

US $295.00

FORTHCOMING

eBook

US $195.00

The Handbook of Formative Assessment comprehensively profiles this burgeoning field of study. Written by leading international scholars and practitioners, each chapter discusses key issues in formative assessment policy and practice. October 2009: 246x174: 408pp Hb: 978-0-415-99319-7: £150.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87485-1

+44 (0)1235 400524

US $225.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

EDUCATION

NEW

eBook

NEW

Handbook of Motivation at School

6-VOLUME SET

Edited by Kathryn Wentzel and Allan Wigfield, both at University of Maryland – College Park, USA

Edited by Patricia Hedge, University of Warwick, UK, Nick Andon and Martin Dewey, both at Kings College, University of London, UK

The Handbook on Motivation at School presents the first comprehensive and integrated compilation of theory and research on children’s motivation at school. It covers the major theoretical perspectives in the field as well as their application to instruction, learning, and social adjustment at school. Section 1. surveys the major theoretical perspectives addressing children’s motivation at school, its antecedents, and its development.

English Language Teaching

Series: Major Themes in Education With contributions drawn from a variety of contexts, this extensive new six-volume collection from Routledge’s Major Themes in Education series, reflects the international diversity of English Language Teaching in practice. Bringing together material from a broad range of perspectives, it highlights the controversial nature of many apparent ‘givens’ in the field, and provides a useful balance between academic and practical insights.

NEW

eBook

Handbook of Metacognition in Education Edited by Douglas J. Hacker, University of Utah, USA, John Dunlosky, Kent State University, USA and Arthur C. Graesser, University of Memphis, USA Providing comprehensive coverage of the theoretical bases of metacognition and its applications to educational practice, this compendium of focused and in-depth discussions from leading scholars in the field: • represents an intersection of education, cognitive science, and technology

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Section 1: Theories 2. An Attributional Approach to Motivation in School 3. Self-efficacy theory 4. Expectancy – Value theory 5. Achievement Goal Theory: The Past, Present, and Future 6. Goal-Directed Behavior In The Classroom 7. Self-Theories and Motivation: Students’ Beliefs About Intelligence 8. SelfWorth Theory: Retrospection And Prospects 9. Promoting Self-Determined School Engagement: Motivation, Learning, and Well-Being 10. Situational and Individual Interest 11. Engagement and Disaffection as Organizational Constructs in the Dynamics of Motivational Development 12. Motives to Self-Regulate Learning: A Social Cognitive Account 13. Commentatary: Building on a Strong Foundation: Five Pathways to the Next Level of Motivational Theorizing Section 2: Contextual and Social Influences on Motivation 14. Parenting and Children’s Motivation at School 15. Students’ Relationships with Teachers as Motivational Contexts 16. Peers and Motivation 17. Teacher Expectations and Self-Fulfilling Prophecies 18. School as a Context of Student Motivation and Achievement 19. Gender and Motivation 20. Achievement Motivation in Racial and Ethnic Context 21. Commentary: The Role of Environment in Contextual and Social Influences on Motivation: Generalities, Specificities, and Causality Section 3: Teaching, Learning, and Motivation 22. Beliefs About Learning In Academic Domains 23. Reading Motivation 24. Understanding Motivation in Mathematics: What is Happening in Classrooms? 25. Motivation and Achievement in Physical Education 26. Emotions at School 27. Motivation and Learning Disabilities: Past, Present and Future 28. Teachers’ Self-Efficacy Beliefs 29. Commentary: What Can We Learn from A Synthesis of Research on Teaching, Learning, and Motivation?

Series: Studies in Curriculum Theory Series

NEW

’Through an incredibly eclectic mix of junior and established scholars, this volume represents a uniquely current and diverse presentation of curriculum studies inquiry. The focus on emergent/junior scholars anticipates evolving lines of inquiry in the field, and brings those inquiries into direct dialogue with experts in the field/s. In this sense, this volume is current, progressive, and in some sense revolutionary.’ – Michael P. O’Malley, Texas State University at San Marcos, USA

Handbook of Research on the Education of School Leaders

August 2009: 246x174: 704pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6284-3: £160.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87949-8

July 2009: 234x156: 584pp Hb: 978-0-415-98948-0: £170.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87779-1

US $295.00

With a general introduction and separate section introductions presenting the historical context for current debates and guiding users through the various issues raised in the collection, this is a highly useful resource for both student and scholar alike. Selected Contents: Part 1: Focus On Key Orientations In Elt Part 2: Focus On The Learner Part 3: Focus On Methodology Part 4: Focus On Curriculum Part 5: Focus On The Teacher July 2009: 234x156: 2,576pp Hb: 978-0-415-29943-5: £975.00

US $1,950.00

NEW

eBook

Curriculum Studies Handbook – The Next Moment

The Handbook of Metacognition in Education — covering Comprehension Strategies, Metacognitive Strategies, Metacomprehension, Writing, Science and Mathematics, Individual Differences, SelfRegulated Learning, Technology, Tutoring, and Measurement — is an essential resource for researchers, faculty, students, curriculum developers, teachers, and others interested in using research and theory on metacognition to guide and inform educational practice. US $250.00

Edited by Erik Malewski, Purdue University, USA

US $250.00

NEW

Handbook of Reading Research, Volume 4

The Handbook of Practice and Research in Study Abroad

Edited by Michael L. Kamil, Stanford University, USA, P. David Pearson, Elizabeth Birr Moje, Peter Afflerbach and Peter B. Mosenthal

Higher Education and the Quest for Global Citizenship

August 2009: 234x156: 1,040pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5342-1: £170.00

• sets the standard for scholarship for theoretical research and practical applications in this field.

June 2009: 234x156: 464pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6353-6: £170.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87642-8

NEW

The Handbook of Reading Research is the research Handbook for the field. Each volume has come to define the field for the period of time it covers. Volume 4 follows in this tradition. The editors extensively reviewed the reading research literature since the publication of Volume 3 in 2000, as portrayed in a wide array of research and practitioner-based journals and books, to identify the themes and topics covered. Volume 4 brings the field authoritatively and comprehensively up-to-date.

• serves as a gateway to the literature for researchers and practitioners interested in one or more of the wide array of topics included

eBook

Edited by Ross Lewin, University of Connecticut, USA Co-published with the Association for American Colleges and Universities (AAC&U) The Handbook of Practice and Research in Study Abroad is a comprehensive survey of the field. Each chapter eloquently conveys an enthusiasm for study abroad alongside a critical assessment of the most up-to-date research, theory and practice. May 2009: 234x156: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-99160-5: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87664-0

eBook

Edited by Michelle D. Young, University of Texas at Austin, USA, Gary M. Crow, Indiana University, USA, Joseph Murphy, Vanderbilt University, USA and Rodney T. Ogawa, University of California Santa Cruz, USA Sponsored by the University Council of Educational Administration, this comprehensive Handbook will be the definitive work on leadership education in the United States. An in-depth portrait of what constitutes research on leadership development, this handbook provides a plan for strengthening the research-based education of school leaders in order to impact leadership’s influence on student engagement and learning. Although research-oriented, the content is written in a style that makes it appropriate for any of the following audiences: university professors and researchers, professional development providers, practicing administrators, and policy makers who work in the accreditation and licensure arenas. July 2009: 234x156: 584pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6157-0: £120.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87886-6

US $155.00

US $260.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $295.00

EDUCATION

Handbook of Research on School Choice

eBook

Edited by Mark Berends, Mathew G. Springer, Dale Ballou, all at Vanderbilt University, USA and Herbert J. Walberg, University of Illinois, Chicago, USA Since the early 1990s when America’s first charter school was opened in Minneapolis, the scope and availability of school-based options to parents has steadily expanded. No longer can public education be characterized as a monopoly. Sponsored by the National Center on School Choice (NCSC), this handbook makes readily available the most rigorous and policy-relevant research on K-12 school choice. Coverage includes charters, vouchers, home schooling, magnet schools, cyber schools, and other forms of choice, with the ultimate goal of defining the current state of this evolving field of research, policy, and practice. This book is suitable for researchers, faculty and graduate students in education policy studies, politics of education, and social foundations of education. It should also be of interest to inservice administrators and policy makers. April 2009: 234x156: 648pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6223-2: £200.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88178-1

US $295.00

The Routledge International Handbook of Higher Education

eBook

Edited by Malcolm Tight, University of Lancaster, UK, Ka Ho Mok, The University of Hong Kong, Jeroen Huisman, University of Bath, UK and Christopher Morphew, University of Georgia, USA This volume is a detailed and up-to-date reference work providing an authoritative overview of the main issues in higher education around the world today. Consisting of newly commissioned chapters and impressive journal articles, it surveys the state of the discipline and includes the examination and discussion of emerging, controversial and cutting edge areas. April 2009: 234x156: 544pp Hb: 978-0-415-43264-1: £110.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88222-1

US $170.00

Handbook of Education Policy Research

eBook

Edited by Gary Sykes, Barbara Schneider, both at Michigan State University, USA and David N. Plank, University of California, Berkeley, USA Educational policy continues to be of major concern. Defining the theoretical boundaries and methodological approaches of education policy research are the two primary themes of this comprehensive, AERA-sponsored Handbook. April 2009: 276x219: 1,064pp Hb: 978-0-415-98991-6: £200.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88096-8

ORDER NOW!

4-VOLUME SET

Gifted and Talented Education MW Edited by Deborah Eyre, University of Warwick, UK Series: Major Themes in Education The education of gifted and talented pupils is an established domain of study but research in the area has increased dramatically, particularly in the past fifteen years. The reason for this burgeoning interest relates principally not to conventional educational concerns but rather to the desire of governments around the world to maximize intellectual capital better to compete in a globalized economy. Nurturing those with exceptional ability is now seen as a societal necessity rather than simply an educational objective. A secondary aspect of this societal interest relates to equity; gifted and talented programmes are at the forefront of national and international educational policy and they are increasingly being adopted in the pursuit of meritocracy as a mechanism to improve life chances and to stimulate social mobility.

The Routledge Companion to Dyslexia Edited by Gavin Reid, Moray House School of Education, University of Edinburgh, UK, Gad Elbeheri, Ministry of Education Kuwait Dyslexia Association, John Everatt, University of Canterbury, New Zealand, Deborah Knight, Rollins Centre for Language & Learning, Atlanta Speech School, USA and Janice Wearmouth, University of Wellington, Education, New Zealand A ground-breaking study of the whole field of dyslexia by a distinguished international team of contributors, this is a superb resource for those coming to the subject for the first time as well as students and practitioners already familiar with it.

Selected Contents: Volume I: Section 1: Rationale and Purposes of Gifted Education 1.1. The Case for Gifted Education 1.2. Gifted Education as a Feature of General School Systems 1.3. Giftedness in the Long Term Section 2: Socio-Cultural Perspectives 2.1. Cultural and Equity Issues in Specific Countries 2.2. Landmark Developments in Gifted Education Volume II: 2.3. Gifted Children or Gifted Education? Section 3: Definitions and Identification 3.1. Early Pioneers in the Study of Giftedness 3.2. Definitions: Seminal Papers on the Definition of Intelligence and Ability 3.3. Identification Dilemmas, Identification Methods, the Significance of Labels Volume III: Section 4: Curriculum and Classrooms 4.1. Curriculum Models 4.2. Teaching and Learning 4.3. Teachers and their Practice Section 5: School-wide and Non-school Provision 5.1. Structural Models Volume IV: 5.2. Programmes Specifically for the Gifted 5.3. New Technologies and Distance Learning Section 6: Personal Development 6.1. Social and Emotional Development 6.2. Gender and Background 6.3. Underachievement 6.4. Multiple Exceptionality

Selected Contents: Part 1: Research – Current and Future Developments 1. Dyslexia – An Overview of Recent Research 2. Dyslexia and IQ: From Research to Practice 3. Dyslexia and Cognitive Skills 4. Dyslexia and Glue Ear Syndrome 5. Visual Stress and Dyslexia Part 2: Dimensions of Dyslexia 6. The Role of Early Identification – Models from Practice 7. The Role of Early Identification – Models from Research and Practice 8. Identification and Assessment of Dyslexia and Planning for Learning 9. Extending Literacy Skills – Issues for Practice 10. Spelling: Development, Assessment and Instruction 11. Dyscalculia and Learning Difficulties in Mathematics 12. Phonological Awareness in Reading Disabilities Remediation: Some General Issues 13. Alternative and Innovative Interventions for Dyslexia – A Critical Commentary Part 3: Identifying and Meeting Needs in an Inclusive Context: Inclusion and the Barriers to Learning 14. How Compatible is the Recognition of Dyslexia with Inclusive Education? 15. Identifying and Overcoming the Barriers to Learning in an Inclusive Context 16. Dyslexia in the Secondary School: Improving Whole School Achievement Through Dyslexia Aware Best Practice 17. School-wide Professional Development to Raise Students’ Literacy Levels at Clyde Quay School, Wellington, New Zealand 18. Dyslexia: Overcoming the Barriers of Transition 19. Overcoming the Barriers to Literacy: An Integrated, Contextual Workshop Approach 20. The Implications of Students’ Perspectives on Dyslexia for School Improvement Part 4: Identifying and Meeting Needs in Further, Higher Education and the Workplace 21. The Development of Protocols for Assessment and Intervention at University for Students with Dyslexia 22. Reading Comprehension Solutions for College Students with Dyslexia in an Era of Technology: An Integrated Approach 23. Dyslexia: Meeting the Needs of Employers and Employees in the Workplace Part 5: Diversity, Culture and Language 24. Dyslexia and Foreign Language Learning 25. Reading and Dyslexia in Arabic 26. Reading and Reading Disabilities in Spanish and Spanish-English Contexts 27. Responsive Approaches to Literacy Learning Within Cultural Contexts

March 2009: 234x156: 2,225pp Hb: 978-0-415-46598-4: £650.00

March 2009: 246x174: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-43078-4: £85.00

As serious thinking about and around the education of the gifted and talented continues to flourish, this new title in the Routledge series, Major Themes in Education, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to codify and make sense of the field’s literature. Gifted and Talented Education is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is an essential library purchase and is destined to be valued by scholars and students—as well as by educational policy-makers—as a vital reference work and research tool.

US $1,295.00

US $140.00

US $295.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

EDUCATION

Handbook of Positive Psychology in Schools

eBook

Edited by Rich Gilman, Cincinnati Children’s Hospital Medical Center, University of Cincinnati, USA, E. Scott Huebner, University of South Carolina, USA and Michael J. Furlong, University of California - Santa Barbara, USA National surveys consistently reveal that an inordinate number of students report high levels of boredom, anger, and stress in school, which often leads to their disengagement from critical learning and social development. If the ultimate goal of schools is to educate young people to become responsible and critically thinking citizens who can succeed in life, understanding factors that stimulate them to become active agents in their own leaning is critical. A new field labeled ’positive psychology’ is one lens that can be used to investigate factors that facilitate a student’s sense of agency and active school engagement. Selected Contents: Section 1: Conceptual Foundations 1. A Conceptual Model for Research in Positive Psychology in Children and Youth 2. The Nature and Importance of Positive Mental Health in America’s Adolescents Section 2: Internal Assets and Positive Student Development 3. Life Satisfaction 4. Measuring and Promoting Hope in Schoolchildren 5. Optimism and the School Context 6. Strengths of Characters in Schools 7. Gratitude in School: Benefits to Students and Schools 8. Positive Self-Concepts 9. Emotion Regulation: Implications for Positive Youth Development 10. Empathy, Prosocial Behavior, and Positive Development in Schools 11. Flow in Schools: Cultivating Engaged Learners and Optimal Learning Environments Section 3: Contextual Resources and Positive Student Development 12. Toward a Positive Psychology of Academic Motivation: The Role of Self-Efficacy Beliefs 13. Oriented Towards Mastery: Promoting Positive Motivational Goals for Students 14. Creativity in the Schools: A Rapidly Developing Area of Positive Psychology 15. School Satisfaction and Children’s Positive School Adjustment 16. Student Engagement and Positive School Adaptation 17. The ClassMaps Survey: A Framework for Promoting Positive Classroom Environments 18. Peer Relationships and Positive Adjustment at School 19. Parent-Child Relationships 20. Parents as Essential Partners for Fostering Students’ Learning Outcomes 21. Secrets of Their Success: Activity Participation and Positive Youth Development Section 4: School-Based Applications for Positive Student Development 22. Positive Psychology and School-Based Interventions 23. The Positive in Positive Models of Discipline 24. Positive Psychology and the Prevention of School-Based Victimization 25. Promoting Positive Adaptation During the Early Childhood Years 26. Listening to Students: Moving from Resilience Research to Youth Development Practice and School Connectedness 27. Positive Psychology and Students with Intellectual Disabilities 28. Positive Psychology and School/Community-based Youth Participatory Photography Programs 29. Child and Adolescent Health Risk Behaviors: Prevalence and Comprehensive Prevention and Intervention Strategies 30. Wholistic Wellness and Exercise among Adolescents 31. Nutrition: The Foundation of Health, Happiness, and Academic Success 32. A Positive Psychology Approach to Developing Talent and Preventing Talent Loss in the Arts and Sciences 33. Positive Psychology, Culture, and Schools: Conceptual and Empirical Challenges 34. Positive Psychology for Educators 35. The Law’s Place in Fostering Positive Youth Development in Schools February 2009: 234x156: 520pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6361-1: £150.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88408-9

GEOGRAPHY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

39-VOLUME SET

RLE

History of Education Various

Routledge’s pre-eminent position at the forefront of academic education publishing is represented by this essential collection. The History of Education reprints texts carefully selected on the basis of their influence and prestige, written by the finest historians of education. Together they provide unparalelled international coverage of the development of education from medieval times to the present day, themes covered include: • the development of national curriculums • the evolution of primary and secondary schooling • the move towards comprehensive schooling • the history of schooling for disabled learners. For further information on this collection please email reference@routledge.com. Selected Contents: Volume 1: Education in Renaissance England Volume 2: Education for Leadership Volume 3: The Playgroup Movement Volume 4: Growth in English Education Volume 5: The Changing Sixth Form in the Twentieth Century Volume 6: The Comprehensive School 1944-1970 Volume 7: Education in the Second World War Volume 8: A History of the Working Men’s College Volume 9: Learning & Living 1790-1960 Volume 10: The Changing Curriculum Volume 11: Education & The Professions Volume 12: The History of Education in Europe Volume 13: History, Sociology and Education Volume 14: Local Studies and the History of Education Volume 15: Educational Policy and the Mission Schools Volume 16: Indicative Past Volume 17: Mediaeval Education and the Reformation Volume 18: A Social History of Eduction in England Volume 19: The Schools of Medieval England Volume 20: A Nineteenth Century Teacher Volume 21: Popular Education and Socialization in the Nineteenth Century Volume 22: Landmarks in the History of Physical Education Volume 23: Objectives & Perspectives in Education Volume 24: Education Since 1800 Volume 25: Church, State and Schools Volume 26: Society and Education in Engalnd since 1800 Volume 27: Edward Thring Volume 28. Abbotsholme Volume 29: Offspring of the Vic Volume 30: Education in Britian Since 1944 Volume 31: The Evolution of the Comprehensive School Volume 32: J. A. Comenius and the Concept of Universal Education Volume 33: English Primary Education & The Progressives, 1914-1939 Volume 34: The Teaching of English in Schools Volume 35: The Concept of Popular Education Volume 36: Education as History Volume 37: The Education of the Poor Volume 38: The Education of the People Volume 39: The Evolution of the Nursery-Infant School US $7,050.00

4-VOLUME SET

Event Tourism

Series: Routledge Library Editions

2007: 234x156: 10,608pp Hb: 978-0-415-41978-9: £3,525.00

NEW

Edited by Stephen J. Page and Joanne Connell, both at University of Stirling, UK Series: Critical Concepts in Tourism Edited by two leading scholars in the field, this is the first title in a new Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Tourism. It is a four-volume collection of canonical and cutting-edge research in event tourism. The origins of event tourism as a topic of serious academic interest are comparatively recent. The subject is largely a postwar development which began especially to unfold in the 1970s, not least in response to a growing interest and recognition of the potential value of events to economies, societies, and their cultures, as well as to environmental regeneration. In part, the continued evolution of the subject has arisen from the development of convention and exhibition management as cognate areas but, through time, policy-makers, planners, and destination managers became aware of the potentially significant and wide role of events in specific localities, ranging in scale from the Olympic Games to community festivals. Event tourism is now a vibrant and dynamic field of study and research, and the sheer scale of the growth in its output makes this Routledge collection especially timely. A wide range of social-science journals have published material about event tourism and this new Major Work makes available foundational pieces of scholarship—as well as cutting-edge research—from these disparate, and sometimes less accessible sources, as well as from the leading UK, European, and North American tourism journals, and from other hard-to-find publications. As well as bringing together the key studies and journal articles that have shaped serious thought about event tourism, the collection will be welcomed as the first mapping of an area that to date has lacked an interdisciplinary synthesis. The thematic organization of the collection, together with the editors’ introductions and their commentaries on the collected texts, will make sense of the wide range of approaches, theories, and concepts that have informed event tourism, and will review the history of the subject and the rise of its identity and research agenda. It is an essential collection destined to be valued as a vital research resource by all scholars and students of the subject. Selected Contents: Volume I: The Evolution of Event Tourism: Concepts and Approaches Part 1: Defining Event Tourism Part 2: Historical Studies on Event Tourism Part 3: Approaches to Understanding Event Tourism Volume II: Effects, Role, and Significance Part 4: Social and Cultural Perspectives Part 5: Political and Economic Perspectives Volume III: Event Tourism Destinations: Case Studies and Best Practice Part 6: Private Events Part 7: Cultural Events Part 8: Urban destinations Part 9: National Events Part 10: Sporting Events Volume IV: Managing Event Operations Part 11: Event Audiences Part 12: Stage and Visitor Management Part 13: Planning and Managing Events Part 14: Evaluating Events

US $225.00

October 2009: 234x156: 1,610pp Hb: 978-0-415-47517-4: £650.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $1,295.00

GEOGRAPHY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Urban Ecology

Handbook of Local and Regional Development

Edited by Ian Douglas, University of Manchester, UK, David Goode, University College London, UK, Mike Houck, Portland State University, USA and Rusong Wang, Chinese Academy of Sciences, China The birds, animals, insects, trees and plants encountered by the majority of the world’s people are those that survive in, adapt to, or are introduced to, urban areas. Some of these organisms give great pleasure; others invade, colonise and occupy neglected and hidden areas such as derelict land and sewers. Urban ecology analyses this biodiversity and complexity and provides the science to guide policy and management to make cities more attractive, more enjoyable, and better for our own health and that of the planet. This book provides a state-of the art guide to the science, practice and value of urban ecology to help everyone understand and enjoy their urban habitat. Original contributions from leading academics and practitioners from across the world provide an indepth coverage of the main elements of practical urban ecology. The sixty-five chapters provide practitioners and students with the wealth of interdisciplinary information needed to manage the biota and green landscapes in urban areas. In six parts it deals with the philosophies, concepts and history of urban ecology; followed by consideration of the biophysical character of the urban environment and the diverse habitats found within it. It then examines human relationships with urban nature, the health, economic and environmental benefits of urban ecology before discussing the methods used in urban ecology and ways of putting the science into practice. Urban areas have high biodiversity. Urban gardens and vegetable plots have multiple benefits, from helping to reduce greenhouse gases to providing insect and bird habitats. Encounters with nature in cities help to improve our physical and mental health. The ecosystem services provided by nature in cities include cooling the urban area, reducing urban flood risks, filtering pollutants, supplying some of our food, and giving opportunities for accessible recreation. Yet protecting urban nature faces competition from other urban land uses. May 2010: 246x189: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-49813-5: £128.00

ORDER NOW!

Companion Encyclopedia of Geography From the Local to the Global

Edited by Andy Pike and John Tomaney, both at University of Newcastle upon Tyne, UK July 2010: 246x189: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-54831-1: £98.00

Edited by Ian Douglas, Richard Huggett and Chris Perkins 2006: 246x174: 1,192pp Hb: 978-0-415-43169-9: £215.25

US $415.00

US $165.00

Companion Encyclopedia of Geography

NEW 5TH EDITION

The Environment Encyclopedia and Directory 2009 Examining environmental issues throughout the world, this reference title contains thorough definitions and explanations of terms relating to the environment. Features of this title include: • an updated A-Z section of key terms and issues surrounding the environment • a comprehensive directory section organized alphabetically by country, listing main governmental and non-governmental organizations, both national and international • a series of maps showing environmental features both regionally and world-wide • an extensive bibliography of relevant periodicals • a comprehensive who’s who section of the leading personalities actively involved with environmental affairs. September 2009: 279x211: 608pp Hb: 978-1-85743-377-7: £310.00

US $575.00

From the Local to the Global Edited by Ian Douglas, Richard Huggett and Chris Perkins 2006: 246x174: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-33977-3: £215.25

US $415.00

NEW 3-VOLUME SET

The History of the Study of Landforms For the Development of Geomorphology R. J. Chorley Series: Routledge Revivals This Routledge Revivals set makes available for the first time as a collection the first three volumes of The History of the Study of Landforms or the Development of Geomorphology, the groundbreaking and definitive study in geomorphology compiled by Richard J. Chorley, Robert P. Beckinsale and Antony J. Dunn. Volume 1 (1964) dealt with contributions to the field up to 1890. Volume 2 (1973) dealt with the concepts and seminal contributions of William Morris Davis and Volume 3 (1991) treats historical and regional themes during the 'classic' period of geomorphology, between 1890 and 1950.

US $230.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

GEOGRAPHY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

NEW

eBook

The History of the Study of Landforms: Volume 1 Geomorphology Before Davis

6-VOLUME SET

Edited by A. Dirk Moses, University of Sydney, Australia

Richard J. Chorley, Antony J. Dunn and Robert P. Beckinsale Series: Routledge Revivals This re-issue, first published in 1964, is the first of a seminal series analysing the development of the study of landforms, from both the geographical and geological point of view, with especial emphasis upon fluvial geomorphology. Volume 1 treats the subject up to the first important statement of the cycle of erosion by W. M. Davis in 1889, and attempts to identify the most significant currents of geomorphic thought, integrating them into the broader contemporary intellectual frameworks with which they were associated. As well as dealing with such key figures as Werner, De Saussure, Hutton, Playfair, Buckland, lyell, Agassiz, Ramsay, Dana, Peschel, Powell, Gilbert and Davis, attention is also given to many less important contributions by American, British and continental workers. A spirited biographical treatment, attractively set off by contemporary portraits, diagrams and sketches, will make this book of great interest to the historian of science, and indeed to the general reader, as well as to the student and scholar in geomorphology, hydrology and any other earth science. Selected Contents: Part 1: ’Worlds Without End’ Part 2: The Age of Lyell: 1820–1845 Part 3: Marine Versus Subaerial Erosionists: 1846–1875 Part 4: The Western Explorations July 2009: 234x156: 698pp Hb: 978-0-415-55278-3: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87137-9

FORTHCOMING

Genocide

For the Development of Geomorphology

eBook

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Islamic Medical and Scientific Tradition Edited by Peter Pormann, Warwick University, UK

Series: Critical Concepts in Historical Studies

Series: Critical Concepts in Islamic Studies

Stimulated anew in the 1990s by the slaughter and the so-called ‘ethnic cleansing’ in the former Yugoslavia, and by the horrors of Rwanda, research about and around genocide flourishes as never before. Genocide studies has now accrued a large, sophisticated, and growing, body of scholarly literature. This growth looks set to continue: historians and social scientists are increasingly casting their analytical nets further into the past to investigate whether group destruction and population expulsions have been constitutive of imperial and state expansion over millennia. And, moreover, events such as the Sudanese government’s genocidal counter-insurgency in Darfur suggest that, like war, genocide is a pervasive feature of human society that is here to stay.

Islam developed over the course of its history one of the most innovative and interesting scientific and medical traditions in the world. In this context, the term Islam should not simply be understood as referring to the religion of the prophet Muhammad, but rather to a civilisation which was surprisingly open to foreign influences, and eager to engage with the proverbial Other. Yet Islam is often perceived as being opposed to (Western) science and methodology.

The scholarship assembled in the final part of the collection (‘International Law and Humanitarian Intervention’) brings together vital research on antigenocide international law since 1948. It also focuses on the work of international criminal tribunals. Finally, Part 8 also explores the emergence of the controversial ‘duty to protect’ doctrine. Genocide is supplemented with a full index and other scholarly apparatus. It also includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. The collection is a landmark reference work and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research and pedagogic resource. October 2010: 234x156: 2,400pp Hb: 978-0-415-49375-8: £975.00

US $1,625.00

US $219.00

NEW

The History of the Study of Landforms: Volume 2 – The Life and Work of William Morris Davis

Islamic Medical and Scientific Tradition presents a selection of articles that illustrate the intellectual curiosity and theoretical vigour with which Arabs and non-Arabs living in the medieval Muslim world pursued scientific endeavours. The focus is firmly on articles published during the last twenty years, during which the discipline has enjoyed a new bloom, with a significant number having been published in the new millennium. Starting with the theoretical framework of the sciences in Islamic philosophy and theology, this new Major Work from Routledge elucidates the position of mathematics, physics, and medicine within the hierarchy of the sciences. Another topic discussed is Ancient (or Greek) versus traditional (or Muslim) sciences; and Islamic theological views on the pure pursuit of knowledge. The Life Sciences of Biology, Medicine, and Veterinary Medicine are examined, as are those of the Physical Sciences: Physics and Astronomy (this includes the nature of the universe, the building blocks of life, and the eternal movement of the spheres.) The Occult Sciences of Astrology, Alchemy, and Geomancy are also discussed. Close attention is paid to the Mathematical Sciences of Arithmetic, Algebra, Geometry, Optics (including the introduction of zero, the invention of algebra, the squaring of the circle, conics, and the nature of vision.) The Practical Sciences, Agriculture, Engineering, and Horticulture, are also examined in detail. Fully indexed, and with a comprehensive introduction newly-written by the editors, that places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, this is an essential work destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers as a vital one-stop reference resource.

For the Development of Geomorphology Richard J. Chorley, Antony J. Dunn and Robert P. Beckinsale

August 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47953-0: £650.00

Series: Routledge Revivals

US $1,295.00

This re-issued title, first published in 1973, forms the second volume of The History of the Study of Landforms. This volume is entirely devoted to the life and work of the world’s most famous geomorphologist, William Morris Davis (1850-1934). It contains a treatment in depth of Davis’ many contributions to the study of landforms including: • the cycle of erosion • denudation chronology • arid and karst geomorphology • the coral reef problem. July 2009: 234x156: 896pp Hb: 978-0-416-26890-4: £150.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87135-5

HISTORY

For more information about our eBooks in History, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

US $263.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

HISTORY

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

The Ottoman Empire and Its Aftermath The Emergence of the Modern Middle East and Balkans Edited by M. Sükrü Hanioglu, Princeton University, USA This four-volume study is a major compilation for students of Ottoman history and culture, particularly the late period where the political and social structures were not able to evolve in the face of intellectual and industrial expansion in the outside world. The ensuing, inevitable collapse led to the British and French mandates of the entire Middle East, as well as Balkanisation, and created the conditions for the gradual emergence of nationstates through the course of the twentieth century, as well as a host of wars and ethnic conflicts, some of which are still extant. It is the late period, roughly 1789–1922, which attracts the most students because of the interest in the external influences and the political aftermath. However, the collection also contains key background articles to set the historical scene and provide full context. An enhanced understanding of late Ottoman history is indispensable not only to comprehend modern Turkey or even the vast geographical area that was once ruled from Istanbul. It is also essential for the study of European and world history. The Ottoman experience may serve as a superb laboratory for examining the impact of modernity in non-European settings. Given the size of the subject matter and the need to have a good knowledge of numerous languages (in addition to the extinct Ottoman language, which changed considerably from one century to the next), a well-edited compilation of major articles will overshadow all general works on Ottoman history, Volume I focuses on Ottoman administration, bureaucracy, and diplomacy (as well as bureaucratic modernisation and reforms.) Volume II examines Ottoman intellectual life and culture, with an emphasis on cultural modernisation and westernisation. Volume III looks at Ottoman economic and social life, and Volume IV focuses on Ottoman politics.

FORTHCOMING

5-VOLUME SET

A History of Psychiatry

The Enlightenment

Edited by German Berrios, University of Cambridge, UK

Edited by Ryan Patrick Hanley, Marquette University, USA and Darrin McMahon, Florida State University, USA

This 6-volume facsimile collection charts the history and development of psychiatry. The volumes take an international perspective, including writings in German, French, Italian as well as UK/US materials. A collection of British documents (or documents in English) would not adequately represent the history of the field, since the contribution of Great Britain, and indeed of the English-speaking world to the development of Western psychiatry and psychopathology has been rather limited. Shorter pieces have been translated by the editor and any longer pieces are printed with a short synopsis in English alongside. January 2010: 234x156: 2,400pp Hb: 978-0-415-40156-2: £725.00

US $1,450.00

FORTHCOMING 5-VOLUME SET

Irish Feminisms, 1810–1930 Edited by Mary Pierse, University College Cork, Republic of Ireland Series: History of Feminism Co-published by Routledge and Edition Synapse, the History of Feminism series makes key archival source material readily available to scholars, researchers, and students of womenís and gender studies, womenís history, and women’s writing, as well as those working in allied and related fields. Selected and introduced by expert editors, the gathered materials are reproduced in facsimile, giving users a strong sense of immediacy to the texts and permitting citation to the original pagination. This new title in the series brings together a unique selection of the multiple feminisms articulated by Irish writers between 1825 and 1930. Selected Contents: Volume I: Leading the Way Volume II: Land and Labour Volume III: Éire Abú? Volume IV: In the Real World Volume V: Literary Approaches December 2009: 246x174: 2,476pp Hb: 978-0-415-47529-7: £625.00 US $1,096.00

Each volume has its own introduction, plus short notes covering individual sections (or in some cases, articles). July 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-45254-0: £650.00

6-VOLUME SET

US $1,295.00

Series: Critical Concepts in Historical Studies More than any earlier period of European intellectual history, the age of Enlightenment infused the republic of letters with social and political significance; this long-awaited new collection from Routledge brings together in five volumes the very best scholarship on the period and its legacy. Volume I (‘Definitions’) addresses questions of general chronology and internal periodization, of national and international perspective and of thematic continuities or breaks. It includes classic readings on the so-called ‘Enlightenment Project’, the ‘Radical Enlightenment’, and ‘Conservative Enlightenment’, and on the putative differences between the Enlightenment in France, with often unattached professional writers, on the one hand, and in Scotland, Germany, and Italy, with their distinctive national traditions or civic culture, university professors, courtiers or public officials, on the other. It also incorporates historical and critical essays addressed to the Enlightenment’s alleged responsibility for institutions or policies prevalent in the twentieth century, including economic globalization and the Holocaust. Volume II (‘Knowledge’) brings together the best work on key themes in eighteenth-century philosophy, epistemology, linguistics, the arts (including music), and the sciences. It considers the elaboration of the natural and human sciences and the production and dissemination of knowledge via universities, academies, and encyclopedias. Attention is also given to the development of medicine and historical inquiry. The third volume (‘Civilization’) collects vital scholarship which addresses eighteenth-century perspectives on humankind’s passage from barbarism to civilization—terms whose invention in or association with the age of Enlightenment are also treated here. It embraces notable contributions to eighteenth-century political economy as well as discussions of sociability, the book trade, the role of women, and the Counter-Enlightenment. Volume IV (‘Power’), meanwhile, focuses on eighteenth-century political doctrines and their transforming effects on institutions from the nation-state to Church to the practices of international relations. In so doing it surveys Enlightenment concepts of constitutionalism and enlightened absolutism, toleration and revealed religion, and anti-imperialism and perpetual peace. The final volume in the collection (‘Revolutions’) focuses on the much-debated and crucial question of the relationship of the Enlightenment to the American and French Revolutions, as well as the equally important question of how the Enlightenment continues to shape academic and political debates today. October 2009: 234x156: 2,060pp Hb: 978-0-415-34687-0: £825.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $1,250.00

www.routledge.com/reference

HISTORY

NEW

eBook

5-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

American Women during World War II

6-VOLUME SET

An Encyclopedia

Edited by Mark Llewellyn, University of Liverpool, UK and Jessica Cox, University of Wales, Lampeter, UK

Doris Weatherford American Women during World War II relates in one volume the experiences of women of all races, social classes, and major ethnic groups who lived in the United States during the war era, including the periods directly before and after the actual conflict. Among the biographical entries are those of American women who served in the British armed forces prior to the creation of U.S. military units for women. Other biographical entries explicate the experience of American women caught in Japanese attacks on Asian cities that took place years before Pearl Harbor. Similarly, some of women’s most unusual and precedent-setting activities occurred in the immediate postwar years. Many women, for instance, participated in the founding meetings of the United Nations, while others pioneered warrelated areas such as the prosecution of war criminals in Europe. The work documents the lives and stories of women who contributed directly to the war effort via official and semi-official military organizations, as well as the millions of women who worked in civilian defense industries, ranging from aircraft maintenance to munitions manufacturing and much more. It also illuminates how the war changed the lives of women in more traditional home front roles. All women had to cope with rationing of basic household goods, and most women volunteered in war-related programs. Other entries discuss institutional change, as the war affected every aspect of life, including as schools, hospitals, and even religion. American Women during World War II provides a handy one-volume collection of information and images suitable for any public or professional library. September 2009: 276x219: 552pp Hb: 978-0-415-99475-0: £110.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87066-2

US $175.00

Women and Belief, 1852–1928

Series: History of Feminism Over recent years, research into religious belief during the Victorian period and the early twentieth century has grown in diversity and importance. The centrality of faith-based discourses to women of the period has long been recognized by scholars in the field. But until now relatively little significance has been attached to the fundamental relationship between women’s faith and women’s rights. This new title in the History of Feminism series, copublished by Routledge and Edition Synapse, remedies that omission. Women and Belief, 1852–1928 is a six-volume collection of primary materials covering a wide range of opinions about women, their self-identity, and the combination of their spiritual and political beliefs. Addressing the most debated aspects of women’s religious, social, cultural, and political rights, the collection adopts an historical overview of the period and provides an authoritative representation of the wide body of literature written by and about women’s faith. Beginning with an example of how religious discourse provided a model for acceptable female behaviour and a satirical take on women’s rights and spiritualism and ending with an economist’s psychoanalytic study of female belief from 1928, Women and Belief, 1852–1928 provides a unique collection of different viewpoints. It brings together the work of women writers, theologians, philosophers, and economic and cultural historians to illustrate the multiplicity of voices and opinions on the issues of suffrage and religious faith. This diversity is equally reflected in the broad geographical coverage of the collection which draws on works not only from the United Kingdom and United States but also includes materials from Canada and India, and moves beyond the Christian into the spheres of theosophy, Islam, Hinduism, Buddhism, and Judaism. The gathered materials include works of non-fiction, poetry, analytical works, satires, pamphlets, sermons, spiritual (auto)biography, and periodical articles. Making readily available such materials—which are currently very difficult for scholars, researchers, and students across the globe to locate and use— Women and Belief, 1852–1928 is a veritable treasure-trove. The gathered works are reproduced in facsimile, giving users a strong sense of immediacy to the texts and permitting citation to the original pagination. And with detailed and comprehensive introductory, biographical, and contextual material in each volume illustrating the ways in which the materials chart the gradual evolution of feminist thinking about belief, spirituality, and faith that directly fed into the emerging discourses of political and social rights for women, the collection is destined to be welcomed as a vital reference and research resource. March 2010: 234x156: 2,400pp Hb: 978-0-415-47218-0: £695.00

US $1,150.00

Women and Empire, 1750–1939 Primary Sources on Gender and AngloImperialism Edited by Susan K. Martin, Caroline Daley, Elizabeth Dimock, all at La Trobe University, Australia, Cheryl Cassidy, Eastern Michigan University, USA and Cecily Devereux Series: History of Feminism

This set functions to extend significantly the range of the History of Feminism series (co-published by Routledge and Edition Synapse), bringing together the histories of British and American women’s emancipation, represented in earlier sets, into juxtaposition with histories produced by different kinds of imperial and colonial governments. The alignment of writings from a range of Angloimperial contexts reveals the overlapping histories and problems, while foregrounding cultural specificities and contextual inflections of imperialism. Perhaps the most novel aspect of this collection is its capacity to highlight the common aspects of the functions of empire in their impact on women and their production of gender, and conversely, to demonstrate the actual specificity of particular regional manifestations. Concerning questions of power, gender, class and race, this new Routledge–Edition Synapse Major Work will be of particular interest to scholars and students of imperialism, colonization, women’s history, and women’s writing. January 2009: 234x156: 2,016pp Hb: 978-0-415-31092-5: £595.00

US $1,190.00

Studies in Social History Studies in Social History reprints some of the most important works on economic history published in the last century. Selected Contents: 1. Ancient Crete: A Social History: From Early Times until the Roman Occupation 2. Army in Victorian Society 3. Army of Charles II 4. The Attack on ’Feudalism’ in Eighteenth Century France 5. Churches and the Working Classes in Victorian England 6. English Landed Society in the Eighteenth Century 7. English Landed Society in the Nineteenth Century 8. English Parish Clergy on the Eve of the Reformation 9. The English Poor in the XVIIIth Century: A Study in Social and Administrative History from 1662 to 1782 10. Heavens Below: Utopian Experiments in England 1560–1960 11. A History of Shopping 12. An Imperial War and the British Working Class 13. Leisure and Class in Victorian England: Rational Recreation and the Contest for Control, 1830–1885 14. The Leviathan of Wealth: The Sutherland Fortune in the Industrial Revolution 15. Packhorse, Wagon and Post: Land Carriage and Communications under the Tudors and Stewarts 16. Prelates and People 17. The Profession of English Letters 18. The Purchase of Paradise: The Social Function of Aristocratic Benevolence 19. Religious Toleration in England 1787–1833 20. The Rise of the Technocrats: A Social History 21. A Social History of English Music 22. A Social History of the French Revolution 23. Society and Politics in Germany 1500–1750 24. Sport and Society: Elizabeth to Anne 25. The Trade in Lunacy 26. Victorian Attitudes to Race C. Bolt 27. Western India in the Nineteenth Century: A Study in the Social History of Maharashtra 2006: 234x156: 8,928pp Hb: 978-0-415-40266-8: £2,025.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $4,025.00

HISTORY OF SCIENCE

Encyclopedia of 20th-Century Technology Edited by Colin Hempstead and William Worthington 2004: 276x219: 992pp Hb: 978-1-57958-386-6: £199.50

US $385.00

Encyclopedia of Nonlinear Science Edited by Alwyn Scott 2004: 279x219: 1,104pp Hb: 978-1-57958-385-9: £145.00

US $275.00

Encyclopedia of Science, Technology and Society Edited by Rudi Volti 2004: 276x219: 1,500pp Hb: 978-1-57958-151-0: £160.00

US $305.00

LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCES

FORTHCOMING

The Emerging Research Library

Outsourcing Records Management

The Research Library in the 21st Century

Jane Proffitt

Edited by Sul H. Lee, University of Oklahoma Libraries, USA

Outsourcing is a global phenomenon that has enjoyed rapid growth over recent years, evidenced by the proliferation of outsourcing service providers in all areas of business. The concept centres on businesses and organizations divesting themselves of essential, but non-core, business activities and, properly managed, can realize considerable cost and other benefits for both the service provider and the outsourcing client.

The chapters included in this book were developed from papers presented at ’The Emerging Research Library: Our Role in the Digital Future’ Conference sponsored by the University of Oklahoma Libraries. These chapters explore the emergence of a new form of academic library and the challenging issues we face as a profession because of the changing role of the academic library. Issues discussed include the changing profession, new publishing models, the reallocation of spaces, the preservation of past knowledge, changing user behaviours, and improving access to information. This book also provides possible suggestions for helping academic libraries transition into the future, including reevaluation of professional expectations and abandoning past practices, enhancing the use of metadata, responding to user behaviours, long-term planning for preservation, the promotion of open access initiatives, and extending professional inclusion and collaboration. Each chapter engages the question of how academic libraries will adapt to the challenges arising from their new role as facilitators of research in the information age. Together these chapters present an impressive set of reflections on the changes that are necessary for emerging research libraries to flourish in an increasingly digital future, and this book is recommended reading for scholars and professional librarians. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Sul H. Lee 2. A Tribute to Duane Webster Sul H. Lee 3. Local to Global: The Emerging Research Library Lizabeth A. Wilson 4. Partners in Knowledge Creation: An Expanded Role for Research Libraries in the Digital Future Mary M. Case 5. Reinventing Our Work: New and Emerging Roles for Academic Librarians Lori A. Goetsch 6. Attitudes and Behaviors in the Field of Economics: Anomaly or Leading Indicator Kevin Guthrie and Ross Housewright 7. Unintended Consequences: A Friendly User Looks at User-Friendly Digitization Jack A. Siggins 8. From Advocacy to Implementation: The NIH Public Access Policy and Its Impact Heather Dalterio Joseph 9. Deconstructing the Library: Reconceptualizing Collections, Spaces and Services Sarah M. Pritchard 10. Out of the Gray Times: Leading Libraries into the Digital Future Deborah Jakubs October 2009: 234x156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-54323-1: £75.00

US $125.00

This title will prove invaluable for any librarian or information professional with a practical or academic interest in outsourcing, or any students in the field of library science. December 2009: 234x156: 224pp Pb: 978-1-85743-491-0: £35.00 US $70.00

FORTHCOMING

Information Worlds Behavior, Technology, and Social Context in the Age of the Internet Gary Burnett, Florida State University, USA and Paul T. Jaeger, University of Maryland, USA Series: Routledge Studies in Library and Information Science Melding concepts drawn from Library and Information Studies scholar and theorist Elfreda Chatman and philosopher Jurgen Habermas, Burnett and Jaeger present a multi-level theory of ’Information Worlds’ to investigate the ways in which information creates the social worlds of people. Where Chatman’s work focuses almost exclusively on the role of information at the local community level, Habermas views information as a resource for society as a whole. Combining their key theories, and critically examining several other theoretical approaches, Information Worlds offers a richer understanding of the intersection between the idea of information and the many different cultural contexts in which it is used, from the micro to the macro level. Testing their theory through application to a variety of real-world issues, Burnett and Jaeger tackle the topics of libraries and information provision, the value assigned to information by differing social groups, information access and exchange, international information policies, the role of information in democracy, and technological change. The resulting theory not only serves as a driver to enrich and expand our abstract understanding of the idea of information in society in LIS studies and other disciplines—Information Worlds also provides a framework for empirical investigations into the fascinating and very real social dimensions of information. December 2009: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-99778-2: £65.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $95.00

www.routledge.com/reference

LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCES

FORTHCOMING

NEW

FORTHCOMING

Strategic Planning in Academic Libraries

Serials Binding

Handbook of Information Management

A Practical Guide

Irma Nicola, Azusa Pacific University, USA

Elizabeth Connor, Daniel Library, The Citadel, USA

Series: Routledge Studies in Library and Information Science

Strategic Planning in Academic Libraries: A Practical Guide is comprised of illuminating essays, instructive tables and graphs, and a wide range of case studies from academic libraries in the United States and United Kingdom, making it an indispensable guide to cultivating the library’s most valuable resource— its workforce. Strategic Planning in Academic Libraries: A Practical Guide provides detailed analysis and a comprehensive set of guidelines to aid librarians in successfully navigating the essential tasks of teaching, orienting, training, mentoring, and developing librarians and library staff at colleges and universities. Other topics discussed in Strategic Planning in Academic Libraries: A Practical Guide include the significance of staff development, methods for relating staff orientation, training, and development to the library’s mission statement and strategic plan, and exercises to help educate, train, and develop new and current library personnel. For students, educators, and library and information services professionals everywhere, Strategic Planning in Academic Libraries: A Practical Guide, is an essential resource for its comprehensive breadth and thoroughness. September 2010: 168pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3700-8: £65.00

Serials Binding: A Simple and Complete Guidebook to Processes presents all the step-by-step information needed to begin a journal binding project. This essential Handbook provides novice faculty and staff beginning bindery programs at any school or library with a useful history of binding, work flow information, and vendor information. Practical and concise, this guide explains the entire process in easy-to-understand terms, including comprehensive strategies for each critical stage— including analyzing and obtaining funding, the selection of appropriate serials for binding, and the manual binding procedure, including a photo essay of the automated binding process. Serials Binding: A Simple and Complete Guidebook to Processes is an essential resource for all faculty and staff interested in starting a bindery program at their school or library. Selected Contents: 1. History 2. Collection Development 3. Manual Processing 4. Automated Processing 5. Vendors 6. Preservation 7. Budget Development 8. Statistics and Inventory 9. Disaster Planning and Preparedness 10. Workflow: Concepts to Completion References Index October 2009: : 152pp Hb: 978-0-7890-2504-3: £70.00

US $95.00

FORTHCOMING

The Directory of EU Information Sources The eighteenth edition of The Directory of EU Information Sources is the most comprehensive compilation of contacts and published information on the European Union. It brings together a broad range of information sources, comprising not only the various constituent institutions of the European Union, their personnel, publications, information websites and representations in Europe and the rest of the world, but also diplomatic representation in Brussels, European-level trade and professional associations and NGOs, consultants and lawyers specializing in EU affairs, Press Agencies, EU grants and loans programmes, and information networks serving businesses, students, academics, consumers, job-seekers and many other groups. US $525.00

This is effectively the eighth edition of the highly regarded, Handbook of Special Librarianship and Information Work, which has provided the seminal text on modern information theory, practice, and procedure since 1957. The text draws on a substantial background of research and best practice to provide a pragmatic approach to information management in the workplace. This volume covers strategic, legal, management, and marketing issues and highlights the importance of new web-based delivery mechanisms. It includes contributions from outside the UK, mirroring the global nature of information management. Includes: • essential reference to core theories and principles of information organization, retrieval and dissemination •a new chapter exploring the legal issues involved with information on the internet • new topics including: freedom of information, project management, digital library research, the hybrid library, the effective website and the intranet. September 2010: 234x156: 448pp Pb: 978-1-85743-492-7: £75.00 US $150.00

4TH EDITION US $95.00

Directory of Museums, Galleries and Buildings of Historic Interest in the United Kingdom

FORTHCOMING

18TH EDITION

November 2009: 279x211: 570pp Hb: 978-1-85743-521-4: £275.00

A Simple and Complete Guidebook to Processes

3RD EDITION

Assessing Information Needs in the Age of the Digital Consumer David Nicholas and Eti Herman Aiming at ensuring that everyone obtains the rich rewards available in today’s information-centred society, this book seeks to provide a systematic method for the understanding, appreciation and evaluation of information needs, which alone can guarantee the value of information to the consumer. Based on the insights gained from research projects involving hundreds of thousands of people, it sets out to provide a framework, firmly grounded in theory but nevertheless highly practical, for information needs analysis. The book is written both for librarians, publishers, archivists, records managers, journalists and other information professionals, to help them in their efforts to design improved systems and monitor the effectiveness of their services on an ongoing basis, and for individual information consumers, to enable them to better meet their own information needs in the expanding sphere of virtual information.

This unique and important directory incorporates some 2,700 entries. It covers all types and sizes of museums; galleries of paintings, sculpture and photography; and buildings and sites of particular historic interest. It also provides an extensive index listing over 3,000 subjects. The Directory covers national collections and major buildings, but also the more unusual, less well-known and local exhibits and sites. 2008: 297x210: 692pp Hb: 978-1-85743-489-7: £175.00

December 2009: 234x156: 144pp Pb: 978-1-85743-487-3: £35.00 US $70.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $350.00

LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCES

Freedom of Information Open Access, Empty Archives?

Career Paths and Career Development of Business Librarians

Assessment of Library Collections in a Consortial Environment

Edited by Andrew Flinn, University College London, UK and Harriet Jones, University of London, UK

Edited by Diane Zabel, Pennsylvania State University, USA

Experiences From Ohio

The Freedom of Information (FOI) Act has been broadly welcomed by contemporary British historians as a means of increasing access to public records within the thirty-year rule. But the benefits of this formal commitment to open government are untested, and experiences in other countries with FOI or Access to Information legislation have raised a number of shared problems and concerns.

Contributors provide insights about business librarianship in various types of institutions, explore traditional and non-traditional career paths in business librarianship, and discuss numerous strategies for professional growth (from earning an MBA degree to working abroad). Among the topics covered are the following: recruitment of business librarians (including recent data on the supply and demand of business librarians); the special concerns of early career and mid-career business librarians; the importance of mentoring; leadership development; and business librarians on the job in academic, public, and corporate libraries. This book will appeal to a wide audience: practitioners; directors of public, academic, and special libraries serving the business community; library and information science educators; and those considering business librarianship as a career, including students, generalist librarians, and individuals seeking a career change.

These problems are common among countries with FOI legislation. But there has been very little discussion among historians and archivists internationally about dealing with these issues as well as reflecting on the benefits of access legislation. This volume will be the first to compare and reflect upon both the successes and difficulties of FOI across the world. Written by an international mixture of senior archivists and historians, it will appeal across the disciplines of history and archive studies. Selected Contents: Section 1: Freedom of information in Britain 1. ‘History Must be Written Imperfectly’: Closure and Disclosure in British Public Records, 1838–2006 David Vincent 2. Opening Government? The Freedom of Information Act and the Foreign and Commonwealth Office Gill Bennett 3. The Freedom of Information Act in Practice: The Historian’s Perspective Andrew Flinn and Harriet Jones 4. The Freedom of Information Act and Welsh Devolution Duncan Tanner and Mari Elin Wiliam Section 2: Comparative Experiences of Freedom of Information 5. The Access to Information Shuffle: Historical Researchers Versus the Government in the Netherlands Bob de Graaff 6. Access to Information: Promise Versus Practice in the USA Don B. Schewe 7. Freedom of Information and the American Presidency: A Researcher’s Perspective Darby A. Morrisroe 8. The Problematic Freedom of Information Principle: The Swedish Experience Kjell Östberg and Fredrik Eriksson 9. Access to Information and Historical Research: The Canadian Experience Larry Hannant Section 3: Historians and the Closed Archive 10. Problems in Obtaining and Using Official Records for Research in Irish and British History in the Twenty-first Century Eunan O’Halpin 11. Censorship, Declassification and the History of End of Empire in Central Africa Philip Murphy 12. Researching Contemporary Monetary History: The Archival Experiences of an Economic Historian Michael J. Oliver 13. Political and Digital Divides: The Dual Challenge for Central European Archives Miklos Lojko April 2009: 234x156: 216pp Hb: 978-1-85743-420-0: £130.00

This book was published as a special issue of the Journal of Business & Finance Librarianship. April 2009: 234x156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3794-7: £75.00

The consortial environment provides librarians with new ways to manage collections at their home institutions. Academic libraries in Ohio have been participating in OhioLINK since 1988, and the consortium has had an effect on shaping local collections for more than one decade. While each institution pursues its own collection management strategy, the shared resources and delivery system provided through OhioLINK influence local collections profoundly. What has been the effect? This work is a collection of articles assessing local collections within a consortial environment. The authors assess collections from their own vantage points, considering such diverse factors as cost, regional depositories, book reviews, and faculty input. The influence of consortial ties in shaping local collections is a common thread throughout the work. This book was published as a special issue of Collection Management. February 2009: 234x156: 186pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3732-9: £75.00

US $125.00

US $150.00

An Introduction To Staff Development In Academic Libraries Edited by Elizabeth Connor, The Daniel Library of The Citadel, Charleston, South Carolina, USA An indispensable resource for librarians of all roles, the case studies in An Introduction to Staff Development in Academic Libraries demonstrate the necessity and value of integrating the library’s mission statement and strategic plan with bold approaches to staff orientation, training, mentoring, and development. February 2009: 234x156: 248pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3844-9: £65.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3845-6: £26.99

Edited by George Lupone, Cleveland State University Ohio, USA

US $95.00

US $39.95

Ethics And Integrity In Libraries Edited by Amy Besnoy, University Of San Diego, USA A library must function with integrity in order to function well. This book looks at a broad range of library functions through the lens of integrity and ethics. This largely unexplored area of study is handled exceptionally well by the library and information professionals contained in these pages. This book addresses the ethical and integrity issues that may come up in the day to day workings of the library as well considerations for the ethical education of our future librarians. Within a framework based on the ethical issues that are attached with information management, this book examines the impact of the US Patriot Act, library authentication and access management, plagiarism and social networking. This material was published in the Journal of Library Administration. January 2009: 234x156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3755-8: £75.00

US $125.00

US $230.00

For more information about our eBooks in Library and Information Science, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCES

Electronic Theses and Dissertations

Digital Scholarship

15TH EDITION

Developing Standards and Changing Practices for Libraries and Universities

Edited by Marta Mestrovic Deyrup, Seton Hall University Libraries, USA

Aslib Directory of Information Sources in the United Kingdom

Robert E. Wolverton Jr, Lona Hoover, Susan Hall and Robert Fowler, all at Mississippi State University, USA

Series: Routledge Studies in Library and Information Science

First published in 1928, the Aslib Directory is the leading information sources reference work on organizations of all kinds. Now published in its fifteenth edition, the title’s diversity is reflected by the wide spectrum of entries. The Directory is widely regarded as the best publication of its type.

As open access initiatives, electronic theses and dissertations (ETDs) provide Internet access to graduate student research documents from hundreds of academic institutions, thus furthering international scholarly communication. The last decade has seen change and collaboration among colleagues of varied disciplines and across institutional boundaries. There is a need for practical information for academics, database managers and library catalogers in dealing with the complexities of developing ETD programs and workflow. The authors present a comprehensive treatise on ETDs, drawing on many years of collective experience within this specialization. This book was published as a special issue of Technical Services Quarterly. 2008: 234x156: 152pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3175-4: £75.00

Collecting important original essays by librarians and archivists – all of whom are actively engaged in building digital collections – Digital Scholarship details both challenges and proven solutions in establishing, maintaining, and servicing digital scholarship in the humanities. This volume further explores the ways in which the humanities have benefited from the ability to digitize text and page images of historic documents, mine large corpuses of texts and other forms of records, and assemble widely dispersed cultural objects into common repositories for comparison and analysis—making new research questions and methods possible for the first time.

US $150.00

Libraries and Graduate Students Building Connections Edited by Gretta Siegel, Portland State University, USA This book gathers together a variety of perspectives and approaches toward building relationships between academic libraries and a unique scholarly population with specific needs—graduate students. This valuable resource shows efforts on specific programs and strategies to enhance and enrich the graduate student experience. Contributions to this volume include a wide variety approaches though case studies, an extensive literature review on academic integrity, an initiative for program development in the context of a broader education initiative, and a chapter on graduate fellowships for manuscripts and special collections. Many of the approaches integrate tried and true information literacy strategies, but they also put unique ’spins’ on these approaches. This book’s scope includes large and small colleges and universities, public and private, and specialized and general. Subjects include stand alone courses and workshops, program development, assessment, distance education, online environments, instructional design, and collaborations. This book is a valuable resource for public service librarians, information literacy/instruction librarians, library science professors, graduate program coordinators, special collections librarians, and subject specialist librarians in all areas.

The ten notable scholars included in Digital Scholarship offer a balanced view of the strengths and weaknesses of various approaches to digitization, reporting both progress and problems, examining new business models, new forms of partnerships, and the new technologies and resources that make many more library and archival services available. Librarians and library staff everywhere will find Digital Scholarship an essential text for the modern library and an illuminating resource for anyone looking to understand the changing face of research in the electronic age. 2008: 234x156: 166pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3688-9: £65.00

Edited by David Stern, Kline Science Library, USA This book explores the expectations and resources available to develop a set of important core skills needed for this profession. Leading authorities in the field of librarianship offer their extensive experience and insight to help beginners to understand precisely what actual measurable skills are required to become a successful career science librarian. Librarians currently working in the area will gain the data they need to be able to effectively collaborate with more experienced people. Topics include reviews of key concepts, basic skills, terminology, ACRL instruction competencies, teams, and assessment of services. US $150.00

This book was published as a special issue of Public Services Quarterly. 2008: 234x156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3054-2: £75.00

US $150.00

Entries in the fifteenth edition included: • Epilepsy Research Foundation • Parentline Plus • Donkey Breed Society • Centre for Buckinghamshire Studies • Environmental Law Foundation. Each entry is listed alphabetically and includes the organization’s name and contact details, type and purpose, and lists publications and collections where appropriate. The Directory also contains a comprehensive index of acronyms and abbreviations and a substantial subject index. 2008: 297x210: 1,400pp Hb: 978-1-85743-488-0: £395.00

US $790.00

Marketing and Promoting Electronic Resources Creating the E-Buzz! Edited by Eleonora I. Dubicki, Monmouth University, USA

US$95.00

Competencies for Science Librarians

2008: 234x156: 210pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3730-5: £75.00

The Aslib Directory of Information Sources in the United Kingdom provides instant access to listings of 6,800 associations, clubs, societies, companies, educational establishments, institutes, commissions, government bodies, and other organizations which provide information freely or on a fee-paying basis.

Technological advances allow libraries to more readily serve patrons’ needs. But how can a librarian effectively communicate what services libraries offer? Marketing and Promoting Electronic Resources: Creating the E-Buzz! explains the foundations of marketing and promotion, focusing on practical and creative techniques that have worked in academic, public, and special libraries. Respected authorities from various libraries offer their insights and advice for effective marketing strategies for electronic resources such as e-serials, databases, and e-books, helping library patrons to better understand the resources now available to them. This book provides librarians with practical suggestions on how to best let their patrons know about the available e-resources and instruct them on how to use them effectively. Librarians in any type of library setting, even if previously unschooled in marketing campaigns, can find fresh ideas to apply in their own setting. This invaluable tool discusses in detail how to develop a marketing plan, create and finance a promotional campaign, and how to use new technologies to reach out to your library patrons in the most effective way to promote your e-resources. This material was published as a special issue of The Serials Librarian. 2008: 234x156: 212pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3585-1: £75.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $150.00

LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCES

Medical Librarian 2.0

E-Journals Access and Management

The Challenges to Library Learning

Use of Web 2.0 Technologies in Reference Services

Edited by Wayne Jones, Queen’s University, Kingston, Canada

Solutions for Librarians

Edited by M. Sandra Wood, Pennsylvania State University, USA

Series: Routledge Studies in Library and Information Science

Medical Librarian 2.0 is a vital resource for understanding and implementing revolutionary technologies and next-generation tools like Web 2.0. The essays in this groundbreaking collection offer a comprehensive look at the potential uses and effects of Web 2.0 in reference services. 2008: 234x156: 262pp Pb: 978-0-7890-3606-3: £39.99

US $60.00

Google Scholar and More New Google Applications and Tools for Libraries and Library Users Edited by William Miller and Rita Pellen, both at Florida Atlantic University, USA In only a few years, Google has become an authoritative provider of multiple products which have changed the digital information landscape. This book discusses how libraries can go beyond Google’s basic search and Scholar functions to expand services for their patrons. Respected authorities reveal the expanding variety of new Google applications developed in the past few years, many of which have not received wide attention and are as yet not often used in libraries. Applications explored include Google Co-op, Google News, Google Docs & Spreadsheets, Google Calendar, and Google Talk. This book also discusses different important aspects of the company’s expansion of functions, such as the failure of the Google Answers experiment, the broad variety of free Google applications that librarians can use to collaborate, and the success of Google’s Blogger, among others. A helpful chronology of Google’s growth is provided, as well as comparative analyses between various Google functions and other functions that are currently available. The book is extensively referenced. This book is an invaluable resource for academic librarians, public librarians, school librarians, library science faculty, and special librarians. This book was published as a special issue of the Journal of Library Administration. 2008: 234x156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3614-8: £80.00

US $150.00

For more information on our Library and Information Science Programme, contact us at: reference@routledge.com

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

The proliferation of e-journals and their impact on library collections is tremendous. E-Journals Access and Management takes a comprehensive look at how e-journals have changed the library landscape and offers librarians strategies to better manage them. This useful resource provides a broad overview of the practical and theoretical issues associated with the management of electronic journals, and contains practical and illuminating case studies of problems faced and solutions found in individual libraries. Containing chapters by respected authorities on this dynamic topic of debate, E-Journals Access and Management presents vital information on a full range of issues dealing with electronic resource access and management, including bibliographic and web access, acquisitions, and licensing. 2008: 234x156: 360pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3385-7: £75.00

US $110.00

An Introduction to Instructional Services in Academic Libraries Edited by Elizabeth Connor, Daniel Library, The Citadel, USA ’If you are looking for detailed, practical examples of proven activities to use in your academic library instructional services program, then this is the text to consult. A resource the instructional services librarian should not be without.’ – Lorna Peterson, SUNY Buffalo, USA More than ever before, librarians are being called upon to contribute considerable energy, knowledge, and leadership to fostering the academic success of students through information literacy. Unique in its expansive breadth and in-depth approach, An Introduction to Instructional Services in Academic Libraries explores the latest methods and ideas for planning, delivering, and evaluating effective instructional sessions. Providing librarians with informative, real-world case studies culled from over three dozen prominent librarian-instructors from across the US and Canada, An Introduction to Instructional Services in Academic Libraries comprehensively covers the topics of experiential learning, hybrid models of library instruction, interdisciplinary inquiry through collaboration, introducing primary documents to undergrads, using case studies in credit-bearing library courses, teaching information literacy to ESL students, information literature for the nontraditional student, preparing an advanced curriculum for graduate students, librarians in the online classroom, and teaching distance education students. An Introduction to Instructional Services in Academic Libraries features numerous planning documents, survey instruments, handouts, active learning exercises, and extensive references which make it an ideal resource for educators and librarians everywhere. 2008: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3707-7: £65.00

+44 (0)1235 400524

US $95.00

Bruce E. Massis, Columbus State Community College, USA Series: Routledge Studies in Library and Information Science The Challenges to Library Learning: Solutions for Librarians is an insightful volume that offers a practical philosophy of engagement that can be used to meet the growing challenges facing librarians, including staffing shortages, depleted or eliminated training budgets, longer hours, greater workloads, and rapidly-changing technology, hindering the ability—and willingness—of employees to continue job education in library sciences. With three decades of experience as a library administrator, author Bruce E. Massis details an effective plan for inspiring initiative in the learner to pursue a goal-oriented and individualized approach to learning – helping the library to become more efficient, productive, and user-centered. Topics discussed include overcoming staff disengagement, accepting e-learning as a routine learning model, teaching and measuring information literacy training, creating a flexible alternative staffing model, the Community of Learning Program (CLP) for library staff, and the details of creating and implementing a training program. The Challenges to Library Learning: Solutions for Librarians is a vital and practical resource for anyone actively involved or pursuing a career in library administration. 2008: 234x156: 120pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3141-9: £65.00

US $95.00

Introduction to Health Sciences Librarianship Edited by M. Sandra Wood, Pennsylvania State University, USA ’Fills a void in the textbook market where health sciences librarianship is concerned...Provides a broad overview of health sciences librarianship and health sciences libraries...Structured to facilitate ease of use...Highly recommended as a textbook for teaching courses related to health sciences librarianship as well as a refresher text for novice health sciences librarians.’ – Jeffrey T. Huber, Texas Woman’s University, USA 2008: 546pp Pb: 978-0-7890-3596-7: £65.00 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY US $94.95

The Directory of University Libraries in Europe 2006 2006: 279x211: 600pp Hb: 978-1-85743-376-0: £275.00

US $550.00

Medical Library Downsizing Administrative, Professional, and Personal Strategies for Coping with Change Michael Schott 2005: 174pp Hb: 978-0-7890-0413-0: £19.99

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $29.95

www.routledge.com/reference

LINGUISTICS

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Handbook of Applied Linguistics

4-VOLUME SET

Anthropological Linguistics

The Routledge Handbook of World Englishes

James Simpson, University of Leeds, UK

Theories and Practices

Andy Kirkpatrick

Series: Routledge Handbooks in Applied Linguistics

Edited by Bambi Schieffelin, New York University, USA and Paul Garrett, Temple University, USA

Series: Routledge Handbooks in Applied Linguistics

The Routledge Handbook of Applied Linguistics serves as an introduction and reference point to key areas in the dynamic field of applied linguistics. It is characterised by its scope, its broad relevance, its social engagement, and its authoritative yet straightforward chapters. For newcomers and established academics alike, it offers a readable and accessible overview of the field.

Series: Critical Concepts in Language Studies

The Roultedge Handbook of World Englishes constitutes a comprehensive introduction to the study of world Englishes drawing on the expertise of leading authors within the field.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Descriptions of Language for Applied Linguistics Part 2: The Study of Language in Use: Evidence and Enquiry Part 3: Language, Culture and Identity Part 4: Language in Social Life: Problems, Puzzles, Questions Part 5: Language and Languages, English and Englishes Part 6: Language Learning, Language Education November 2010: 246x174: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-49067-2: £95.00

US $170.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Endangered Languages Edited by Peter K. Austin and Stuart McGill, both at SOAS, UK Series: Critical Concepts in Language Studies The field of endangered languages and language documentation research and practice is a growing one with new programmes having been established in Europe, Australia and the US recently, and new initiatives planned for the future. This is one area of the humanities that has attracted the largest grant support in the world from Volkswagen Foundation, NSF-NEH and Lisbet Rausing Charitable Fund, amounting to several million pounds in total annually. This has been associated with an outburtst in publications, including two recent textbooks by Mouton (Tsunoda, and Gippert Himmelamnann and Mosel), and a new e-journal just launched by University of Hawaii Press. A whole new generation of students and researchers is being trained in the field and they will want to read and refer to this unique collection of articles. There is no existing collection of papers with this range of coverage. Selected Contents: Volume I: Language Ecology and Endangered Languages 1. Language Ecology and Endangerment 2. Speakers and Communities of Endangered Languages (including ethical aspects) 3. Endangered Language Situations around the World 4. What is Lost When a Language is Lost? 5. Structural aspects of Language Endangerment 6. Language and Identity Volume II: Documenting Endangered Languages 1. Language Documentation Theory 2. Speakers and Language Documentation 3. Data and Language Documentation 4. Data Processing and Management 5. Multidisciplinarity in Language Documentation 6. Archiving and Language Documentation Volume III: Maintaining and Supporting Endangered Languages 1. Language Policy for Endangered Languages 2. Revitalisation 3. Language Programmes for Endangered Languages 4. Information Technology and Endangered Languages 5. Advocacy and Support for Endangered Languages Volume IV: The Future of Endangered Languages 1. Language and Development 2. Community-based Training and Capacity Development 3. Researcher Training and Capacity Development 4. New Roles for Endangered Languages

Viewing language as a dynamic semiotic system that shapes and is shaped by cultural, social and cognitive factors alike, the articles in this new Major Work from Routledge explore how people in communities worldwide think about language, talk about language, use language, and change language. The articles illustrate the ways in which language practices – spoken, written, and signed – are resources that participants use for creating social worlds and accomplishing a wide range of activities within those worlds. Furthermore, they demonstrate how analysts use linguistic and cultural practices, and the ideologies that shape them, to provide insights into the complexities of everyday, as well as less commonly occurring, social encounters. Theoretical essays are complemented with readings that illustrate, integrate and often advance these theoretical frameworks. Focus is on work that emphasizes the importance of cultural contexts in analyzing the linguistic practices in which they are embedded; the role talk-in-interaction in establishing, maintaining, or transforming social realities; and the linguistic and communicative resources and strategies that speakers use in conforming others to their point of view. Selections range from investigations, for example, of how speakers create and assert identities in particular kinds of face-to-face interactions; how political institutions, including language academies and experts, attempt to regiment the language practices of particular communities, and how such attempts are resisted; and how various technologies and media, including literacy, radio, television, cellular telephones, and computers, are transforming communicative landscapes at local, national, transnational, and global levels. The editors, experts in the field, have selected essays by leading scholars that are theoretically foundational as well as innovative. They draw on a broad range of ethnographic and linguistic materials to illustrate their arguments in a compelling manner, highlighting the major research directions that have shaped the discipline and pointing to exciting new directions. Primarily drawing from the work of linguistic anthropologists, the collection will be of interest to those working in Social and Cultural Anthropology, Sociology of Language, Sociolinguistics, Communications, Discourse Analysis, Language and Education, Rhetoric, and other fields in which scholars and students explore how language use creates and shapes social worlds. September 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-55178-6: £650.00 US $1,140.00

FORTHCOMING

Among the key themes covered are the development of English as a lingua franca among speakers for whom English is a common but not first language, the parallel development of English as a medium of instruction in educational institutions throughout the world and the role of English as the international language of scholarship and scholarly publishing, as well as the development of ‘computer-mediated’ Englishes, including ‘cyberprose’. The Roultedge Handbook of World Englishes is the ideal resource for postgraduate students of applied linguistics as well as those in related degrees such as applied English language and TESOL/TEFL. Selected Contents: 1. Historical Context 2. Variational Contexts 3. Acculturation 4. Crossing Borders 5. Grammar Wars vs Standard 6. Ideology, Identity 7. WE and Globalization 8. WE and Applied Theory 9. Resources on WE June 2010: 246x174: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-47039-1: £95.00

US $170.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Handbook of Corpus Linguistics Edited by Michael McCarthy and Anne O’Keeffe Series: Routledge Handbooks in Applied Linguistics The Routledge Handbook of Corpus Linguistics brings together the leading figures in the field to produce a state-of-the-art overview of a dynamic area within applied linguistics. It is no longer acceptable to make assumptions or statements about language without the back-up of corpus-based evidence and as a result of developments in hardware over the last thirty years, Corpus Linguistics has seen an ever-widening application to many applied fields including applied linguistics, forensic linguistics, translation studies, computational linguistics and pragmatics. The Routledge Handbook of Corpus Linguistics provides a timely overview of the area bringing together experts in a number of key areas of development and change. Structured around six themes, each theme is preceded by a substantial overview of the area putting the subsequent themes into perspective. Individual contributions include further reading sections with three to five key texts highlighted and annotated facilitating further exploration of the topics. A comprehensive introduction covers the historical development of the area and its growing influence and application in many areas. July 2010: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-415-46489-5: £95.00

September 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-43843-8: £725.00 US $1,450.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $170.00

LINGUISTICS

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

6-VOLUME SET

Ferdinand de Saussure

Pragmatics II

Second-Language Acquisition

Edited by John Joseph, University of Edinburgh, UK

Edited by Asa Kasher, Tel Aviv University, Israel

Series: Critical Assessments of Leading Linguists

Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics

Edited by Lourdes Ortega, University of Hawaii, USA

Ferdinand de Saussure (1857–1913) is widely recognized as the founder of twentieth-century language science. In his lifetime he published an important work on Indo-European philology but it was his Course in General Linguistics, published posthumously in 1916, that paved the way for a genuinely scientific theory of language based on a system of mutually defining entities. In addition to laying the foundations for many of the significant developments in modern linguistics, the implications of Saussure’s work have been far reaching across a broad range of disciplines beyond language studies; indeed, his projected science of signs effected a fundamental reconceptualization of our knowledge about all socially organized meaning systems and it has had a profound impact on, for example, the evolution of modern sociology, anthropology, film studies, and literary theory.

A new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Linguistics, Pragmatics II is a four-volume collection of the very best scholarship on pragmatics. It is an essential successor collection to the editor’s Pragmatics (6-Volumes, 978-0-41511734-0), published in 1998 and described by The Linguist List as ‘essential background reading for students of pragmatics and new researchers in the pragmatics of language’.

As serious work on Saussure’s thinking and influence continues to flourish, this long-awaited new title in Routledge’s Critical Assessments of Leading Linguists series meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a vast scholarly literature. Edited by John E. Joseph, author of the first full-length and comprehensive biography of Saussure, this four-volume Major Work brings together the best and most influential Englishlanguage Saussurean secondary literature. (It also makes available in translation several key pieces originally published in languages other than English.) The collection includes: work on Saussure’s precursors; comprehensive coverage of his linguistic theory, his key concepts, and their critical reception, especially in Europe and the USA; critiques of Saussure (including reassessments and refinements prompted by the unearthing in 1996 of a manuscript published as his Writings in General Linguistics); full coverage of Saussure’s ‘rediscovery’ in the 1960s and his significance in the rise of structuralism, as well as his influence on the broader poststructuralist approaches to inquiry in the human sciences that followed. Ferdinand de Saussure is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research and pedagogic resource. March 2011: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-46546-5: £650.00

US $1,295.00

Pragmatics has experienced dramatic growth since its first flourishing early in the twentieth century. Pragmatics (1998) was the first comprehensive collection of the field’s canonical and cutting-edge research, and this new collection now takes full account of the many important developments that have taken place since its appearance. Pragmatics II also includes coverage of areas without the scope of the first collection, including sections on ‘Silence’ and ‘Typology’. With a full index, together with a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Pragmatics II is an indispensable work of reference. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers as a vital research resource. June 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47795-6: £725.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

Second-language acquisition was born in the late 1960s as an interdisciplinary enterprise that borrowed equally from the feeder fields of linguistics, language teaching, child language acquisition, and psychology. Since then, it has expanded considerably in scope and methodology to the point that for many, by the end of the twentieth century, it had finally reached its coming of age as an autonomous discipline, a discipline that today is more than ever undergoing change, renovation, and expansion. This six-volume collection, a new title in Routledge’s Critical Concepts in Linguistics series, offers a comprehensive survey of this burgeoning field, its accumulated findings and proposed theories, its developed research paradigms, and its pending questions for the future. Including both classical and cutting-edge research, the collected materials offer a cogent and nuanced panoramic of the past, present, and future of second-language acquisition research. March 2010: 234x156: 2,400pp Hb: 978-0-415-45020-1: £975.00

US $1,950.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Historical Linguistics

US $1,225.00

Edited by Brian D. Joseph and Hope Dawson, both at Ohio State University, USA

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Handbook of Forensic Linguistics Malcolm Coulthard and Alison Johnson Series: Routledge Handbooks in Applied Linguistics Forensic Linguistics, an increasingly popular option with students, is the study of language and the law, covering topics from legal language and courtroom discourse to plagiarism. It looks at the linguist as expert providing evidence for the defence and prosecution, investigating areas from blackmail to trademarks and warning labels.

Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics Historical Linguistics is a new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Linguistics. It is a four-volume collection of canonical and cutting-edge research from a rich and flourishing field. July 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-45443-8: £725.00

US $1,450.00

This Handbook includes a comprehensive introduction to the field written by the editors and approximately thirty essays, written by leading international experts and structured in three sections: core issues and topics, the linguist as expert and new debates and new directions. Selected Contents: Section 1: Core Issues and Topics Section 2: The Linguist as Expert Section 3: New Debates and New Directions April 2010: 246x174: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-46309-6: £95.00

ORDER NOW!

Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics

+44 (0)1235 400524

US $170.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

LINGUISTICS

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Clinical Linguistics

Language and Politics

Language Acquisition

Edited by Thomas W. Powell, Louisianna State University, USA and Martin J. Ball, University of Louisiana at Lafayette, USA

Edited by John E. Joseph, University of Edinburgh, UK

Edited by Charles Yang, University of Pennysylvania, USA

The intrinsic link between language and politics has long been recognized (for example, Aristotle wrote ‘… that man is more of a political animal than bees or any other gregarious animals is evident. Nature, as we often say, makes nothing in vain, and man is the only animal whom she has endowed with the gift of speech’ (Politics, 1, 2). It remains a broad, flourishing, and highly contested area of academic study. On the one hand, it analyses how politicians use language, applying approaches which range from traditional rhetoric to Critical Discourse Analysis (CDA). On the other hand, it is also concerned with the political dimension that is arguably inherent in the use of all language.

Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics

Language and Politics, a new title the Routledge series, Major Themes in English Studies, addresses the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of this rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of scholarly literature. Edited by John E. Joseph, a prominent scholar in the field, and author of the subject’s leading textbook, this new Major Work from Routledge brings together in four volumes the foundational and the very best cuttingedge scholarship to provide a synoptic view of many of the key issues and current debates.

With a new introduction by the editor, comprehensive index, and a chronological table of the gathered materials, this four-volume collection provides both student and scholar alike with all the key writings on language acquisition in one convenient and authoritative reference resource.

Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics Clinical Linguistics involves the application of linguistic theories and procedures to the study, characterization, and treatment of communicative disorders. Although linguists have long applied their science to a variety of language problems, Clinical Linguistics did not emerge as an autonomous discipline until the publication of Crystal’s influential Clinical Linguistics in 1981. Despite its youth, this specialist area has quickly evolved into a highly productive field of inquiry. From its inception, Clinical Linguistics has had a strong international presence. The field is interdisciplinary, with relevance to theoretical and applied linguistics, speech and language therapy, psychology, and education. The Clinical Linguistics literature has been especially eclectic, appearing in diverse scientific and professional publications. Many of these sources have limited circulation, a fact that challenges individuals and research libraries to maintain a comprehensive collection. Selected Contents: Volume I Part 1: Defining the Domain of Clinical Linguistics Part 2: Historical Bases of Clinical Linguistics Part 3: The Role of Linguistic Theory Volume II Part 4: Clinical Phonetics Part 5: Speech Measurement and Instrumentation Part 6: Clinical Phonology Volume III Part 7: Developmental Disorders of Language Part 8: Acquired Disorders of Language Part 9: Cognitive–Communicative Disorders Volume IV Part 10: Application of Clinical Linguistics in Educational Settings Part 11: Application of Clinical Linguistics in Medical Settings Part 12: Emerging Issues and Controversies November 2009: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48125-0: £650.00 US $1,140.00

FORTHCOMING

6-VOLUME SET

Metaphor and Figurative Language Edited by Patrick Hanks, Charles University, Prague, Czech Republic and Rachel Giora, Tel Aviv University, Israel Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics

Language and Politics is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research and pedagogic resource. Selected Contents: Volume I Part 1: Persuasion and Propaganda Part 2: Language and Political Theory Part 3: Political Uses of Language in the Past Volume II Part 4: Political Uses of Language in Recent Decades Part 5: Analysing Political Language Part 6: Ideology in Political Discourse Volume III Part 7: Marxist Views of Language Part 8: Performativity and Identity Part 9: Language and the Structure of Society Volume IV Part 10: Language Choice and Language Policy Part 11: Politics in Language Part 12: ‘Critical’ (Applied) Linguistics and Critical Discourse Analysis June 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-45243-4: £650.00

This new addition to Routledge’s Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Linguistics, brings together the very best and most influential scholarly research in over half a century of languageacquisition research. The collection represents and reflects the interdisciplinary nature of the field, by highlighting models and methodologies from—and implications for—adjacent fields such as psycholinguistics, developmental psychology, computer science, and comparative cognition. In addition, the collection steers users to the most important, as well as controversial, issues that lie at the frontier of language acquisition research. With a new introduction by the editor, comprehensive index, and a chronological table of the gathered materials, this four-volume collection provides both student and scholar alike with all the key writings on language acquisition in one convenient and authoritative reference resource Selected Contents: Volume I: Foundations Volume II: Speech Volume III: Words Volume IV: Structures November 2009: 234x156: 1,654pp Hb: 978-0-415-43709-7: £725.00 US $1,450.00

US $975.00

With contributions from Aristotle to Lakoff and Johnson, and incorporating the work of philosophers, linguists, literary theorists, and cognitive psychologists, this wide-ranging and multidisciplinary six-volume collection on metaphor and figurative language is a new title from Routledge’s Critical Concepts in Linguistics series. Metaphor and Figurative Language is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editors, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is an essential library purchase and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital reference work and research tool. April 2010: 234x156 Hb: 978-0-415-39249-5: £1,095.00

US $1,650.00

For more information about our eBooks in Linguistics, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

LINGUISTICS

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Sociolinguistics Around the World

3RD EDITION

Semiotics

A Handbook

The Linguistics Encyclopedia

Edited by Peer F. Bundgaard and Frederik Stjernfelt, both at University of Aarhus, Denmark

Edited by Martin J. Ball, University of Louisiana at Lafayette, USA

Kirsten Malmkjaer, Middlesex University, UK

4-VOLUME SET

Series: Critical Concepts in Language Studies Semiotics (the study of sign processes—‘semiosis’— and sign systems) embraces linguistics, philosophy, and literary studies, as well as linking to anthropology, art, psychology, and biology. This new Routledge collection helps to make sense of the huge interdisciplinary corpus of scholarly literature and brings together the best and most influential materials from ‘the first phase’, neo-classics from the institutionalization of semiotics in the 1960s, and contemporary works illustrating the ongoing development of semiotics and its widening applications (for example, in the natural sciences). Volume I (‘Philosophy’) collects pre-modern material showing the genesis of semiotics from Locke to Peirce, along with a range of work from the last thirty years. Volumes II and III focus on ‘Linguistics and Literary Theory’ and include key work from recent developments in cognitive linguistics and cognitive semantics. Finally, Volume IV (‘Psychology, Biology, Anthropology’) gathers the best offerings from other disciplines, and from emerging fields such as ‘biosemiotics’. March 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47681-2: £650.00

US $1,140.00

NEW

The Routledge Handbook of Multimodal Analysis Edited by Carey Jewitt, University of London, UK The Handbook offers a theoretical and methodological tool kit to support multimodal research including: chapters on key concepts, methodological issues, key factors, a range of theoretical approaches, multimodal case studies and an extensive glossary. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: What is Multimodality? Carey Jewitt 2. Multimodal Data Collection and Transcription Rosie Flewit and Regine Hampel 3. What is Mode? Gunther Kress 4. Materiality and Meaning: A Social Semiotic Approach Theo van Leeuwen 5. Multimodality and Language: A Retrospective and Prospective View Ron Scollon and Suzie Wong Scollon 6. Modal Density and Modal Configurations Sigrid Norris 7. Transduction and Transformation Pippa Stein 8. Multimodality, Identity, and Time Jay Lemke 9. Technology and Sites of Display Rodney Jones 10. Historical Changes in Semiotic Signs Kay O’Halloran 11. Conceptions of Literacy Len Unsworth 12. Culture and Multimodality Kevin Leander

Drawing on examples from a wide range of languages and social setting, Sociolinguistics Around the World is the first single-volume collection surveying current and recent research trends in international sociolinguistics. With over thirty chapters written by leading authorities in the region concerned, all continents and their respective regions are covered. The book will serve as an important tool to help widen the perspective on sociolinguistics to readers of English. Divided into sections covering: The Americas, Asia, Australasia, Africa and the Middle East, and Europe, the book provides readers with a solid, up-to-date appreciation of the interdisciplinary nature of the field of sociolinguistics in each area. It clearly explains the patterns and systematicity that underlie language variation in use, as well as the ways in which alternations between different language varieties mark personal style, social power and national identity.

The Linguistics Encyclopedia is a single-volume Encyclopedia covering all major and subsidiary areas of linguistics and applied linguistics. The seventy nine articles provide in-depth coverage of the topics and sub-topics of the field, extensively crossreferenced so the reader can see how areas interrelate. Including a substantial introduction which provides a potted history of linguistics and suggestions for further reading, this is an indispensable reference tool for specialists and non-specialists alike. This new edition includes ten completely new articles, introducing new areas like slang language and new technologies. Articles from the previous edition have also been thoroughly updated. October 2009: 246x174: 704pp Hb: 978-0-415-42104-1: £125.00

US $225.00

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Bilingualism and Multilingualism

Sociolinguistics around the World is the ideal resource for all students on undergraduate sociolinguistics courses and researchers involved in the study of language, society and power.

Edited by Li Wei, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK

Selected Contents: Part 1: Americas 1. Sociolinguistics in the United States of America 2. Sociolinguistics in Canada 3. Sociolinguistics in Mexico: Defining New Agendas 4. The Sociolinguistics of Indigenous Languages in South America 5. Sociolinguistics of the Caribbean Part 2: Asia 6. Sociolinguistic Research in China, 7. Sociolinguistics in South Asia 8. Japan 9. Burma, Thailand, Cambodia, Laos and Vietnam 10. Malaysia, Singapore, Indonesia, Philippines 11. A Sociolinguistic Profile of Turkey, Northern Cyprus and Other Turkic States in Central Asia 12. The Caucasus 13. Sociolinguistics in the Iranian World Part 3: Australasia 14. Australia 15. New Zealand 16. The South Pacific 17. A Sociolinguistic Sketch of New Guinea Part 4: Africa and the Middle East 18. Sociolinguistics in South Africa – A Critical Overview of Current Research 19. Sociolinguistic Studies of West and Central Africa 20. East Africa 21. Israeli Sociolinguistics: From Hebrew Hegemony to Israeli Plurilingualism 22. Arabic Sociolinguistics in the Middle East and North Africa (MENA) Part 5: Europe 23. German Speaking Area 24. Sociolinguistics in the Dutch Language Area in Europe 25. Sociolinguistics in the Nordic Region 26. The British Isles 27. French Speaking Area 28. Italy 29. Spain and Portugal 30. Sociolinguistics in Hungary, the Czech Republic and Poland 31. The Balkans 32. Russian Federation, Ukraine, Belarus, Moldova 33. The Development of Sociolinguistics in the Baltic States

This four volume Major Work on Bilingualism and Multilingualism will showcase the major achievements in this multidisciplinary field, through the inclusion of the most important, as well as controversial, works that lie at the forefront of bilingualism and multilingualism research.

Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics

Although scientific studies of the language behaviour of polyglots began to appear in the nineteenth century, it is only in the last fifty years or so that bilingualism and multilingualism have been recognized as crucial areas of linguistic research. This new four-volume collection from Routledge showcases the major achievements in this now vibrant multidisciplinary field. Selected Contents: Volume I: Linguistic and Developmental Perspectives Volume II: Psycholinguistic and Neurolinguistic Perspectives Volume III: Sociolinguistic and Interactional Perspectives Volume IV Applied Perspectives July 2009: 234x156: 1,885pp Hb: 978-0-415-46267-9: £725.00

US $1,450.00

September 2009: 246x174: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-42278-9: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86965-9 US $150.00

July 2009: 246x174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-43437-9: £85.00

ORDER NOW!

US $150.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

LINGUISTICS

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Translation Studies Edited by Mona Baker, University of Manchester, UK

2ND EDITION

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Bernard Comrie

Computer-Assisted Language Learning Edited by Philip Hubbard, Stanford University, USA

Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics

Translation Studies has emerged as a thriving interdisciplinary and international area of scholarship. Its rapid growth has been accompanied by diverse forms of translation research and commentary, most falling within, or crossing, traditional academic disciplines such as linguistics, literary criticism, philosophy, anthropology, and, more recently, cultural studies.

Serious work using computers to support language teaching and learning began in the 1960s, but it was not until the beginning of the 1980s when microcomputers began to proliferate that groups of practitioners began forming professional groups and a formal identification of the field occurred. Although the early promise of computer-assisted language learning (or ‘CALL’), to revolutionize second-language learning has not been met, the past quarter century has seen a fascinating range of growth. This is not only because of lessons learned from research and practice, but also due to the rapid and continuing shifts in the technology itself.

This new four-volume collection from Routledge brings together foundational and more recent, cutting-edge contributions to the field. The collection is both retrospective and forward-looking, making sense of the past as well as providing pointers towards the future. Fully indexed and with a comprehensive introduction, Translation Studies is an essential work of reference for use by both scholar and student as a vital one-stop research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I Part 1: Conceptualizing Translation: Transformation, Creation, Mimesis, Commentary Part 2: Incommensurability of Paradigms Part 3: Travelling Theory Volume II Part 4: Translation at the Interface of Cultures: Contact Zones, Third Spaces, and Border Crossings Part 5: World Literature and the Making of Literary Traditions Part 6: Politics and Dynamics of Representation Part 7: Environments of Reception Volume III Part 8: Translation as Ethical Practice Part 9: Modes and Strategies Part 10: Discourse and Ideology Part 11: The Voice of Authority: Institutional Settings and Alliances Part 12: Voice, Positionality, Subjectivity Volume IV Part 13: Minority: Cultural Identity and Survival Part 14: Instruments and Mechanisms of Domination Part 15: The Dynamics of Power and Resistance Part 16: Changing Landscapes: New Media, New Technologies July 2009: 234x156: 1,608pp Hb: 978-0-415-34422-7: £650.00

US $975.00

Nominally a branch of applied linguistics, ’CALL’ is truly interdisciplinary, drawing its core concepts not only from linguistics, but also from computer science, speech engineering, psychology, sociology, second-language acquisition, and general education. This new four-volume title from Routledge will allow ’CALL’ practitioners, researchers, and students to easily access the best and most influential foundational and cutting-edge scholarship. There is also a comprehensive introduction to critical concepts in ’CALL’ for applied linguists and language educators interested in the growing role of technology in second-language acquisition. Selected Contents: Volume I: Foundations of CALL 1. CALL Theory, Frameworks, and Conceptualizations 2. Early CALL Projects 3. CALL Research Trends and Issues 4. CALL Design and Evaluation Volume II: CALL and Language Skills 5. Listening, Speaking, and Pronunciation 6. Reading and Writing 7. Grammar, Vocabulary, and Data-Driven Learning Volume III: Computer-Mediated Communication for Language Learning 8. CMC Foundations and Conceptualizations 9. Synchronous CMC 10. Asynchronous and Mixed CMC Volume IV: Present Trends and Future Directions in CALL 11. Online Learning 12. Assessment 13. Learner Training and Autonomy 14. Teacher Education 15. Intelligent CALL 16. Future Directions May 2009: 234x156: 1,888pp Hb: 978-0-415-46539-7: £725.00

US $1,450.00

The World’s Major Languages This volume features over fifty of the world’s languages and language families. The featured languages have been chosen based on the number of speakers, their role as official languages and their cultural and historical importance. Each language is looked at in depth, and the chapters provide information on both grammatical features and on salient features of the language’s history and cultural role. This second edition has been updated and revised. Two new languages, Amharic and Javanese, have been included. This accessible volume will appeal to anyone with an interest in linguistics. Key features: • attention is paid to both grammatical and sociolinguistic features • attention is concentrated on the world’s major languages • designed to be accessible to all readers with an interest in language. 2008: 246x174: 928pp Hb: 978-0-415-35339-7: £100.00 eBook: 978-0-203-30152-4

US $200.00

World Englishes Edited by Kingsley Bolton and Braj Kachru

Series: Critical Concepts in Linguistics The study of World Englishes has seen a revolutionary shift during the last twenty years. Before 1980, there was a general assumption within Britain, the United States and many other societies where English was taught, that the primary target was the ‘Standard English’ of Britain. However, during the 1980s interest grew in the identification and description of global varieties of English, marking a shift in focus from ‘English’ to ‘Englishes’. This collection covers the full range of differing academic traditions within the subject and also addresses current theoretical approaches to the field. It provides students and researchers with instant access to the key articles and theories on the subject, and is completed by a new introduction from the editors. 2005: 234x156: 2,744pp Hb: 978-0-415-31505-0: £1,045.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $1,575.00

LITERATURE

26-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

The Broadway Travellers

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Eileen Power and E. Denison Ross

Ernest Hemingway

’The variety of The Broadway Travellers becomes more remarkable and refreshing with every new addition to the series. It is possible to range from Bristol to Darien, from China to Peru and to pick a Puritan, a Moslem, a Jesuit or a footman for one’s guide. The English denounce the Spanish, the Spanish watch the French, and the Portuguese fight the Dutch. The drama of the three great centuries of discovery – the fifteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth – are revealed by the shrewdest of observers’ – The New Statesman First published between 1926-1931, with the invaluable addition of introductions and explanatory notes, maps and appendices, this series makes available in English inaccessible texts of travel from around the globe. 2004: 216x138 Hb: 978-0-415-34465-4: £2,475.00

US $4,935.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Companion to Caribbean Literatures in English Edited by Alison Donnell, University of Reading, UK and Michael Andrew Bucknor, University of the West Indies, Mona, Jamaica The Routledge Companion to Caribbean Literature offers a comprehensive and critically engaging overview of this increasingly important area of literature. This volume is divided into four sections that provide an introduction and critical history of the field, discussions of key texts and a critical debate on major topics such as the nation, race, gender and migration. In the final section contributors examine the material dissemination of Caribbean literature and point towards the new directions that Caribbean literature and criticism are taking. This volume is an essential text, bringing together sixty essays representing three generations of Caribbean critics, from the foundational critics such as Baugh, Morris and Walcott to the emerging voices such as DeLoughrey, Puri and Scott. The volume’s interdisciplinary nature and clarity of writing will provide an excellent resource and springboard to further research for those working in literature and cultural studies, postcolonial and diaspora studies as well as Caribbean studies, history and geography. January 2011: 246x174: 560pp Hb: 978-0-415-48577-7: £85.00

Edited by Henry Claridge, University of Kent, UK Series: Critical Assessments of Major Writers Few twentieth-century American writers have been as influential as Ernest Hemingway (1899–1961). Whilst contemporaries such as F. Scott Fitzgerald and William Faulkner may be as widely taught and studied as Hemingway, neither had an influence on other writers—or indeed, the cognate arts—as great as that of Hemingway. For example, the ‘hardboiled’ school of detective fiction extending from the novels of Raymond Chandler and Dashiell Hammett to those of James Ellroy and Robert Parker is more or less inconceivable without Hemingway’s stylistic influence. Arguably, film noir is also Hemingwayesque in its laconic detachment. And quite independently of his creative writings, Hemingway’s life continues to exert a profound fascination for both student and the general reader. Hemingway was the subject of extensive enquiry before his death and since then he has generated interpretative and critical commentary on a vast and bewildering scale, in part aided by the continuing publication of works left unpublished at his death (most notably The Garden of Eden in 1987). The dizzying quantity (and variable quality) of Hemingway criticism makes it difficult to discriminate the useful from the tendentious, superficial, and otiose. That is why this new Routledge title is so urgently needed. In four volumes, the collection meets the need for an authoritative reference work to allow researchers and students to make sense of a vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output. Users will now be able easily and rapidly to locate the best and most influential critical scholarship, work that is otherwise often inaccessible or scattered throughout a variety of specialist journals and books. With material gathered into one easy-to-use set, researchers and students can now spend more of their time with the key journal articles, book chapters, and other pieces, rather than on timeconsuming (and sometimes fruitless) archival searches.

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Companion to Literature and Science Edited by Bruce Clarke, Texas Tech University, USA and Manuela Rossini, Swiss Academies of the Arts and Sciences, Switzerland There has long been friction and debate between the sciences and the humanities, culminating in the ‘two cultures debate’ in which scientist and novelist C.P. Snow declared the breakdown of communication between the ‘two cultures’. This triggered many responses and debates and has led to the suggestion of a ‘third culture’ which is the area in which the humanities and natural sciences in general, but more specifically literature and science interact, often now called the ‘posthumanities’. With over fifty newly commissioned essays from leading scholars The Routledge Companion to Literature and Science offers an overview of the history of these debates whilst tracing the interaction, reaction and conflict between the two disciplines. Divided into four main sections, part one looks at the ways in which different types of science are more closely related to different authors or types of literature from Artificial Intelligence to thermodynamics; part two provides a broad survey of the different theoretical and disciplinary approaches currently at work in the study of Science and Literature from agricultural sciences to theology; part three looks at specific cultures from around the globe and periods from the classical era to the present day; part four offers a chronology of key events in the history of literature and science. This is the essential guide to anyone approaching this vibrant area of study. Selected Contents: Part 1. Literatures and Sciences Part 2. Disciplinary and Theoretical Approaches Part 3. Cultures and Periods Part 4. Chronolgy of Literature and Science June 2010: 246x174: 560pp Hb: 978-0-415-49525-7: £85.00

US $140.00

Fully indexed and with a comprehensive introduction newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Ernest Hemingway is an essential reference work and is destined to be valued as a vital research resource. October 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49120-4: £650.00

US $1,140.00

US $140.00

For more information about our eBooks in Literature, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

LITERATURE

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

Philip Larkin

Travel Writing

James Joyce

Andrew Motion

Edited by Tim Youngs, Nottingham Trent University, UK

Edited by Colin Milton, University of Aberdeen, UK

Series: Routledge Revivals

Series: Critical Assessments of Major Writers

Series: Critical Concepts in Literary and Cultural Studies

James Augustine Aloysius Joyce (1882–1941) is a towering figure in the development of Englishlanguage modernist prose fiction. And his influence extends well beyond the anglophone literary world; like his alter ego, Stephen Dedalus, Joyce flew by the nets of nationality, language, and religion, and spent most of his life in continental Europe.

Philip Larkin is recognised as one of the most important writers to have emerged in Britain since the Second World War. First published in 1982, Andrew Motion’s study begins with an account of Larkin’s life and literary background and discusses his literary relationship with Hardy and Yeats and his association with the Movement. He analyses Larkin’s two novels and assesses his three mature collections. Throughout the book much reference is made to uncollected reviews and articles and occasionally to unpublished manuscripts. Rather than developing the familiar line on Larkin as an empirical and melancholy writer, Andrew Motion explores the Symbolist and transcendent element in his work, and emphasises its range and variety.

The past three decades have seen a remarkable growth of cross-disciplinary academic interest in travel writing. This new four-volume collection from Routledge, edited by a pioneer of travel-writing studies, brings together the best research from scholars around the world. The collection also features pieces by travel writers themselves discussing their work, including: • Michael Cronin on Travel and Translation • Robyn Davidson interviewed by Tim Youngs • William Dalrymple on Writing Travel • Peter Hulme on Columbus • David Espey on Americans in Vietnam • John Hutnyk on Calcutta • Charles Forsdick on French Travel Writing • Mary Louise Pratt on Travel-Writing Scholarship • Richard White on Australian Travellers. Volume I focuses on the production of travel writing; Volume II on the contexts of travel writing; Volume III on types of traveller; and Volume IV on critical approaches to travel writing. June 2011: 234x156: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-37498-9: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price: £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication) US $1,295.00

$1,150.00

The significance of Joyce’s oeuvre—particularly the later and more radical prose works—far outweighs the modesty of its bulk: only two books of verse, a play, one collection of short stories, and three novels (using that term in its most elastic sense) were published in his lifetime. But the combination of a modest output with an increasingly audacious experimentalism has generated interpretative and critical commentary on a vast and bewildering scale. Joyce attracted serious attention (not always favourable) from virtually every significant writer of the age: elder statesmen like Yeats recognized his importance, as did members of his own generation, such as Pound, Eliot, and Lawrence. The major American critics of the era, like Edmund Wilson and Lionel Trilling, and, in France, Eugene Jolas and Jacques Mercanton, also responded with enthusiasm to his work, as did Cyril Connolly and F. R. Leavis in Britain. Joyce’s work has also lent itself to approaches informed by contemporary theory— whether new critical, formalist, structuralist, deconstructionist, feminist, or materialist—such that the development of Joycean criticism maps the spread and transmutations of ‘theory’ and illustrates its applications. So, while the prospective reader of Ulysses or Finnegans Wake is likely to feel a compelling need for some preparation before consuming the text itself, the daunting quantity (and variable quality) of Joyce criticism makes it difficult to discriminate the useful from the tendentious, superficial, and otiose. That is why this new Routledge title is so urgently needed. In four volumes, the collection meets the need for an authoritative reference work to allow researchers and students to make sense of the vast Joycean literature and the continuing explosion in research output. Users will now be able easily and rapidly to locate the best and most influential critical scholarship, work that is otherwise often inaccessible or scattered throughout a variety of specialist journals and books. With material gathered into one easy-to-use set, researchers and students can now spend more of their time with the key journal articles, book chapters, and other pieces, rather than on time-consuming (and sometimes fruitless) archival searches. Fully indexed and with a comprehensive introduction newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, James Joyce is an essential reference work and is destined to be valued as a vital research resource. September 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49182-2: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price: £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication) US $1,295.00

US $1,150.00

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Background 3. The Novels 4. The Poems October 2009: 198x129: 96pp Hb: 978-0-415-56243-0: £55.00

US $96.00

FORTHCOMING

Philip Roth Hermione Lee Series: Routledge Revivals

On its original publication in 1982 this book was the first full-length study of Philip Roth as a major twentieth-century writer. As well as setting the novelist’s work in the context of Jewish-American writing (and Jewish-American families) and twentiethcentury American politics, the book explores the characteristic paradoxes in Roth: self-disgust and self-consciousness, restraint and letting go, nausea and appetite, energy and frustration, stylishness and vulgarity, surrealism and the mundane. Roth is a highly literary and referential character and an assessment is made of the conflicting influences on his work of Kafka, Checkov, Gogol, Henry James, Melville and Henry Youngman, a Jewish nightclub and Vaudeville comic. In addition a close examination of his anxious, revolting, garrulous heroes, their mothers, their marriages, their shrinks, and their shiksas is undertaken and a deep seriousness is discovered, co-existing with Roth’s comic brashness and bravura. Selected Contents: 1. ‘Are you Finished?’ 2. ‘Nathan Dedalus’: Jewish Sons, Jewish Novelists, Jewish Jokes 3. ‘Beyond the Pale’: American Reality from the Second World War to Watergate 4. ‘You Must Change Your Life’: Mentors, Doubles and Literary Influences in the Search for Self 5. Finishing October 2009: 198x129: 100pp Hb: 978-0-415-56241-6: £55.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $96.00

LITERATURE

FORTHCOMING

Saul Bellow Malcolm Bradbury Series: Routledge Revivals

Bradbury draws attention to Bellow’s comedy, his sense of contemporary history and its stresses and anxieties, his attempt to sustain an adequate concept of the individual and the power of the imagination in an age of overwhelming concepts and notions of ‘Death of the Subject’. Above all, emphasis is placed on Bellow’s contemporaneity and significance, his role in the contemporary possibilities of the novel. Selected Contents: 1. Saul Bellow and the Contemporary Novel 2. The Forties Novels: Dangling Man and The Victim 3. The Fifties Novels: The Adventures of Augie March, Seize the Day, and Henderson the Rain King 4. The Sixties Novels: Herzog and Mr Sammler’s Planet 5. The ‘it’ and the ‘we’: Humboldt’s Gift and The Dean’s December 6. ‘A Nightmare During Which I’m Trying to get a Good Night’s Rest’: Conclusion US $96.00

FORTHCOMING

The Novels of Virginia Woolf

eBook

Literature in Protestant England, 1560–1660

Alan Sinfield, Sussex University, UK

This study of Saul Bellow, initially published in 1982, looks at this Nobel Prizewinning author as a leading figure in the development of contemporary fiction, one whose work has, however, been challenged by more experimental, ‘post-modern’ developments in the novel.

October 2009: 198x129: 114pp Hb: 978-0-415-56245-4: £55.00

NEW

Hermione Lee Series: Routledge Revivals This book, first published in 1977, is not about Bloomsbury, lesbianism, madness or suicide, but is a much-needed introduction to Virginia Woolf’s nine novels, written in the hope of turning attention back from the life to the fictional work. Its clarity and insights will make this book invaluable to a student embarking on a study of Virginia Woolf as a novelist, and to all those whose interest has been aroused by the continuing publication of biographical material. It will, moreover, increase the enjoyment, not only of enthusiasts, but also of those who have hitherto, found her a ‘difficult’ writer.

Series: Routledge Revivals The hardline, uncompromising theology preached by the English Church in the 16th and 17th Centuries had disturbing effects on the literature of the period. This study, originally published in 1983, assesses the importance of the prevailing religious climate to the work of several major writers, both in and out of sympathy with the contemporary protestantism. It is argued that the accepted view of the period as essentially ’Christian-Humanist’ obscures the harsher aspects of a Calvinism which throws into relief the agonies of a writer like Donne, and the acceptances of one like George Herbert. Many writers rejected more or less explicitly the Christian dogma, through the heroic assertion of human potential in Shakespearean and other dramatic characters, the nihilism of Marlowe, or the secular rationalism of Bacon and Hobbes. Milton is central to this complex weft of belief and rejection, piety and atheism, acceptance of predestination and determination to accept fate, that characterises the period. Finally, Sinfield shows how this protestantism disintegrated under the strain of internal contradictions and external pressures, and in the process helped to stimulate secularism. In this original and clearly written book, scholarship is deployed unobstrusively to place many major works in an unaccustomed and stimulating perspective. Selected Contents: 1. Theoretical Perspectives 2. Protestantism: A Belief of Contradictories 3. Puritan Humanists 4. Who Bids Abstain? 5. Heroic Assertion 6. Providence and Tragedy 7. The Reformation and Secular Society July 2009: 216x138: 172pp Hb: 978-0-415-55290-5: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87134-8

US $113.00

The Routledge Companion to Science Fiction Edited by Mark Bould, University of the West of England, UK, Andrew M. Butler, Canterbury Christ Church University, UK, Adam Roberts, Royal Holloway, University of London, UK and Sherryl Vint, Brock University, Canada Series: Routledge Literature Companions ‘Well designed for reference, for serendipitous browsing, or for systematic study, The Routledge Companion to Science Fiction will be welcomed by novice and veteran scholars alike.’ – Carl Freedman, Louisiana State University, USA The Routledge Companion to Science Fiction is a comprehensive overview of the history and study of science fiction. It outlines major writers, movements, and texts in the genre, established critical approaches and areas for future study. Fifty-six entries by a team of renowned international contributors are divided into four parts which look, in turn, at: • History – an integrated chronological narrative of the genre’s development • Theory – detailed accounts of major theoretical approaches including feminism, Marxism, psychoanalysis, cultural studies, postcolonialism, posthumanism and utopian studies • Issues and Challenges – anticipates future directions for study in areas as diverse as science studies, music, design, environmentalism, ethics and alterity • Subgenres – a prismatic view of the genre, tracing themes and developments within specific subgenres. Bringing into dialogue the many perspectives on the genre The Routledge Companion to Science Fiction is essential reading for anyone interested in the history and the future of science fiction and the way it is taught and studied. January 2009: 246x174: 576pp Hb: 978-0-415-45378-3: £90.00

US $150.00

Selected Contents: 1. The Voyage Out 1915 2. Night and Day 1919 3. Jacob’s Room 1922 4. Mrs Dalloway 1925 5. To the Lighthouse 1927 6. Orlando 1928 7. The Waves 1931 8. The Years 1937 9. Between the Acts 1941 October 2009: 198x129: 252pp Hb: 978-0-415-56242-3: £70.00

US $122.00

COMING SOON.... Routledge Literature Online! Including Bullough’s Shakespeare email: reference@routledge.co.uk for more details

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

Taylor and Francis Online Resources www.online.taylorandfrancis.com

THE ROUTLEDGE ENCYCLOPEDIA OF PHILOSOPHY ONLINE www.rep.routledge.com A dynamic online resource for researching, teaching and studying philosophy and related disciplines. The Routledge Encyclopedia of Philosophy Online provides instant access to more than 2,300 entries. Since its launch in 2001, REP Online grows each year with a diverse range of new material, providing impeccable scholarship in articles covering the latest developments in philosophical enquiry. With its easy, intuitive user environment and special resources for users at all levels, REP Online is a living, truly authoritative work that enriches the studies of academics, students and general readers worldwide. REP Online includes: • powerful search and advanced search options • ‘Signpost’ overview articles introducing the full breadth of key philosophical themes • an interactive Subject Guide, allowing users to scan a full list of entries concerned with a particular area, era, or school of philosophy • extensive cross-references and suggestions for further reading, and comprehensive critical bibliographies • fresh content and updates from our team of editors and subject specialists.

“

This easy-to-use resource will definitely become the first stop for philosophy research. Highly recommended for academic and medium to large public libraries.

”

– Library Journal

A Library Journal Best Web Reference

AY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY

Europa World and The Europa Regional Surveys of the World Online Europa World enables you to subscribe to The Europa World Year Book online together with as many of the nine Europa Regional Surveys of the World online as you choose, in one simple annual subscription. The Europa Regional Surveys of the World complement and expand upon the information in The Europa World Year Book with in-depth, expert analysis at regional, sub-regional and country level. • An interactive online library for all the countries and territories of each of the world regions • Impartial coverage of issues of regional importance from acknowledged experts • A vast range of up-to-date economic, political and statistical data • Book and periodical bibliographies direct you to further research • Extensive directory of research institutes specializing in the region • Ability to search by content type across regions • Thousands of click-through web links to external sites • Regular updates of key content.

Order your free trial today at: www.tinyurl.com/ewfreetrial

“Online access greatly enhances the utility and flexibility of this venerable reference tool.” – Choice

Europa Biographical Reference Online At the forefront of biographical reference, the World Who’s Who provides hard-to-find details for the most prominent and influential individuals around the world. • Includes around 60,000 entries from the entire Who’s Who series • Biographical data updated regularly, with daily updates of important political position changes and reported deaths of entrants • Thousands of new entries each year - Over 2,000 added in 2009 • Profiles of deceased personalities, in addition to the living individuals covered in the print Who’s Who • Provides personal contact details with direct links to websites and email addresses • Biographical entries are updated by the entrants themselves to ensure accuracy.

Order your free trial today at: www.tinyurl.com/wwwfreetrial

“Given the quick access and browse features, the electronic version of the index offers much for the researcher that is not possible with the print edition. Highly recommended for those in need of international biographical listings.” – Reference Reviews

The Europa World of Learning Online The Europa World of Learning Online provides a unique and invaluable source of global educational contacts. Hundreds of thousands of librarians, curators, university chancellors, presidents, rectors, professors and deans are included along with informative background data on the institutions concerned. Key Features: • Fully searchable by country, institution name, type, professorial subject specialization, and many more options • Updated four times a year • Contains around 40,000 clickable links to institutional sites • Fully networkable to allow multi-user access • An introductory section containing 18 essays of topical interest to the world of higher education

‘I can’t imagine why any library would not opt to give its users greater, enhanced access to valuable information via the web-based product. Highly recommended.’ – Reference Reviews Order your free trial today at: www.tinyurl.com/wolfreetrial

0 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 D

Routledge Online www.routledgeonline.com

www.routledgepoliticsonline.com

New Website Coming Soon!

Routledge Reference Resources Online are cross-searchable online subject libraries in the areas of Politics and Religion including reference essentials that have won critical accolades and places on the best reference lists, with new works and updates added every year. Soon they are being launched on a new platform – Routledge Online. Although, each of our new sites will be given a new separate URL – you will still be able to access all of the sites using www.reference.routledge.com. To mark the launch of our new platform, we are adding thousands of pages of new content as well as regular updates as new titles become available.

www.routledgereligiononline.com

Also coming soon, Routledge Music Online, including the Routledge Music Bibliographies, online for the first time.

To register your interest in these new sites, email reference@routledge.com www.routledgemusiconline.com

Armed Conflict Database www.iiss.org/acd The IISS Armed Conflict Database (ACD) is an authoritative and unique online source of data and independent analysis on current and recent conflicts. Features • contains the latest information on all conflicts, including political developments, military trends and the types of weapons being used • details on the parties involved, and analysis on the human impact – including fatality and refugee numbers • provides an historical background, event timeline and annual assessment for each conflict • a list of selected non-state armed groups, their estimated strength, origin, political or ideological aims, and areas of operation is also included. Functions • the user can either browse through the different year-onyear reports and fact sheets online or generate reports • the user can generate targeted reports on conflict data back to 1997 and correlate reports from various years, conflicts, regions and topics • the database is updated with current events once a month • the annual analyses are published each January.

DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DA

Taylor & Francis

www.ebooksubscriptions.com

eBooks Over 20,000 eBook titles in the Humanities, Social Sciences, Behavioural Sciences, STM and Law from some of the world’s leading imprints. Taylor & Francis eBooks allow you to maximise your resources effectively, with quick and efficient access to the right material at the right time, where and when you want it.

eCollections: Annual Subscription or Outright Purchase – the choice is yours

• NEW! Print up to 30 pages per eBook, per session

30 key eCollections are now available providing a comprehensive range of titles in each subject area. These can either be rented or purchased outright; enhancing the user-experience of any library. Coming soon: Architecture, Planning, Construction and Civil Engineering.

• Simultaneous publication with the print version

Pick and Mix: You Decide, We Provide

• MARC records provided FREE of charge for easy integration into your library’s catalogue

Pick and mix on a title-by-title basis or choose from a range of pre-selected subject packages (50-title minimum applies).

• Quick search across all metadata, advanced search across all full text

eBest-seller Packages

• Saved searches are an alternative way to keep up-to-date with a research topic

Our best-seller packages include 100 eBooks in each of the following subjects.

• DOIs at chapter level

• COUNTER compliant usage statistics

General Reference; Philosophy; Classics; History; Literature; Religion; Archaeology & Heritage; Media & Cultural Studies; Linguistics; Geography; Economics; Psychology; Psychotherapy & Jung; Business; Asian Studies; Politics; Sociology; Architecture & Building; Bioscience; Civil Engineering; Medicine & Pharmacology; Education Theory; Education Practice; Health & Society.

• Chapters may be viewed, downloaded or printed in PDF format.

NEW eBooks Archive and Subscription Packages

Purchase Options

When you subscribe to either of our unique archive and subscription packages, you will not only gain access to our most prestigious front list programmes digitally, you will also have access to free back list content worth over £160,000/$220.000!

Key Features:

• Book abstracts and table of contents listings are available free of charge through CrossRef on all titles • Athens Authentication and Shibboleth compliant

• Flat annual subscription fee per title with anytime start and the ability to change or swap titles on renewal • Outright purchase option with perpetual ownership. A minimum of 50-title initial purchase is required after which further individual titles can be purchased and added to your collection whenever you wish. A small maintenance fee is applicable but will be waived for those who purchase new content equal or greater in value to the fee

Our new archive and subscription packages are now available in the following subjects:

• Pricing based on the retail list price of each title’s hardcover edition.

• Political Science – includes 1,680 backlist titles, plus around 160 new books per year

• Business and Management – includes 2,052 backlist titles, plus around 250 new books per year

You also have the option to purchase or subscribe to any of the sub-sets within these packages.

CONTACT DETAILS For more information, pricing enquiries or to order a free trial of any of our online or eBook packages, please contact your local sales team. United States, Canada and South America Taylor & Francis Reference Online 270 Madison Ave. New York NY 10016 Tel: 1-888-318-2367 Fax: 212-244-1563 Email: e-reference@taylorandfrancis.com

UK and Rest of World

East/Southeast Asia

Taylor & Francis Reference Online 2 Park Square Milton Park, Abingdon OX14 4RN, UK Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6062 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6699 Email: online.sales@taylorandfrancis.com

Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific 240 MacPherson Road #08-01 Pines Industrial Building Singapore 348574 Tel: +65 6741 5166 ext. 113 Fax: +65 6742 9356 Email: don.low@tandf.com.sg

DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY FREE TRIALS AVAILABLE • 30 DAY

LITERATURE

6-VOLUME SET

10-VOLUME SET

Books for Children and Youth MW in Nineteenth-Century America Series II A Collection of Conduct Books for Young Women and Men in 19th-Century America Edited by Toshika Nonomura This is a facsimile reprint of fourteen books bound in six volumes. It is the second collection of the series of conduct books published in Victorian America. The collection includes fourteen items in total (including numerous illustrations and plates, reprinted here) which were originally published in the mid-nineteenth century mainly for a juvenile readership. It includes reading books, educational books, poetry books, and picture books by wellknown juvenile and educational book authors such as Lydia Sigourney, William Alcott, T. S. Arthur, and Horace Mann, among others. Like the first collection for small boys and girls, this collection juxtaposes the writings on women and men by the same author and tries to offer an interesting new perspective on gender studies as well as child studies. January 2009: 234x156: 3,300pp Hb: 978-4-86166-045-0: £795.00

Various

The Japan Weekly Mail, Series I: 1870–1899, Part 4, 1885–1889

Yokohama Archives This is the fourth part of the facsimile reprint series of the leading English newspaper published in Yokohama throughout the Meiji era. It represents a complete collection, provided by the Yokohama Archives of History and other institutions. Playing an important role for Meiji Japan’s exchange with western society, the journal contains articles on politics, commerce, and economics, and also on the cultural activities of early Japanologists and the Asiatic Society of Japan. Contributors include George Aston, Ernest Satow, Basil Hall Chamberlain, F. V. Dickins, Henry Dyer, William Anderson, and many others. It is an indispensable primary source for any scholar of Modern Japan. US $3,925.00

Today and Tomorrow 103 Titles Bound in 25 Volumes Various

Series: Routledge Library Editions This small collection of books originally published over sixty years brings back into print some valuable works. As well as examining the art of Dickens’ writing, the emphasis is on the social and political background of his times and the influence this had on his work. Selected Contents: Volume I: Dickens at Work Volume II: The Social Novel in England, 1830-1850 Volume III: The Imagination of Charles Dickens Volume IV: The Companion to Our Mutual Friend Volume V: Charles Dickens Volume VI: Dickens and the Twentieth Century Volume VII: The Days of Dickens: A Glance at Some Aspects of Early Victorian Life in London Volume VIII : The Dickens Encyclopaedia Volume IX : Dostoevsky and Dickens A Study of Literary Influence Volume X: Martin Chuzzlewit 2008: 246x174: 2,456pp Hb: 978-0-415-43595-6: £750.00

’That very lively and courageous series’ – The Spectator ’This admirable series of provocative and brilliant essays’ – Daily Telegraph This series, originally published in the 1920s and 1930s, includes work by some of the twentieth century’s most well-known thinkers, scientists, philosophers, doctors, critics and artists. When first published it was immediately recognized as a noteworthy event. Written from various points of view, with one books frequently opposing the argument of another, the volumes provide the reader with numerous aspects of modern thought. 2008: 216x138: 10,096pp Hb: 978-0-415-43596-3: £1,850.00 *Co-published in Japan with Edition Synapse US $3,700.00

US $1,350.00

Encyclopedia of Italian Literary Studies

2ND EDITION

Europa Directory of Literary Awards and Prizes

Edited by Gaetana Marrone and Paolo Puppa

A complete guide to the major awards and prizes of the literary world.

US $1,275.00

January 2009: 6,900pp Hb: 978-4-86166-023-8: £2,450.00

RLE

Charles Dickens

• an invaluable source of information on awards and prizes world-wide

2006: 1,504pp Hb: 978-1-57958-390-3: £335.00

US $505.00

J.R.R. Tolkien Encyclopedia Scholarship and Critical Assessment Edited by Michael D. C. Drout

• covers over 1,000 awards and prizes

2006: 808pp Hb: 978-0-415-96942-0: £125.00

• comprehensive background information on each award

Encyclopedia of Erotic Literature

• extensive contact details.

Edited by Gaëtan Brulotte and John Phillips

Contents

2006: 1,616pp Hb: 978-1-57958-441-2: £235.00

• includes internationally awarded prizes along with prestigious national awards • subject areas covered include adult and children’s fiction, non-fiction, poetry, lifetime’s achievement, translation and drama • information is provided on the history of each award, its purpose, what is awarded, how often the prize is awarded, eligibility and restrictions, the awarding organization and the most recent recipients • full contact details of the awarding organization are provided, including main contact name, postal address, e-mail and Internet address, telephone and fax numbers • fully indexed by keyword, awarding organization and award by subject. 2008: 234x156: 544pp Hb: 978-1-85743-490-3: £195.00

US $390.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $200.00

US $390.00

LITERATURE

MEDIA AND CULTURAL STUDIES

8-VOLUME SET

Robin Hood: Classic Fiction Library Edited by Stephen Knight Series: Routledge Library of Folklore and Popular Culture The Robin Hood tradition is best known in popular forms such as ballad, lyric, play, children’s story and, in our own era, television and film. There have, however, also been a significant number of novelists who have devoted themselves to retelling and reshaping the story. In particular, the nineteenth century provided some classical fictional reformulations of the outlaw saga, in which the hero and his activities were reinterpreted in ways relating to the concerns and values of the period. Robin appears, for instance, as a Gothic adventurer, a romantic hero, a lost heir, a precursor of Baden-Powell, and even as a loyal servant of parliamentary democracy in its alleged origin. The substantial novels that embody these conceptions of the outlaw are little known, and quite unavailable until now. This collection reprints these nineteenth-century texts and in doing so re-establishes for scholars and readers a largely lost element of the remarkably rich and ever-popular myth. Selected Contents: Robin Hood: A Tale of the Olden Time. Maid Marian Robin Hood and Little John, or, The Merry Men of Sherwood Forest. Forest Days. Maid Marian, or, The Forest Queen. Robin Hood and the Outlaws of Sherwood Forest. 2005: 216x138: 2,936pp Hb: 978-0-415-22002-6: £850.00

FORTHCOMING

Blacks in American Film, Television, and Video

4-VOLUME SET

Elizabeth Amelia Hadley, Simmons College, USA

Edited by John Feather, Loughborough University, UK

Blacks in American Film, Television, and Video presents the contributions of African-Americans in all forms of film throughout the history of the medium in the US, from cartoons to motion pictures, including documentaries, music videos, and commercials. This work examines the role of African-Americans, the cultural context in which the films were created, and their impact on the culture. Coverage includes essays, biographies, and film listings. This work is an essential reference for students and scholars doing research in various fields, including film studies, television history, African-American studies, and gender studies. It is of interest to lay readers as well, who are seeking information on the entertainment business and about African-American artists. December 2010: 800pp Hb: 978-0-415-96612-2: £95.00

US $150.00

FORTHCOMING

3-VOLUME SET

Orientalism Edited by Patrick Williams, Nottingham Trent University, UK Series: Critical Concepts in Literary and Cultural Studies

US $1,665.00

60-VOLUME SET

RLE

Shakespeare Various Series: Routledge Library Editions

Shakespeare has generated a critical literature that is unsurpassed in its richness and variety. Routledge has been responsible for a disproportionate share of this, especially through Methuen Academic, the original publisher of the Arden Shakespeare. Routledge Library Editions: Shakespeare will make up to sixty out of print titles on Shakespeare available again, and will reflect changing patterns in the reception and interpretation of Shakespeare over the last fifty years. Mini-sets are as follows: A: Comedies: 6-Volume Set: (978-0-415-35328-9) B: Critical Studies: 38-Volume Set: (978-0-415-35329-7) C: History and Politics: 6-Volume Set: (978-0-415-35330-0) D: Performance: 4-Volume Set: (978-0-415-35331-9) E: Tragedies: 8-Volume Set: (978-0-415-35332-7) 2004: 216x138 Hb: 978-0-415-33086-2: £4,975.00

FORTHCOMING

US $9,925.00

In the three decades since its publication, Edward Said’s Orientalism, and the body of knowledge which it analysed, have become a battleground. Here, fierce conflicts have raged—for example, over the relationship of texts to international politics, the nature and form of scholarship, and the role of the critic and the intellectual. As serious thinking in the area continues to flourish and develop, this new title in Routledge’s acclaimed Critical Concepts in Literary and Cultural Studies series meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output. Edited by a leading scholar, Orientalism is a threevolume collection of the best and most influential canonical and cutting-edge work in the field. With a full index, together with comprehensive introductions, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Orientalism is an essential work of reference. For the novice or advanced student, the collection will be particularly useful as an essential database allowing scattered and often fugitive material to be easily located. And, for the more advanced scholar, it will be welcomed as a crucial tool permitting rapid access to less familiar— and sometimes overlooked—texts. For both, Orientalism will be valued as a vital one-stop research and pedagogic resource.

Book Publishing Series: Critical Concepts in Media and Cultural Studies Books are the cornerstone of our culture. They disseminate ideas, and preserve and transmit literature. Their contents underpin great religions, and have been responsible for wars and revolutions. They lie at the heart of education and scholarship. They have brought pleasure (and some pain) to countless millions of people for nearly three millennia. The systematic study of books and the means by which they are created and distributed began in the eighteenth century, but it is only in the last 150 years or so that it has developed into an important field of scholarship. After an intellectual transformation in the last quarter of the twentieth century, the history of books—and particularly the commercial history of books—is now a vibrant and widely practised area of study and research. Literary scholars, historians, and many others in the humanities and social sciences, have a keen interest in how texts have reached us, how they were created, marketed and distributed, and what impact the commercial processes of publishing had on their contents. As serious academic work on and around publishing and the printed book continues to flourish as never before, this new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Media and Cultural Studies, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a growing and ever more complex corpus of literature, and to provide a map of the area as it has emerged and developed. It is a landmark collection of foundational and the best cutting-edge scholarship in the field and is organized in four volumes. For the novice or advanced student, the collection will be particularly useful as an essential database allowing scattered and often fugitive material to be easily located. And, for the more advanced scholar, it will be welcomed as a crucial tool permitting rapid access to less familiar—and sometimes overlooked— texts. For both, Book Publishing will be valued as a vital one-stop research and pedagogic resource. October 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49009-2: £650.00

US $1,075.00

Encyclopedia of Contemporary Chinese Culture

eBook

Edited by Edward L. Davis Series: Encyclopedias of Contemporary Culture 2004: 246x174: 824pp Hb: 978-0-415-24129-8: £150.00 eBook: 978-0-203-64506-2

US $285.00

November 2010: 234x156: 1,200pp Hb: 978-0-415-54717-8: £650.00 US $1,140.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

MEDIA AND CULTURAL STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

eBook

FORTHCOMING

eBook

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Communication Ethics

Handbook of Emotions and the Mass Media

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by George Cheney, University of Utah, USA Steve May, University of North Carolina, USA and Debashish Munshi, University of Waikato, New Zealand

Edited by Katrin Doveling, Christian von Scheve, both at Free University Berlin, Germany and Elly A. Konijn, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands

Edited by Neil Badmington, University of Cardiff, UK

Series: ICA Communication Series

The impact of the mass media on individuals and society is to a great extent based on human emotions. Emotions, in turn, are essential in understanding social behavior and public social life. This Handbook brings together the most current perspectives on these tightly intertwined and highly up-to-date issues. Leading international authorities in the fields of media and communication studies, psychology, sociology, and cultural studies provide a comprehensive overview of the various interrelations of the mass media and emotions. The Handbook systematically analyzes the role of emotions in mass media communications in a step-by-step fashion and on different levels of analysis: psychological, functional, socio-cultural, and technical. In six sections, the contributions address basic conceptual issues, emotions in reception processes, emotional goals and purposes of media communications, emotions as parts of media content, how medially communicated emotions structure and are structured by the socio-cultural environment, and how emotions are affected by innovative media technologies.

This Handbook will bridge ’explicit’ treatments of ethical issues in communication and ’implicit’ considerations of ethics, putting under one umbrella analyses and applications that draw upon recognized ethical theories and those which, while they do not cite traditional ethical theorists, nevertheless engage important questions of power, equality, and justice. Selected Contents: Introduction: Defining Our Terms— Communication Ethics, Communicating about Ethics, and Ethical Communication. Part 1: Theory Old and New Ethics and Communication in the Western Philosophical Tradition. Ethics, Rhetoric, and Discourse. Ethics and Dialogue. Feminist Ethics and Communication. Ethics, Power, and Authority. Ethics, Narrative, and Postmodernism. Postcolonial Explorations of Ethics. Part 2: Contexts of Application and Theory Development Interpersonal Communication. Group Communication in Natural and Experimental Settings. Organizational and Professional Communication. Journalism. New Technology/Media. Advertising, Public Relations, Marketing, and Integrated Communications. Visual Communication in Traditional and Digital Contexts. Law. Politics. Health Communication. Science Communication. Intercultural Communication. Part 3: Contemporary Issues Diversity, Multiculturalism, and Identity Politics. Peace, Nonviolence, Intervention, and Security. Democracy, Pluralism, Participation, and Global Governance. Religion, the State, and Secularism. Environmental Sustainability and Justice. Economic (In)equality. Corporate Social Responsibility and Economic Governance. International Legal Frameworks, Trade and Communication Networks. Globalization and ’Localization’. August 2010: 234x156: 560pp Hb: 978-0-415-99464-4: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-89040-0

Roland Barthes

Selected Contents: Part 1: Emotions in the Media: Display, Depiction, and Reception Part 2: Emotional Experience as a Result of Media Interaction Part 3: Form and Function: Emotion Elicitation Beyond the Message Part 4: Means and Ends: Instrumentalization of Emotions in the Mass Media Part 5: Mass Media and Public Emotions Part 6: Next Generation Media: Accounting for Emotional Needs March 2010: 234x156: 324pp Hb: 978-0-415-48160-1: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88539-0

US $180.00

US $200.00

NEW

eBook

The Handbook of Spanish Language Media Alan Albarran, University of North Texas, USA With the rise of Spanish language media around the world, no reference work is available that provides an overview of the field or its emerging issues. The Handbook of Spanish Language Media is intended to fill that need. The goal is to establish a Handbook that will become the definitive source for scholars interested in this emerging field of study; not only to provide background knowledge of the various issues and topics relevant to Spanish Language Media, but also to establish directions for future research in this rapidly growing area. This volume is an edited compilation, drawing on the expertise of authors and collaborators throughout the globe. The Handbook consists of three main sections: • overview of Spanish Language Media

Series: Critical Evaluations in Cultural Theory Thirty years ago the English-speaking world was discovering the work of some of the key poststructuralist theorists for the first time: Jacques Derrida’s Of Grammatology had just appeared in translation, as had Roland Barthes’ S/Z, Jacques Lacan’s Écrits, Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari’s Anti-Oedipus, Michel Foucault’s Discipline and Punish, and Pierre Macherey’s A Theory of Literary Production. English editions of Julia Kristeva’s Desire in Language and Jean-François Lyotard’s The Postmodern Condition were just around the corner. The subsequent ‘theory wars’ that raged on campuses in the 1980s are now generally seen as a thing of the past: poststructuralism is now, largely, a familiar and widely taught part of the academic landscape in the English-speaking world. Of all the poststructuralists, Roland Barthes (1915–80) is probably the most widely read. Mythologies has sold hundreds of thousands of copies in paperback and has never been out of print since it first appeared in English in 1972. And ‘The Death of the Author’, his short essay dating from 1968, is probably the most widely anthologized theoretical text of all. Moreover, even though he died over a quarter of a century ago, Barthes remains especially ‘alive’ to English-speaking audiences in that his voluminous writings are still being translated into English. Reflecting the vibrancy and dynamism of Barthes Studies, this four-volume collection, a new title in Routledge’s Critical Evaluations in Cultural Theory series, brings together the best and most influential cutting-edge and canonical research on Roland Barthes. The gathered materials address the full range of Barthes’ extremely diverse output to provide the definitive evaluation of his work. With a full index, together with a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Roland Barthes is an essential work of reference. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers as a vital research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I Section 1: Myth, Doxa, History Volume II Section 2: Writing/Reading Volume III Section 3: Love, Desire, Pleasure, Sex Section 4: Sound and Vision Volume IV Section 5: Queer Barthes Section 6: Imagining Others Section 7: The Late Roland Barthes November 2009: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47257-9: £650.00 US $1,295.00

• issues in Spanish Language Media • future directions in Spanish Language Media The work is an essential reference work for graduate students, professors, and media practitioners interested in Spanish Language Media, and is certain to influence the course of future research in this growing and increasing influential area. August 2009: 246x174: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-99044-8: £100.00 eBook: 978-0-203-92647-5

US $175.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

MEDIA AND CULTURAL STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

NEW

The Routledge Companion to News and Journalism

Routledge Handbook of Applied Communication Research

Sourcebook for Political Communication Research

Edited by Stuart Allan, Bournemouth University, UK

Edited by Lawrence R. Frey, University of Colorado at Boulder, USA and Kenneth N. Cissna, University of South Florida, USA

Methods, Measures, and Analytical Techniques

Series: Routledge Communication Series

The Routledge Handbook of Applied Communication Research provides a state-of-the-art review of communication scholarship that addresses real-world concerns, issues, and problems. This comprehensive examination of applied communication research—including its foundations, research methods employed, significant issues confronted, important contexts in which such research has been conducted, and overviews of some exemplary programs of applied communication research—shows how such research has and can make a difference in the world and in people’s lives.

The Sourcebook for Political Communication Research will offer scholars, students, researchers, and other interested readers a comprehensive source for state-of-the-art/field research methods, measures, and analytical techniques in the field of political communication.

eBook

The Routledge Companion to News and Journalism provides an authoritative and comprehensive assessment of the diverse forms of news media, including newspapers, radio, television, magazines, photojournalism, online news and beyond. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Evolving Ideals of Journalism 1. The Fourth Estate Ideal in Journalism History 2. Journalism, History and the Politics of Popular Culture 3. The Origins of Objectivity in American Journalism 4. Journalists and Their Professional Identities 5. The Changing Status of Women Journalists 6. Journalism and Its Publics: The Lippmann-Dewey Debate 7. Photojournalism: Historical Dimensions to Contemporary Debates 8. The Watchdog’s New Bark: Changing Forms of Investigative Reporting Part 2: News and Social Agendas 9. News and Democracy in the United States: Current Problems, Future Possibilities 10. The Press, Power and Public Accountability 11. Media Spectacle, Presidential Politics, and the Transformation of Journalism 12. International News Flow 13. Journalism and Political Change: The Case of China 14. Rethinking ’Development’ Journalism 15. Radio News: Re-imagining the Community 16. Alternative Journalism: Challenging Media Power Part 3: Newsmaking: Rules, Routines and Rituals 17. Journalists as Interpretive Communities, Revisited 18. Gatekeeping and News Selection as Symbolic Mediation 19. Journalism, News Sources and Public Relations 20. Journalism Ethics as Truth-Telling in the Public Interest 21. Making up the News: Journalists, Deviance and Social Control in News Production 22. Me, Me, Me: The Rise and Rise of Autobiographical Journalism 23. ’Delight in Trivial Controversy’? Questions for Sports Journalism 24. Journalism and Local Politics 25. Journalism and Convergence Culture 26. Journalism in the Network Part 4: Truths, Facts and Values 27. News as Culture 28. News and the Emotional Public Sphere 29. Race and Diversity in the News 30. Getting it Straight: Gay News Narratives and Changing Cultural Values 31. The Television News Interview: Questions of Discourse 32. Tabloidization of News 33. Television News in the Era of Global Infotainment 34. Real News/Fake News: Beyond the News/Entertainment Divide 35. Journalism in the Cinema Part 5: Making Sense of the News 36. Journalism and the Question of Citizenship 37. News, Audiences and the Construction of Public Knowledge 38. News Practices in Everyday Life: Beyond Audience Response 39. Living with News: Ethnographies of News Consumption 40. News Influence and the Global Mediasphere: A Case Study of Al-Jazeera English 41. Young Citizens and the News 42. News and Memory: Old and New Media Pasts Part 6: Crisis, Conflict and Controversy 43. Global Crises and World News Ecology 44. Reporting the Climate Change Crisis 45. News and Foreign Policy: Defining Influence, Balancing Power 46. Iconic Photojournalism and Absent Images: Democratization and Memories of Terror 47. Journalism and the Visual Politics of War and Conflict 48. Journalists and War Crimes 49. Peace Journalism Part 7: Journalism’s Futures 50. News in the Digital Age 51. Reassessing Journalism as a Profession 52. Citizen Journalism: Widening World Views, Extending Democracy 53. Newspapers, Labor and the Flux of Economic Uncertainty 54. Impartiality in Television News: Profitability Versus Public Service 55. Comparative News Media Systems: New Directions in Research 56. Studying Journalism: A Civic and a Literary Education October 2009: 246x174: 704pp Hb: 978-0-415-46529-8: £120.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86946-8

US $200.00

As an impressive benchmark in the ongoing growth and development of communication scholarship, editors Lawrence R. Frey and Kenneth N. Cissna provide an exceptional resource that will help new and experienced scholars alike to understand, appreciate, and conduct high-quality communication research that can positively affect people’s lives. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Foundations of Applied Communication Research 1. The Development of Applied Communication Research 2. Across Applied Divides: Great Debates of Applied Communication Scholarship 3. Practical Theory in Applied Communication Scholarship Part 2: Methods of Applied Communication Research 4. Using Quantitative Methods to Conduct Applied Communication Research 5. Rhetorical Methods of Applied Communication Scholarship 6. Ethnography in Applied Communication Research 7. Discourse Analysis: The Practice and Practical Value of Taping, Transcribing, and Analyzing Talk Part 3: Issues in Applied Communication Research 8. Positioning Gender as Fundamental in Applied Communication Research: Taking a Feminist Turn 9. Race as Political Identity: Problematic Issues for Applied Communication Research 10. Technology in/as Applied Communication Research 11. Managing a World of Problems: The Implications of Globalization for Applied Communication Research 12. Applied Communication Ethics: A Summary and Critique of the Research Literature Part 4: Contexts of Applied Communication Research 13. Family as Agency of Potential: Toward a Positive Ontology of Applied Family Communication Theory and Research 14. Organizational Communication and Applied Communication Research: Parallels, Intersections, Integration, and Engagement 15. In the Public Interest: Communication in Nonprofit Organizations 16. Health Communication as Applied Communication Inquiry 17. Communication in the Helping Professions 18. Aging and Applied Communication Research 19. Applied Political Communication Research 20. Applied Communication Research in Educational Contexts 21. Communication for Participatory Development: Dialogue, Action, and Change Part 5: Exemplary Programs of Applied Communication Research 22. Drug Resistance Strategies Project: Using Narrative Theory to Enhance Adolescents’ Communication Competence 23. Applied Research on Group Decision Support Systems: The Minnesota GDSS Project 24. Fear Appeals and Public Health: Managing Fear and Creating Hope 25. The Multiple Faces of the Public Dialogue Consortium: Scholars, Practitioners, and Dreamers of Better Social Worlds June 2009: 712pp Hb: 978-0-8058-4983-7: £140.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87164-5

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Erik Bucy, Indiana University, USA and R. Lance Holbert, University of Delaware, USA

Selected Contents: Introduction: Advancing Methods and Measurement in Political Communication Research Part 1: Survey Methodology 1. The Challenges and Benefits of Panel Designs 2. Strategies for Representative Web-Based Survey Designs 3. Problems with Probability Sampling and Response Rates: Cell Phone Use and Other Conundrums Part 2: Secondary Analysis and Meta Analysis in Political Communication 4. Reliability and Validity Issues Involved in Secondary Analyzes 5. Comparative Strengths and Weaknesses of ANES and NAES for Political Communication Scholarship 6. Advancing the Use of Meta-Analysis in Political Communication Research Part 3: Experimental Methods 7. Between Subjects and Repeated Measures Designs 8. Using the Web as a Tool for Experimental Research 9. Advancing the Study of Long-Term Experimental Effects Part 4: Content Analysis 10. Assessing Political Images and News Visuals 11. Framing Analysis in Political Communication Research: Issues and Opportunities 12. Advancements in Computerized Content Analysis Part 5: Discourse Analysis 13. Qualitative Focus Group Analysis 14. Linguistic Approaches to Discourse Analysis 15. Textual Analysis of Presidential Communication Part 6: Network and Deliberation Analyses 16. Network Analysis in Political Communication 17. Online Deliberation Analysis 18. Levels of Analysis Issues in the Study of Political Communication Networks Part 7: Comparative Political Communication Methods 19. Advancing Comparative Political Communication Methods: A European Perspective 20. Advancing Comparative Political Communication Methods: An Asian Perspective 21. Methodological Issues Involved in Comparing Non-Democratic, Emerging Democratic, and Established Democratic States Part 8: Statistical Techniques 22. Structural Equation Modeling for Political Communication 23. Hierarchical Linear Modeling for Political Communication 24. Assessment of Mediation Models in Political Communication Part 9: Measurement Issues 25. Explication and Scale Construction in Political Communication Research 26. Physiological Measurement for Political Communication 27. Using Neuroscience and fMRI to Study Political Phenomena Conclusion: The Role of Method in Advancing Political Communication Research June 2009: 456pp Hb: 978-0-415-96495-1: £43.99

US $70.00

US $250.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

MEDIA AND CULTURAL STUDIES

NEW

Communication Yearbook 33

2ND EDITION

Bridging the Gap

Edited by Christina S. Beck, Ohio State University, USA

The Global Public Relations Handbook, Revised and Expanded Edition

Connecting Users to Digital Contents Edited by Sul H. Lee, University of Oklahoma, USA The amount of digital information that libraries need to manage effectively for the benefit of users is constantly increasing. This book discusses in detail how library administrators can better handle this growing abundance of information, as well as effective ways to allow library users easy access. Respected leaders in the field of librarianship explore various aspects of how librarians are meeting the challenges of delivering more digital information to a changing user base, including preservation demands, licensing agreements, digitizing and making available collections unique to specific libraries, and providing more personalized digital services to library users. This book focuses on timely issues that impact how libraries are administered and viewed by both librarians and by users. This innovative book discusses practical ways to provide remote access and services to digital resources, support the preservation of digital resources, understand their library users who prefer the digital information format, and reshape the traditional library for better digital access. The book is carefully referenced and includes helpful illustrations. The book is a valuable resource for senior and midlevel library administrators, including deans, directors, and department heads, of public, special and academic libraries. This book was published as a special issue of the Journal of Library Administration. September 2009: 234x156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-7890-3786-2: £75.00 US $125.00

The Communication Yearbook annuals publish diverse, state-of-the-discipline literature reviews across the field of communication. Sponsored by the International Communication Association, volumes offer insightful descriptions of research as well as reflections on the implications of those findings for other areas of the discipline. Editor Christina S. Beck presents a diverse, international selection of articles that highlight empirical and theoretical intersections in the communication discipline. April 2009: 536pp Hb: 978-0-415-99961-8: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87156-0

US $150.00

Critical Thinking Within the Library Program Edited by John Spencer, University of Gonzaga, USA and Christopher Millson-Martula, Lynchburg College Library, USA While academic librarians frequently discuss critical thinking and its relationship to information literacy, the literature does not contain an abundance of sources on the topic. Therefore, this works provides a current and timely perspective on the possible roles of critical thinking within the library program. The work contains a variety of approaches likely to benefit the practicing librarian. It begins with a review of the literature, followed by theoretical approaches involving constructivism and the Socratic method. Readers will find pieces on the integration of critical thinking into the first-year experience and course-specific case studies, as well as a selection on a campus-wide critical thinking project. In each of the pieces, librarians are exploring new ways to meet their instructional goals, including the goal of teaching critical thinking skills to students across the curriculum. This book was originally published as a special issue of College & Undergraduate Libraries. January 2009: 264pp Hb: 978-0-415-99838-3: £85.00

US $125.00

For more information about our eBooks in Media, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

eBook

Theory, Research, and Practice Edited by Krishnamurthy Sriramesh, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore and Dejan Vercic The Global Public Relations Handbook, Revised and ExpandedEdition extends the discussion in the first volume on the history, development, and current status of the public relations industry from a global perspective. Selected Contents: Section 1: Global Public Relations: Conceptual Framework 1. A Theoretical Framework for Global Public Relations Research and Practice 2. Political Economy and Public Relations 3. Culture and Public Relations 4. The Mass Media and Public Relations 5. Activism and Public Relations Section 2: Asia and Australasia 6. Public Relations in Australasia: Friendly rivalry, Cultural diversity and a Global focus 7. An Overview of Public Relations in Japan and the ’Self-Correction’ Concept 8. Professionalism and Diversification: The Evolution of Public Relations in South Korea 9. Becoming professionals: A portrait of public relations in Singapore 10. Public Relations in Mainland China: An Adolescent with growing pains 11. Sharing the Transformation: Public Relations and the UAE Come of Age 12. Public Relations in Palestine: Inside and Out 13. The Israeli Public Relations Experience: Nation building and Professional Values Section 3: Africa 14. The Nature and Status of Public Relations in Africa 15. Public Relations in Nigeria 16. The Status of Public Relations in Kenya 17. Public relations in South Africa: From Rhetoric to Reality 18. Public Relations in Egypt: Practices and Obstacles Section 4: Europe 19. The United Kingdom: Advances in Practice in a Restless Kingdom 20. From ’Literary Bureaus’ to a Modern Profession: The Development and Current Structure of Public Relations in Germany 21. Public Relations in Norway: Communication in a Small Welfare State 22. Public Relations in the Polder: The Case of the Netherlands 23. Public Relations in Sweden: A Strong Presence, Increasing in Importance 24. Public Relations in Italy: Masters of Ceremony in a Relational Society 25. Public Relations in an Economy and Society in Transition: The Case of Poland 26. Public Relations in a Corporativist Country: The Case of Slovenia Dejan Vercic 27. Challenges of Revived Democracies: The rise of public relations in Romania 28. A Hungarian Rhapsody: The Evolution and Current State of Hungarian Public Relations 29. The Development of Public Relations in Russia: A Geopolitical Approach Section 5: The Americas 30. Public Relations in the United States: A Generation of Maturation 31. A Different Country, A Different Public Relations: Canadian PR in the North American Context 32. Public Relations in México: From amateurism to professionalism 33. Overview of Public Relations in South America 34. Public Relations in Brazil: Practice and Education in a South American Context 35. Public Relations in Chile: Searching for Identity Amid Imported Models Section 6: International Public Relations: Key Dimensions and Actors 36. Transnational Public Relations by Foreign Governments 37. Public Relations of ’Movers and Shakers:’ Transnational Corporations 38. Non-Governmental Organizations and International Public Relations 39. Public Relations, Public Diplomacy, and Strategic communication 40. Sustainable Development in Sub-Saharan Africa: A Communication Ethic for the Global Corporation 41. Managing Your Global Reputation: The Public Relations Agency 42. Public Information in the UNESCO: Progress Toward a Strategic Role 43. The United Nations Department of Public Information: Intractable Dilemmas and Fundamental Contradictions 44. The Missing Link: Multiculturalism and Public Relations Education January 2009: 992pp Hb: 978-0-415-99513-9: £190.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88937-4

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $300.00

MEDIA AND CULTURAL STUDIES

PHILOSOPHY

Encyclopedia of American Journalism

FORTHCOMING

Edited by Stephen L. Vaughn

The Philosophy of Race

2007: 276x219: 664pp Hb: 978-0-415-96950-5: £125.00

US $200.00

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Paul C. Taylor, Temple University, USA Series: Critical Concepts in Philosophy

Encyclopedia of NineteenthCentury Photography Edited by John Hannavy 2007: 276x219: 1,736pp Hb: 978-0-415-97235-2: £315.00

US $545.00

3-VOLUME SET

Encyclopedia of Twentieth-Century Photography Edited by Lynne Warren 2005: 2,042pp Hb: 978-1-57958-393-4: £290.00

US $575.00

3-VOLUME SET

Encyclopedia of the Documentary Film Edited by Ian Aitken 2005: 1,968pp Hb: 978-1-57958-445-0: £365.00

US $640.00

Encyclopedia of American Gospel Music Edited by W. K. McNeil 2005: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-94179-2: £100.00

US $160.00

2-VOLUME SET

Encyclopedia of Modern Jewish Culture Edited by Glenda Abramson 2004: 246x174: 1,200pp eBook: 978-0-203-49435-6

Since at least the early 1990s, philosophical race theory has emerged as a dynamic and fertile area of serious scholarly inquiry, and this new four-volume Major Work from Routledge meets the need for a comprehensive collection to faciliate ready access to the most influential and important foundational and cutting-edge scholarship. The Philsophy of Race is edited by Paul C. Taylor, a leading scholar in the field. The collection is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the material in its intellectual and historic context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research resource. October 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49602-5: £650.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

The Routledge Companion to Philosophy and Music Edited by Andrew Kania, Trinity University, USA and Theodore Gracyk, Minnesota State University, USA Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions The Routledge Companion to Philosophy and Music is an outstanding guide and reference source to the key topics, subjects, thinkers and debates in philosophy and music. The Routledge Companion to Philosophy and Music is essential reading for anyone interested in philosophy, music and musicology. Selected Contents: 1. Music Education 2. Phenomenology and Music 3. Early Modern Philosophy and Music 4. Song 5. Improvisation 6. Jazz 7. Music’s arousal of Emotions 8. Gurney 9. Ontology 10. Music and Motion Pictures 11. Nietzsche 12. Tonality 13. Psychology of music 14. Music and Politics 15. Music as an Artistic Medium 16. Notation 17. Analytic Philosophy and Music 18. Musical Beauty, Sublimity, and Aesthetic Properties 19. Analysis 20. Music and Evolution 21. Ethnomusicology 22. Folk and Popular Music 23. Kant 24. The Value of Music 25. Evaluating Music 26. Hanslick 27. Wagner 28. Plato 29. Adorno 30. Sociology and Cultural Studies 31. Visual Music and Synesthesia 32. Understanding Music 33. Music and Language 34. Silence, Sound, Noise, and Music 35. Style 36. Definition of ’Music’ 37. Theory 38. Musicology 39. Ancient and Medieval 40. Arousalist Theories of Musical Expression 41. Music, Philosophy, and Gender 42. Performances and Recordings 43. Rock 44. Schopenhauer 45. Nineteenth Century 46. Music, Philosophy, and Cognitive Science 47. Expression Theories 48. Continental Philosophy and Music 49. Rousseau 50. Melody, Harmony, and Rhythm 51. Composition 52. Music and Dance 53. Authentic Performance Practice 54. Opera 55. Music and Imagination 56. Resemblance Theories 57. Appropriation and Hybridity 58. Music: Instrument, Machine, Technology

+44 (0)1235 400524

The Routledge Handbook of German Idealism Edited by Brian O’Connor, University College Dublin, Ireland, Michael Rosen, Lincoln College Oxford, UK and Hans Jörg Sandkühler, Breman University, Germany The course of German Idealism, which lasted from roughly from Kant to Schelling, is one of the most important and influential periods in the history of philosophy. The Routledge Handbook of German Idealism is a superb resource for all students and scholars of the movement. September 2010: 246x174: 600pp Hb: 978-0-415-45392-9: £95.00 US $170.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Companion to Ethics Edited by John Skorupski, University of St. Andrews, UK Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions

US $1,075.00

FORTHCOMING

October 2010: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-415-48603-3: £95.00

FORTHCOMING

Selected Contents: Part 1: History 1. Ethical thought in China 2. Ethical Thought in India 3. Plato and Socrates 4. Aristotle 5. Later Ancient Ethics 6. The Arabic Tradition 7. Mediaeval Ethics 8. Natural Law 9. Hobbes 10. Ethics and Reason 11. Ethics and Sentiment 12. Hume 13. Utilitarianism to Bentham 14. Kant 15. Hegel 16. Mill 17. Green, Bradley and Sidgwick 18. Nietzsche 19. Pragmatism (to Rorty) 20. Existentialism 21. Heidegger Part 2: Meta-ethics 22. Ethics, Religion, Science 23. ‘Open question’ Arguments, Supervenience, Universalisability 24. Reasons for Action 25. Freedom and Responsibility 26. Non-cognitivism 27. Realism 28. Relativism 29. Cognitivism without Realism 30. Error Theory and Fictionalism Part 3: Ideas and Methods from Outside Ethics 31. Social Anthropology 32. Psychology 33. Biology 34. Formal Methods in Ethics 35. Ethics and Law Part 4: Perspectives in ethics 36. Reasons, Values and Morality 37. Consequentialism 38. Contemporary Kantian Ethics 39. Intuitionism [Moral pluralism] 40. Virtue Ethics 41. Contractualism 42. Contemporary Natural Law Theory 43. Feminist Ethics 44. Ethics and Aesthetics Part 5: Morality 45. Morality and its Critics 46. Conscience, Integrity 47. Moral Identity, Narrative 48. Recognition, Respect 49. Blame, Remorse, Mercy, Forgiveness 50. Evil 51. Responsibility: Intention and consequence 52. Responsibility: Act and Omission 53. Partiality and Impartiality 54. Particularism and principles Part 6: Debates in Ethics 55. The Ends of Life (Welfarism) 56. Ideals of Living (Perfectionism) 57. Rights 58. Justice and Punishment 59. Justice and Distribution 60. Life and Death 61. Beginning Life (the ethics of reproduction) 62. Ending Life 63. Population 64. Animals 65. Environment 66. The Ethics of Free Speech 67. The Ethics of Research 68. World Poverty 69. War 70. Terrorism and Torture April 2010: 246x174: 760pp Hb: 978-0-415-41362-6: £95.00

US $190.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

PHILOSOPHY

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Companion to Nineteenth Century Philosophy

4-VOLUME SET

Richard Rorty

Friedrich Nietzsche

Edited by Dean Moyar, Johns Hopkins University, USA

Edited by James Tartaglia, University of Keele, UK

Various

Series: Critical Assessments of Leading Philosophers

Series: Routledge Library Editions

Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions The nineteenth century is a period of stunning philosophical originality, characterised by radical engagement with the emerging human sciences. Often overshadowed by twentieth century philosophy which sought to reject some of its central tenets, the philosophers of the nineteenth century have re-emerged as profoundly important figures. The Routledge Companion to Nineteenth Century Philosophy is an outstanding survey and assessment of the century as a whole. The Routledge Companion to Nineteenth Century Philosophy is essential reading for students of philosophy, and for anyone interested in this period in related disciplines such as politics, history, literature and religion. Selected Contents: Introduction Dean Moyar Part 1: German Idealism 1. Self-Consciousness, System, Dialectic Scott Jenkins 2. Epistemology in German Idealism Dietmar Heidemann 3. The Philosophy of Nature of Kant Schelling and Hegel Dieter Wandschneider 4. The Moral Theory of German Idealism Allen Wood 5. The Political Theory of Kant, Fichte and Hegel Dean Moyar 6. The Aesthetics of Schelling and Hegel Rachel Zuckert Part 2: Philosophy as Political Action 7. After Hegel: The Actualization of Philosophy in the Deed Michael Quante 8. Karl Marx Tony Smith 9. Tocqueville, Social Science, and Democracy Jon Elster Part 3: Rethinking the Subject 10. Early German Romanticism: the Challenge of Philosophizing Jane Kneller 11. Schopenhauer David Wellbery 12. Kierkegaard and German Idealism Merold Westphal 13. Nietzsche Ken Gemes and Chris Sykes 14. Bergson Keith Ansell-Pearson Part 4: Engaging Naturalism 15. Comte’s Positivist Dream, Our Post-Positivist Burden Robert Scharff 16. Darwin’s Philosophical Impact Richard Richards 17. The Philosophy of Race in the Nineteenth Century Robert Bernasconi 18. Psychology and Philosophy Gary Hatfield 19. Dilthey and the NeoKantians: The Dispute Over the Status of the Human and Cultural Sciences Rudolph Makkreel and Sebastian Luft Part 5: Utilitarianism and British Idealism 20. Mill: Logic and Metaphysics Fred Wilson 21. Mill’s Consequentialism Phillip Kitcher 22. British Idealism: Theoretical Philosophy Stewart Candlish 23. The British Idealists: Practical Philosophy and Social Responsibility David Boucher Part 6: American Pragmatism and Idealism 24. C.S. Peirce Vincent Colapietro 25. William James Robert Burch 26. Josiah Royce David Schweikard Part 7: New Directions in Philosophy of Mind and Logic 27. Post-Kantian Logical Radicalism Stephan Käufer 28. Franz Brentano Peter Simons 29. Gottlob Frege Kevin Klement 30. Edmund Husserl Christian Beyer April 2010: 246x174: 800pp Hb: 978-0-415-40450-1: £95.00

US $190.00

Richard Rorty (1931–2007) remains one of the contemporary world’s most influential thinkers. He has been a major figure in philosophy ever since the publication of his first important paper, ‘Mind-Body Identity, Privacy, and Categories’ in 1965, but it was the release of his seminal Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature (1979) that caused the literature on his work to expand exponentially, a process which has accelerated since his death in 2007; scores of new articles and books about Rorty appear every year, and even his biography has proved to be an academic bestseller. Rorty’s enduring appeal has a number of sources. One is the scope and urgency of his views, for he was never shy about presenting his call for the abandonment of objective truth against the grand backdrop of the cultural progress of the West. Another is that his views were highly controversial, and yet could not be easily dismissed, since Rorty was able to claim with some plausibility that he was simply drawing out the consequences of positions developed by his more conventionally respectable peers. And another is that Rorty applied his views to a wide range of topical concerns outside of academic philosophy. For these and many other reasons, philosophers to this day line up to refute him, students read Rorty before the philosophers he discusses, and non-philosophy academics produce a continuous stream of articles applying his views to their own interests. The daunting quantity (and variable quality) of literature available on Rorty makes it difficult to discriminate the useful from the tendentious, superficial, and otiose. That is why this new title in the highly regarded Routledge series, Critical Assessments of Leading Philosophers, is so urgently needed. Edited by James Tartaglia, the author of Rorty and the Mirror of Nature (Routledge, 2007), one of the most popular and straightforward books available on Rorty, this new Routledge Major Work is a four-volume collection of the best scholarship from the 1960s to the present day; the collected materials have been carefully selected from a wide range of academic journals, edited collections, and research monographs, many of which are hard to obtain in their original source. The tightly focused organization of this collection will allow scholars quickly and easily to access both established and up-to-date assessments of Rorty’s central positions, and will also make for irresistible browsing. Selected Contents: Volume I: Mind, Language and Truth Richard Rorty. Mind. Language. Truth. Volume II: Metaphilosophy and Pragmatism Reviews of Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature. Metaphilosophy. Pragmatism. Volume III: Philosophers Davidson. Dennett. Derrida. Dewey Gadamer. Habermas. Hegel. Heidegger Nietzsche. Peirce Plato. Putnam. Wittgenstein. Volume IV: Themes. Bioethics Chinese Philosophy. Environmental Philosophy. Ethnocentrism. Feminism. Irony. Literature. Moral Philosophy. Nihilism. Politics. Religion. Social Science. December 2009: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49004-7: £650.00

FORTHCOMING

RLE

6-VOLUME SET

This six-volume Routledge Library Edition set is dedicated to the work of key nineteenth-century German thinker, Friedrich Nietzsche, whose hugely influential work in the field of philosophy continues to be felt to this day. The six volumes, published between 1948 and 1988, represent a truly wideranging analysis of Nietzsche’s life and work, offering an excellent overview of the cannon of critical analysis and interpretation on Nietzsche in the twentieth century. The collection covers Nietzsche’s perspectives and influence upon a variety of sociological and philosophical debates, as well as placing his work in the context of contemporaries such as Richard Wagner, Fyodor Dostoyevsky and Max Stirner. Selected Contents: Volume 1: Break-out from the Crystal Palace Volume 2: Authenticity and Learning Volume 3: Nietzsche, Wagner and the Philosophy of Pessimism Volume 4: Exceedingly Nietzsche Volume 5: Nietzsche: An Approach Volume 6: Nietzsche: Imagery and Thought December 2009: 216x138: 1,350pp Hb: 978-0-415-56149-5: £375.00 US $658.00

FORTHCOMING

Waiting on God Simone Weil Series: Routledge Revivals

A work first published in English in 1951, Waiting on God forms the best possible introduction to the work of Simone Weil, for it brings us into direct contact with this amazing personality, at once so pure, so ardent, so utterly sincere, yet normally so reserved that only her closest friends guessed the secrets of her inner life. The first part of the book concerns her letters written to the Reverend Father Perrin, O.P., who befriended her at Marseilles and, the only priest she knew, became her intimate friend. The second part of the book concerns essays and reflections on such subjects as education, human affliction and the love of God, prayer, and forms of the implicit love of God. Selected Contents: Part 1: Letters 1. Hesitations Concerning Baptism 2. Same Subject 3. About her Departure Part 2: Letters of Farewell 4. Her spiritual Autobiography 5. Her Intellectual Vocation 6. Last Thoughts Part 3: Essays 7. Reflections on the Right use of School Studies with a View to the Love of God 8. The Love of God and Affliction 9. Forms of the Implicit love of God 10. The Love of Our Neighbour 11. Love of the Order of the World 12. The Love of Religious Practices 13. Friendship 14. Implicit and Explicit Love 15. Concerning the ’Our Father’ 16. The Three Sons of Noah and the History of Mediterrean Civilisation October 2009: 216x138: 194pp Hb: 978-0-415-56238-6: £65.00

US $1,075.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $113.00

PHILOSOPHY

FORTHCOMING

Formative Writings

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Simone Weil

Philosophy of Mind

Philosophy of Religion

Series: Routledge Revivals

Edited by Sean Crawford, University of Manchester, UK

Edited by William J. Wainwright, University of Wisconsin, USA

Series: Critical Concepts in Philosophy

Philosophy of Mind is concerned with fundamental issues about the relation between mind and body and mind and world, and with the nature of the diverse variety of mental phenomena, such as thought, self-knowledge, consciousness, perception, sensation, and emotion. Philosophers of mind explore some of the most perplexing questions about our mental lives. For instance:

The past forty years or so have witnessed a renaissance in the philosophy of religion. New tools (modal logic, probability theory, and so on) and new historical research have prompted many thinkers to take a fresh look at old topics (God’s existence, the problem of evil, faith and reason, and the like). Moreover, sophisticated examinations of contentious new issues, such as the problem of religious diversity or the role of emotions and other non-evidential factors in shaping rationally held religious beliefs, have also emerged.

This volume, first published in English in 1987 makes available an important part of Weil’s early writings. Although primarily known as a religious thinker, she devoted enormous energy in her formative years to her work as a political activist and as a philosopher/teacher. This book reveals these other sides of Weil and demonstrates the lines of continuity underlying her whole thought. Written between 1929 and 1941 the book covers a crucial and transitional period in Weil’s life. Taken together they represent invaluable primary source material on the evolution of Weil’s life and on her chosen method of abstracting elements from her personal experience and transmuting that experience into considered thought. Even when highly theoretical, her writing was always concerned with the application of her intelligence to concrete problems of human existence. Selected Contents: 1. Preface 2. Introduction 3. Science and Perception in Descartes 4. The Situation in Germany 5. Factory Journal 6. War and Peace 7. Philosophy. October 2009: 216x138: 308pp Hb: 978-0-415-56239-3: £75.00

US $131.00

NEW

The Origin of Our Knowledge of Right and Wrong

Franz Brentano Series: Routledge Revivals Based on a lecture given before the Vienna Law Society in 1889, this title had an extraordinary influence in the field of philosophy. It provided the basis for the theory of value as this was developed by Meinong, Husserl and Scheler. In addition, the doctrine of intentionality that is presented here is central to contemporary philosophy of mind. Selected Contents: 1. The Lecture: The Origin of Our Knowledge of Right and Wrong 2. Supplementary Notes 3. Appendices 4. Introduction to the 1934 Edition by Oscar Kraus July 2009: 216x138: 188pp Hb: 978-0-415-55739-9: £65.00

• How exactly is the mental related to the physical? • How is it that our thoughts can reach out to reality and refer to objects distant in time and space? • What is consciousness? Can it be explained by science? • How is thought related to language? • Can animals think? • Is there some one thing, some special property, that all mental phenomena share that distinguishes them from non-mental phenomena? • To what extent has the computer helped us to understand the nature of mind? • Does emotion play a larger role in our rationality that has previously been thought? For as long as humanity has sought an understanding of its place in the universe, philosophy of mind has been at the centre of philosophy, but it flourishes now as it has never done before. This new title in the Routledge’s Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Philosophy, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s enormous literature and the continuing explosion in research output. Edited by Sean Crawford, a prominent scholar in the field, it is a four-volume collection of classic and contemporary contributions to all of the major debates in philosophy of mind. With comprehensive introductions to each volume, newly written by the editor, which place the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Philosophy of Mind is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by philosophers of mind—as well as those working in allied areas such as metaphysics, epistemology, and philosophy of language; and cognate disciplines such as psychology—as a vital research tool.

Addressing the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of this rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of scholarly literature, Philosophy of Religion is a new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Philosophy. The Philosophy of Religion is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the material in its historical and intellectual context. Selected Contents: Volume I 1. Concepts of God 2. God’s Knowledge 3. God’s Power 4. God’s ‘Metaphysical’ Attributes 5. Onto-Theology Volume II 6. Arguments for the Existence of God 7. The Ontological Argument 8. The Cosmological Argument 9. Design Arguments 10. The Problem of Evil 11. Divine Hiddenness Volume III 12. Religious Experience 13. Faith and Reason 14. Religious Language Volume IV 15. Pragmatic Arguments for Religious Belief 16. Religious Diversity and Rational Religious Belief 17. Tolerance and the Public Role of Religion August 2009: 234x156 Hb: 978-0-415-44210-7: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price: £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication) US $1,295.00

US $1,150.00

NEW

The Foundation and Construction of Ethics Franz Brentano Series: Routledge Revivals

Expanding on the theory of ethics first posited by Brentano in The Origin of our Knowledge of Right and Wrong this re-issued work, first published posthumously in 1952, is based on series of lectures on practical philosophy, given at the university of Vienna from 1876 to 1894.

Selected Contents: Volume I: Foundations Volume II: The Mind–Body Problem Volume III: Intentionality Volume IV: Consciousness April 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47191-6: £650.00

US $1,295.00

US$113.00

The English-speaking reader will find it interesting to examine the step-by-step development of Brentano’s ethical theory, his extensive critique of British moral philosophers, and his unusually detailed section on casuistry.

For more information about Routledge Encylopedia of Philosophy Online, please see the online section in the middle of the catalogue

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Principles of Ethical Knowledge Part 2: The Supreme Practical Good Part 3: The Freedom of the Will Part 4: Morality in General Part 5: Individual Moral Precepts Part 6: Realizing Moral Precepts July 2009: 216x138: 402pp Hb: 978-0-415-55740-5: £80.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $140.00

www.routledge.com/reference

PHILOSOPHY

NEW

Leonardo, Descartes, Max Weber

The Routledge Companion to Philosophy of Psychology

34-VOLUME SET

Edited by John Symons, University of Texas, USA and Paco Calvo, University of Murcia, Spain

Three Essays

Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions

Karl Jaspers Series: Routledge Revivals First published in 1965, this collection of three essays by influential German philosopher Karl Jaspers deals with the response of the philosophical mind to the world of reality, with the search for truth. In Leonardo, this search is shown in the thinking and the works of a supreme artist whose means of apperception are the senses. The essay on Max Weber commemorates a man Jaspers knew personally and ardently admired. The main essay in the collection is an exhaustive, three part study of Descartes: analyzing Descartes’ new philosophical operation, Descartes’ Method, and the position of his philosophy within the wider historical context of philosophical thought. Selected Contents: Part 1: Leonardo as Philosopher Part 2: Descartes and Philosophy Part 3: Max Weber as Politician, Scientist, Philosopher July 2009: 216x138: 286pp Hb: 978-0-415-55735-1: £75.00

US $131.00

NEW

eBook

Lukács and Heidegger

Towards a New Philosophy Lucien Goldmann This text re-issues an important work by Lucien Goldmann, based on his university lectures from 1967–8, and first published in English in 1977. It focuses upon two of the twentieth century’s most important philosophers, György Lukács and Martin Heidegger, demonstrating the origins of existentialist thought in the implicit connection between the two. This book represents the application of methodology already developed in The Hidden God and also sees Goldmann elaborating the differences between himself and Lukács for the sake of defining his own Marxist perspective.

The Routledge Companion to Philosophy of Psychology is an invaluable guide and reference source to the major topics, problems, concepts and debates in philosophy of psychology and is the first companion of its kind. Selected Contents: Part 1: Historical Background to the Philosophy of Psychology 1. Rationalist Roots of Modern Psychology 2. Empiricist Roots of Modern Psychology 3. Early Experimental Psychology 4. Freud and the Unconscious 5. The Early History of the quale and its Relation to the Senses 6. Behaviourism 7. Cognitivism Part 2: Psychological Explanation 8. What is Psychological Explanation? 9. Is Folk Psychology a Theory? 10. Computational Functionalism 11. The Interface Between Psychology and Neuroscience 12. Connectionism 13. Embodied Cognition and the Extended Mind 14. Conceptual Problems in Statistics, Testing and Experimentation Part 3: Cognition and Representation 15. Problems of Representation 1: Nature and Role 16. Problems of Representation 2: Naturalizing Content 17. The Language of Thought 18. Modularity 19. Nativism 20. Memory 21. Interactivism 22. The Propositional Imagination Part 4: The Biological Basis of Psychology 23. Representation and the Brain 24. Levels of Mechanisms: A Field Guide to the Hierarchical Structure of the World 25. Cellular and Subcellular Neuroscience 26. Evolutionary Models in Psychology 27. Development and Learning 28. Understanding Embodied Cognition through Dynamical Systems Thinking Part 5: Perceptual Experience 29. Consciousness 30. Attention 31. Introspection 32. Dreaming 33. Emotion 34. Vision 35. Color 36. Audition 37. The Temporal Content of Perceptual Experience Part 6: Personhood 38. Action and Mind 39. Moral Judgment 40. Personal Identity 41. The Name and Nature of Confabulation 42. Buddhist Persons and Eudaimonia February 2009: 246x174: 700pp Hb: 978-0-415-39632-5: £95.00

US $113.00

RLE

Various Series: Routledge Library Editions History and Philosophy of Science reprints a distinguished selection of important texts published in this field over the last century. This set presents a unique opportunity to gain comprehensive coverage of all aspects of the history and philosophy of science. It covers all major fields of scientific thought throughout history from Physics, Biology, and Cosmology to ESP and Alchemy. It includes texts on all the great historical scientific figures including Darwin, Copernicus, Archimedes and Hooker. Finally it covers all main themes in science taking in creation, evolution, the development of scientific methodology and the future of science. For further information on this collection please email info.research@routledge.co.uk. Selected Contents: 1. Evolution and Human Behaviour 2. Scientific Knowledge and Sociological Theory 3. Continuous Creation 4. Glimpsing Reality 5. Frames of Meaning 6. Darwin and the Naked Lady 7. Science, Industry and Society 8. British Scientists of the Nineteenth Century 9. British Scientists of the Twentieth Century 10. Empiricism, Explanation and Rationality 11. Evidence and Meaning 12. The Social Impact of Modern Biology 13. Boundaries of the Universe 14. The Scientific Revolution 15. The Common Scientist in the Seventeenth Century 16. Cooke and Wheatstone 7. Soviet Marxism and Natural Science 18. Objectivity, Science and Society 19. Experience and Theory 20. The Astronomical Revolution 21. Evolutionary Theory and Christian Belief 22. Induction and Intuition in Scientific Thought 23. Philosophy of Science and Sociology 24. Science, Technology and Economic Growth in the Eighteenth Century 25. The Royal Society: Concept and Creation 26. From Magic to Science: Francis Bacon 27. Science and Religion 28. Method in the Physical Sciences 29. Philosophy and Scientific Realism 30. Science and ESP 31. Evidence and Explanation in Social Science 32. Beyond Empiricism 33. Foundations of Inference in Natural Science 34. Explanation and Understanding 2008: 234x156: 8,768pp Hb: 978-0-415-42029-7: £2,600.00

US $4,395.00

US $190.00

American Philosophy: An Encyclopedia Edited by John Lachs and Robert B. Talisse 2007: 276x219: 872pp Hb: 978-0-415-93926-3: £115.00

US $225.00

Encyclopedia of African Thought Edited by Abiola Irele and Biodun Jefiyo 2007: 792pp Hb: 978-0-415-23513-6: £115.00

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction to Lukacs and Heidegger Part 2: Lectures during the 1967-8 Academic Year 1. Reification, Zuhandenheit and Praxis 2. Totality, Being and History 3. Objective Possibility and Possible Consciousness 4. Subject-object and Function 5. The Topicality of the Question of the Subject Part 3: Being and Dialectics August 2009: 216x138: 140pp Hb: 978-0-415-55292-9: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87133-1

History & Philosophy of Science

US $230.00

For more information about our eBooks in Philosophy, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

PHILOSOPHY

The Routledge Companion to Metaphysics Edited by Robin Le Poidevin, University of Leeds, UK, Peter Simons, Trinity College Dublin, Andrew McGonigal, University of Leeds, UK and Ross Cameron, University of Leeds, UK Series: Routledge Philosophy Companions ‘The field of metaphysics is flourishing—and with an outstanding cast of contributors, the impressively-broad and satisfyingly-deep The Routledge Companion to Metaphysics offers a superb guide to many of its most engaging and perplexing twists and turns, both historical and contemporary.’ – Hud Hudson, Western Washington University, USA

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

A Dictionary of International Trade Organizations and Agreements

4-VOLUME SET

Patrick Holden Continuing globalization has meant the increased development and importance of regional and international trade organizations and trade agreements. This Dictionary provides a background to the historical development of such systems, as well as giving a global overview of the current situation. Impartial analysis and up-to-date information is given in a concise way, detailing: • major international and regional trade agreements and organizations • other national and international organizations involved in trade • major commodities

The Routledge Companion to Metaphysics contains over fifty chapters written by international scholars covering all aspects of metaphysics. It is essential reading for any student of metaphysics and an invaluable reference resource.

• people involved in the development and current state of trade agreements and organizations

Selected Contents: General Introduction Part 1: History of Metaphysics 1. Pre-Socratic Themes: Being, Not-being and Mind 2. Plato: Arguments for Forms 3. Aristotle: Form, Matter and Substance 4. Aristotle: Time and Change 5. Medieval Metaphysics 1: The Problem of Universals 6. Medieval Metaphysics 2: Things, Non-things, God and Time 7. Descartes: The Real Distinction 8. Hobbes: Matter, Cause and Motion 9. Spinoza: Substance, Attribute and Mode 10. Locke: The Primary and Secondary Quality Distinction 11. Leibniz: Mind-body Causation and Preestablished Harmony 12. Berkeley: Arguments for Idealism 13. Hume: Necessary Connections and Distinct Existences 14. Kant: The Possibility of Metaphysics 15. Hegel and Schopenhauer: Reason and Will 16. Anti-Metaphysics I: Nietzsche 17. Bradley: the Supra-relational Absolute 18. Whitehead: Process and Cosmology Peter Simons 19. Heidegger: The Question of Being 20. Anti-Metaphysics II: Verificationism and Kindred Views 21. Metaphysics Revivified Part 2: Ontology: On What Exists 22. To Be 23. Not to Be 24. Razor Arguments 25. Substance 26. Intrinsic and Extrinsic Properties 27. Universals: The Contemporary Debate 28. Particulars 29. Persistence, Composition and Identity 30. Relations 31. Facts, Events and States of Affairs 32. Possible Worlds and Possibilia 33. Mathematical Entities 34. Fictional Objects 35. Vagueness 36. Minor Entities: Surfaces, Holes and Shadows 37. Truth-Makers and Truth-Bearers 38. Values Part 3: Metaphysics and Science 39. Space, Absolute and Relational 40. The Infinite 41. The Passage of Time 42. The Direction of Time 43. Causation 44. Laws and Dispositions 45. Probability and Determinism 46. Essences and Natural Kinds 47. Metaphysics and Relativity 48. Metaphysics and Quantum Physics 49. Supervenience, Reductionism and Emergence 50. Biometaphysics 51. Social Entities 52. The Mental and the Physical 53. The Self A Short Glossary of Metaphysics

Entries are listed alphabetically, and fully crossreferenced for ease of use.

April 2009: 246x174: 632pp Hb: 978-0-415-39631-8: £95.00

• countries and regions involved in agreements • other topics of importance, such as multinationals and globalization.

December 2010: 234x156: 350pp Hb: 978-1-85743-329-6: £150.00

FORTHCOMING

International Political Economy Critical Concepts in Political Science Edited by Andrew Moravcsik Series: Critical Concepts in Political Science December 2010 Hb: 978-0-415-70110-5: £825.00

US $1,650.00

FORTHCOMING 4TH EDITION

A Dictionary of Modern Politics David Robertson, University of Oxford, UK ’Highly recommended.’ – Choice In the increasingly complex world of modern politics, the fully revised and expanded fourth edition of this longstanding title provides a comprehensive guide to political ideologies and terminologies. Listing topics covering all aspects of international and national politics, this text is an essential reference source for students of politics at all levels as well as to those with a general interest in the subject.

Islamic Political Thought and Governance Edited by Abdullah Saeed, University of Melbourne, Australia Series: Critical Concepts in Political Science Islam has had a significant impact on world history, not only as a major religion that has directed the personal beliefs and actions of individuals, but also as the basis of a distinct system of government that has developed its own institutions, practices and philosophies. This new Routledge Major Work is concerned with the development of political thought in Islam. By political thought is meant, broadly, the study and interpretation of Islamic political culture, ideas, beliefs and institutions; the contribution of key political theorists and authorities to the understanding or practice of governance; what people and groups believed about political authority and institutions and their political convictions; and how politics in the Islamic world has related to and interacted with other disciplines, such as religion, law, ethics, philosophy and statehood. Although contemporary issues in Islamic political thought are very much in the public focus at the moment, this set instead focuses on the history and development of Islamic political theories and thought, from their inception until the twentieth century. Political thought in the Muslim world is connected to its history and by understanding the past, those who study contemporary political thought will have a better grounding to understand current and future developments. Moreover, understanding how Islamic political thought developed also helps shed light on the political thought of other civilisations, such as Western political thought. Political thought in Islam did not develop in isolation – it responded to and interacted with the political institutions and theories of other civilisations throughout history. Furthermore, this compilation provides a much needed focus on the history of Islamic political thought, while bringing together a wide range of scholarship and perspectives on the subject matter. The advantage of a compilation on this subject is that students, teachers and researchers in the wider sphere of Islamic studies have access to writings that were formerly buried inside academic journals, while also having the most relevant works on this subject brought together in a handy reference tool. August 2010 Hb: 978-0-415-49868-5: £650.00

US $1295.00

US $190.00

August 2010: 234x156: 544pp Hb: 978-1-85743-333-3: £140.00

ORDER NOW!

US $300.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

US $265.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Ethics of War and Conflict

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

The Politics of Climate Change A Survey

Edited by Asa Kasher, Tel Aviv University, Israel

Democracy, Reform, and Authoritarianism in the Arab World

Series: Critical Concepts in Philosophy

Edited by Gerd Nonneman, University of Exeter, UK

Standing on the shoulders of thinkers who have sought carefully to delineate proper behaviour in armed conflict—not least to distinguish just from illegitimate wars—military ethics is a subdiscipline enjoying renewed interest and, at the beginning of the twenty-first century, increasing practical relevance. It is particularly vibrant and expansive at the moment due to the emergence of novel forms of military activity. Whereas classical warfare involved a near symmetrical encounter between opposing forces, present-day asymmetric conflicts (such as fighting terrorists and insurgents) and other military challenges (such as humanitarian intervention and peacekeeping) raise especially difficult—and often dizzying—ethical issues.

Series: Critical Concepts in the Modern Politics of the Middle East

Climate change is a defining issue in contemporary life. Since the Industrial Revolution, heavy reliance on carbon-based sources for energy in industry and society has contributed to substantial changes in the climate, indicated by increases in temperature and sea level rise. This particular period of time has been referred to as the ‘Anthropocene Era’, or the ‘Age of the Hydrocarbon Human’.

As research in and around the area flourishes as never before, this new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Philosophy, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of literature. It is a four-volume collection of the best and most influential canonical and cutting-edge research. June 2011: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48033-8: £650.00

US $1,295.00

FORTHCOMING

Routledge Handbook of Ethnic Politics Edited by Karl Cordell, University of Plymouth, UK and Stefan Wolff, University of Nottingham, UK This Handbook provides a global survey of the interaction between religion and politics. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Context & Key Concepts 1. The Origin of Modern Nations 2. The Origins of Nationalist Doctrine 3. Nationalism as an Ideology 4. The Nation-State 5. The Civic Nation-State 6. Ethnicity and the Nation-State 7. Stateless Nations in a World of Nation-States 8. Ethnicity and Race Part 2: Ethnicity and Conflict 9. Ethnicity as a Generator of Conflict: Dispelling Some Myths 10. Democracy & Democratisation 11. Ethnic Cleansing 12. Genocide 13. Preventing Ethnic Conflict 14. Managing and Settling Ethnic Conflicts 15. Judicial and Semi-Judicial Approaches to Conflict Resolution 16. Post-conflict Reconstruction in Ethnically Divided Societies Part 3: Accommodation and Conciliation 17. Bridging the Gaps: The Role of Civil Society 18. Human Rights and Ethnopolitics 19. The Role of Treaties and Formal Post-Conflict Agreements 20. CrossBorder Co-operation 21. Multi-national Frameworks 22. Territorial Models 23. Ethnic Accommodation in Unitary States 24. Cultural Autonomy 25. Power Sharing 26. Integration 27. Assimilation Strategies 28. Playing the Ethnic Card: Liberal Democratic and Authoritarian Practices Compared 29. Conclusion March 2010: 246x189: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-47625-6: £95.00

US $190.00

The potential for reform in the pattern of persistent authoritarianism in the Arab world has been the subject of interest for policymakers, the informed general public, and scholars alike, particularly since the end of the Cold War and again after the events of 11 September 2001. It is also one that has generated much debate within the Arab world itself, both in this period and, less prominently, but at times very acutely, throughout much of the twentieth century. Such debates and investigations have been carried out at the popular, political, intelligentsia, and scholarly levels, producing a varied array of commentary, analysis, and policy prescription. The subject ties in to questions of the relationship between Islam and politics, and, in a comparative context of democratization studies, the role of political culture, the nature of civil society and the middle class, the role of external powers, and the links—if any—between economic development and economic liberalization on the one hand, and political liberalization and democratization on the other. In exploring the chances of, and conditions for, liberalization and democratization, much of the relevant scholarly literature has also had to focus on the other side of the coin: what has sustained and may continue to sustain authoritarian rule? Findings and arguments about these questions are of direct relevance for Arabs themselves, policymakers with an interest in the region, and scholars both of the Arab world and of wider democratization studies: the wider field and the area-specific expertise have much to contribute to each other in this regard. Yet the significant array of scholarly literature relating to these questions remains widely dispersed in a bewildering range of different outlets, important parts of which are unexplored by, or inaccessible to, large sections of the potentially interested audience. This new four-volume collection from Routledge meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output. April 2010: 234x156: 1,800pp Hb: 978-0-415-46915-9: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price: £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication) US $1,295.00

Edited by Max Boykoff

In the last three decades, concerns regarding human contributions to climate change have moved from obscure scientific inquiries to the fore of science, politics, policy and practices at many levels. From local adaptation strategies to international treaty negotiation, ‘the politics of climate change’ is as pervasive, vital and contested as it has ever been. On the cusp of a new commitment to international cooperation to rein in greenhouse gas emissions (to be decided on at the UN Climate Conference in Copenhagen, Denmark in 2009), this essential book intervenes to help understand and engage with the dynamic and compelling ‘Politics of Climate Change’. This edited collection draws on a vast array of experience, expertise and perspectives, with authors with backgrounds in climate science, geography, environmental studies, biology, sociology, political science, psychology and philosophy. This reflects the contemporary conditions where the politics of climate change permeates and penetrates all facets of our shared lives and livelihoods. Chapters include the Politics of Climate Science, History of Climate Policy: from the World Climate Conference (1979) to the UN Climate Conference in Copenhagen (2009), the Contemporary Climate Science-Policy Interface, Spatial Politics of Climate Change: Global North-South Responsibility, Equity and Justice, the Politics of Public Understanding and Engagement, and the Cultural Politics of Climate Change: Interactions in the Spaces of Everyday (mass media, celebrities, NGOs and social movements, contrarians, sport, the arts) An A – Z glossary of key terms offers additional information in dictionary format, with entries on topics including Carbon tax, Stabilization, Renewable technologies and the World Meteorological Organization. A section of Maps will offer a visual overview of the effects of environmental change. Statistics are included for further information.

US $1,150.00

December 2009: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-496-5: £130.00

FORTHCOMING

Encyclopedia of Modern Political Thought Edited by Dr Gregory Claeys April 2010: 246x174: 1100pp Hb: 978-0-415-40328-3: £130.00

US $260.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

The Politics of Water

The Politics of Narcotic Drugs

The Politics of the Olympics

A Survey

Edited by Kai Wegerich and Jeroen Warner

Edited by Julia Buxton

Edited by Alan Bairner, Loughborough University, UK and Gyozo Molnar, Glyndwr University, UK

This new title presents timely information covering the global politics of water. With the current threat of climate change and the increasing demand on water resources, this title will give an invaluable insight into an increasingly politicized topic. Includes: • in-depth essays profiling the critical topics • an A-Z of key terms • maps detailing water consumption and distribution • statistical tables. This new title provides an invaluable guide to politics surrounding the availability and provision of water on a world-wide scale and is the only guide to deal with the issues of water in politics in such detail. This will prove to be an invaluable reference source for anyone who is interested in, or studying the politics of, water, or indeed climate change. March 2010: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-339-5: £130.00

FORTHCOMING

The Politics of Narcotic Drugs brings together leading experts on the drugs trade to provide an accessible yet detailed analysis of the multiple challenges that the contemporary trade in narcotic drugs and its prohibition pose, from the local to the international community. Through the use of country and regional case studies that include Afghanistan, Mexico, Colombia and the Middle East, the drivers of the drug trade and the security and development dilemmas created by the prohibition of narcotic substances are explored. Contributions that assess the international drug control regime, British anti-drug enforcement organizations, ’narcoterrorism’ and options for drug policy reform engage readers in current debates and the narrative frameworks that shape discussion of the drugs issue. The book is an invaluable guide to the dynamic and cross-cutting issue of narcotic drugs. Selected Contents: Introduction: The Narcotic Drugs Debate 1. The History of Drugs and Drugs in History 2. Evolution of the International Drug Control Framework 3. Narcotic Drug Consumption 4. Drug Production 5. The Traffic in Narcotic Drugs 6. The Political Economy of the Drugs Trade 7. Narcotic Drugs and Criminal Justice 8. Drugs and Crime 9. Militarizing the ‘Drugs War’ and Alternative Strategies February 2010: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-501-6: £130.00

The Politics of Space

FORTHCOMING

A Survey

The Politics of Gender

Edited by Eligar Sadeh

A Survey

The pace of space exploration has long been dictated by political motivations. This book helps to explain why this is so in the post-Cold War era. Combining essays, a glossary of terms, tables and statistics, this new title from Routledge comes as a welcome addition to this increasingly popular topic.

Edited by Yoke-Lian Lee, University of Keele, UK

The book: • covers theories and concepts, as well as current issues • gives a background to international and national space agencies • contains essays that cover military, commercial and governmental actors in space politics. Selected Contents: Part 1: Essays 1. Introduction: The Politics of Space: A Survey 2. Space Policy-Making Processes and Space Politics 3. Developed Space Programs 4. Developing Space Programs 5. Space Policy-Making Actors and Space Politics 6. Governmental Actors 7. Military Space Actors 8. Nongovernmental Space Actors 9. Commercial Space Actors 10. International Organizations and Space Part 2: A-Z Glossary Part 3: Tables and Statistics: Table 1: Developed Space Programs Table 2: Developing Space Programs Table 3: Governmental Space Actors (United States, China, Europe, India, Japan, and Russia) Table 4: Military Space Actors, Doctrines, and Mission Areas (United States) Table 5: Nongovernmental Organizations Table 6: Commercial Companies Table 7: International Organizations

This new title in the Politics of . . . series will address the major theme of the politics of gender. Chapters on a variety of issues, contributed by experts in the field of gender, will include Human Trafficking and EU Law, Gender in International Relations, the Gender Politics of Philosphy/Political Theory, the Construction of Masculinity in Hollywood Movies, the Politics of Law, and the Politics of Mainstreaming Gender in the Peace and Security Agenda of the African Union. An A–Z glossary will offer supplementary information on key terms, with entries including abortion, Commission on the Status of Women, ecofeminism, equal access, human rights, migration, population control, and sex tourism. January 2010: 234x156: 300pp Hb: 978-1-85743-493-4: £130.00

With the ever increasing global significance of the Olympic Games, it has never been more topical to address the political issues that surround, influence and emanate from this quadrennial sporting mega event. In terms of the most recent evidence of the politics of the Olympics, the 2008 Beijing Games were riddled with political messages and content from the outset, and provided a global stage for protesters with numerous agendas. These included, to name but a few, proposed boycotts, potential terrorist attacks, the question of open media access, protests against China’s political practices and attempts to interrupt the ‘traditional’ torch rally. Essays in this collection focus on numerous political aspects of the Olympics from a variety of different perspectives, with a Glossary that contains a range of politically relevant entries relating to famous and infamous Olympic athletes, Olympic movement personnel and events and broader political issues and developments which have affected the modern Games. The purpose of this anthology is not to perpetuate hatred towards the concept and practices of Olympism nor to regurgitate a ‘celebratory party line’. Instead, in addition to being informative, the book offers critical engagement with the Olympics by raising awareness of the movement’s political significance. Consequently, the essays in this anthology illustrate the strong but changing links between the modern Olympic Games and politics, in general, and address and discuss the key political aspects and issues with regard to the Games themselves, to national and international sport organisations and to specific countries’ attitudes to (ab)using the idea/ideal of the Olympics for their own political ends. Selected Contents: The Politics of the Olympic Movement. Jung Woo Lee The Olympic Games in the Post-Soviet Era: The Case of the Two Koreas. Miklos Hadas Olympic Rivalries and the Warsaw Pact. Susan Bandy The Olympics and the Politics of Gender. Rob Beamish The Politics of Drug Use in the Olympics. David Howe Disability, Olympism and Paralympism. Chris Young The Berlin Olympic Games, Sport and National Socialism. David L. Andrews The Olympic Games and Terrorism. John Hoberman Race Issues. John Horne The Political Economy of Hosting the Olympic Games. John Horne January 2010: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-494-1: £130.00

FORTHCOMING

The Politics of Fair Trade A Survey Edited by Meera Warrier, University of Sussex, UK April 2010: 234x156: 300pp Hb: 978-1-85743-512-2: £130.00

December 2009: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-419-4: £130.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

The Politics of Development

Handbook of New Security Studies

A Survey

Edited by J. Peter Burgess, PRIO, Oslo, Norway

The European Union and Global Governance

Edited by Heloise Weber, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Australia

This new Handbook gathers together state-of-theart theoretical reflection and empirical research by leading international scholars into the subdiscipline of Critical Security Studies.

This new title presents a wealth of information covering the global politics of development. Includes: • in-depth essays profiling the critical topics • an A-Z of key terms • statistical tables. March 2010: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-500-9: £130.00

The Politics of the Environment A Survey Edited by Chukwumerije Okereke 2007: 234x156: 312pp Hb: 978-1-85743-341-8: £135.00

The Politics of Conflict A Survey Edited by Vassilis Fouskas, University of Stirling, UK 2007: 234x156: 304pp Hb: 978-1-85743-405-7: £135.00

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction J. Peter Burgess Part 1: New Security Concepts 2. Civilizational Security Brett Bowden 3. Risk Oliver Kessler 4. Small Arms Keith Krause 5. Critical Human Security Taylor Owen 6. Visuality and Security Michael Shapiro 7. Critical Geopolitics Simon Dalby Part 2: New Security Subjects 8. Biopolitics Michael Dillon 9. Gendered Security Laura Shepherd 10. Identity Security Pinar Bilgin 11. Security as Ethics Anthony Burke 12. Security/Media James Der Derian Part 3: New Security Objects 13. Environmental Security Jon Barnett 14. Food Security Rachel Slater and Steve Wiggins 15. Energy Security Roland Dannreuther 16. Financial Security Marieke de Goede 17. Cyber Security Markus Jakobsson 18. Pandemic Security Stephan Elbe 19. Biosecurity Frida Kuhlau Part 4: New Security Practices 20. Surveillance Mark Salter 21. Urban Insecurity David F. .J. Wood 22. Privatization of Security Anna Leander 23. Migration William Walters 24. Security Technologies Julien Jeandesboz 25. Designing Security Cynthia Weber and Mark Lacy 26. New Mobile Crime Monica den Boer January 2010: 246x174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-48437-4: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter

Handbook of Terrorism Research

A Survey

Research, Theories and Concepts

Edited by Andrew T. H. Tan, University of New South Wales, Australia

Edited by Alex Schmid, United Nations, Terrorism Prevention Branch, Albert Jongman, Ministry of Defence, the Netherlands and Eric Price, International Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna, Austria

The Politics of Migration A Survey Edited by Barbara Marshall, University of East Anglia, UK 2006: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-365-4: £135.00

The Politics of Oil A Survey Edited by Bülent Gökay, University of Keele, UK 2006: 234x156: 260pp Hb: 978-1-85743-340-1: £135.00

The Politics of Religion A Survey Edited by Jeffrey Haynes, London Metropolitan University, UK 2006: 234x156: 282pp Hb: 978-1-85743-348-7: £135.00

This book is a new edition of the most comprehensive existing reference book on political terrorism, previously published to great acclaim in 1984. It is a monumental collection of definitions, conceptual frameworks, paradigmatic formulations, and bibliographic sources, which has been revised and updated as a resource for the expanding community of researchers on the subject of terrorism. This Handbook surpasses the previous edition in both scope and importance. The Handbook of Terrorism Research will be essential reading for all students of terrorism, political science and security studies, as well as policy makers and professionals in the security field. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Terrorism and Related Concepts 2. Theories 3. Data and Databases on Domestic and International terrorism 4. Literature of Terrorism 5. Bibliography of Political Terrorism 6. World Directory of Terrorist Organizations 7. Glossary May 2010: 246x174: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-41157-8: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter US $155.00

The Politics of Terrorism A Survey Edited by Andrew T. H. Tan, University of New South Wales, Australia

The European Union and Global Governance: A Handbook aims to analyze contemporary debates in European Studies in order to provide lessons for the development, design and normative evaluation of global governance. It brings together scholars of European Studies and international relations, where much of the literature on regional and global governance is located, thereby providing interdisciplinary lessons from the study of European Union and its governance that can be used to reevaluate processes of global governance. Each chapter examines methodological, theoretical or empirical discussions within European studies in order to draw insights for current developments in global governance. January 2010: 246x174: 300pp Hb: 978-1-85743-509-2: £150.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Series: Critical Concepts in International Relations Feminist International Relations is a new title in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in International Relations. Feminist International Relations can be seen as project by feminists to influence international relations—both as a set of practices (e.g. war, diplomacy, terrorism, aid, and trade) and as a set of theories (such as realism, liberal institutionalism, and constructivism). Adopting a combined thematic and chronological structure, the collection brings together the work of indisputable luminaries in this project, as well as vital research from new generations of scholars. February 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47843-4: £650.00

US $1,295.00

FORTHCOMING

The Global Arms Trade A Handbook Edited by Andrew T. H. Tan The Global Arms Trade is a timely, comprehensive and in-depth study of this topic, a phenomenon which has continued to flourish despite the end of the Cold War and the preoccupation with global terrorism after 11 September 2001. It will provide a clear description and analysis of the demand for, and supply of, modern weapons systems, and assess key issues of concern. This book will be especially useful to scholars, policy analysts, those in the arms industry, defence professionals, students of international relations and security studies, media professionals, government officials, and those generally interested in the arms trade. December 2009: 246x174: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-497-2: £150.00

2006: 234x156: 288pp Hb: 978-1-85743-347-0: £135.00

US $300.00

Edited by Christine Sylvester, University of Lancaster, UK

FORTHCOMING

Hb: 978-1-85743-404-0: £135.00

Edited by Jens-Uwe Wunderlich and David J. Bailey

Feminist International Relations

US $155.00

The Politics of Maritime Power

2007: 234x156: 328pp

A Handbook

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $300.00

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

A Political and Economic Dictionary of the USA Edited by George Kurian

A Political and Economic Dictionary of South Asia

FORTHCOMING

Subrata K. Mitra, Siegried Wolf and Jivanta Schottli

Migration

December 2010: 234x156: 450pp Hb: 978-1-85743-543-6: £190.00

2006: 234x156: 464pp Hb: 978-1-85743-210-7: £135.00 eBook: 978-0-203-40326-6

FORTHCOMING

2ND EDITION

A Political and Economic Dictionary of Central and South-Eastern Europe

A Political and Economic Dictionary of Eastern Europe

Circa

2007: 234x156: 324pp Hb: 978-1-85743-334-0: £135.00

Countries covered in this volume include:

Circa

Albania, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Estonia, Greece, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, FYR Macedonia, Poland, Romania, Serbia and Montenegro, Slovakia, Slovenia.

5-VOLUME SET

Edited by Steven Vertovec, Max-Planck-Institute, Germany Series: Critical Concepts in the Social Sciences Nowadays, migration seems never far from the top of the political agenda. Whether as a consequence of civil and ethnic unrest, or as one response to the widening gulf between the wealthy and poor zones of the world, international population movement for sanctuary or settlement has become as prevalent as increased capital flows. (Indeed, for many commentators, there is a clear connection between the fluidity of population movements and the economic and technological changes that have generated ‘globalization’.) According to UN estimates, the global stock of migrants has doubled in the past forty years and now amounts to around 200 million souls living outside their places of birth. For receiving countries, migration—at once perceived as a social challenge and an economic necessity—prompts difficult debates and questions.

This Dictionary provides entries on the history and economy of each constituent country of the region, as well as entries on any distinct territories, ethnic groups, religions, political parties, prime ministers, presidents, politicians, businesses, international organizations, multinationals and major NGOs with an impact on the region’s political or economic affairs.

Perhaps rather belatedly, the social sciences have recognized the importance of these issues and a significant body of new literature has accumulated in recent decades. The field is, however, intrinsically multidisciplinary with contributions stemming from economics, demography, human geography, law, sociology, political science, and social anthropology. Migration also interweaves with other important multidisciplinary fields such as gender studies, labour-market studies, and cultural studies.

The book reflects the unique perspective of each country in the region, providing invaluable, specific information. Entries are concise and crossreferenced, providing contact details where appropriate. A Political and Economic Dictionary of Central and South-Eastern Europe will be invaluable for anyone in need of concise information on politics and economics, and will be particularly useful to public and academic libraries, students, the media, teachers, businesses and all organizations or individuals requiring a reliable overview of these world regions.

The sheer scale of the growth in migration research output—and the breadth and complexity of the discipline—makes this new Major Work from Routledge especially timely, and answers the urgent need for a wide-ranging collection which provides easy access to the key items of scholarly literature, material that is often inaccessible or scattered throughout a variety of specialist journals and books. In five volumes, Migration brings together the best and most influential foundational and cutting-edge research on: theories of migration; patterns of migration; the politics of migration; and the dynamics of migration.

December 2009: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-359-3: £130.00

A Political and Economic Dictionary of East Asia Jim Hoare and Susan Pares

The collection is supplemented with a full index, and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. Migration is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers as a vital research resource.

2005: 234x156: 336pp Hb: 978-1-85743-258-9: £140.00

A Political and Economic Dictionary of South-East Asia Edited by Andrew T.H. Tan

Selected Contents: Volume I: Theories 1. Theories 2. Concepts 3. Flows 4. Shifts Volume II: Types 5. Labour Migrants 6. Refugees 7. Miscellaneous Types Volume III: Trends 8. Modes of Migration 9. Migration and Development 10. Transnationalism Volume IV: Policies 11. Understanding Migration Policies 12. Forced Migration and Refugee Policy 13. International Migration and the State 14. Migration Management Volume V: Processes 15. Integration and Incorporation 16. Assimilation Debates 17. The Second Generation 18. Immigration and Multiculturalism

2004: 234x156: 344pp Hb: 978-1-85743-226-8: £135.00

A Political and Economic Dictionary of the Middle East Edited by David Seddon 2004: 234x156: 624pp Hb: 978-1-85743-212-1: £135.00 eBook: 978-0-203-40291-7

December 2009: 234x156: 1,934pp Hb: 978-0-415-47842-7: £825.00 US $1,250.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

6-VOLUME SET

International Law Edited by Joseph Weiler, NYU School of Law, New York University, USA and Alan T. Nissel, New York University, USA and University of Helsinki, Finland

FORTHCOMING

A Dictionary of Humanitarianism

Handbook of Asian Security Studies

Tim Allen, London School of Economics, University of London, UK This major new title provides definitions, biographies and explanations detailing the key terminology, issues, people and events in the field of humanitarianism, a topic that is increasingly at the forefront of international relations. This Dictionary provides information which will be essential to all those involved in humanitarianism.

Series: Critical Concepts in Law This long-awaited Routledge collection brings together canonical and the very best cutting-edge works on International Law to provide both classical and contemporary perspectives on a rapidly developing subdiscipline. The gathered materials, carefully selected by Joseph Weiler (Editor) and Alan Nissel (Associate Editor), represent traditional approaches, as well as those that rethink the international legal system. Selected Contents: Volume I: Systemic Overview Volume II: Fundamentals of International Law Volume III: International Law in and of Peace Volume IV: International Law in and of War Volume V: Legitimacy and Governance Volume VI: Interdisciplinary Approaches May 2010: 234x156: 2,400pp Hb: 978-0-415-40027-5: £975.00

US $1,475.00

FORTHCOMING

5-VOLUME SET

Recent events such as the reconstruction of Iraq are included, making the Dictionary up-to-date on the key issues of humanitarianism today. Entries include:

United Nations Edited by David Travers, University of Lancaster, UK Series: Critical Concepts in Political Science The United Nations is the second great experiment in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries that has attempted to prevent war and further international cooperation in the political, economic, social and technical fields. Covering five of the six principal organs of the United Nations: the Security Council, the General Assembly, the Economic and Social Council, the Trusteeship Council, and the Secretariat, this collection explores the original conception of the United Nations, how it has evolved, how it now works, and how effectively it has prevented and resolved disputes and contributed to international cooperation. June 2011: 234x156: 2,000pp Hb: 978-0-415-35569-8: £825.00

A Dictionary of Humanitarianism brings together knowledge and insight from a number of different fields, such as political economy, human rights, international law, security studies, anthropology and international relations, and this multi-disciplinary approach provides a unique view of one of the most important subject areas in international relations today.

US $1,650.00

Bosnia, Peace Keeping, Conflict Resolution, Security Council, CAFOD, Civil War, Earthquakes, Genocide, Humanitarian Intervention, Just War, Malnutrition, Médecins Sans Frontières, Oxfam, Terrorism, and The World Bank. This book will prove valuable to journalists and researchers, staff of aid agencies and other charities, reference libraries, students and university or departmental libraries, businesses, government departments, international organizations and research institutes. The book will also provide a useful reference tool for university courses dealing with the topic of humanitarianism. July 2010: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-281-7: £130.00

FORTHCOMING

A Dictionary of International Relations Edited by George Kurian

International Bibliography of the Social Sciences

A Dictionary of International Relations aims to be a comprehensive glossary of terms, issues, ideas, events, doctrines and policies relating to international relations in modern history since 1815. It will cover over 500 nations (including 300 that have disappeared from history) the great and small wars that have punctuated modern history, the terms and ideas that have driven the tides of change, war and peace and the alliances marking the rise and fall of great powers, the revolutions and regime changes, the growth and eventual disappearance of colonialism, the rise of globalism and globalization, and the social, political, cultural and technological changes that have heralded the end of modern history and the beginning of post-modern history.

First published in 1952, the International Bibliography of the Social Sciences (anthropology, economics, political science, and sociology) is well established as a major bibliographic reference for students, researchers & librarians. • An essential resource in the social sciences for researchers and librarians. • Includes extensive coverage of the Developing World and Eastern European publications. • All materials are organized alphabetically by controlled subject keywords providing an excellent means of browsing. November 2009:234x156: 680pp Hb: 978-0-415-55467-1: £295.00

July 2010: 234x156: 450pp Hb: 978-1-85743-544-3: £190.00

The Handbook of Asian Security Studies provides a detailed exploration of security dynamics in the three distinct subregions that comprise Asia, and also bridges the study of these regions by exploring the geopolitical interstices that link each of them. Selected Contents: Part 1: Northeast Asia 1. China’s Rise: How Peaceful? 2. Japan’s Security Future 3. The Security of the Korean Peninsula 4. The Taiwan Issue 5. The Tibetan Question 6. The Shanghai Cooperation Organization and Its Implications for Regional Security 7. U.S.–China Relations Part 2: South Asia 8. Kashmir and the Indo–Pakistani Conflict 9. Nuclear Weapons and Crisis Stability in South Asia 10. The Sino–Indian Rivalry 11. India’s Experiences with Insurgency and CounterInsurgency 12. The Sri Lankan Civil War 13. Pakistan’s Quest for Security 14. Insurgency, Instability, and the Security of Afghanistan Part 3: Southeast Asia 15. The Association of Southeast Asian Nations 16. Bilateral Tensions in ASEAN 17. Great Power Politics and Southeast Asian Security 18. Maritime Security in Southeast Asia 19. Internal Conflicts in Southeast Asia 20. Islamic Extremism in Southeast Asia 21. Burma/Myanmar: How Flourishing the ’Disciplined Democracy’? Part 4: Cross Regional Issues 22. Maritime Rivalry in Asia 23. The ASEAN Regional Forum 24. The New Security Agenda in Asia: Making Spaces for Non-Traditional Security Formulations of Emerging Security Challenges November 2009: 246x174: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-77781-0: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter eBook: 978-0-203-86510-1 US $155.00

FORTHCOMING

RLE

90 VOLUME-SET

Japan Series: Routledge Library Editions

US $260.00

VOLUME 57

Political Science: 2008

Edited by Sumit Ganguly, Indiana University, USA, Andrew Scobell, The Bush School of Government and Public Service, Texas A&M University, USA and Joseph Liow, S. Rajaratnam School of International Studies, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore

Routledge Library Editions: Japan will re-issue works originally published between 1890 and 2005. Volumes will be available to purchase individually, or as sub-disciplinary mini-sets focussing on economics and Japanese business as well as the history, politics, sociology, literature and linguistics of Japan. It will include titles by authors such as Ronald Dore, William Tsutsui, Kiyoshi Kojima, Robert J. Ballon, Wolfgang Herbert, Tony Elger, Chris Smith, Howard F. Gospel, Kazuo Sato, John Dunning, Peter Burton, John Lane, John Clammer, Margaret Powell, Joy Hendry, Merry White, Susan Pollack, G. Lowes Dickinson, Walter McLaren, Hugh Byas, Arthur Young, George Sansom, G. C. Allen, Radha Sinha, Inazo Nitobe, Otis Poole, Malcolm Kennedy, Henry Chung, Jean-Pierre Lehmann. An extensive collection of previously hard to access or out of print books, this set presents an unrivalled opportunity to build up a wealth of material on a key global influence of the twenty-first century. May 2010: 234x156: 15, 884pp Hb: 978-0-415-56498-4: £5,000.00

US $380.00

US $450.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $8,772.00

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Security Studies

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Victor Mauer and Myriam Dunn Cavelty, both at Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH), Zurich, Switzerland

Security Studies

Political Science

Edited by Theo Farrell, Kings College London, UK

Various

Series: Critical Concepts in International Relations

Series: Routledge Library Editions

Focusing on contemporary challenges, this major new Handbook offers a wideranging collection of cuttingedge essays from leading scholars in the field of Security Studies. Selected Contents: Part 1: Theoretical Approaches to Security and Different ’Securities’ 1. Realism and Security Studies 2. Liberalism 3. The English School and International Security 4. Critical Security Studies 5. Constructivism and Securitization Studies 6. Poststructuralism, Continental Philosophy, and the Remaking of Security Studies 7. Feminist Security Studies 8. National Security, Culture, and Identity 9. Societal Security 10. Human Security and Diplomacy Part 2: Contemporary Security Challenges 11. Terrorism 12. Weapons of Mass Destruction 13. Organised Crime, Drug Trafficking, and Trafficking in Women 14. State Failure and State Building 15. Migration and Security 16. Cyberthreats 17. Old and New Wars 18. The Privatization of International Security 19. Energy Security 20. Resources, the Environment and Conflict 21. Emerging Dangers of Biological Weapons 22. Security and Health in the 21st Century Part 3: Regional Security Challenges 23. China’s Rise: Intentions, Power, and Evidence 24. The Korean Peninsula: On the Brink? 25. Indian Security Policy 26. Pakistan’s Security Predicament: Religion, Economics, or Geopolitics? 27. Afghanistan: A State in Crisis 28. The Middle East as a Crisis Region 29. Iran’s Nuclear Challenge 30. Intervention in Iraq: Regime Change and the Dialectics of State-Building 31. The Israeli–Palestinian Conflict 32. Russia’s Revival 33. The Western Balkans: On the Path to Stability Part 4: Confronting Security Challenges 34. The European Union: From Security Community towards Security Actor 35. Alliances 36. Deterrence 37. Coercive Diplomacy: Scope and Limits, Theory and Policy 38. Peace Operations 39. Humanitarian Intervention 40. Global Governance 41. The Study of Crisis Management October 2009: 246x174: 432pp Hb: 978-0-415-46361-4: £95.00 before publication £110.00 thereafter eBook: 978-0-203-86676-4 US $155.00

FORTHCOMING

A Handbook of Chinese International Relations Edited by Shaun Breslin, University of Warwick, UK This Handbook, comprising around twenty-five chapters provided by numerous experts in the field, will prove invaluable to students of international affairs, academics, researchers, businesspeople and policy analysts. Chapters will give up-do-date and unbiased information on the current state of Chinese international relations in historical perspective. February 2010: 246x174: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-508-5: £150.00

ORDER NOW!

US $300.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

Security Studies traces its origins to work on the causes of war. It remains the most significant subdiscipline of International Relations and, at the beginning of the twenty-first century, its concerns with the security of the international system and the individual, as well as the state, remain as pertinent and urgent as ever. While—especially since the events of 11 September 2001 and the remilitarization of US foreign policy—the focus on states and military power remains central to Security Studies, the subject also embraces economic, societal, and environmental security. Furthermore, Security Studies has spawned a dizzying range of competing theoretical approaches—liberal, constructivist, critical, postmodernist, and feminist among them—to challenge the dominant ‘realist’ take on security. Addressing the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of this rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of scholarly literature, Security Studies is a new title in the Routledge series, Critical Concepts in International Relations. Edited by Theo Farrell of King’s College London and chair of the International Security Studies section of the International Studies Association, it is a five-volume collection of the foundational and the very best cutting-edge scholarship. Security Studies is fully indexed and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is an essential reference work and is destined to be valued by scholars and students—as well as policy-makers and practitioners—as a vital one-stop research and pedagogic resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Theoretical Debates Realism. Liberalism. Constructivism. Critical Approaches. Bureaucratic Politics, Organizational Theory and Psychology. Volume II: National Security Future of Conventional Warfare. Nuclear Strategy and Deterrence. Insurgency and Counter-Insurgency. Civil–Military Relations. Intelligence and National Security. Domestic Politics, Public Opinion and the Media. Volume III: International Security The Causes of War. Humanitarian Intervention and Peace Operations. Terrorism and Counter-Terrorism. Nuclear Proliferation. Economic Sanctions. International Law and Armed Conflict. Volume IV: Regional Security Europe and NATO. Middle East. Asia. Africa. Russia and the North Caucasus. Volume V: Global Security Non-State Actors. Human Security. Democracy Promotion. Environmental Security and Climate Change. Migration and Refugees. Energy Security.

FORTHCOMING

RLE

60-VOLUME SET

Routledge Library Editions: Political Science reprints a distinguished selection of important texts published in this field over the last century. This set presents a unique opportunity to gain comprehensive coverage of all aspects of the history, philosophy and theory of political science. For further information on this collection please email info.research@routledge.co.uk. Selected Contents: Matthew Arnold and John Stuart Mill. Edward Alexander A History of Political Thought in the Sixteenth Century. J. W. Allen Race and Politics. Muhammad Anwar Locke’s Two Treatises of Government. Richard Ashcraft Greek Political Theory. Ernest Barker The Nonconformist Conscience. David Bebbington Political Judgement. Ronald Beiner Social Principles and the Democratic State. S. I. Benn and R. S. Peters Socialism National or International. Franz Borkenau The Language of Politics. James T. Boulton Political Discipline in a Free Society. H. J. Blackham An Introduction to the Republic of Plato. William Boyd Marx’s Ethics of Freedom. George G. Brenkert The Left and Rights. Tom Campbell A Short History of Electoral Systems in Western Europe. Andrew McLaren Carstairs Authority and Democracy. April Carter Direct Action and Liberal Democracy. April Carter The Political Theory of Anarchism. April Carter Marx’s Capital and Capitalism Today. Antony Cutler, Barry Hindess, Paul Hirst and Athar Hussain Socialism, Democracy and Industrialization. Amlan Datta Bureacracy and Democracy. Eva EtzioniHalevy The Greek State. Victor Ehrenberg Political Repression in 19th Century Europe. Robert Justin Goldstein Law, Socialism and Democracy. Paul Q Hirst Aspects of Toleration. John Horton and Susan Mendus The Politics of John F. Kennedy. Edmund S. Ions Political Parties. J. Jupp The Politics of the Labour Party. Dennis Kavanagh Capital and Politics. Roger King Redefining Politics. Adrian Leftwich Burke’s Reflections on the Revolution in France. F. P. Lock Political and Social Philosophy. D. O’Mahony Socialism. Norman MacKenzie On Trotskyism . Kostas Mavrakis Marx’s Capital. Geoffrey Pilling The Popular and the Political. Mike Prior Educate Agitate Organize. Patricia Pugh Political Representation and Elections in Britain. Peter Pulzer The English Face of Machiavelli. Felix Raab Anglo-American Democracy. Malcolm Shaw The Political Sciences. Hugh Stretton Studies in the Growth of Nineteenth Century Government. Gillian Sutherland A History of Greek Political Thought. T. A. Sinclair Karl Marx and the Anarchists. Paul Thomas The Growth of Papal Government in the Middle Ages. Walter Ullmann Labour in American Politics. Vivian Vale October 2009: 234x156: 15,884pp Hb: 978-0-415-49111-2: £3,500.00 • Special Pre-pub Pri £3,100.00 ce

US $4,500.00

US $5,250.00

(Valid until 3 months upon publication)

November 2009: 234x156: 2,218pp Hb: 978-0-415-45601-2: £825.00 $1,250.00

For more information about our online resources in Politics, please see the online section in the middle of the catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

POLITICS

FORTHCOMING

NEW

2ND EDITION

Handbook of US–Middle East Relations

The Great Powers

Edited by Robert Looney

Max Beloff

A Dictionary of Modern Defence and Strategy David Robertson, St Hugh’s College, University of Oxford, UK The second edition of this highly regarded reference source will be a welcome addition to any reference library, governmental department, development centre, as well as journalists, students and researchers involved in the subject. Defence and strategy is never far from international press interest. Whether the subject is nuclear armament, arms trading to developing nations or pre-emptive strikes, A Dictionary of Modern Defence and Strategy covers the background to the topic in full detail, and provides clear and concise definitions for complicated military terms. Containing over 400 entries detailing all aspects of military defence and strategy, this title is an ideal starting point for anyone new to the subject. Entries are extensively cross-referenced. Also included is a list of abbreviations and acronyms, essential to the understanding of the topic. May 2010: 234x156: 336pp Hb: 978-1-85743-358-6: £130.00

US $260.00

FORTHCOMING

Social and Foreign Affairs in Iraq

Saddam Hussein Series: Routledge Revivals First published in 1979, prior to the Iran-Iraq war, this important collection of speeches explains some of the strategic foundations of Iraq’s foreign and internal policies under the Ba’th Arab Socialist Party. This work concerns itself with aspects varying from advice on youth – ‘Let us win the young to safeguard the future’ –,to speeches on Iraq’s diplomatic relations. This fundamental work, concerning a historical and contemporary range of social and foreign affairs in Iraq, will be of considerable value to both political and diplomatic departments, and universities and research organisations involved with the Middle East. It is also of major significance to anyone with an interest in the rise to power of one of the twentieth century’s most infamous dictators. Selected Contents: 1. Women – One Half of Our Society 2. Avoiding Two Erroneous Tendencies 3. No Fear but Careful Planning 4. The Planned Progress of the Revolution 5. The Revolution and the Historical Role of Women 6. Let us Win the Young to Safeguard the Future 7. The National Potential and International Politics 8. Détente and the Arab–Zionist Conflict 9. The Realistic Approach to the Palestinian Cause October 2009: 216x138: 128pp Hb: 978-0-415-56240-9: £60.00

US $104.00

Essays in Twentieth Century Politics

The Handbook of US–Middle East Relations provides a thorough and up-to-date overview of contemporary US–Middle East relations in historical perspective. Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview/Setting 1. Introduction Robert E. Looney 2. International Relations John Tirman 3. Beyond Iraq: Lasting Issues for the US in the Middle East Dr Lawrence J. Korb and Daniel de Wit 4. The US Foreign Aid Policy to the Middle East Hilton Root, Yan Li and Kanishka Balasuriya 5. US Relations with International Organizations Rodrigo Tavares and Michael Schulz 6. War in the Middle East Dan Moran 7. Globalization as a Mediating Force in US–MENA Relations Anoushiravan Ehteshami 8. Proliferation in the Persian Gulf and Middle East: Challenges for US Policy James A. Russell 9. US Relations with Islamic Groups in the Middle East Heather S. Gregg 10. The US and the Geopolitics of Middle Eastern Oil Anas F. Alhajji 11. The Middle East and US Energy Security Anas F. Alhajji 12. Peace Process Stephen Zunes 13. US Economic and Governance Reform Efforts in the Middle East: Conceptual Difficulties and Practical Realities Robert E. Looney Part 2: Perceptions 14. The Arab Street Stephen Glain 15. US–Middle East Relations: Right of Return, Independence and the `Peace Process’: The View from Palestine Naseer Aruri 16. US–Jordan Relations: The King Abdullah II Era: An Analytical Study Adnan M. Hayajneh 17. Pakistan’s Perceptions of US Middle East Policy Shahid Javed Burki Part 3: Country Studies North Africa 18. The US and Algeria: Hostility, Pragmatism and Partnership Yahia H. Zoubir 19. The US and Morocco: The Long-Lasting Alliance Yahia H. Zoubir 20. The US and Tunisia: Model of Stable Relations Yahia H. Zoubir 21. The US and Libya: The Lengthy Road to Reconciliation Yahia H. Zoubir 22. US Relations with Egypt: An Overview Michael Collins Dunn The Levant 23. Turkey and the US Lenore G. Martin 24. American Foreign Policy in Lebanon Anne Marie Baylouny 25. Missed Opportunities: Co-operation and Confrontation in the US–Syrian Relationship David W. Lesch 26. US-Jordan Bilateral Relations Jomana Amara 27. Who Lost the Middle East? The Collapse of the Neoconservative-led US–Israeli Hegemonic Project Leon Hadar The Gulf Co-operation Council (GCC) Countries 28. Close Allies, Ambivalent Partners: The Role of the UAE in US Gulf Policy Christian Koch 29. US Relations with Qatar Jill Crystal 30. USSaudi Arabia Dipliomatic Relations: An Evolutionary Process David E. Long 31. The Sultanate of Oman and the US Joseph A. Kéchichian 32. US-Bahrain Relations Jeffrey B. Nugent 33. Kuwait–US Relationship – A Small State Alliance with the Major Power: From Hesitant to Strategic Alliance Abdullah Alshayji Iran, Iraq, Yemen 34. Opting for the Lesser Evil: US Foreign Policy toward Iraq 1958–2008 Abbas Kadhim 35. Missed Opportunities and Political Blunders: The Tale of US–Iran Relations Mouchehr Dorraj and Hamid Zangeneh 36. The United States and Yemen: A History of Unfulfilled Expectations J. E. Peterson August 2009: 246x174: 544pp Hb: 978-1-85743-499-6: £150.00

US $300.00

Series: Routledge Revivals This re-issued work, first published in 1959, is a collection of essays by British historian Max Beloff, designed to help us to understand and interpret the political problems of the twentieth century. The essays are divided into three key areas: the challenges and limitations of interpretation from a historian’s perspective, the appropriate scale for political activity and organisation in the modern world, and the emergence of the United States of America as the most powerful nation on the planet. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Problem for Historians Part 2: Problems of Integration Part 3: America July 2009: 216x138: 244pp Hb: 978-0-415-55284-4: £75.00

US $131.00

NEW

New Dimensions in Foreign Policy

Max Beloff Series: Routledge Revivals Originally published in 1961, this is an extremely valuable contribution to the understanding of contemporary international institutions and the working of the British system of government. It deals with the problems presented to British Government Departments by the emergence in the postwar world of a number of new international organisations which are concerned with European recovery and integration and with the development of the Atlantic Community of Nations. This book traces the British share in the creation of the Council of Europe, OEC, NATO, and WEU, and deals with the relations between Britain and the Coal and Steel Community, the Common Market and Euratom. Finally, the book assesses the impact of these activities upon the government at home and the extent to which the public appreciates the change in Britain’s international status that has resulted from these developments. Selected Contents: 1. The Setting 2. Britain and the Crisis of Europe 3. The Development of the Organisations 4. Britain and the Little Europe 5. The Foreign Office and British Representation Abroad 6. The Impact upon the Departments 7. Problems of Co-ordination 8. An Assessment of the Record July 2009: 216x138: 212pp Hb: 978-0-415-55750-4: £70.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $122.00

POLITICS

NEW

Political Philosophy and Social Welfare

NEW

Essays on the Normative Basis of Welfare Provisions

A Comparative Study

Raymond Plant, Peter Taylor-Gooby and Anthony Lesser

Series: Routledge Revivals

This re-issued work, first published in 1980, represents a work of normative political philosophy which argues positively for the centrality of the obligation to meet the various demands of social need in our society, and will be of particular interest to students of politics, philosophy, social politics and administration. Bringing the insights of analytical Political Philosophy to bear on the issues of social welfare and welfare provision, the authors discuss such issues as the basis of the sense of stigma involved in the receipt of welfare benefits, the right of welfare and the concepts of ‘community’.

This volume, first published in 1967, offers a new approach to the study of pressure groups, whose importance in the British political system has been increasingly recognised in recent years.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Political Philosophy and Social Welfare Part 2: Needs, Rights and Welfare Part 3: Human Needs, Objectivity and Morality Part 4: The Moral Basis of Welfare Provision Part 5: Needs, Interests and Power Part 6: Objectivity, Social Justice and Social Power Part 7: True and False Friends Part 8: Market, Needs and Welfare Part 9: Community and the Legitimation of Social Policy Part 10: Markets, Community and Welfare US $122.00

NEW

Politics and Social Insight Francis Castles Series: Routledge Revivals

First published in 1971, this is a clear, straightforward introductory discussion of the importance of sociological knowledge, and particularly sociological theory, for the understanding of political life. The topics covered include sociology and the discipline of politics, the elementary forms of political life, and the relationship between theory, evidence and insight. Francis Castles also looks at functionalism and the analysis of conflict as sociological meta-theories, and at the idea of anomie and the theory of mass society. Selected Contents: 1. Sociology and the Discipline of Politics 2. The Elementary Forms of the Political Life 3. On Theory, Evidence and Insight 4. Functionalism as Metatheory 5. The Analysis of Conflict as a Metatheoretical Orientation 6. Anomie and the Theory of Mass Society July 2009: 216x138: 152pp Hb: 978-0-415-55751-1: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09229-3

ORDER NOW!

US $113.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

Selected Contents: 1. Pressure Group Theory and its Problems 2. The Emergent Nations 3. Totalitarianism 4. Continental Europe – The Politics of Immobility 5. Scandinavia 6. The Anglo–American System – The Autonomous Interest Group 7. Attitude Groups in Britain 8. Conclusion July 2009: 216x138: 130pp Hb: 978-0-415-55759-7: £60.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09230-9

NEW

The Social Democratic Image of Society

US $104.00

NEW

Antonio Gramsci Conservative Schooling for Radical Politics Harold Entwistle Series: Routledge Revivals

Antonio Gramsci is one of the few Marxist theoreticians to have considered the role and nature of education, yet paradoxically his revolutionary, political and social theory seems at odds with his conservative approach to the content and processes of schooling. This book, originally published in 1979, examines his educational, political and cultural writings in an effort to resolve this apparent discrepancy. Gramsci's relevance lies in his treatment, in the context of his radical political theory, of themes which currently exercise modern radical educationists.

Francis Castles Series: Routledge Revivals This book, originally published in 1978, constitutes a genuinely comparative study of the world’s only truly succesful democratic socialist parties: the Social Democraic Parties of Denmark, Norway and Sweden. The measure of achievement is not merely political success the fact that in Scandinavia the Social Democrats have become ’natural parties of goverment’ shows. Just as importantly, the author shows that a political success grounded on the symbiotic relationship between party and trade union movement has been the foundation for a higher level of welfare state provision and egalitarian striving than in virtually any other advanced Western nations. It is a book for friends and foes of democratic socialism alike; for the former to provide an understanding of the tasks ahead and for the latter to know the enemy better. Selected Contents: Part 1: Achievements 1. The Political Dominance of Social Democracy 1.1. The Relative Strength of the European Social Democratic Parties 1.2. The Emergent Scandinavian Labour Movements 1.3. The Road to Power 1.4. The Mechanisms of Social Democratic Ascendancy 1.5. New Problems and New Parties 2. Equality and Welfare in Capitalist Society 2.1. Taking an Agnostic Approach 2.2. Devising a Measure of Welfare State Provision 2.3. The Data and an Interpretation 2.4. Dimensions of Equality and Welfare in Scandinavia 2.5. Capitalism and the Social Democratic Image of Society Part 2: Origins 3. Paradoxes of Scandinavian Political Development 3.1. Class and Party in Scandinavia 3.2. The Politics of Virtuous Circles 3.3. The Weakness of the Right July 2009: 216x138: 180pp Hb: 978-0-415-55762-7: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09231-6

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Schooling of Children 1.1. Introduction 1.2. The Curriculum of the School 1.3. Curriculum and the Sociology of Knowledge 1.4. Curriculum as ’The Entire Thought of the Past 1.5. School Assessment and Examinations 1.6. Education Method: School as Work 1.7. Instruction or Education? 1.8. Authority, Teachers and Teaching 1.9. Education and Fascism 1.10. Politics and Schooling: Correspondence or Contradiction 1.11. The Structure and Organisation of the School System 1.12. Educational Theory as Countercyclical 1.13. Schooling: Towards the Education of Adults Part 2: The Education of Adults 2.1. Political Education as Adult Education 2.2. Education and the Problem of the Intellectuals 2.3. Technical and Vocational Education Part 3: Theory and Practice in Education 3.1. The Philosophy of Praxis 3.2. Polytechnical Education and the Relationship Between Theory and Practice 3.3. Education and Gramsci’s Conception of Practice 3.4. Theory, Practice and the Education of Teachers 3.5. Theory, Practice and the Problem of Relevance. July 2009: 216x138: 212pp Hb: 978-0-415-55763-4: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09232-3

+44 (0)1235 400524

A Study of the Achievements and Origins of Scandinavian Social Democracy in Comparative Perspective

Francis Castles

Series: Routledge Revivals

July 2009: 216x138: 266pp Hb: 978-0-415-55743-6: £70.00

Pressure Groups and Political Culture

US $113.00

For more information about our eBooks in Politics, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

US $113.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

POLITICS

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Civilization Edited by Brett Bowden, University of New South Wales, Australia Series: Critical Concepts in Political Science Especially since the end of the Cold War, the concept of ‘civilization’ has been frequently deployed by those who seek to describe and explain the world in which we live. The events of 11 September 2001, and the subsequent ‘war on terror’, have further elevated the concept’s use in the discourse of politics and international relations. There has, for instance, been feverish speculation and increasingly heated rhetoric about struggles ‘for civilization’ or a possible ‘clash of civilizations’, particularly between the West and the Islamic world. The term is used both to describe—and to cast value-laden judgements about—people, places, and events. It is often misinterpreted and misapplied, with sometimes dangerous consequences.

11TH EDITION

Key features include:

With a full index, together with a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Civilization is an essential work of reference. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers of politics, political philosophy, and international relations—as well as those working in allied disciplines such as security studies and international law—as a vital research resource.

• some eighty-five current maps

June 2009: 234x156 Hb: 978-0-415-46965-4: £650.00

• comprehensive overview of the Russian Federation • offers an analysis and understanding of the country’s regional dimension • invaluable directories of important territorial contacts • detailed and accurate political, economic and statistical information • extensive information from a wide variety of sources, many of which are otherwise unavailable in English. February 2010: 234x156: 330pp Hb: 978-1-85743-555-9: £180.00

Jens-Uwe Wunderlich and Meera Warrier, University of Reading, UK US $300.00

Survey of Arab–Israeli Relations Liberalisms Essays in Political Philosophy

Liberalisms, a work first published in 1991, provides a coherent and comprehensive analytical guide to liberal thinking over the past century and considers the dominance of liberal thought in AngloAmerican political philosophy over the past twemty years. John Gray assesses the work of all the major liberal political philosophers including J. S. Mill, Herbert Spencer, Karl Popper, F. A. Hayek, John Rawls and Robert Nozick, and explores their mutual connections and differences. October 2009: 216x138: 274pp Hb: 978-0-415-56375-8 £75.00

US $130.00

A new addition to Europa’s popular ’Territories of the World’ series, The Territories of Indonesia provides invaluable information on this diverse country. The book supplies an in-depth guide to both the regional dimensions of the area and its inter-provincial politics. Key features: • informative introductory essays provide an impartial background on regional aspects of the Republic • a chronology covers the major events in the area’s political and economic history including: colonial rule, independence, guided democracy, Suharto and recent terrorist activities • information is provided about the national governments, structures and organizations. Individual chapters on each of the provinces and special districts, providing: • a map of the area, with geographical and historical information • an economic survey presenting the latest available statistics on performance and conditions in each of the provinces and districts • a directory of the names and addresses of leading administrative and political officials. This key publication offers a unique insight into the struggle between provinces and central government within Indonesia. September 2009: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-215-2: £140.00 eBook: 978-0-203-40301-3

US $265.00

David Seddon 2005: 234x156: 536pp Hb: 978-1-85743-213-8: £135.00 eBook: 978-0-203-40379-2

US $260.00

US $55.00

3RD EDITION

US$975.00

The Territories of Indonesia

A Political and Economic Dictionary of Africa

A Dictionary of Globalization 2007: 234x156: 312pp Hb: 978-1-85743-332-6: £155.00 Pb: 978-1-85743-518-4: £29.50

NEW Edited by Iem Brown

The introduction examines the Russian Federation as a whole, and consists of an essay written by an acknowledged expert focusing on the evolution of the relationship between the central state and the regions, followed by a chronology, demographic and economic statistics, and a review of the Federal Government. The second section comprises territorial surveys, with a chapter on each of Russia’s federal subjects, each of which includes a current map. The third and fourth parts comprise a select bibliography of books and indexes, listing the territories alphabetically, with a gazetteer of alternative names, and by both Federal Okrug and Economic Area.

In response to the revival and misuse of ‘civilization’, this new four-volume collection from Routledge Major Works meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a vast and growing scholarly literature. It brings together canonical and the best cutting-edge research to provide a comprehensive overview of the origins, contested meanings, contextual applications, and general history of this critical concept.

Selected Contents: Volume I: The Origins and Meaning of Civilization Volume II: Civilization, Civilizations, Progress, and History Volume III: Civilization and its Others Volume IV: Civilizational Relations: Past, Present, and Future

The Territories of the Russian Federation 2010

2006: 234x156: 568pp Hb: 978-1-85743-394-4: £135.00

A Political and Economic Dictionary of Latin America Peter Calvert 2004: 234x156: 336pp Hb: 978-1-85743-211-4: £135.00 eBook: 978-0-203-40378-5

US $260.00

Encyclopedia of Globalization Edited by Roland Robertson and Jan Aart Scholte 2006: 1,728pp Hb: 978-0-415-97314-4: £445.00

A Political and Economic Dictionary of Western Europe

US $800.00

Edited by Claire Annesley 2005: 234x156: 344pp Hb: 978-1-85743-214-5: £135.00 eBook: 978-0-203-40341-9

Available Online! www.europaworld.com

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $260.00

POLITICS

Edited by Michael Dumper, University of Exeter, UK

Routledge Handbook of International Political Economy (IPE)

Series: Major Writings in Middle Eastern Studies

IPE as a Global Conversation

The Arab–Israeli conflict remains one of the longestrunning disputes in modern world politics and the search for a lasting peace remains as elusive as ever. The series of wars and disputes starting in 1948 after the arrival of Zionist settlers in Palestine and the creation of the new state of Israel have primarily been about territory, but a number of other issues have exacerbated and prolonged the conflict. Externally, these include superpower rivalry and interventions in the region by Western industrial powers to secure access to the Middle East’s huge oil reserves. Internally, issues such as religious animosities, militarized polities, and the traumas of rapid modernization and development, have all contributed to regional instability.

Edited by Mark Blyth, Johns Hopkins University, USA

4-VOLUME SET

Arab–Israeli Conflict

Attempts at resolving the conflict have included a number of agreements between Palestinians and Israelis, on the one hand, and between Israel and her neighbouring states (Egypt and Jordan), on the other. Although the Oslo Accords of 1993 between Israel and the Palestine Liberation Organization established a framework for the partial decolonization of territories occupied in 1967, many thorny issues remain unresolved. Understanding the evolution and unfolding of the Arab–Israeli conflict provides crucial insights into the nature of the local, national, and international politics of the region, and offers vital indications of possible future developments. Moreover, the world crisis following the events of 11 September 2001 underscores the growing need to comprehend and resolve this conflict. The study of the conflict has generated a huge body of literature, some of it factual and evidence-based, some more polemical and provocative. In all cases there is a wide and divergent range of views. An important tool in understanding the conflict and the emotions it generates is to become familiar with such different perspectives and interpretations, and this new four-volume collection from Routledge provides an overview of both the principal topics and the various approaches to the conflict. With a full index, together with a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, The Arab–Israeli Conflict is an essential work of reference. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers of Middle East Studies, Politics, and International Relations as a vital research resource. February 2009: 234x156: 1,869pp Hb: 978-0-415-44038-7: £650.00

US $1,295.00

The study of the International Political Economy (IPE), like the IPE itself, is plural and unbounded. Despite what partisan’s sometimes say, rather than there being ‘one way’ of studying the IPE that is the ‘right way’, we find across the world great variation in IPE scholarship in terms of focus, questions, and methods. How then can we make sense of this and understand the field as a whole rather than simply learn one part of it? This Handbook is designed to address precisely this concern. It maps the shifting boundaries and diverse theoretical commitments of IPE around the world. It engages the geographical and theoretical diversity of the different versions of IPE found in North America, the UK, in Asia and Australia; and notes the absences of distinctive versions of IPE in Europe and Latin America. With over twenty contributors from a wide range of countries Routledge Handbook of International Political Economy is an essential resource for all those with an interest in this complex and rapidly evolving field of study. Selected Contents: Introduction: IPE as a Global Conversation Mark Blyth Section 1: North American IPE 1. The Multiple Traditions of American IPE Benjamin J. Cohen 2. Realist Political Economy: Traditional Themes and Contemporary Challenges Jonathan Kirshner 3. Thinking Rationally about Hierarchy and Global Governance Alexander Cooley 4. Constructivism as an Approach to International Political Economy Rawi Abdelal 5. Of Margins, Traditions and Engagements: A Brief Disciplinary History of IPE in Canada Randall Germain Section 2: British IPE 6. Lineages of a British International Political Economy Ben Rosamond and Ben Clift 7. Empiricism and Objectivity: Reflexive Theory Construction in a Complex World Ronen Palan and Angus Cameron 8. Power-Knowledge Estranged: From Susan Strange to Post-structuralism in British IPE Paul Langley 9. Bridging the Transatlantic Divide? Toward a Structurational Approach to International Political Economy Philip G. Cerny Section 3: IPE in Asia 10. Reading Hobbes in Beijing: Great Power Politics and the Challenge of the Peaceful Ascent Giovanni Arrighi 11. States and Markets, States Versus Markets: The Developmental State Debate as the Distinctive East Asian Contribution to International Political Economy Walden Bello 12. The Rise of East-Asia: An Emerging Challenge to the Study of International Political Economy Henry Yeung 13. Neither Asia nor America: IPE in Australia Jason Sharman Section 4: IPE Elswhere - Exemptions, Exclusions, and Extensions 14. Why IPE is UNderdeveloped in Europe: A Case Study of France Nicolas Jabko 15. Why Did the Latin American Critical Tradition in the Social Sciences Become Practically Extinct? Gabriel Palma 16. What Do Sociologists Bring to International Political Economy John Campbell 17. Economic History and the International Political Economy Michael J. Oliver 18. Everyday International Political Economy Leonard Seabrooke and John Hobson February 2009: 246x174: 392pp Hb: 978-0-415-77126-9: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88156-9

Handbook of Defence Politics International and Comparative Perspectives Edited by Isaiah ’Ike’ Wilson III and James J.F. Forrest Issues of defence politics and policy have long been at the forefront of political agendas and defining of international affairs. However, the dramatic changes to the global system that have taken place since the end of the Cold War and parrticularly since the terror attacks on the USA on 11 September 2001 have amplified the world’s attention toward political and policy issues of national, regional and global security. The focus of this volume is on examining the fundamental causes of, and defence policy responses to this new ’post9/11’ security environment. Edited by Isaiah (Ike) Wilson III and James J. F. Forest of the US Military Academy, West Point, USA, this volume is international in scope, with pieces written by experts in the field, offering a collection of up-to-date and balanced insights on key contemporary issues of concern to defence policymakers. The book will be an invaluable reference tool for academics and students, researchers in international relations, media professionals and government officials. 2008: 246x174: 476pp Hb: 978-1-85743-443-9: £150.00

US $295.00

Encyclopedia of the Cold War Edited by Ruud van Dijk, William Glenn Gray, Svetlana Savranskaya, Jeremi Suri and Qiang Zhai Between 1945 and 1991, tension between the USA, its allies, and a group of nations led by the USSR, dominated world politics. This period was called the Cold War – a conflict that stopped short to a fullblown war. Benefiting from the recent research of newly open archives, the Encyclopedia of the Cold War discusses how this state of perpetual tensions arose, developed, and was resolved. This work examines the military, economic, diplomatic, and political evolution of the conflict as well as its impact on the different regions and cultures of the world. Using a unique geopolitical approach that will present Russian perspectives and others, the work covers all aspects of the Cold War, from communism to nuclear escalation and from UFOs to red diaper babies, highlighting its vast-ranging and lasting impact on international relations as well as on daily life. Although the work will focus on the 1945–1991 period, it will explore the roots of the conflict, starting with the formation of the Soviet state, and its legacy to the present day. 2008: 276x219: 1,146pp Hb: 978-0-415-97515-5: £260.00

US $550.00

US $190.00

For other books on Asian Politics, please see page: 7

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

POLITICS

PSYCHOLOGY

4TH EDITION

2ND EDITION

A Dictionary of the European Union

Territories of the People’s Republic of China

Lee McGowan and David Phinnemore, both at Queen’s University, Belfast, UK ’Deserves a wide circulation among reference libraries.’ – Reference Reviews This unique collection of data includes concise definitions and explanations on all aspects of the European Union. It explains the terminology surrounding the EU and outlines the roles and significance of the institutions, member countries, programmes and policies, treaties and personalities. It contains over 1000 clear and succinct definitions, spelling out acronyms and abbreviations, arranged alphabetically and fully cross-referenced. Among the 1,000 entries you can find explanations and back-ground details on: • atmospheric pollution • Central European Free Trade Area • common agricultural policy • company law statute • competition policy • the euro • Governance White Paper • human rights • MERCATOR • Middle East • OLAF – European Anti-Fraud Office • refugee policy • Schengen Agreement • Treaty of Nice • US-EC Declaration. US $260.00

A Chronology of International Organizations This volume contains dedicated chronologies for all the major organizations, such as the UN, the Arab League, NATO, OPEC, the African Union, OAS, WTO, ASEAN and the IMF, whilst an introductory chronology covers the general development of international organizations. As the role of international organizations attains greater global significance, this source detailing how, when and why they developed, is vital both to the study of twentieth century history and to an understanding of the world today. 2008: 234x156: 320pp Hb: 978-1-85743-208-4: £140.00 eBook: 978-0-203-40366-2

Intergroup Conflicts and Their Resolution Social Psychological Perspective

US $265.00

Edited by Daniel Bar-Tal, Tel Aviv University, Israel 2ND EDITION

Series: Frontiers of Social Psychology

Profiles of People in Power

October 2010: 392pp Hb: 978-1-84169-783-3: £37.00

Circa 2006: 234x156: 720pp Hb: 978-1-85743-346-3: £135.00

US $65.00

FORTHCOMING

US $260.00

4-VOLUME SET 2ND EDITION

Social Psychology

A Dictionary of Human Rights

Edited by Richard J. Crisp, University of Kent, UK

2004: 234x156: 352pp Hb: 978-1-85743-207-7: £130.00

Series: Critical Concepts in Psychology US $250.00

FORTHCOMING

A Dictionary of Ethnic Conflict Edited by Rajat Ganguly, University of East Anglia, UK

• accession negotiations

2008: 234x156: 474pp Hb: 978-1-85743-485-9: £135.00

2006: 234x156: 272pp Hb: 978-1-85743-395-1: £140.00

FORTHCOMING

Containing approximately 500 entries, this detailed Dictionary provides authoritative and up-to-date information on ethnic groups involved in conflict. Entries are provided for current ethnic hotspots, irredentist claims, secessionist movements as well as major peace accords, with clear and concise definitions given for each specific conflict. A country profile for each of the 191 UN member states is included, detailing the current ethnic makeup, as well as the history of ethnic relations in that country, with particular emphasis on periods of hostility or violence, attempts at conflict management and signings of peace agreements. Political parties, insurgency movements, international and national organizations are listed, with contact details and internet and e-mail addresses, where available. Current concepts, theories and policies related to ethnic conflict are also covered in detail. Among those topics listed are: autonomy, ethnic identity, genocide, internal colonialism, macedonian syndrome, secession and velvet divorce. Key features: • provides a unique reference covering this important area of international affairs

Gordon W. Allport, one of social psychology’s founding fathers, described the subdiscipline as ‘an attempt to understand and explain how the thoughts, feelings and behavior of individuals are influenced by the actual, imagined or implied presence of others’. From pioneering studies in the 1940s and 1950s, via the ‘cognitive revolution’ of the 1970s, to the the emergence of sophisticated computerized methodologies and the wonders of functional MRI, social psychology remains a thriving enterprise. As serious work in social psychology continues to flourish as never before, this new title from Psychology Press meets the need for an authoritative reference work to map and make sense of a vast body of literature and a continuing explosion in research output. Edited by a leading scholar, Social Psychology is a four-volume collection which brings together the very best foundational and cuttingedge contributions. It is divided into four principal parts: Attitudes and Social Cognition; Self, Identity, and Interpersonal Processes; Group Processes; and Intergroup Relations. The collection is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the gathered material in its historical and intellectual context. Clearly delineating the subdiscipline’s key turning points and critical transitions, Social Psychology will provide users with a new and coherent understanding of the subdiscipline’s evolution. It is an essential resource and is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research tool. July 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49940-8: £650.00

• details conflicts in an un-biased manner • includes both national and international disputes • fully cross-referenced for ease of use. March 2010: 234x156: 400pp Hb: 978-1-85743-059-2: £140.00 eBook: 978-0-203-40349-5

US $265.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $1,075.00

PSYCHOLOGY

FORTHCOMING

Cluttering

A Compendium of Tests, Scales and Questionnaires

3RD EDITION

A Handbook of Research, Intervention and Education Edited by David Ward, The University of Reading, UK and Kathleen Scaler-Scott, University of Louisiana at Lafayette, USA Very few people are aware of the significant negative impact that cluttering – a communication disorder which affects a person’s ability to speak in a clear, concise and fluent manner – can have on one’s life educationally, socially and vocationally. Although different from stuttering, it is often related to this more well-known disorder. This book treats cluttering as a serious communication disorder in its own right, providing an in-depth examination of the critical factors surrounding its assessment, treatment and research. Using evidence-based data as well as information regarding the assessment and treatment of cluttering within the field of speech-language pathology, the volume includes the latest research findings and work from leading worldwide cluttering experts. Current viewpoints regarding cluttering, along with substantiated evidence are provided. Research findings are presented regarding the nature and neurology of cluttering. A range of successful assessment and treatment methodologies are described in the context of disorders which may co-occur with cluttering, such as autism spectrum disorders, learning disabilities, Down Syndrome and stuttering. Future directions with regards to the definition, teaching and researching of cluttering are also addressed. Students, faculty members, researchers and clinicians in the field of speech pathology will find this book an essential and unique source of information on cluttering. August 2010: 234x156: 232pp Hb: 978-1-84872-029-9: £39.95

US $70.00

FORTHCOMING

Work Engagement A Handbook of Essential Theory and Research Edited by Arnold Bakker, Erasmus Unviersity Rotterdam, the Netherlands and Michael Leiter, Acadia University, Canada ’This book is very carefully written and is definitely reader-friendly. Although it deals with complex and contested theories around identity it does so with rigour and clarity, and could become part of an essential bibliography for courses in psychology, gender studies, narrative studies or critical and human geography.’ – Maria Tamboukou, Centre for Narrative Research, University of East London, UK February 2010: 246x189: 248pp Hb: 978-1-84169-736-9: £34.95

ORDER NOW!

The Practitioner’s Guide to Measuring Outcomes after Acquired Brain Impairment Robyn L. Tate, University of Sydney, Australia ’Tate has identified the relevant information on a huge number of scales to save us much of the work and for that we should be extremely grateful. The book is an incredibly useful resource. I am sure clinicians, therapists and researchers working in the field of acquired brain injury will consult this book frequently – I know I will.’ – Jonathan Evans, University of Glasgow, UK The Compendium is a comprehensive reference manual containing an extensive selection of instruments developed to measure signs and symptoms commonly encountered in neurological conditions, both progressive and non-progressive. It provides a repository of established instruments, as well as newly-developed scales, and covers all aspects of the functional consequences of acquired brain impairment.

Handbook of Cognitive-Behavioral Therapies Edited by Keith S. Dobson, University of Calgary, Canada This acclaimed text and practitioner reference presents an authoritative overview of major models of cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT). Foremost treatment developers explain core CBT principles and provide a framework for systematic assessment, case conceptualization, and treatment planning. Scholarly yet accessible chapters on each therapy detail what makes the approach unique, which clinical problems it is used to treat, what assessment and intervention tools have been developed, how they are implemented, and what the research reveals about the therapy’s effectiveness. Special topics include working with children and adolescents, couples, and culturally diverse clients. The Handbook has been widely adopted in training programs, and the revisions in this edition reinforce its value as a text. New to this Edition:

In particular, the text provides a detailed review of approximately 150 specialist instruments for the assessment of people with neurological conditions such as dementia, multiple sclerosis, stroke and traumatic brain injury. Each instrument is described as a stand-alone report using a uniform format. A brief history of the instrument’s development is provided, along with a description of item content and administration/scoring procedures. Psychometric properties are reviewed and a critical commentary is provided. Up to a dozen key references are cited and in most cases the actual scale is included, giving the reader easy access to the instrument. The structure of the book directly maps onto the taxonomy of the influential International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (World Health Organization, 2001), enabling linkage of clinical concepts across health conditions.

• thoroughly revised with the latest findings and clinical advances, including five new chapters

The Compendium will be a valuable reference for clinicians, researchers, educators, and graduate students, and a practical resource for those involved in the assessment of people with brain impairment.

December 2009: 498pp Hb: 978-1-60623-437-2: £41.00

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part A: Body Functions 2. Scales of Consciousness and Orientation 3. Scales of General Cognitive Functions 4. Scales of Specific Cognitive Functions 5. Scales Assessing the Regulation of Behaviour, Thought, and Emotion 6. Scales of Sensory, Ingestion and Motor Functions Part B: Activities and Participation 7. Scales of Activities of Daily Living 8. Scales of Participation and Social Role Part C: Contextual Factors 9. Scales of Environmental Factors Part D: Multi-Domain 10. Global and Multidimensional Scales

The Handbook of Advanced Multilevel Analysis

January 2010: 297x210: 720pp Hb: 978-1-84169-561-7: £100.00 before publication £125.00 thereafter

• additional therapies: schema therapy and mindfulness- and acceptance-based interventions • chapter on the empirical evidence base for CBT • chapters on treatment of couples and culturally diverse clients. Selected Contents: Part 1: Conceptual Issues Historical and Philosophical Bases of the CognitiveBehavioral Therapies. Cognitive Assessment: Issues and Methods. Cognitive-Behavioral Case Formulation. Cognition and Clinical Science: From Revolution to Evolution. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy and Psychotherapy Integration. Part 2: The Therapies Self-management Therapies. Problem-solving Therapies. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy with Youth. Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy. Cognitive Therapy. Views of Constructivism in Psychotherapy.

FORTHCOMING

Edited by Joop Hox, Utrecht University, the Netherlands and Kyle Roberts, Southern Methodist University, Texas, USA Series: European Association for Methodology Series March 2010: 234x156: 536pp Hb: 978-1-84169-722-2: £59.95

US $120.00

US $160.00

US $62.95

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

PSYCHOLOGY

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Happiness and Well-being Edited by Felicia Huppert, University of Cambridge, UK and Alex Linley Series: Critical Concepts in Psychology Questions about the meaning, purpose, and pursuit of happiness and well-being have been addressed by thinkers since ancient times but over the past decade or so there has been a tremendous upsurge of scholarly interest in the subject. This renewed interest has come from a variety of academic disciplines, including psychology, neuroscience, and economics. The field has, in particular, been galvanized by the advent of the positive psychology movement at the turn of the century. Especially in the United States, but also in the UK and on continental Europe, Australia, and parts of Asia, research and courses in positive psychology are thriving. Harvard University’s positive psychology course, for example, is currently the most popular offering in the college’s history. Governments and international organizations are also increasingly engaged by notions of well-being and happiness. The World Health Organization has recently redefined ‘health’ to include ‘psychological well-being’ and many national policy-makers have begun to recognize that measuring a nation’s success by traditional economic values alone no longer suffices and that we need also urgently to understand how people experience the quality of their lives. Beyond the academy and government, there is also immense interest in the promotion and examination of happiness and well-being in many professional disciplines such as coaching, education, clinical psychology, and community-building. As work on happiness and well-being flourishes as never before, this new title in Psychology Press’s Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Psychology, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output. Co-edited by two leading scholars, Happiness and Well-being is a four-volume collection of classic and contemporary contributions. April 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47363-7: £650.00

US $1,295.00

FORTHCOMING

The Treatment of Eating Disorders A Clinical Handbook

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Handbook of Employee Selection

Handbook of the Uncertain Self

Edited by James L. Farr, Pennsylvania State University, University Park, USA and Nancy T. Tippins, Valtera Corporation, Greenville, South Carolina, USA

Edited by Robert M. Arkin, Kathryn C. Oleson and Patrick J. Carroll

The Handbook of Employee Selection provides a comprehensive review of a) contemporary personnel selection instruments, including the technical methodology for their development and evaluation of their effectiveness, b) the organizational systems necessary for the effective and efficient use of personnel selection methods as part of organizations’ human resource management approach, and c) the societal and organizational factors that provide the context within which personnel selection is nested. The Handbook will include descriptions of specific examples of personnel selection procedures that have had major impact on the development of personnel selection function within organizations, as well as discussions of current and future trends in employee selection around the world. March 2010: 234x156: 900pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6437-3: £49.95

US $99.00

NEW

4-VOLUME SET

Psychology of Ageing Edited by Patrick Rabbitt, University of Oxford, UK Series: Critical Concepts in Psychology Cognitive and biological ageing has become a fastgrowing and dynamic area of study and research, and the scale of this acceleration in growth makes this new four-volume collection in the Psychology Press Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Psychology, especially timely.

This Handbook examines contemporary research in social and personality on the determinants and consequences of selfuncertainty in social life. October 2009: 234x156: 480pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6187-7: £45.00

US $80.00

NEW 3RD EDITION

Handbook of Infant Mental Health Edited by Charles H. Zeanah, Jr, Tulane University School of Medicine, New Orleans, USA Widely regarded as the standard reference in a burgeoning field, this state-of-the-art Handbook offers a comprehensive analysis of developmental, clinical, and social aspects of mental health from birth to the preschool years. Leading authorities explore models of development; biological, family, and sociocultural risk and protective factors; and frequently encountered disorders and disabilities. Evidence-based approaches to assessment and treatment are presented, with an emphasis on ways to support strong parent–child relationships. The volume reviews the well-documented benefits of early intervention and prevention and describes applications in mental health, primary care, childcare, and child welfare settings. New to this Edition:

With comprehensive introductions to each volume, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in historical and scientific context, Psychology of Ageing is destined to be a vital work of reference. It will also be valued by scholars, students, and practitioners as a primary research resource.

• a major revision reflecting significant scientific and clinical advances

Selected Contents: Volume I: Biological Bases of Ageing Volume II: Cognitive Ageing Volume III: Relating Cognitive Ageing to Brain Ageing Volume IV: The Effects of Health, Demographics, and Social Conditions on Rates of Change in Old Age: Interpreting Data from Large Studies

• key gains in understanding and treating autism, language delays, trauma, attachment disorders, and more.

July 2009: 234x156: 1,976pp Hb: 978-0-415-42989-4: £650.00

US $1,075.00

• More than twenty-five new chapters • cutting-edge assessment and intervention models • important findings on brain development and early experiences

September 2009: 234x156: 622pp Hb: 978-1-60623-315-3: £51.00

NEW

Handbook on Peace Education

Edited by Carlos M. Grilo, Yale University School of Medicine, Connecticut, USA and James E. Mitchell, University of North Dakota, USA

Edited by Gavriel Salomon and Edward Cairns This Handbook encompasses a range of disciplines that underlie the field of peace education, plus contributions from experts in applying peace education in a range of settings, all complemented by chapters which deal with issues related to research and evaluation of peace education.

’A landmark contribution from internationally renowned clinical researchers. This practical volume informs the reader about state-of-theart empirically based and promising treatments, and it provides a uniquely effective guide on how to deliver these treatments. A ‘must-have’ for clinicians, researchers, and students in the field.’ – David B. Herzog, Endowed Professor of Psychiatry in the Field of Eating Disorders, Harvard Medical School, USA

September 2009: 234x156: 368pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6252-2: £50.00 US $99.00

December 2009: 592pp Hb: 978-1-60623-446-4: £43.50

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

PSYCHOLOGY

NEW

Handbook of Child Development and Early Education

Handbook of Individual Differences in Social Behavior

Handbook of Cultural Developmental Science

Research to Practice

Edited by Mark R. Leary and Rick H. Hoyle, both at Duke University, North Carolina, USA

Edited by Marc H. Bornstein, National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, Bethesda, Maryland, USA

Edited by Oscar A. Barbarin and Barbara Hanna Wasik, both at the Frank Porter Graham Child Development Institute, University of North Carolina, USA ’A “must have” for early childhood educators. This volume helps the reader keep abreast of the diverse knowledge bases that underlie the teaching of young children, and shows how applying research and theory can aid in preparing children for school. Coverage includes basic neural changes in infancy, typical socioemotional development, the effects of relationships and culture, and teaching and learning in specific content areas. The chapters provide a solid framework for novices and a terrific catch-up for seasoned professionals, with excellent bibliographies and crossreferences. Barbarin, Wasik, and company have done the field a great service.’ – Barbara Bowman, Irving B. Harris Professor of Child Development, Erikson Institute, Chicago, USA Selected Contents: Part 1: Development and Early Education Developmental Science and Early Education: An Introduction. Rethinking Early Schooling: Using Developmental Science to Transform Children’s Early School Experiences. Bridging Developmental Theory and Educational Practice: Lessons from the Vygotskian Project. Part 2: Brain Functioning and Learning Developmental Cognitive Neuroscience and Education Practice. Neurodevelopmental Changes in Infancy and Beyond: Implications for Learning and Memory. Learning to Remember. The Mind of the Preschool Child: The Intelligence–School Interface. Part 3: Social and Emotional Development Development of Self, Relationships, and Socioemotional Competence: Foundations for Early School Success. Taming the Terrible Twos: Self-Regulation and School Readiness. Teaching Hearts and Minds in Early Childhood Classrooms: Curriculum for Social and Emotional Development. Supporting Peer Relationships in Early Education. Promoting Social Acceptance and Respect for Cultural Diversity in Young Children: Learning from Developmental Research. Part 4: Language and Literacy The Social Context of Language and Literacy Development. Teaching and Learning to Read. Changing Classroom Conversations: Narrowing the Gap between Potential and Reality. Young Latino Children’s English Reading Development: Insight for Classroom Teachers. Supporting Parental Practices in the Language and Literacy Development of Young Children. Part 5: Mathematics and Science Early Mathematics Education and How to Do It. Improving Preschoolers’ Number Sense Using Information-Processing Theory. The Early Construction of Mathematical Meanings: Learning Positional Representation of Numbers. Applying Developmental Approaches to Learning Math. Construction and Representation of Space in 5-Year-Old Children. Enhancing Mathematical Problem Solving in Primary School Children. Science Education for Young Children: A Conceptual-change Point of View. Improving Science Teaching for Young Children. Part 6: Conclusion Applying Lessons from Developmental Science to Early Education. August 2009: 234x156: 624pp Hb: 978-1-60623-302-3: £57.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

’Leary and Hoyle have gathered together a set of creative social scientists who have written compelling chapters on nearly forty dispositions and their influence on social processes and outcomes. This volume will be stimulating reading for graduate students in personality and social psychology, and it reveals why the boundary between personality and social psychology is not especially meaningful. A wonderfully conceived project!’ – Peter Salovey, Yale University, USA August 2009: 234x156: 624pp Hb: 978-1-59385-647-2: £57.00

NEW

Adverse Impact Implications for Organizational Staffing and High Stakes Selection Edited by James Outtz, Outtz & Associates, Washington D.C., USA Series: SIOP Organizational Frontiers Series ’This book goes beyond the simplistic notions that prejudice can explain adverse impact, that it is enough to measure subgroup mean differences or compute adverse impact ratios, or that it happens only ’at-the-front-door’ when employees are selected. The book shows the complexities of adverse impact and of understanding it from the perspectives of psychology theory and of organizational leadership. It goes far beyond the concerns of industrial and organizational psychologists, touching on cognitive, developmental, social, and educational psychology. A lot of dissertation topics can be expected to a arise from reading this book. It will be cited often in diverse literatures.’ – Robert M. Guion, Distinguished University Professor Emeritus, Bowling Green State University, USA This text is the best single repository for a comprehensive examination of the scientific research and practical issues associated with adverse impact. Adverse impact occurs when there is a significant difference in organizational outcomes to the disadvantage of one or more groups defined on the basis of demographic characteristics such as race, ethnicity, gender, age, religion, etc. This book shows, based on scientific research, how to design selection systems that minimize subgroup differences. The primary object of this volume in the SIOP series is to bring together renowned experts in this field to present their viewpoints and perspectives on what underlies adverse impact, where we are in terms of assessing it and what we may have learned (or not learned) about minimizing it.

Researchers and theoreticians commonly acknowledge the profound impact of culture on all aspects of development. However, many in the field are often unaware of the latest cultural literatures or how development proceeds in places other than their home locations. This comprehensive handbook covers all domains of developmental science from a cultural point of view and in all regions of the globe. Part 1 covers domains of development across cultures, and Part 2 focuses on development in different places around the world. The Handbook documents child and caregiver characteristics associated with cultural variation, and it charts relations between cultural and developmental variations in physical, mental, emotional, and social development in children, parents, and cultural groups. This contemporary and scholarly resource of culture in development covers theoretical, methodological, substantive, and ethnic issues as well as geographic approaches. Each chapter includes an introduction, historical and demographic considerations, theory, an overview of the most important classical and modern research studies, recommended future directions in theory and research, and a conclusion. The chapters focus on children from the prenatal stage through adolescence. Interdisciplinary in nature, the Handbook will appeal to human development theoreticians, researchers, and students in psychology, education, and pediatrics. Ideal for those new to the field, readers will appreciate the plethora of cultural examples from all fields of child and human development and developmental examples from all fields of cultural study. Selected Contents: Part 1: Domains of Development Across Cultures. Culture. Methodology. Survival and Health. Perception. Motor Function. Cognition. Language. Literacy. Emotions and Temperament. Self and Personality. Gender. Peers. Socialization. Parenting. Religion. Part 2: Development in Different Places on Earth. The United States of America. Central and South America. European Union. North Africa and the Middle East. Afrique Noire. Russia. China. East and Southeast Asia: Japan, South Korea, Vietnam, and Indonesia. India. Australia and New Zealand. The Home Environment. Immigration and Acculturation. August 2009: 234x156: 624pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6330-7: £47.50 eBook: 978-1-4106-1782-8

US $85.00

August 2009: 584pp Hb: 978-0-8058-6374-1: £39.95 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY US $79.95

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

PSYCHOLOGY

NEW

Learning, Training, and Development in Organizations

4-VOLUME SET

Cognitive Neuroscience

A Comprehensive Handbook

Edited by Steve W.J. Kozlowski, Michigan State University, USA and Eduardo Salas, University of Central Florida, USA

Edited by Jamie Ward, University of Sussex, UK

Edited by Kathleen T. Brady, Sudie E. Back, both at the Medical University of South Carolina, USA and Shelley F. Greenfield, Harvard Medical School, Massachusetts, USA

Series: SIOP Organizational Frontiers Series This scholarly book in SIOP’s Organizational Frontier series looks at research on enhancing knowledge acquisition and its application in organizations. It concentrates on training, design and delivery given the changing nature of work and organizations. Now that work is increasingly complex, there is greater emphasis on expertise and cognitive skills. Advances in technology such as computer simulations and web-based training are necessitating a more active role for the learner in the training process. In the broad context of the organization systems, this book promotes learning and development as a continuous lifelong endeavor. Selected Contents: Part 1. The Learner, Learning Processes, and Training Outcomes. Individual Differences, Attribute-Treatment Interactions, and Training Outcomes. Motivation in Training and Development: A Phase Perspective. Experts at Work: Principles for Developing Expertise in Organizations. An Updated Review of the Multidimensionality of Training Outcomes: New Directions for Training Evaluation Research. Part 2. Emerging Issues for Design and Delivery. Cognitive Science-Based Principles for the Design and Delivery of Training. Research-Based Solutions to Three Problems in Web-Based Training. Synthetic Learning Environments: On Developing a Science of Simulation, Games, and Virtual Worlds for Training. Toward a Theory of Learner-Centered Training Design: An Integrative Framework of Active Learning. Part 3. The Organizational Context, Levels, and Time. Informal Learning and Development in Organizations. ’Learning’ a Living: Continuous Learning for Survival in Today’s Talent Market. Building an Infrastructure for Organizational Learning: A Multilevel Approach. A Multi-Level Perspective on Training and Development Effectiveness. Part 4. Reflection and an Agenda for the Future. Where Have We Been and Where Are We Going? Learning, Training, and Development in Organizations: Much Progress and a Peek Over the Horizon. July 2009: 552pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5559-3: £45.00 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY US $79.95

Series: Critical Concepts in Psychology Standing at the junction of psychology, neuroscience, and biology, cognitive neuroscience seeks to provide brain-based accounts of mental functions such as language, memory, perception, action, emotions, and decision-making. Its emergence as a coherent discipline came about relatively recently through the amalgamation of techniques that had already been in existence (such as research into the effects of brain lesion on cognition, and electrical recordings of the brain) with newly established techniques (principally brain-imaging methods), originally developed for medical diagnostic purposes. As cognitive neuroscience flourishes as never before, this new title in Psychology Press’s Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Psychology, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s already vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output. Edited by a prominent scholar, and the author of the field’s leading student textbook, Cognitive Neuroscience is a four-volume collection of foundational and contemporary contributions. The four volumes are divided into eight principal sections: History, Methods, and Key Concepts; Developmental Cognitive Neuroscience; Perception and Attention; Action; Learning and Memory; Language; Executive Functions and Decision-Making; and Emotions and Social Neuroscience. The collection is also fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editors, which places the collected material in its historical, intellectual, and practical context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students of cognitive neuroscience as a vital one-stop research tool. Selected Contents: Volume I Part 1. History, Methods, and Key Concepts 1.1 Electrophysiology 1.2 Brain Imaging 1.3 Neuropsychology 1.4 Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation Part 2. Developmental Cognitive Neuroscience Volume II. Part 3. Perception and Attention Part 4. Action Volume III Part 5. Learning and Memory Part 6. Language Volume IV Part 7. Executive Functions and Decision-Making Part 8. Emotions and Social Neuroscience June 2009: 234x156 Hb: 978-0-415-46139-9: £725.00

US $1272.00

NEW

Women and Addiction

For many years, addiction research focused almost exclusively on men. Yet scientific awareness of sex and gender differences in substance use disorders has grown tremendously in recent decades. This volume brings together leading authorities to review the state of the science and identify key directions for research and clinical practice. Concise, focused chapters illuminate how biological and psychosocial factors influence the etiology and epidemiology of substance use disorders in women; their clinical presentation, course, and psychiatric comorbidities; treatment access; and treatment effectiveness. Prevalent substances of abuse are examined, as are issues facing special populations. Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview Substance Abuse across the Lifespan in Women. Research Design and Methodology in Studies of Women and Addiction. Part 2: Biological Issues Neuroactive Gonadal Steroid Hormones and Drug Addiction in Women. Stress, Neuroendocrine Response, and Addiction in Women. Sex Differences in the Transmission of Substance Use Disorders. Sex Differences and Neurotransmitter Systems in Addiction. Sex Differences in Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics. Gender, Cognition, and Addiction. The Roles of Sex Differences in the Drug Addiction Process. Part 3: Co-occurring Psychiatric Disorders Comorbidity of Substance Use with Independent Mood and Anxiety Disorders in Women: Results from the National Epidemiologic Survey on Alcohol and Related Conditions. Depression and Substance Use Disorders in Women. Gender, Anxiety, and Substance Use Disorders. Co-occurring Eating and Substance Use Disorders. Trauma, Posttraumatic Stress Disorder, and Addiction among Women. Psychotic Disorders in Women with Substance Abuse. Concurrent Personality Disorders and Substance Use Disorders in Women. Part 4: Treatment Outcome Gender-specific Treatment for Women with Substance Use Disorders. Treatment Seeking and Utilization among Women with Substance Use Disorders. Behavioral Couple Therapy: Partner-involved Treatment for Substance-abusing Women. Part 5: Specific Substances Women, Girls, and Alcohol. Treatment of Nicotine Dependence in Women. Gender and Prescription Opioid Addiction. Women and Marijuana Dependence: Issues and Opportunities. Sex Differences in Vulnerability to Stimulant Abuse: A Translational Perspective. Part 6: Special Populations Adolescent Substance Use and the Role of Gender. Substance Use in Pregnancy. Ethnic and Cultural Correlates of Addiction among Diverse Women. Substance Use Disorders among Sexual-minority Women. Part 7: Social and Policy Issues Violence and Victimization among Women with Substance Use Disorders. Legal Issues, Addiction, and Gender. June 2009: 246x174: 526pp Hb: 978-1-60623-107-4: £43.50

For more information about our eBooks in Psychology, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

PSYCHOLOGY

2ND EDITION

NEW

2ND EDITION

Handbook of Developmental Social Neuroscience

The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy Psychoanalytic Approaches Edited by Monica Lanyado, Training Supervisor at the British Association of Psychotherapists, UK and Ann Horne, Senior Member of the British Association of Psychotherapists, UK ’This revised edition is a thoroughly impressive and impressively thorough achievement. The writing, the level of specialism and expertise evidenced, and the rich variety of clinical and research illustrations make it also a great read.’ – Anne Alvarez, Consultant Child and Adolescent Psychotherapist. This second edition provides a uniquely comprehensive guide to the practice and principles of child and adolescent psychotherapy around the world and has been thoroughly updated to take into account the many changes that have taken place. Selected Contents: Introduction. Part 1: Theoretical Foundations The Roots of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy in Psychoanalysis. Normal Emotional Development. Contributions from Attachment Theory and Research. The Contribution from Neuroscience. Research in Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy: An Overview. Part 2: Context The Child Psychotherapist in the Multi-disciplinary Team. Race and Cultural Issues. The International Scene. Part 3: Diversity of Treatments and Settings The Therapeutic Setting and Process. Individual Psychotherapy: Assessment, Intensive and Nonintensive Work. Brief Psychotherapy and Therapeutic Consultations. How Much Therapy is ‘Good-Enough’? Work with Parents. Parent-infant Psychotherapy. Group Psychotherapy. Working within Schools and Educational Settings. The Challenges of In-patient Work in a Therapeutic Community. Consultation within Residential Care. Part 4: Areas of Specialist Interest Child Psychotherapy for Children on the Autistic Spectrum. Psychotherapy with Severely Traumatised Children and Adolescents: ‘Far Beyond Words.’ Psychotherapy for Children Looked After by Local Authorities. Working with Foster Carers. Sexual Abuse and Sexual Abusing in Childhood and Adolescence. The Roots of Violence: Theory and Implications for Technique with Children and Adolescents. Work with Children and Adolescents Exposed to Political Violence. Delinquency. Working with People with Eating Disorders: ‘What If I Die Without Knowing Why?’ Gender Identity Dysphoria June 2009: 234x156: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-46368-3: £60.00

US $100.00

Edited by Michelle de Haan, Institute of Child Health, University College London, UK and Megan R. Gunnar, Institute of Child Development at the University of Minnesota, USA ’This Handbook describes research emerging at the interface of two of the hottest areas in neuroscience: social neuroscience and developmental cognitive neuroscience. The volume provides a comprehensive review of this exciting area, ranging from developmental neuroanatomy and comparative studies to developmental disorders. I predict that this will become a landmark work. It is essential reading for students and an important resource for researchers in cognitive neuroscience and social development.’ – Mark H. Johnson, University of London, UK Recent years have seen an explosion of research into the physiological and neural bases of social behavior. This state-of-the science Handbook is unique in approaching the topic from a developmental perspective. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction The Brain in a Social Environment: Why Study Development? Part 2: Methodological and Biological Background Methods in Social Neuroscience: Issues in Studying Development. Neuroanatomy of the Developing Social Brain. Part 3: Perceiving and Communicating with Others Neural Bases of the Development of Face Processing. Decoding Social Signals in the Infant Brain: A Look at Eye Gaze Perception. The Development and Neural Bases of Processing Emotion in Faces and Voices. The Development of Social Information Gathering in Infancy: A Model of Neural Substrates and Developmental Mechanisms. Imitation as a Stepping Stone to Empathy. Mentalizing and Development during Adolescence. Early Communicative Development and the Social Brain. Evolutionary Origins of Social Communication. Part 4: Relationships Attachment and the Comparative Psychobiology of Mothering. Neuroendocrine Mechanisms of Social Bonds and Child–Parent Attachment, from the Child’s Perspective. Neurobiology and Hormonal Aspects of Romantic Relationships. Animal Models of Romantic Relationships. Part 5: Regulatory Systems: Motivation and Emotion Temperament and Affect Vulnerability: Behavioral, Electrocortical, and Neuroimaging Perspectives. Reward Systems. Social Relationships as Primary Rewards: The Neurobiology of Attachment. A Brain-Based Account of Developmental Changes in Social Decision Making. Part 6: Perspectives on Psychopathology A Social Neuroscience Approach to Adolescent Depression. The Development and Neural Bases of Psychopathy. Autism: Risk Factors, Risk Processes, and Outcome. Social and Genetic Aspects of Turner, Williams–Beuren, and Fragile X Syndromes. The Effects of Early Institutionalization on Social Behavior and Underlying Neural Correlates. Socioemotional Development Following Early Abuse and Neglect: Challenges and Insights from Translational Research. May 2009: 234x156: 558pp Hb: 978-1-60623-117-3: £57.50

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Auditing Organizational Communication A Handbook of Research, Theory and Practice Edited by Owen Hargie, University of Ulster. and Dennis Tourish, Robert Gordon University, UK. ’This is a terrific book which advances theoretical and applied knowledge about the purpose, conduct and outcomes of communication audits. The editors are two of the UK’s leading scholars in organisational communication who are also both experts at carrying out audits in a variety of organisations and sectors. It’s hardly surprising then that this is a most insightful text.’- Christine Daymon, Curtin Business School, Curtin University of Technology, Australia Auditing Organizational Communication is a thoroughly revised and updated new edition of the successful Handbook of Communication Audits for Organizations, which has established itself as a core text in the field of organizational communication. Research studies consistently show the importance of effective communication for business success. They also underscore the necessity for organizations to put in place validated techniques to enable them to systematically measure and monitor their communications. This Handbook equips readers with the vital analytic tools required to conduct such assessments. This second edition arrives at a time of considerable growing interest in the area. A large volume of research has been published since the last edition of the book, and the text has been comprehensively updated by reviewing this wealth of data. In addition, new chapters on social network analysis and auditing the communication revolution have been added, together with new case study chapters illustrating audits in action. Selected Contents: Editorial Introduction. Part 1: Audits in Context Communication and Organisational Success. Auditing Communication to Maximise Performance. Part 2: Audit Methodologies The Questionnaire Approach. The Interview Approach. The Focus Group Approach. Data Collection Log-sheet Methods. Social Network Analysis. Auditing Professional Practice. Auditing the Communications Revolution. Crafting the Audit Report. Part 3: Audits in Action Charting Communication Performance in a Health Care Organisation. Communication Audit of a Hospital Clinic. A Communication Audit of a Paper Mill. Auditing Corporate Leadership. Redesigning a Communication Event through External Audits. Auditing Corporate Culture. Auditing a Major Police Organisation. Auditing a Major Retail Chain. A Study of Sensemaking and CEO Change. Part 4: Final Considerations Strategy, Pedagogy and Research: The Role of Audits. March 2009: 234x156: 520pp Hb: 978-0-415-41445-6: £49.95 Pb: 978-0-415-41446-3: £27.50 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $90.00

US $49.95

www.routledge.com/reference

PSYCHOLOGY

Social Cognition The Basis of Human Interaction Edited by Fritz Strack, Universitat Würzburg, Germany and Jens Förster, Universiteit Van Amsterdam, the Netherlands Series: Frontiers of Social Psychology Social cognition is an area of social psychology that has been flourishing over the past two decades. It has harnessed basic concepts from cognitive psychology and developed and refined them to explain human thinking, feeling, and acting in a social context. Moreover, social cognition has integrated emotional influences and unconscious processes to reach a more complete understanding of social psychological phenomena. In this volume, the reader will find a representative sample of outstanding research in the field of social cognition. The chapters address its central themes, roughly organized along the temporal axis of information processing. They include basic operations like perception, categorization, representation, and judgmental inferences. Other chapters focus on issues like social comparison, emotion, language and culture. All of the contributors are internationally-renowned experts who share with the reader their accounts of the research experience in each of their domains. Social Cognition: The Basis of Human Interaction is an invaluable resource for researchers requiring a comprehensive, yet concise, overview of the field, and may also be used by intermediate and advanced students of social cognition. Selected Contents: Social Cognition: An Introduction. Attention, Perception and Social Cognition. Representing Social Concepts Modally and Amodally. Unconscious, Conscious, and Metaconscious in Social Cognition. Conversational Inference: Social Cognition as Interactional Intelligence. From Simple Categorization to Higher-Order Inference Problems. Mental Construal in Social Judgment. Social Comparison. Metacognition. Spontaneous Evaluations. Emotion. A Social-Cognitive Perspective on Automatic Self Regulation: The Relevance of Goals in the Information Processing Sequence. Language and Social Cognition. Culture and Social Cognition in Human Interaction. March 2009: 331pp Hb: 978-1-84169-451-1: £37.00 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY US $65.00

Handbook of Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Discrimination

Handbook of Peer Interactions, Relationships, and Groups

Edited by Todd D. Nelson, California State Univeristy – Stanislaus, USA This Handbook provides a uniquely comprehensive and scholarly overview of the latest research on prejudice, stereotyping, and discrimination. All chapters are written by eminent prejudice researchers who explore key topics, by presenting an overview of current research and, where appropriate, developing new theory, models, or scales. The volume is clearly structured, with a broad section on cognitive, affective, and neurological processes, followed by chapters on some of the main target groups of prejudice – based on race, sex, age, sexual orientation, and weight. A concluding section explores the issues involved in reducing prejudice. Chapters on the history of research in prejudice and future directions round off this state-of-the-art Handbook. The volume will provide an essential resource for students, instructors, and researchers in social and personality psychology, and also be an invaluable reference for academics and professionals in the fields of sociology, communication studies, gerontology, nursing, medicine, as well as government and policymakers and social service agencies. Selected Contents: Part 1: History of Research on Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Discrimination The Study Of Stereotyping, Prejudice, and Discrimination Within Social Psychology: A Quick History of Theory and Research. Part 2: Cognitive, Affective, and Neurological Processes Involved in Prejudice Development of Racial and Ethnic Prejudice Among Children. Intergroup Threat Theory. Automaticity and Control in Stereotyping and Prejudice. Attributions to Discrimination: Antecedents and Consequences. Controlling Prejudice and Stereotyping: Antecedents, Mechanisms, and Contexts. Stereotypes and Shifting Standards. Stereotype and Social Identity Threat. The Role of Entitativity in Stereotyping: Processes and Parameters. The Unbearable Accuracy of Stereotypes. Downward and Upward Spirals in Intergroup Interactions: The Role of Egosystem and Ecosystem Goals. The Stereotypic Behaviors of the Powerful and Their Effect on the Relatively Powerless. Mechanisms Underlying the Malleability of Implicit Prejudice and Stereotypes: The Role of Automaticity and Cognitive Control. Intergroup Emotions Theory. How Our Dreams of Death Transcendence Breed Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Conflict: Terror Management Theory. You Were Always On My Mind: How Event-Related Potentials Inform Impression Formation Research. Pictures in Our Heads: Contributions of fMRI to the Study of Prejudice and Stereotyping. Measures of Prejudice. Part 3: Targets of Prejudice Racism in the 21st Century. Sexism. Ageism. Sexual Prejudice. Anti-Fat Prejudice. Part 4: Reducing Prejudice A Common Ingroup Identity: A Categorization-based Approach for Reducing Intergroup Bias. The Selfregulation of Prejudice. Part 5: Epilogue. The Future of Research on Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Discrimination.

Edited by Kenneth H. Rubin, William M. Bukowski, Concordia University, USA and Brett Laursen, University of Maryland, College Park, USA This comprehensive, authoritative Handbook covers the breadth of theories, methods, and empirically based findings on the ways in which children and adolescents contribute to one another’s development. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction: History and Theory Critical Issues and Theoretical Viewpoints. Trends, Travails, and Turning Points in Early Research on Children’s Peer Relationships: Legacies and Lessons for Our Time? Part 2: Social Behaviors, Interactions, Relationships, and Groups: What Should be Measured, How, and Why? Children’s Behaviors and Interactions with Peers. Methods for Investigating Children’s Relationships with Friends. Sociometric Methods. Assessment of the Peer Group: Identifying Naturally Occurring Social Networks and Capturing Their Effects. Part 3: Infancy and Early Childhood The Beginnings of Peer Relations. Peer Interactions and Play in Early Childhood. Social - Emotional Competence in Early Childhood. Friendship in Early Childhood. Structural Descriptions of Social Transactions Among Young Children: Affiliation and Dominance in Preschool Groups. Part 4: Middle Childhood and Early Adolescence Friendship as Process, Function, and Outcome. The Behavioral Basis of Acceptance, Rejection, and Perceived Popularity. Social Exclusion in Childhood and Adolescence. Conflict in Peer Relationships. Aggression and Peer Relationships in School-Age Children: Relational and Physical Aggression in Group and Dyadic Contexts. Avoiding and Withdrawing from the Peer Group. Bullies, Victims, and Bully - Victim Relationships in Middle Childhood and Early Adolescence. Adolescent Romantic Relationships and Experiences. Informal Peer Groups in Middle Childhood and Adolescence. Part 5: Distal Correlates of Children’s Peer Relationships Sex Differences in Peer Relationships. Race and Ethnicity in Peer Relations Research. Neighborhood Contexts of Peer Relationships and Groups. Peer Interactions and Relationships from a Cross-Cultural Perspective. Part 6: Proximal Correlates of Children’s Social Skills and Peer Relationships, Genetic Factors in Children’s Peer Relations. Temperament, Self-Regulation, and Peer Social Competence. Child - Parent Attachment Relationships, Peer Relationships, and Peer-Group Functioning. Family Influences on Children’s Peer Relationships. Part 7: Childhood Peer Experiences and Later Adjustment Peers and Academic Functioning at School. Peer Reputations and Psychological Adjustment. The Role of Friendship in Child and Adolescent Psychosocial Development. Part 8: Translation and Policy Deviant by Design: Peer Contagion in Development, Interventions, and Schools. Social Skills Training to Improve Peer Relations. Author Index. Subject Index. January 2009: 234x156: 654pp Hb: 978-1-59385-441-6: £57.50

February 2009: 234x156: 584pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5952-2: £49.95 eBook: 978-1-84169-777-2 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY US $90.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

PSYCHOLOGY

Handbook of Polytomous Item Response Theory Models Edited by Michael Nering and Remo Ostini This comprehensive Handbook focuses on the most used polytomous item response theory (IRT) models. These models help us understand the interaction between examinees and test questions where the questions have various response categories. The book reviews all of the major models and includes discussions about how and where the models originated, conceptually and in practical terms. Diverse perspectives on how these models can best be evaluated are also provided. Practical applications provide a realistic account of the issues practitioners face using these models. Disparate elements of the book are linked through editorial sidebars that connect common ideas across chapters, compare and reconcile differences in terminology, and explain variations in mathematical notation. These sidebars help to demonstrate the commonalities that exist across the field. By assembling this critical information, the editors hope to inspire others to use polytomous IRT models in their own research so they too can achieve the type of improved measurement that such models can provide. Featuring contributions from the leading authorities, this Handbook will appeal to measurement researchers, practitioners, and students who want to apply polytomous IRT models to their own research. The book will be of particular interest to education and psychology assessment specialists who develop and use tests and measures in their work, especially researchers in clinical, educational, personality, social, and health psychology. This book also serves as a supplementary text in graduate courses on educational measurement, psychometrics, or item response theory. January 2009: 234x156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-8058-5992-8: £40.00 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY US $62.95

2ND EDITION

The Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play Linnet McMahon, Retired Lecturer in Social Work, University of Reading, UK This completely revised and updated second edition provides a comprehensive introduction to using play to communicate with troubled or traumatized children and their families, and to heal emotional damage. The book gives examples of good practice in different settings and situations, including schools, hospitals, residential settings, families and foster carers. It also includes a consideration of the support needs of workers and carers. Drawing on psychodynamic, systemic and attachment theory, the book provides an integrated theory base for using play in therapeutic work with children. It emphasizes non-directive approaches to therapeutic play and play therapy, based on supporting the child’s developing self within the safe boundaries provided by the setting and the worker’s emotional holding and containment. Areas explored include: • children with disabilities and illnesses • daily living with abused and traumatized children • helping troubled families • difficulties in early years • children experiencing separation, loss and bereavement • children moving to new families. The Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play is an invaluable resource for all of those using play therapy with children and will appeal not only to play therapists but also to professionals working in the broader field of therapeutic play. It will be useful whether the readers are at the beginning of their training or are well-established and experienced practitioners and managers. Selected Contents: Introduction: The State of Play. The Development of Play. Approaches to Therapeutic Play. The Process of Therapeutic Play and Play Therapy. Therapeutic Play in the Early Years. Play in Helping Troubled Families. Therapeutic Play for Children with Disabilities and Illness. Therapeutic Play for Children Experiencing Separation, Loss and Bereavement in Their Families. Therapeutic Play with Children who have Experienced Continual Trauma and Loss. Therapeutic Play in Daily Living with Abused and Traumatized Children. Play in Therapeutic Work with Children Moving to New Families. January 2009: 234x156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-43941-1: £60.00

US $100.00

Social Psychology of Consumer Behavior Edited by Michaela Wanke, Institut fur Psychologie, Basel, Switzerland Series: Frontiers of Social Psychology The Social Psychology of Consumer Behavior brings together the most promising and theoretically fruitful research developments by internationally renowned scholars, whose work is at the cutting edge of research. Experts from both fields – social psychology and consumer behavior – provide an informed, up-to-date overview, from an original integrative perspective. The aim of this volume is two-fold. On the one hand, the application of social psychology to consumer behavior is meant to broaden the horizon of social psychologists. On the other hand, students and researchers of consumer behavior will be offered an advanced account of relevant theories tailored to their interests. While the range of topics is rather broad – including the construal of judgments and decisions, affective and cognitive feelings, social and media influences, and goals and self-regulation – each chapter is focused on one specific theoretical or methodological perspective and thereby gives a comprehensive and penetrative account of the relevant issues and the respective research. The volume provides an invaluable resource to students, researchers, and instructors in social psychology, consumer psychology, consumer behavior, and marketing. 2008: 385pp Hb: 978-1-84169-498-6: £37.50 • AVAILABLE AS AN INSPECTION COPY US $65.00

Handbook of Imagination and Mental Simulation Edited by Keith D. Markman, William M. P. Klein and Julie A. Suhr, all at Department of Psychology, Ohio University, USA Over the past thirty years, and particularly within the last ten years, researchers in the areas of social psychology, cognitive psychology, clinical psychology, and neuroscience have been examining fascinating questions regarding the nature of imagination and mental simulation – the imagination and generation of alternative realities. Some of these researchers have focused on the specific processes that occur in the brain when an individual is mentally simulating an action or forming a mental image, whereas others have focused on the consequences of mental simulation processes for affect, cognition, motivation, and behavior. This Handbook provides a novel and stimulating integration of work on imagination and mental simulation from a variety of perspectives. It is the first broad-based volume to integrate specific subareas such as mental imagery, imagination, thought flow, narrative transportation, fantasizing, and counterfactual thinking, which have, until now, been treated by researchers as disparate and orthogonal lines of inquiry. As such, the volume enlightens psychologists to the notion that a widerange of mental simulation phenomena may actually share a commonality of underlying processes. 2008: 234x156: 488pp Hb: 978-1-84169-887-8: £49.95

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $90.00

www.routledge.com/reference

RELIGION

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Spirituality

Religion and the Environment

Religion and Science

Edited by Paul Heelas, Lancaster University, UK

Edited by Roger Gottlieb, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, USA

Edited by Sara Fletcher Harding and Nancy Morvillo, both at Florida Southern College, USA

Series: Critical Concepts in Religious Studies It would not be an exaggeration to say that during the last century, most especially during and since the ‘sixties’, the language of spirituality has become one of the most significant ways in which the sacred has come to be understood and judged in the west, and, increasingly, elsewhere. Whether it is true that ‘spirituality’ has eclipsed ‘religion’ in western settings remains debatable. What is incontestable is that the language of spirituality, together with practices (most noticeably spiritual CAM, complementary and alternative medicine), has become a major feature of the sacred dimensions of contemporary modernity. Equally incontestably, spirituality is a growing force in all those developing countries where its presence is increasingly felt among the cosmopolitan elite, and where spiritual forms of TCAM (traditional complementary and alternative medicine) are thriving. This new four-volume Major Work from Routledge provides a coherent compilation of landmark texts which cannot be ignored by those intent on making sense of what is happening to the sacred as spirituality – more exactly what is taken to be spirituality – develops as an increasingly important lingua franca, series of practices, and as a humanistic ethicality. July 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49029-0: £650.00

US $1,140.00

2-VOLUME SET

The Encyclopedia of Taoism Edited by Fabrizio Pregadio, Stanford University, USA 2007: 246x174: 1,551pp Hb: 978-0-7007-1200-7: £160.00 eBook: 978-0-203-69548-7

US $305.00

Series: Critical Concepts in Religious Studies In the last two decades a new form of religiously motivated social action and a virtually new field of academic study—each based in recognition of the connections between religion and humanity’s treatment of the environment—have developed. Interactions between religion and environmental concern have been manifest in the explosive growth of ecotheological writings, institutional commitment by organized religions, and environmental activism explicitly oriented to religious ideals. Clergy throughout the world in virtually every denomination have received word from leaders of their religion that the environment—no less than sexuality, poverty, or war and peace—is now a basic and compelling religious matter. Out of this confrontation have been born vital new theologies based in the recovery of marginalized elements of tradition, profound criticisms of the past, and ecologically oriented visions of God, the Sacred, the Earth, and human beings. Theologians from every religious tradition—along with dozens of non-denominational spiritual writers—have confronted world religions’ past attitudes towards nature. In the realm of institutional commitment, public statements and actions by organized religions have grown dramatically. In the context of political action, throughout the U.S. and the world religiously oriented groups take part in environmentally oriented political action: from lobbying and consciousness raising to activist demonstrations and civil disobedience. This collection serves as a comprehensive introduction, overview, and in-depth account of these exciting new developments. The four volumes cover virtually every aspect of the field—from theological change and institutional commitment to innovation in liturgy, from new ecumenical connections among different religions and between religion, science and environmental movements, from religious participation in environmental politics to an account of the global social and political contexts in which religious environmentalism has unfolded. December 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-55451-0: £650.00 US $1,295.00

Series: Critical Concepts in Religious Studies The modern world is the product of a post-enlightenment age and an emerging global society. Struggles among peoples with different ideas, values and customs are historically, and presently, manifest. To be human is to seek an understanding of the world in which we live, how it works and why. These basic questions for the human mind have produced answers that have emerged in different contexts and with different methods. Empirical science explains our observations of the natural world, whereas religion provides answers about meaning and purpose for such a world. The encounter between reason and faith, the mind and spirit, have the appearance of polarity. In actuality, there is fluidity between the two. It is a dynamic and constantly changing, albeit often misunderstood, relationship, and for that reason, it is an important academic area that needs careful and intentional study. The constructive engagement between religion and science provides an important pathway for overcoming cultural boundaries and incorrect assumptions about the world and our relationship to it. Through an interdisciplinary approach, the study of religion and science can help individuals understand both disciplines in a different light, paint a more holistic picture of the world around us and, most importantly, lead us to an appreciation of the different ways we come to understand our world. Volume I: Histories and Methodologies in Religion and Science sets a context for the other volumes in that it will present historical accounts of the relationship between religion and science as well as methodologies and ways of knowing in both science and religion. Volume II: Cosmological Considerations in Religion and Science ranges from ancient understandings of the universe, to the Galileo affair, to current understandings of the Big Bang and elucidate the roles of chance, randomness and indeterminacy. Volume III: The Imperative of Evolution in Religion and Science studies the premise of scientific evolution and the theological challenges that it brought, as well as highlighting responses to Darwin’s ideas and exploring alternative explanations that have emerged, including creationism. Volume IV: Human Actions at the Intersection of Religion and Science focuses on the environment, medicine, biotechnology and gender. September 2010 Hb: 978-0-415-54902-8: £650.00

For more information about Routledge Religion Online, please see the online section in the middle of the catalogue

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $1,075.00

RELIGION

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Anthropology of Religion

FORTHCOMING

The Orthodox Christian World

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Augustine Casiday, University of Durham, UK

Psychology of Religion

Edited by Phillips Stevens Jr., SUNY at Buffalo, USA Series: Critical Concepts in Religious Studies

Series: Routledge Worlds

Series: Critical Concepts in Religious Studies

Religious belief is an extremely powerful motivator of human behaviour. Religious considerations permeate and influence all parts of a culture. Religious systems are universal in human cultures, around the world and through all stages of human history and prehistory. Of all academic approaches to religion, the anthropological approach is the most comprehensive and the most useful to students of human belief and behaviour, because it examines religion as a cultural system that cannot fully be understood separated from the other systems with which it interacts.

Orthodox Christianity is the main historical inheritor of the Byzantine tradition of Christianity, and is still practised around the world. The two main strands are Greek Orthodox and Russian Orthodox, but there are thriving communities in countries as varied as Egypt (the Copts), Armenia, and Romania, with strong diasporic communities in Western Europe, North America, Australia, and elsewhere.

Psychology of religion is essentially as old as psychology itself, with over a hundred years of history and claiming some of psychology’s most notable characters as contributors, including William James, Sigmund Freud, Gordon Allport, and Jean Piaget. In recent years, this subfield of psychology has risen in prominence. Sectarian violence, secularization, the ‘culture wars’, and increase in cross-cultural and cross-religious contact through migration, urbanization, and globalization have all contributed to heightened interest in questions such as: where do religious beliefs come from? Why do they seem to motivate behaviour so powerfully? Is religious belief and practice good or bad for us? Does religious belief assist or hinder morality?

Anthropology considers cultural phenomena at three levels simultaneously: the ethnographic, the ethnological, and the biological. Since its inception nearly 140 years ago, anthropology’s reputation has been established through its explorations at the first, the ethnographic level, emphasizing the description and explanation of phenomena from the perspectives of the actors themselves. Since the middle of the 20th century anthropology enhanced its unique distinction among the social sciences through the development of its cross-cultural and historical comparative ethnological approach, enabling the construction of general statements about people. And in recent years anthropologists have drawn from the remarkable new discoveries in cognitive neuroscience to firmly establish the bases for culture in the brain, and the implications for our understanding of religion are potentially huge. The work assembles exemplary articles in the field from its Victorian beginnings to the present, and represents all generally-accepted categories of religious belief and ritual, plus some new ones. Topics covered include: the Anthropological Concern with Religion; Power and Symbols; Religious Beings and Forces; Religious Practitioners; Myth; Varieties of Religious Experience; Ritual: collective and individual; Sexuality and Gender Magic; Sorcery and Witchcraft; Explanations: Religion and Ecology; Religion and Society; Religion and Neurobiology; Religion in Culture Change: Conflict, Syncretism, Conversion; Revitalization, Cults, Sects and New Religions. The first volume begins with a general introduction written by the editor which outlines the history and salient aspects of the anthropological concern for religion, and introduces the specific sections of the work. Each major section is opened with a short introduction. Anthropology of Religion lies at the forefront of research on the subject, and is destined to be valued by scholars, students, researchers, and practitioners as an essential one-stop reference. August 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49423-6: £650.00

This book offers a compelling overview of the Orthodox World, covering the main regional traditions and the ways in which the tradition has become global; key figures from John Chrysostom to the contemporary Fathers of Mount Athos and a rich selection of key themes, including theology, monasticism, iconography and the arts, pastoral care and Orthodoxy through the eyes of travellers. The contributors are drawn from the Orthodox community worldwide, providing an innovative and illuminating approach to the subject, ideal for students and scholars alike. Selected Contents: Section 1: Orthodox Christianity Around the World Regional Traditions. The Greek Tradition. The Slavic tradition (inc. Russian, Ukrainian, Serbia, Bulgaria). The Romanian Tradition. The Syriac Tradition. The Arabic Tradition. The Coptic Tradition. The Ethiopian Tradition. The Armenian Tradition. The Georgian Tradition. Orthodoxy Worldwide. Western Europe. North America. Subsection: Alaska SubSaharan Africa. South America. Australasia. Section 2: Important Figures in Orthodox Christianity. Origen – John Chrysostom. Ephrem the Syrian. Cyril of Alexandria. Babai the Great. Emperor Justinian. Dionysius the Areopagite. Maximus the Confessor. Theodore Abu. Qurrah Cyril and Methodius. Photius the Great. Symeon the New Theologian. Gregory abu-l Farag (Barhebraeus). Takla Haymanot. The Hesychasts. Nil Sorsky. Neagoe. Basarab. The Optina Elders. Nikodimos the Hagiorite. Philaret of Moscow. Raphael Hawaweeny. The Paris School. Contemporary Athonite Fathers. Dumitru Staniloae. Matta el-Meskein. Section 3: Major Themes in Orthodox Christianity Orthodox Worship. Orthodox Doctrine. ‘Sophia’ Calendars and Chronologies Monasticism. Iconography and Aesthetics. Canon Law. Ecclesiology and Ecumenism. Pastoral Care and Counselling. Education. Music. Literature: Russian Literature: Greek Ethnicity and Orthodoxy. Orthodoxy Through the Eyes of Travellers. June 2010: 246x174: 672pp Hb: 978-0-415-45516-9: £120.00

US $215.00

Edited by Justin L. Barrett, University of Oxford, UK

Increasingly discussed by journalists and sciencepopularisers such as Richard Dawkins, Daniel Dennett, A.C. Grayling, Sam Harris, Christopher Hitchens, and Lewis Wolpert, these sorts of questions are psychological questions with psychological answers emerging through the work of psychologists of religion. Social and cultural factors have provided some motivation for renewed interest in psychology of religion, and additional impetus has been provided by new advances in psychological subfields, particularly cognitive, developmental, and evolutionary psychology. These three areas, previously only marginal contributors to psychology of religion, have begun making more substantial contributions concerning how and why human minds come to represent certain religious ideas and beliefs. Not surprisingly, psychology of religion is becoming a more prominent focus of psychological research and teaching. This collection presents the most up-to-date and comprehensive presentation of the psychology of religion available. The first volume focuses on psychological explanations of religion (that is, religion as something to be explained), the second concerning religious psychology, the third representing the impact of religion on thought, feelings, and behaviour, and the final volume considering implications of religious perspectives and findings for the practice of psychology, both scientific and applied. Historical and contemporary perspectives are integrated into thematically arranged sections. An extended introduction surveying the field begins the collection and an index increases the collection’s utility as a reference resource. April 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48876-1: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication)

US $1,140.00

US $1,295.00

US $1,140.00

For other titles in Psychology, please see page: 71

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

RELIGION

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Islam in South Asia

Islamic Law

Jihad and Martyrdom

Edited by David Taylor, Institute of Commonwealth Studies, UK

Edited by Gavin Picken, American University of Sharjah, UAE

Edited by David Cook, Rice University, USA

Series: Critical Concepts in Islamic Studies

There are more Muslims – over 400 million – in South Asia than in any other region in the world. Many of the most important political, intellectual and spiritual developments within Islam have had their origins, or have flourished, in the area, and Muslims from the region have played important roles in the global history of Islam. Pakistan was specifically created to provide a homeland for South Asia’s Muslim population, and its trials and tribulations over the past sixty years have been carefully watched by Muslims and non-Muslims alike. Muslims constitute India’s largest minority, with an often uneasy relationship to the majority.

Islamic law is a legal tradition entrenched within a religious context; it is one of the most intriguing and fascinating areas of Islamic Studies. Many practitioners of Islam believe that their lives should be governed by a divinely revealed and sanctioned form of law that affects every aspect of their daily routines. Thus, whether it be a conventional religious act such as prayer, a customary practice such as marriage, or commercial activities such as trade, all these activities are determined by their legal validity within the Islamic law.

Jihad (or ‘struggle’) and martyrdom in Islam have an ever-greater relevance in today’s world, but there remains a great deal of ignorance about these critical concepts.

4-VOLUME SET

The early history of Islam in South Asia, including migration, conversion and Muslim dynasties, as well as religious developments, are studied in depth, as is the role of Islam in the colonial period, including resistance to colonial rule, and intellectual responses to, and dialogue with, Western thought. Articles also cover Islam since independence, including political movements, Muslims as majorities and minorities, and the South Asian Muslim diaspora. In addition, Islam and development, including material related to women and Islam, legal reform, Islamic finance, and education issues, are all areas that Islam in South Asia considers. During the last hundred years there has been extensive English-language writing and research on Islam in South Asia, both by Muslim scholars and by non-Muslims. This new Major Work from Routledge brings together the most significant and enduring work, most of it published in the past thirty years, but with occasional use of older material. Islam in South Asia, with a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor to place the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, is destined to be an essential work of reference. April 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-55295-0: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication)

Islamic law has developed over many centuries of juristic effort into a subtle, complex, and highly developed reality. Thus, Islamic law, like any other, has its ’sources’ (al-masadir); it also has its ’guiding principles’ (al-usul) that dictate the nature of its ’evidence’ (al-adilla); it equally employs the use of ’legal maxims’ (al-qawa’id) and utilizes a number of underlying ’objectives’ (al-maqasid) to underpin the structure of its legal theory. Supplemented with a full index, Islamic Law includes a comprehensive introduction newly written by the editor which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is certain to be valued as a vital research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Origins and Sources The Primacy of Revelation. The Quran. Hadith and Sunna. Ijmfi. Qiys. Subsidiary Sources of Law. Ijtihd. Volume II: The Genesis of Legal Theory and the Schools of Law Malik B. Anas (d. 179/795) and the Muwatta al-Shafii (d. 204/820). Contemporaneous Juristic Activity. Evolution of the Schools. Volume III: Consolidation and ‘Stagnation’ Ijtihad and Taqlid. Muftis and Qadis. Consolidation of the Schools. Volume IV: Islamic Law in the Modern World Islamic Law and the State. The Reconstruction of Tradition. The Study of Islamic Law in the West. June 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47076-6: £650.00

US $1,140.00

FORTHCOMING

The Routledge Companion to Early Christian Thought Edited by D. Jeffrey Bingham, Dallas Theological Seminary, USA

The shape and course which Christian thought has taken over its history is largely due to the contributions of individuals and communities in the second and third centuries. Bringing together a remarkable team of distinguished scholars, The Routledge Companion to Early Christian Thought is the ideal companion for those seeking to understand the way in which Early Christian thought developed within its broader cultural milieu and was communicated through its literature, especially as it was directed toward theological concerns. Divided into three parts, the Companion: • asks how Christianity’s development was impacted by its interaction with cultural, philosophical, and religious elements within the broader context of the second and third centuries. • examines the way in which Early Christian thought was manifest in key individuals and literature in these centuries. • analyzes Early Christian thought as it was directed toward theological concerns such as God, Christ, Redemption, Scripture, and the community and its worship. US $200.00

Series: Critical Concepts in Islamic Studies

Volume I contains material on classical and pre-modern manifestations of jihad, focusing on the early Islamic conquests and the development of the concepts of jihad both in the field and within the legal literature up to and including the period of the Crusades (1099–1291). Volume II, meanwhile, explores alternative analyzes of jihad, such as Sufi interpretations of the ‘greater jihad’, Shi’ite interpretations of jihad, and the martyrology of both groups. Volume III focuses on colonial and near-contemporary manifestations of jihad, including alternative versions, such as those of the Bahais and the Ahmadis that radically reinterpret the concept, and anti-colonial jihadi movements in Africa, the Middle East, Russia, India, and Southeast Asia. The final volume in the collection deals with contemporary thinking about jihad and radical Islam, concentrating on the legal discussion of contemporary radical Muslim tactics, the development of jihadi mythologies, the ideological tensions within the Salafi jihadi world, and the emergence of contemporary Shi’ite interpretations of jihad. Jihad and Martyrdom is an essential collection and is destined to be valued by all scholars and students of Islam as a vital one-stop research resource. November 2009: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47623-2: £650.00 US $1,295.00

NEW 4-VOLUME SET

Religion and Politics Edited by Jeffrey Haynes, London Metropolitan University, UK Series: Critical Concepts in Religious Studies

US $1,295.00

December 2009: 246x174: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-44225-1: £120.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86451-7

The early twenty-first century has witnessed a global resurgence of religious activity and identification. In particular, numerous examples of the growing political influence of religion can be cited, not least in Europe, once thought to be an inexorably secularizing continent. In India, meanwhile, officially a secular state, the Bharatiya Janata Party has served in several coalition governments and, until 2004, was the leading party in government. In the USA, religion continues to have a major impact on both domestic politics and the country’s international relations. More obviously perhaps, in the Middle East, religion plays an enormous part in political life, both domestically and internationally, while the Roman Catholic Church has played a leading role in the turn to democracy in Spain, Poland, and several Latin American countries. With a full index and a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, that places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Religion and Politics is an essential one-stop reference resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: The World Religions and Politics Volume II: Religion and Governance Volume III: Religion and International Relations Volume IV: Religion, Development, and Security September 2009: 234x156: 1,750pp Hb: 978-0-415-49024-5: £650.00 US $1,140.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

RELIGION

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

World Christianity

The Hadith

Religion and Human Rights

Edited by Elizabeth Koepping, School of Divinity, University of Edinburgh, UK

Articulating the Beliefs and Constructs of Classical Islam

Edited by Nazila Ghanea, University of Oxford, UK

Series: Critical Concepts in Religious Studies

Edited by Mustafa Shah, School of Oriental and African Studies (SOAS), London, UK

Hardly a week goes by without some world event relating to the burgeoning field of religion and human rights. Whether attacks carried out in the name of religion by individuals or states, violations of the rights of individuals or communities due to their religious or other beliefs, or clashes between religious and other competing rights (most notably, freedom of speech), matters relating to religion and human rights are not only an area of expert and academic interest, but also of increasing interest to policy-makers, governments, international organizations, and NGOs.

Two-thirds of the world’s Christians live in Africa, Asia, and Latin America and this new interdisciplinary collection of articles on World Christianity from Routledge brings together specialist contributions from around the world, including Pentecostal and various Reform churches, Roman Catholic, Orthodox, Anglican, Lutheran and independent churches. The materials have been arranged around the core themes of contextualization, external and internal power, theological and ethnic marginalization, civic and ancestral identity, mission and conversion, and cover Africa, Asia, the Caribbean and South America, Oceania, and the indigenous people of North America and Australasia. The collection draws on the latest work from theology, anthropology, the sociology of religion, missiology, and religious studies, enabling users to grasp the very varied presentation of the Christian faith, the socio-cultural negotiation, accommodation, renovation, and the challenges to what the collection editor calls a ‘Euro-American Christian taken-for-granted’ understanding, theology and praxis from ‘the world beyond’. World Christianity is destined to be valued by scholars and students as a vital one-stop research resource. December 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-46827-5: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication)

4-VOLUME SET

Series: Critical Concepts in Islamic Studies The Prophetic traditions of Islam, which are commonly referred to as the hadiths (literally: ‘reports’), preserve the sum and substance of the utterances, deeds, directives, and descriptive anecdotes connected with the life of the Prophet Muhammad and his Companions. Together with the Qur’an, the hadiths provide the religion of Islam with its principal scriptural sources. The collection features an accessible and informative introduction which presents an outline of the significance of the hadiths within the religious tradition while also reviewing classical scholarship devoted to the literature of the traditions; moreover, the introduction decisively sets into context the academic debates and arguments which are fleshed out in the articles selected. It also charts developments in the academic study of hadiths, summing up the current state of the field and features a detailed bibliography listing primary classical sources germane to the field of Prophetic traditions together with recent research monographs and articles devoted to the subject. This Major Work provides an authoritative collection of the seminal research articles produced by western academic scholarship on the subject of the hadith over the past century, including recent papers on the subject. Selected Contents: Volume I: Hadith: Codification, Authenticity Volume II: Isnads: Transmission, Terminology, and The Issue of Dating Volume III: Hadith: Scholarship, Perspectives, and Criticism Volume IV: Hadith: Narrative, Context, and Content

US $1,295.00

US $1,150.00

NEW

Series: Critical Concpets in Religious Studies

October 2009: 234x156: 1,667pp Hb: 978-0-415-47398-9: £650.00

US $975.00

Women and Christianity Edited by Kwok Pui-Lan, Episcopal Divinity School, USA

48-VOLUME SET

Series: Critical Concepts in Religious Studies

Series: Routledge Library Editions

This new four-volume collection from Routledge brings together the best and most influential scholarship on women and Christianity. It presents an up-to-date, multidisciplinary, and comprehensive compilation of women’s reflection on the Bible and Christian doctrines; women’s religious roles and movements; and contemporary issues facing Christian women around the world.

Various

Selected Contents: Volume I: Religious Language and Biblical Interpretation Part 1: Approaches to the Study of Christianity Part 2: Gender, Religious Language, and Symbols Part 3: Scriptures and Interpretation Volume II: Doctrines and Religious Practices Part 4: Interpretation and Reconstruction of Doctrines Part 5: Religious Practices Volume III: Religious Leadership, Mission, Dialogue, and Movements Part 6: Religious Leadership Part 7: Mission and Conversion Part 8: Religious Pluralism and Dialogue Part 9: Religious and Social Movements Volume IV: Contemporary Concerns Part 10: Embodiment, Sexuality, and Reproduction Part 11: Religion and Violence Part 12: Religion, Nature, and Science Part 13: Globalization, Transnationalism, Migration, and Diaspora October 2009: 234x156: 1,678pp Hb: 978-0-415-47176-3: £650.00

ORDER NOW!

RLE

Islam

This is a multi-volume collection by leading authors in Islamic Studies. The volumes were originally published between 1867 and 1987. The collection reprints texts carefully selected on the basis of their influence and prestige, written by pre-eminent scholars of Islamic history, philosophy and religion. The majority of the volumes reprint the original, first editions, but where appropriate, updated, enlarged editions are sometimes selected.

This new four-volume Major Work collection from Routledge examines the background, history, and nature of human rights—both individual and collective—as well as economic, social, and cultural rights; and also civil and political rights. Standards, mechanisms, and jurisprudence at international and national levels are included, and form part of the discussion of the conflict of rights and freedom of religion or belief. Religions featured include Islam, Christianity, Judaism, and African religions, and the persecution or discrimination of religious or belief communities are discussed. Relevant human rights documents are also included. The range of subject areas that contribute to discussions on religion and human rights are many, and include: political science; law; international relations; anthropology; philosophy; religious studies; sociology of religion; and theology. Students, scholars, teachers, and practitioners from these and other disciplines will welcome this collection as a vital one-stop compendium of the very best canonical and cutting-edge research. Selected Contents: Volume I: Why Protect Freedom of Religion or Belief? Volume II: Is Freedom of Religion or Belief an Individual or Collective Human Right? Group, Collective, and Corporate Rights. Models for Protection of Religion or Belief. Minority Rights. Refugee Rights. Volume III: Conflict of Rights and Freedom of Religion or Belief General: On Conflict of Rights with Freedom of Religion or Belief. Freedom of Expression. Women’s Rights. Child Rights. Volume IV: International Standards, Persecution and Ways Forward International Standards and Mechanisms Regarding Freedom of Religion or Belief. Persecution and Discrimination. Equality, Differential Treatment, Special Rights, Positive Duties, and Freedom of Religion or Belief. Ways Forward. March 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-47787-1: £650.00

US $1,140.00

Selected Contents: Miniset A: Qu’ran, Religion and Theology A. J. Arberry, Kenneth Cragg, Elie Kedourie and Frithjof Schuon (978-0-415-43347-1) £825.00 Miniset B : Law & Institutions (978-0-415-43348-8) £450.00 Miniset C: History & Civilization Akbar Ahmed, A. J. Arberry, Abdelwahab Bouhdiba, Muhammad Salim Khan, Henri Pirenne and A. S. Tritton (978-0-415-43350-1) £1,050 Miniset D: Philosophy G. E. von Grünebaum, Seyyed Hossein Nasr, F. Rahman, and A. J. Wensinck (9780-415-43360-0) £595.00 Miniset E: Spirituality; Sufism A. J. Arberry, Henry Corbin, Rom Landau and Seyyed Hossein Nasr (978-0-415-43361-7) £825.00 2007: 234x156: 12,528pp Hb: 978-0-415-42600-8: £3,460.00

US $6,480.00

US $1,075.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

RELIGION

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Islam in Southeast Asia

Islam in the West

Edited by Joseph Liow, S. Rajaratnam School of International Studies, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore and Nadirsyah Hosen, University of Wollongong, Australia

Edited by David Westerlund, Söderlörn University, Sweden and Ingvar Svanberg, Uppsala University, Sweden

Series: Critical Concepts in Islamic Studies

In recent decades, the number of Muslims in the West has increased rapidly, and interesting transformations of Islam have taken place—to some extent with repercussions in Islamic or predominantly Muslim countries in Asia and Africa. This new four-volume Major Work collection from Routledge helps to make sense of the burgeoning scholarship in this area.

The Islamic community in Southeast Asia is widely regarded as one of the most moderate and tolerant in the Muslim world. While most of the region’s Muslims are Sunni and fairly orthodox, the Islamic faith as practised in the region has historically been a syncretic blend of Islam, Hinduism, Buddhism, and folk religions. The syncretic roots of Southeast Asian Islam also underscores the pluralistic nature of Islam in the region today, where Muslims have generally lived peacefully in religiously mixed communities, even in areas where they constituted a large majority. Alongside these pluralistic trends in Southeast Asian Islam are some alternative streams of social-political activism that threaten its traditionally inclusivist character. While most Southeast Asian Muslims are known for their moderation, there has historically been a very small but vocal minority who have been drawn to the more puritanical or extremist variants of the faith. In addition, there is a gradual but clearly discernible trend of conservatism among the general Muslim population, particularly in Malaysia and Indonesia, which has given rise to exclusivist attitudes towards non-Muslims. Fully indexed and with an introduction newly written by the editors that comprehensively places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, this new Routledge Major Work is an essential research and teaching resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Southeast Asian Islam: Histories, Cultures, and Identities Volume II: Muslim Politics in Southeast Asia: Discourses and Practices Volume III: Betwixt Local and Global: Islamic Civil Society in Southeast Asia Volume IV: The Myth of the ‘Second Front’: Muslim Southeast Asia and the War on Terror

the Companion:

With a full index, together with comprehensive introductions newly written by the editors, which place the collected material in its historical and intellectual context, Islam in the West is an essential new addition to Routledge’s Critical Concepts in Islamic Studies series.

• considers films as diverse as The Passion of the Christ, The Matrix, Star Wars and Groundhog Day.

April 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48124-3: £650.00

Selected Contents: Part 1: History of the Interaction between Religion and Film: Focus on Western Christianity 1. Silent Cinema and Religion: An Overview (1895-1930) 2. The Era of Censorship (1930-1967) 3. The Roman Catholic Church and Cinema (1967 to the Present) 4. Modern Protestant Approaches to Film (1960 to the Present) Part 2: Depictions of and by Religious Practitioners in Films 5. Judaism 6. Christianity 7. Islam 8. Hinduism 9. Buddhism 10. Postcolonial Religious Syncretism: Focus on the Philippines, Peru, and Mexico 11. Religion in Japanese Film: Focus on Anime 12. New Religious Movements Part 3: Academic Approaches to the Study of Religion and Film 13. Feminism 14. Audience Reception 15. Cultural Theory and Cultural Studies 16. Psychoanalysis 17. Theological Approaches Part 4: Categories Applicable to Religion and Film Studies 18. Narrative 19. Redemption 20. Apocalyptic 21. Heroes and Superheroes 22. Horror and the Demonic 23. Jesus or Christ Figures 24. Iconography 25. Sacrifice 26. Ethics

US $1,295.00

Women and Religion Edited by Pamela Klassen, University of Toronto, Canada This collection is an essential research tool for all students specializing in religion and women’s studies, and will be equally useful to those working in related fields such as anthropology, cultural studies, history, literary studies, philosophy, political science, psychology, and theology. By tracing the evolution of the topic, from the beginnings of feminist research on religion to more contemporary debates about categorizations of gender in the study of religion, this four-volume collection serves the needs of both specialist and generalist users. Women and Religion includes essays treating a broad range of religious traditions, while focusing on particular methodological and theoretical concerns common to the study of women and religion. Organized thematically, each volume includes the most formative theoretical contributions to the field, grouped together with articles that explore a particular set of issues from a range of traditions, with the use of methodologies drawn from anthropology, history, sociology, textual criticism, and religious studies. Each volume’s introductory essay explicitly problematizes the central categories of analysis operating in the study of women and religion while also setting the articles in historical context. June 2009: 234x156: 1,668pp Hb: 978-0-415-43839-1: £650.00

The Routledge Companion to Religion and Film brings together a lively and experienced team of contributors to introduce students to the key topics in religion and film and to investigate the ways in which the exciting subject of religion and film is developing for more experienced scholars. Divided into four parts,

Volume I (‘Regions and History’) includes studies on the historical development of Islam, as well as key work on the current situation in various regions and countries. Volume II focuses on religion and culture, while Volume III (‘Social and Economic Issues’) assembles vital materials on topics such as gender, family structures, class, poverty, and health. The final volume in the collection (‘Politics and Law’) gathers the best work on, among other things, Muslim involvement in political life; Muslim presence in the public sphere; the media coverage of Islam; and issues of integration and so-called ‘Islamophobia’. Legal issues covered include laws on freedom of religion, minority rights, separate legislation, and debates about veils and halal slaughter.

US $1,150.00

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by John Lyden, Dana College, Nebraska, USA

Series: Critical Concepts in Islamic Studies

October 2009: 234x156: 1,736pp Hb: 978-0-415-47680-5: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price: £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication)

NEW

The Routledge Companion to Religion and Film

• analyzes the history of the interaction of religion and film, through periods of censorship as well as appreciation of the medium • studies religion-in-film, examining how the world’s major religions, as well as Postcolonial, Japanese and New Religions, are depicted by and within films • uses diverse methodologies to explore religion and film, such as psychoanalytical, theological and feminist approaches, and audience reception • analyzes religious themes in film, including Redemption, the Demonic, Jesus or Christ Figures, Heroes and Superheroes

This definitive title provides an accessible resource to this emerging field and is an indispensable guide to religion and film for students of Religion, Film Studies, and beyond.

April 2009: 246x174: 520pp Hb: 978-0-415-44853-6: £120.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87475-2

US $200.00

Encyclopedia of New Religious Movements Edited by Peter Clarke 2005: 246x174: 720pp Hb: 978-0-415-26707-6: £150.00

US $295.00

Encyclopedia of Eastern Christianity Edited by Lars Peter Laamann

US $1,295.00

September 2005: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-415-39741-4: £130.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $260.00

RELIGION

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

The World’s Religions

20-VOLUME SET

Continuities and Transformations

Buddhism

Edited by Peter B. Clarke, King’s College, University of London and University of Oxford, UK and Peter Beyer, University of Ontario, Ottawa, Canada

Edited by Various

This comprehensive volume focuses on the world’s religions and the changes they have undergone as they become more global and diverse in form. It explores the religions of the world not only in the regions with which they have been historically associated, but also looks at the new cultural and religious contexts in which they are developing. It considers the role of migration in the spread of religions by examining the issues raised for modern societies by the increasing interaction of different religions. The volume also addresses such central questions as the dynamics of religious innovation which is evidenced in the rise and impact of new religious and new spirituality movements in every continent. 2008: 246x174: 808pp Hb: 978-0-415-39725-4: £100.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87212-3

US $180.00

Encyclopedia of the Historical Jesus Edited by Craig Evans, Acadia Divinity College, Canada This Encyclopedia will bring together the vast array of historical research into the reality of the man, the teachings, the acts, and the events ascribed to him that have served as the foundational story of one of the world’s central religions. This kind of historiography is not biography. The historical study of the Jesus stories and the transmission of these stories through time have been of seminal importance to historians of religion. Critical historical examination has provided a way for scholars of Christianity for centuries to analyze the roots of legend and religion in a way that allows scholars an escape from the confines of dogma, belief, and theological interpretation. In recent years, historical Jesus studies have opened up important discussions concerning anti-Semitism and early Christianity and the political and ideological filtering of the Jesus story of early Christianity through the Roman empire and beyond. Entries will cover the classical studies that initiated the new historiography, the theoretical discussions about authenticating the historical record, the examination of sources that have led to the western understanding of Jesus’ teachings and disseminated myth of the events concerning Jesus’ birth and death. 2008: 276x219: 752pp Hb: 978-0-415-97569-8: £99.75

US $195.00

RLE

Series: Routledge Library Editions Both Routledge & Kegan Paul and Allen & Unwin were pioneers in publishing work on Buddhist philosophy long before the subject became fashionable in the 1960s, and this tradition has been sustained to the present day. Drawing on the deep backlist of these imprints, this new Routledge Library Edition brings together titles on Buddhism which were originally published over a period of fifty years or so, starting in the 1920s. Selected Contents: Volume I: The Buddha’s Philosophy George Francis Allen (978-0-415-46088-0) Volume II: The Buddhist Teaching of Totality Garma C.C. Chang (978-0-415-46089-7) Volume III: Buddhist Meditation Edward Conze (978-0-415-46091-0) Volume IV: Buddhist Thought in India Edward Conze (978-0-415-46098-9) Volume V: Buddhism in the Tibetan Tradition: A Guide Kelsang Gyatso (978-0-415-46099-6) Volume VI: Early Buddhist Theory of Knowledge Kulatissa Jayatilleke (978-0-415-46107-8) Volume VII: The Wheel of Death Philip Kapleau (978-0-415-46109-2) Volume VIII: Buddhism and Christianity Winston L. King (978-0-415-46110-8) Volume IX: Dogen’s Formative Years James Kodera (978-0-415-46116-0) Volume X: Footprint of the Buddha E. F. C. Ludowyk (978-0-415-46117-7) Volume XI: Divine Revelation in Pali Buddhism Peter Masefield (978-0-415-46164-1) Volume XII: The Central Philosophy of Buddhism T. R. V. Murti (978-0-415-46118-4) Volume XIII: Pathways of Buddhist Thought Venerable Nyanaponika (978-0-415-46132-0) Volume XIV: Idealistic Thought of India P. T. Raju (978-0-415-46120-7) Volume XV: The Philosophical Traditions of India P. T. Raju (978-0-415-46121-4) Volume XVI: The Meaning of Life in Hinduism and Buddhism Floyd H. Ross (978-0-415-46146-7) Volume XVII: The Buddhism Way of Life Frederick Harold Smith (978-0-415-46147-4) Volume XVIII: Lucid Exposition of the Middle Way Mervyn Sprung (978-0-415-46150-4) Volume XIX: The Buddhist Tantras Alex Wayman (978-0-415-46163-4) Volume XX: Philosophies of India Heinrich Zimmer (978-0-415-46232-7) 2008: 234x156: 5,656pp Hb: 978-0-415-44291-6: £1,050.00

Routledge Handbook of Global Public Health Edited by Richard Parker and Marni Sommer, both at Columbia University, USA At the beginning of the twenty-first century, key public health issues and challenges have taken center stage. They range from arsenic in drinking water to asthma among children and adults; from the re-emergence of cholera, to increasing cancer rates; from AIDS to malaria and hepatitis; from the crises faced by displaced or refugee populations to the new challenges that have emerged for reproductive health and rights. Like most aspects of contemporary life, these problems have been impacted by globalization. The issues that confront us are being shaped by evolving processes such as the growth of inequalities between the rich and the poor in countries around the world, the globalization of trade and commerce, new patterns of travel and migration, as well as a reduction in resources for the development and sustainability of public health infrastructures. The Routledge Handbook of Global Public Health emerges within this context and addresses both the emerging issues and conceptualizations of the notion of global health, along with expanding upon and highlighting the critical priorities in this rapidly evolving field. It will be organized in ten main sections, each of which will be preceded by a brief editorial introduction. The topics covered include: • structural inequalities and global health • ecological transformation and environmental health in the global system • population and reproductive health • conflict, violence and emergencies within global health • global health policy and practice • global health and development • global mental health • global access to essential medicines • health systems, health capacity, and the politics of global public health

US $2,025.00

Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries Edited by Jonathan Bonk

This comprehensive Handbook will provide an authoritative overview for students, practitioners, researchers, and policy makers working in or concerned with public health around the globe. December 2010: 246x174: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-77848-0: £95.00

Series: Religion and Society 2007: 496pp Hb: 978-0-415-96948-2: £120.00

FORTHCOMING

US $155.00

US $195.00

Encyclopedia of Hinduism Edited by Denise Cush, Catherine Robinson, both at Bath Spa University, UK and Michael York, and Lynn Foulston, University of Wales, Newport, UK 2007: 246x174: 1,128pp Hb: 978-0-7007-1267-0: £145.00

US $270.00

Encyclopedia of Buddhism Edited by Damien Keown, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK and Charles S. Prebish, Utah State University, USA 2007: 246x174: 952pp Hb: 978-0-415-31414-5: £140.00 eBook: 978-0-203-49875-0

ORDER NOW!

US $265.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

The Qur’an An Encyclopedia Edited by Oliver Leaman A RUSA 2007 Outstanding Reference Title 2005: 246x174: 800pp Hb: 978-0-415-32639-1: £150.00

+44 (0)1235 400524

US $285.00

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

FORTHCOMING 4-VOLUME SET

Social Issues of Ageing

Routledge Handbook of Criminology

Edited by Chris Phillipson

An International Perspective

Series: Major Themes in Health and Social Welfare

Edited by Cindy J. Smith, Sheldon X. Zhang and Rosemary Barberet

Edited by David Inglis, University of Aberdeen, UK and Gerard Delanty

This is a four-volume interdisciplinary collection on the social issues of aging. It strikes a balance between a social and public policy perspective on ageing, and broader sociological and socio-cultural debates within the field. Contributions illustrating ageing from a broad range of settings is a key aspect of the volumes.

This Handbook represents the latest thinking and findings from a group of senior and promising young scholars around the world who came together in an effort to broaden our perspectives in understanding crime and social control across borders and nationalities.

4-VOLUME SET

Selected Contents: Volume I: Old Age from a Historical and Cultural Perspective Volume II: Theoretical Perspectives on Social Ageing Volume III: Family, Community and Social Relationships in Old Age Volume IV: Health and Social Policies on Ageing December 2010: 234x156 Hb: 978-0-415-40151-7: £650.00

US $1,295.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

The Sociology of Scientific Knowledge Edited by David Bloor, University of Edinburgh, UK This Routledge Major Work is a four-volume collection of cutting-edge and canonical research on the sociology of scientific knowledge. It brings together many of the classic empirical studies and provides the essential background for their critical assessment and for gaining a deeper understanding of the current controversies surrounding science. Volume I gives historical background and analytical perspectives through the writing of such figures as Karl Mannheim and Émile Durkheim. Volume II offers philosophical and sociological resources drawn from the work of Hume, Duhem, Merton and Kuhn. In each of these volumes the theoretical categories and analyses are supplemented by recent case studies which apply, test and explore the claims and insights of these thinkers. Volume III is devoted to further case studies, paying particular attention to what might appear to be the areas least amenable to sociological analysis, such as physics and mathematics. Volume IV introduces some of the most controversial claims in the field and exhibits the critical exchanges that have taken place in the literature. It is a special feature of this collection that historical material is accompanied by papers which develop the philosophical and theoretical apparatus that is necessary for its full appreciation. Careful introductory comments serve to orient and guide the reader through the technical material and to provide the necessary perspective for its interpretation and for a deeper understanding of current controversies surrounding science. December 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-43490-4: £650.00 US $1,295.00

Cosmopolitanism

This collaborative project articulates a new way of thinking about criminology and to strive for an over arching framework that is truly international. To reduce the complexity of this effort into manageable portions, we present three distinct, albeit often overlapping, types of crime; international crime (e.g., crimes against humanity), transnational crime (e.g., human trafficking), and national crime (e.g., description of one nations system and its related crimes). Each of these perspectives is articulated through chapters on the traditional components (e.g., theory and methods), the international components (e.g., comparative methods, transferability), and a series of case studies of nations. At the end of each chapter is a list of prompting questions suitable for students to pursue as their senior and masters theses. Many of these questions are also intended for young scholars to move the field forward. October 2010: 246x174: 600pp Hb: 978-0-415-77909-8: £130.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86470-8

US $210.00

Series: Critical Concepts in Sociology A term of antique provenance, ‘cosmopolitanism’ has developed and cohered into a critical concept in contemporary social and cultural analysis. However, the daunting quantity (and variable quality) of the available research exploring the many, often controversial, issues attendant upon cosmopolitanism—and the breadth and complexity of the canon on which it draws—makes it difficult to discriminate the useful from the tendentious, superficial, and otiose. That is why this new title in the highly regarded Routledge series, Critical Concepts in Sociology, is so timely. It answers the urgent need for a wide-ranging collection to provide easy access to the key items of scholarly literature, material that is often inaccessible or scattered throughout a variety of specialist journals and books. In four volumes, this new collection addresses how key issues, such as globalization, migration, citizenship, social belonging, and cultural complexity and blending, are illuminated by reflections upon what cosmopolitanism is, or could be; and how cosmopolitan thinking and practice could, or does, impact upon such matters. The gathered materials also make sense of the revolutionary effects that debates on cosmopolitanism are having on research agendas and ways of thinking in sociology, and across the social sciences and humanities more generally.

Gender

Cosmopolitanism is supplemented with a full index, and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editors, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers as a vital research resource.

Edited by Mary Evans, London School of Economics and Political Science, UK

October 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-49881-4: £650.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Taking gender to mean both the forms of identity which follow biological definitions of sex (the social identities of male and female, masculine and feminine), as well as the social and intimate relations which are constructed and defined through gender, serious work in the field is inevitably very wideranging, and draws on scholarship and insights from across the humanities, the social sciences, and beyond. Much of this literature remains inaccessible, or is highly specialized and compartmentalized, so that it is ever more difficult to gain an informed and comprehensive overview of the current and historical issues and debates. The sheer scale of the growth in research output in gender—as well as its breadth—makes this collection especially useful and meets the demand for a one-stop ’mini library’ of this endlessly fascinating and fundamental subject. June 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-55434-3: £650.00 *Special pre-pub price: £575.00 (Valid until 3 months upon publication) US $1,295.00

US $1,150.00

US $1,140.00

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Sexuality-Related Measures, Third Edition Terri D Fisher, Ohio State University Mansfield, USA, Sandra L Davis, Clive M. Davis, both at Syracuse University, USA and William L. Yarber, Kinsey Institute, Indiana University, USA Fundamental to understanding human sexual expression is reliable and valid measurement and assessment. The instruments that have been developed are not easily accessible and the information is limited concerning appropriate use and psychometric properties. In this volume more than 200 instruments are reproduced, accompanied by the necessary information for their use in research. January 2010: 276x219: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-80174-4: £95.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $145.00

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

Handbook of Cultural Sociology

Routledge Handbook of Clinical Supervision

Routledge Handbook of Climate Change and Society

Fundamental International Themes

Edited by Constance Lever-Tracey, Flinders University, Australia

Edited by John R. Hall, Laura Grindstaff, and Ming-cheng Lo, all at University of California, Davis, USA A Handbook of Cultural Sociology will provide a comprehensive overview of contemporary research in sociology and related disciplines focused on the complex relations of culture to the social. Sociology of culture has become highly differentiated in its alternative research foci, intellectual agendas, and geographic concentrations of scholarship. This Handbook will build out from important recent advances (e.g., in studies of the production of culture, subaltern theory, cultural studies, cultural capital, postcolonial theory, and discourse and narrative theory) to bring diverse scholarly approaches and world regions into dialogue that will help chart future pathways of research on culture around the globe. The Handbook will include five parts and eleven sections with sixty-five topical essays. It will bring together leading scholars across intellectual generations, from the U.S., Britain, Europe, and elsewhere around the world. The essays will discuss important developments and emergent research issues both in relation to classic questions in sociocultural analysis, and concerning a series of important topics by which the study of culture has become increasingly vital to the understanding of a wide range of social phenomena, from public issues about politics and the state, to issues of social stratification, subculture, and community, to matters of aesthetics, lifestyle, and identity, as well as questions central to culture in its structure and reproduction, such as power, technology, and the organization of work. Selected Contents: Editors’ Introduction Part 1: Sociological Culture Part 2: Culture and the Social Order 1. Societal Culture 2. Cultures of Society 3. Social Culture Part 3: Cultural Power 1. Power producing the Social 2. Power producing Culture 3. Culture at Work Part 4: Culture in the Lifeworld 1. Cultural Style & Ethos 2. Cultural Worlds 3. Individuals & Culture Part 5: Societal Processes & Change

Edited by John R. Cutcliffe, University of Texas at Tyler, USA, Kristiina Hyrkas, Maine Medical Center, USA and John Fowler, De Montfort University, UK The Routledge Handbook of Clinical Supervision provides a global ‘state of the art’ overview of clinical supervision, presenting and examining the most comprehensive, robust empirical evidence upon which to base practice. This authoritative volume focuses on both areas of contemporary interest and hitherto under-examined issues, such as the link with quality of care. It is divided into five parts and discusses: • education and training • implementation and development • experiences and practice • research activity • international perspectives. Containing chapters on Europe, the US, Canada, and Australasia, the Routledge Handbook of Clinical Supervision has a multi-disciplinary approach to clinical supervision and includes chapters relevant to nurses, doctors, psychologists, psychiatrists and counsellors. It will be of interest to students, researchers and practitioners of clinical supervision in a range of health professions. Selected Contents: Introduction Section 1: Education, Training and Approaches to Clinical Supervision Section 2: Introducing, Implementing and Developing Clinical Supervision Section 3: The Practice and Experiences of Clinical Supervision Section 4: Contemporary Research Activity on Clinical Supervision Section 5: International Perspectives and Developments in the State of the Science of Clinical Supervision June 2010: 246x174: 432pp Hb: 978-0-415-77955-5: £95.00

US $155.00

This Handbook brings together the latest research on climate change from the social sciences. It comprehensively covers social causes, impacts, recognition and responses to climate change and features cutting edge research by leading scholars from Australia, Canada, Europe, UK and USA, and new material on China, India and South East Asia. The science of climate change is introduced in non technical language by a leading climatologist. It is aimed at advanced undergraduates, postgraduated, researchers and libraries in the social sciences. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introductory 1. The Scientific Study of Global Warming. How does Global Warming Work? How do we Know? What do we Know? 2. Natural and Social Science: Interaction of Nature and Society Requires Multidisciplinarity Part 2: Social Causes 3. Fossil Fuels at Basis of Industrial Revolution. Competition Fuels Growth, Trade etc 4. Capitalism V Nature. Socialist Models 5. Big Organisations and Climate Change 6. Consumerism Under Discussion Part 3: Future Social Impacts 7. Vulnerability and Adaptation 8. Case Study on Urban Vulnerability in India 9. Climate Change and Risk Society Part 4 : Social Recognition of Anthropogenic Climate Change 10. Why Did it Take so Long? 11. Sceptics, Deniers and their Think Tanks 12. Media 13. Case Study: Climate Change reporting in Time magazine, Before and After Katrina 14. Public Opinion 15. Religion and Climate Change Part 5: Social Responses - Different Perspectives 16. Economics of Climate Responses Efficiency; Offsets, Carbon Trades; Externalities; Ecological Debt; Stern Report etc 17. Economic Crises, Climate Change and Business Innovations 18. The Global Politics of Energy 19. Ethics and the Politics of Climate Change Part 6: National and Global Responses 20. Global Responses. Under discussion 21. Europe and US 22. China’s Emissions: Dangers and Responses 23. Case Study: Comparing Wind Energy in Germany and the UK Wong Part 7: Implications of Alternative Mitigation Proposals 24. Simpler Lifestyles and Sustainable Agriculture 25. Renewable Energy 26. Case Study: Agroforestry in the Philippines 27. Biofuels 28. Risks of Nuclear Energy Conclusion April 2010 Hb: 978-0-415-54476-4: £110.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87621-3

July 2010: 234x156: 574pp Hb: 978-0-415-47445-0: £105.00 before publication £125.00 thereafter

US $200.00

US $155.00

For more information about our eBooks in Sociology, please visit www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

NEW

The Handbook of Deviant Behavior

Social and Moral Theory in Casework

Edited by Clifton D. Bryant, Department of Sociology, Virginia Tech University, USA

Raymond Plant

Edited by Chris Rojek, Brunel University, London, UK

Series: Routledge Revivals

Series: Critical Concepts in Sociology

This Handbook presents a comprehensive, integrative, and accessible overview of the contemporary body of knowledge in the field of social deviance in the 21st century. It addresses the range of scholarly concerns including theoretical, methodological, and substantive issues in this academic specialty. An international mix of recognized scholars have authored sixty seven definitive original entries on different topics in the field that focus on the historical and sociological evolution of the topics including notable scholars, research findings and published works that propelled this evolution. Beyond this, the entries will speak to and evaluate the contemporary state of knowledge in this area, and consider future directions and concerns that will engage scholars in the decades to come. Each part in the volume is introduced, examined, and connected by appropriate editorial commentary. Some of the entries will include comparative and cross-cultural examples and discussions. Other entries constitute case studies, and yet others focus on substantive and pedagogical concerns.

First published in 1970, the aim of the book is to ’map the logical geography’ of an important set of concepts which enter into the theory of social casework – those concerning the individual and society. Concepts examined include the individually orientated values of ’selfdirection’ and ’acceptance’, and those of ’role’, ’adjustment’ and ’integration’, which express the individual’s relation to society. The author’s main concern is to see whether a coherent theory of the relationship between individual and society can be given in terms of these concepts and to argue that such a theory is fundamental to casework discussion.

In recent years, the study of celebrity has developed and cohered into a flourishing field of social and cultural analysis. There is huge interest in topics such as the politics and logic of glamour; the role of the public-relations industry in manipulating television audiences; the relationship between fame and social control; and the economics of the so-called celebrity industry. And as interest in celebrity continues to explode, a variety of forerunners to its study— drawing on materials from a wide range of disciplines including sociology, cultural studies, history, psychology, organization studies, politics, film, and literary studies—have been rediscovered and reformulated. Among the lines of enquiry and critical tools that have been recuperated as pertinent to the study of celebrity are leadership, charisma, role models, heroes, role sets, ideology, manipulation, commodification, interpellation, narcissism, signification and individuality.

Mr Plant also discusses what, if any, social or political commitments the activity of casework presupposes, and evaluates the view that casework is ’apolitical’.

The sheer scale of the available research exploring the many implications of the phenomenon of celebrity—and the breadth and complexity of the canon on which celebrity studies draws—makes this new Major Work from Routledge especially timely. It answers the urgent need for a wide-ranging collection which provides easy access to the key items of scholarly literature, material that is often inaccessible or scattered throughout a variety of specialist journals and books. In four volumes, Celebrity brings together the best and most influential foundational and cutting-edge research on: the aetiology and basic concepts of celebrity (including charisma, narcissism, and commodification); theoretical and methodological approaches (e.g. Marxism, structuralism, semiotics, and cultural materialism); the mechanics of celebrity (such as the sociology and psychology of showmanship); and key controversies and current debates (e.g. the politics of stardom; the superstructure of celebrity; and the interpellation of celebrity news and the media).

July 2010: 246x174 Hb: 978-0-415-48274-5: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88054-8

US $190.00

FORTHCOMING

July 2009: 198x129: 116pp Hb: 978-0-415-55744-3: £60.00

Edited by Peter Aggleton, Institute of Education, University of London, UK and Richard Parker, Columbia University, USA

FORTHCOMING

The last two decades have witnessed a veritable explosion of research on sexuality as the social sciences have worked to find new ways of understanding a rapidly changing world. Growing concern for issues such as population, women’s and men’s reproductive health, and the HIV and AIDS pandemic, has since provided new legitimacy for work on sexuality, health and rights.

Multiculturalism

This Handbook surveys the state of the discipline and offers an examination and discussion of emerging, controversial and cutting edge areas. It is an essential reference for all academics and researchers in the fields of sexuality studies, sexual health and human rights, as well as key reading for more advanced students. December 2010: 246x174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-46864-0: £95.00

US $190.00

US $104.00

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Gerd Baumann, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands and Steven Vertovec, Max-Planck-Institute, Germany Series: Critical Concepts in Sociology Edited by two leading scholars in the field, this new title in Routledge’s Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Sociology, is a four-volume collection of canonical and cutting-edge research. Serious work on multiculturalism flourishes as never before, and this ‘mini library’ meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subject’s vast literature and the continuing explosion in research output. Perhaps more than other critical concepts, ‘multiculturalism’ is hotly contested; there are sharply different—and perhaps ultimately irreconcilable—approaches to a variety of multicultural conceptions and projects. Rather than seek to establish some kind of consensus on classic works, this collection explicitly brings together the best and most influential work to have emerged from all sides of the debate. July 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-48608-8: £650.00

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Celebrity

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introductory and Programmatic Part 2: Social and Moral Theory in Casework Part 3: Community and Mental Health Part 4: Therapy, Reform, or Revolution: An Insoluble Conflict

Routledge Handbook of Sexuality, Health and Rights

A detailed and up-to-date reference work, The Routledge Handbook of Sexuality, Health and Rights provides an authoritative overview of the main issues in the field today. Leading academics and practitioners have been brought together to reflect on past, present and future approaches to understanding and promoting sexual health and rights. Divided into nine parts, it covers:

Celebrity is supplemented with a full index, and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. It is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and researchers as a vital research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Origins and Historical Counterpoints 1. Ancient Roots and Controversies 2. Modernity and Celebrity Volume II: Basic Concepts and Key Debates 3. Basic Concepts 4. Key Debates Volume III: The Interdisciplinary Matrix 5. History 6. Anthropology 7. Sociology 8. Psychology 9. Political Science 10. Cultural Studies 11. Economics 12. Media and Communication Studies 13. Film Studies 14. Legal Studies Volume IV: Genres and Counter-Genres 15. Genres: Sport 16. Film 17. Television 18. Popular Music 19. Audiences 20. Counter Genres December 2009: 234x156: 1,716pp Hb: 978-0-415-49466-3: £650.00 US $1,140.00

US $1,075.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

3-VOLUME SET

FORTHCOMING

Socialism and Saint-Simon

FORTHCOMING

4-VOLUME SET

Emile Durkheim: Selected Writings in Social Theory

Emile Durkheim

Social Capital

Series: Routledge Revivals

Edited by Nan Lin, Duke University, USA

Various

Durkheim’s study of socialism, first published in English in 1959, is a document of exceptional intellectual interest and a genuine milestone in the history of sociological theory. It presents us with the sociological theories of a truly first-rate thinker and his extensive commentary upon another key figure in the history of sociological thought, Henri Saint-Simon. The core of this volume contains Durkheim’s presentation of Saint-Simon’s ideas, their sources and their development.

Series: Critical Concepts in the Social Sciences

Selected Contents: 1. Definition of Socialism 2. Socialism and Communism 3. Socialism in the Eighteenth Century 4. Sismondi 5. The Life and Work of Saint-Simon 6. The Doctrine of Saint-Simon: The Foundation of Positivism 7. Historic Origins of the Industrial System and the Doctrine of Saint-Simon 8. The Organisation of the Industrial System 9. Internationalism and Religion 10. Saint-Simon Critical Conclusions 11. The Saint-Simon School

Together with a new introduction by the editor to guide the user through its four volumes, this major work of reference provides researchers with all the key writings on social capital in one convenient and unique resource.

Series: Routledge Revivals Emile Durkheim: Selected Writings in Social Theory includes reissues of three seminal works by eminent French thinker Emile Durkheim, one of the founding father s of Sociology. This collection brings together the following import sociological works: Sociology and Philosophy, which first appeared in English in 1953; the hugely influential Socialism and SaintSimon, first published in English in 1959; and Durkheim’s book with Marcel Mauss on sociological classification, entitled Primitive Classification, whose first English publication was in 1969. Selected Contents: Volume 1: Sociology and Philosophy Volume 2: Socialism and Saint-Simon Volume 3: Primitive Classification December 2009: 216x138: 532pp Hb: 978-0-415-56287-4: £175.00

US $306.00

FORTHCOMING

Sociology and Philosophy Emile Durkheim Series: Routledge Revivals

First published in English in 1953, this volume represents a collection of three essays written by seminal sociologist and philsopher Emile Durkheim in which he puts forward the thesis that society is both a dynamic system and the seat of moral life. Each essay stands alone, but their connecting thread is the dialectic demonstration that a phenomenon, be a sociological or psychological one, is relatively independent of its matrix. The essays provide a valuable insight into Durkeheimian thought on sociological and philsophical matters and offer an excellent guide to Durkheim for students of both disciplines. Selected Contents: Part 1: Individual and Collective Representations Part 2: The Determination of Moral Facts Part 3: Replies to Objections 1. The Condition of Society and the Condition of Social Opinion 2. Individual Reason and Moral Reality 3. The Feeling of Obligation 4. The Moral Authority of the Collective 5. Philosophy and Moral Facts 6. The Subjective Representation of Morality Part 4: Value Judgements and Judgements of Reality December 2009: 216x138: 110pp Hb: 978-0-415-55770-2: £60.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09236-1

US $104.00

December 2009: 216x138: 274pp Hb: 978-0-415-56288-1: £70.00

US $122.00

FORTHCOMING

Primitive Classification Emile Durkheim and Marcel Mauss Series: Routledge Revivals

In this influential work, first published in English in 1963, Durkheim and Mauss claim that the individual mind is capable of classification and they seek the origin of the ‘classificatory function’ in society. On the basis of an intensive examination of forms and principles of symbolic classification reported from the Australian aborigines, the Zuñi and traditional China, they try to establish a formal correspondence between social and symbolic classification. From this they argue that the mode of classification is determined by the form of society and that the notions of space, time, hierarchy, number, class and other such cognitive categories are products of society.

‘Social capital’ is a major conceptual and theoretical idea that has received in the last three decades much attention across many social science disciplines. In this relatively short period, it has developed into a major research paradigm guiding voluminous research conducted in North America, Europe, Asia and elsewhere. Theory, measurement, and empirical research continue to grow. At the same time, major components of a theory, systematic research enterprises, and comprehensive applications in diverse substantive areas can now be identified in the literature. This major collection makes available material from diverse sources to provide an up-to-date ‘mini library’ of the cumulative contributions.

Selected Contents: Volume I: Foundations of the Concept and Theories Part 1: History of the Notions of Capital and Types of Capital Part 2: Historical Development of Social Capital as a Concept and a Theory Part 3: Diverse Approaches: Micro versus Macro, Instrumental versus Expressive, Exogenous or Endogenous Part 4: Measurement of Social Capital: Approaches and Issues Volume II: Social Capital and Attainment Part 1: Social Capital and Socio-economic Attainment Part 2: Social Capital and Performance in and of Organizations Part 3: Social Capital and Educational Achievement Volume III: Social Capital and Community Part 1: Social Capital and Community Development Part 2: Social Capital and Inequality Part 3: Social Capital and Health Volume IV: Remaining Issues and Future Directions Part 1: Social Capital and Trust Part 2: The Dark Side of Social Capital Part 3: The Micro–Macro Gap and Linkage Part 4: Further Needs in Theoretical Development and Research Enterprises June 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-40717-5: £650.00

US $1,295.00

Dr Needham’s introduction assesses the validity of Durkhiem and Mauss’s argument, traces its continued influence in various disciplines, and indicates its analytical value for future researches in social anthropology. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Problem 3. The Australian Type of Classification 4. Other Australian Systems 5. Zuñi, Sioux 6. China 7. Conclusions December 2009: 216x138: 148pp Hb: 978-0-415-56283-6: £60.00

US $104.00

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

FORTHCOMING

NEW

Edited by Federico Varese, Linacre College, University of Oxford, UK

The Quest for the New Moral World John Harrison

Edited by Mike Gane, Loughborough University, UK

Series: Critical Concepts in Criminology

Series: Routledge Revivals

The systematic study of organized crime dates back to John Landesco’s classic of ethnography, Organized Crime in Chicago (1929). Since then, the field has grown considerably and, as well as criminologists and sociologists, the topic has been embraced by researchers from a broad range of disciplines, including political science, anthropology, economics, as well as literary and film studies.

Robert Owen and the Owenites were associated with the rise of an early industrial society in Britain and with the development of an agricultural, frontier society in the United States during the first half of the nineteenth century. This book, originally published in 1969, was the first to use both British and American source material, and tells the story of Robert Owen and the movement associated with his name, from the standpoint of comparative social and intellectual history.

This radical appraisal of Durkheim’s method, first published in 1988, argues that fundamental errors have been made in interpreting Durkheim. Mike Gane argues that to understand The Rules it is necessary also to understand the context of the French society in which the book was written. He explores the cultural and philosophical debates which raged in France during the period when Durkheim prepared the book and establishes the real and unsuspected complexity of Durkheim’s position: its formal complexity, its epistemological complexity, and its historical complexity.

Organized Crime

While at first attention was principally devoted to the study of ‘traditional’ organized-crime groups, such as the Sicilian and the American mafias, since the 1980s, serious scholarly work has also emerged on, for example, the Russian mafia, the Japanese Yakuza, and the Triads in both Hong Kong, China, and the USA. Furthermore, researchers have recognized that the behaviour and structure of ‘traditional’ organized-crime groups, and their role in both legal and illegal markets, can be fruitfully compared and contrasted to new forms of organized crime in places as varied as Africa, Columbia, Northern Ireland, and Asia. The study of organized crime has also attracted researchers interested in popular representations of the phenomenon, mainly in films and novels. Furthermore, after the events of 11 September 2001, the intersection between organized crime and terrorism, and the ability of organized-crime groups to operate transnationally and expand to new territories, has gained a new significance. As research on organized crime continues to flourish, this new title in the Routledge’s Critical Concepts in Criminology series, addresses the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of interdisciplinary scholarly literature. Organized Crime is a four-volume collection of the foundational and the very best cutting-edge scholarship. It is also fully indexed and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. An indispensable reference collection, it is destined to be valued by scholars and students of the subject as a vital onestop research and pedagogic resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: Definitions and Theories Volume II: Origins, Resources, Organization Volume IV: Organized Crime and Popular Culture, States and Terrorism March 2010: 234x156: 1,600pp Hb: 978-0-415-46074-3: £650.00

US $1,295.00

Robert Owen and the Owenites in Britain and America

NEW

On Durkheim’s Rules of Sociological Method

4-VOLUME SET

The book directs new light on Owenism, and at the same time illuminates general problems of the history of social movements and social change in modern societies. Selected Contents: Part 1: Philanthropic Origins 1.1. The Dimensions of Poor Relief 1.2. Owenite Philanthropists Part 2: The Definition of Socialism 2.1. The Idea of Community 2.2. The Economy of Co-operation 3. A Science of Society Part 3: The Transmission of Owenism 3.1. Millennialism 3.2. Education Part 4: Building the New Moral World 4.1. Foundations: New Lanark 4.2. The Lost Communities Part 5: Anatomy of a Movement 5.1. Working-men Co-operators 5.2. All Classes of All Nations Part 6: The Owenite Legacy 6.1. The Fading of Communtarian Vision 6.2. The Literature of Owenism October 2009: 216x138: 402pp Hb: 978-0-415-55769-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09235-4

Selected Contents: 1. Durkheim, the Rules and the Problem 2. The Remarkable Argument of the Rules 3. The Problematic Consistency of Durkheim’s ’Official Method’ 4. Variations of Method in Durkheim’s Main Sociological Analyzes 5. Durkheim’s Sociology 6. Introduction: the Rules and the Sociologists 7. The Debate Over the Rules in Recent British Sociology 8. The Storm over the Rules in France during Durkheim’s lifetime 9. French Discussions of the Rules After 1917 10. The Anglo-Saxon Reception of the Rules 11. Durkheim’s Brief Reply to his Critics 12. Complex Transitions 13. A Closer Look at the Emergence of the Rules 14. An Examination of the Argument of the Rules 15. Criticisms of Durkheim Examined October 2009: 216x138: 204pp Hb: 978-0-415-55773-3: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09237-8

US $113.00

FORTHCOMING

RLE

5-VOLUME SET

Michel Foucault

US $140.00

Various Series: Routledge Library Editions

NEW

Community and Ideology An Essay in Applied Social Philosophy Raymond Plant Series: Routledge Revivals

Initially published in 1974, this is a work of applied social and political philosophy which relates the philsophical analysis to various forms of community work theory and practice. Raymond Plant emphasizes that ’community’ has a wide range of both descriptive meanings and evaluative connotations, linking this dual role of the word in the description and evaluation of social experience to its history in ideological confrontations.

Providing a detailed and in depth analysis of one of the most important sociologists of the twentieth century, this Routledge Library Edition brings together some of the most significant and insightful scholarship on Michel Foucault published in the past quarter of a century. These five volumes, first published between 1984 and 1991, offer an extremely valuable study of this influential figure, covering a wide variety of themes, which range from Foucault’s views on education and society through to his thoughts on ethics sexuality, Marxism and power. Not only does the collection offer a detailed analysis of Foucault’s social and philosophical theories, it also seeks to assess the continuing influence and significance of Foucault in the decade immediately following his death in 1984. Selected Contents: Volume 1: Foucault and Education Volume 2: Towards A Critique of Foucault Volume 3: Truth and Eros Volume 4: Foucault Marxism and Critique Volume 5: Cultural Analysis December 2009: 234x156: 1,030pp Hb: 978-0-415-56195-2: £295.00

Selected Contents: Part 1: Philosophy and Community Work Part 2: Community as Fact and Value Part 3: The Liberal Community and Community Work Part 4: Human Nature, Community and the Concept of Mental Health Part 5: Postscript: Community Work and Social Casework July 2009: 216x138: 98pp Hb: 978-0-415-55768-9: £55.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09234-7

US $96.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $517.00

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

NEW

Handbook of Globalization Studies

4-VOLUME SET

Edited by Bryan S. Turner, Wellesley College, USA

Edited by Carolyn Hoyle, Centre for Criminology, University of Oxford, UK

Series: Routledge International Handbooks The Handbook offers students clear and informed chapters on the history of globalization and key theories that have considered the causes and consequences of the globalization process. There are substantive sections looking at demographic, economic, technological, social and cultural changes in globalization. The Handbook examines many negative aspects – new wars, slavery, illegal migration, pollution and inequality – but concludes with an examination of responses to these problems through human rights organizations, international labour law and the growth of cosmopolitanism. There is a strong emphasis on interdisciplinary approaches with essays covering sociology, demography, economics, politics, anthropology and history. The Handbook, written in a clear and direct style, will appeal to a wide audience. The extensive references and sources will direct students to areas of further study. Selected Contents: Part 1: Theories and Definitions 1. Theories of Globalization: Issues and Origins 2. Limiting Theory: Rethinking Approaches to Cultures of Globalization 3. Economic Theories of Globalisation 4. Internet and Globalization Lior 5. Anti-globalization Movements: From Critiques to Alternatives 6. History and Hegemony. The United States and Globalization 7. Vulnerability and Globalization: the Social Impact Part 2: Substantive Issues 8. Transformations of the World’s Population: the Demographic Revolution 9. All That is Modern Freezes Again:Migration History, Globalization and the Politics of Newness 10. Climate Change, Globalization and Carbonization 11. Infectious Disease and Globalization 12. Globalization, Disasters and Disaster Response 13. The Globalization of Crime 14. Religion out of Place? Globalization of Religious Fundamentalism 15. Globalization and Indigenous Peoples: New Old Patterns 16. Genocide in the Global Age 17. Global Elites 18. Globalization, Ethnic Conflict and Nationalism 19. The Global Drive to Commodify Pensions Part 3: New Institutions and Cultures 20. Popular Culture, Fans and Globalization 21. Film and Globalization: from Hollywood to Bollywood 22. Global Cities 23. Crossing Divides: Consumption and Globalization in History 24. Pluralism, Globalization and the Modernization of Gender and Sexual Relations in Asia 25. Globalization and Food: the Dialectics of Globality and Locality 26. Borders, Passports and the Global Mobility 27. Globalization of Space: from the Global to the Galactic 28. Globalization and Americanization Part 4: Critical Solutions 29. Globalization and Labour. Putting the ILO in its Places 30. Globalisation of Human Rights 31. Global civil Society and the World Social Forum 32. Muslim Cosmopolitanism: Contemporary Practice and Social Theory 33. New Cosmopolitanism in the Social Sciences 34. Globalization and its Possible Futures

Restorative Justice

NEW

The Metaphysical Theory of the State L. T. Hobhouse Series: Routledge Revivals

Series: Critical Concepts in Criminology

Selected Contents: 1. The Objects of Social Investigation 2. Freedom and Law 3. The Real Will 4. The Will of the State 5. Varying Applications of the Metaphysical Theory

Over the last decade or so, more has been more written and talked about restorative justice than any other criminological topic. In addition to the proliferation of published work, there have been numerous national and international conferences and seminars both within and outside the academy, and the stream of e-conversations taking place via the many and various restorative justice e-mail lists and websites is in constant spate. As research on and around restorative justice flourishes as never before, this new four-volume collection in the Routledge Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Criminology, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of the subdiscipline’s rich and diverse heritage. It provides a much-needed map to steer students and scholars towards the truly essential foundational and cutting-edge materials and offers an essential grounding in the philosophy and principles of restorative justice in a number of jurisdictions around the world. Furthermore, it furnishes users with a critical awareness of the potential and the pitfalls of restorative justice in responses to crime, conflict, and civil disputes. Restorative Justice is fully indexed and includes a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, a leading scholar in the field, which places the collected material in its historical and intellectual context. An essential reference collection, it is destined to be valued by scholars, students, and practitioners of restorative justice as a vital one-stop research and pedagogic resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: The Rise of Restorative Justice Part 1: The Start of a New Debate Part 2: Protorestorative Practices Part 3: Restorative Justice: From Philosophy to Practice Volume II: Restorative Practices on the International Stage Part 4: Restorative Responses Within the Criminal Justice System Part 5: Restorative Youth Justice Part 6: New Challenges for Restorative Justice: Family Violence Part 7: New Challenges for Restorative Justice: Sexual Violence Part 8: New Challenges for Restorative Justice: Homicide Part 9: New Challenges for Restorative Justice: Crimes against Humanity Volume III: The Promise of Restorative Justice Part 10: Restoring Victims Part 11: Rebuilding Communities Part 12: Diversion, Rehabilitation, and Desistance Part 13: Responsive Regulation: Restorative Justice Outside of Criminal Justice Volume IV: Stumbling Blocks on the Road to a Restorative Jurisprudence Part 14: Procedural Fairness, Ethics, and Accountability Part 15: Indigenous Justice Part 16: The Role of Shame in Restorative Processes Part 17: When Parents Feel Ashamed Part 18: A Place for Proportionality? Part 19: Restoration, Retribution, or ‘Restoration Through Retribution’? Part 20: Some Concerns from an Optimist July 2009: 234x156: 1,792pp Hb: 978-0-415-45001-0: £650.00

US $975.00

July 2009: 216x138: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-55275-2: £65.00

NEW

The Elements of Social Justice

L. T. Hobhouse Series: Routledge Revivals First published in 1922, this title written by L. T. Hobhouse, British politician and one of the leading theorists of Social Liberalism, is a seminal work concerning the social application of ethical principles for the common good. The object of the book is to show that social and political institutions are not ends in themselves. Hobhouse argues that the social ideal is to be sought not in the faultless unchanging system of an institutional Utopia, but in the love of a spiritual life with its unfailing system of harmonious growth unconfined. Selected Contents: 1. Ethics and Social Philosophy 2. Rights and Duties 3. Liberty (1) Moral Freedom 4. Liberty (2) Social and Political Freedom 5. Justice and Equality 6. Personal Justice 7. The Payment of Service 8. Property and Economic Organisation 9. Social and Personal Factors in Wealth 10. Industrial Organisation 11. Democracy July 2009: 216x138: 212pp Hb: 978-0-415-55277-6: £70.00

US $122.00

VOLUME 58

International Bibliography of the Social Sciences Sociology: 2008 First published in 1952, the International Bibliography of the Social Sciences (anthropology, economics, political science, and sociology) is well established as a major bibliographic reference for students, researchers & librarians. • An essential resource in the social sciences for researchers and librarians.

• All materials are organized alphabetically by controlled subject keywords providing an excellent means of browsing.

US $200.00

November 2009:234x156: 650pp Hb: 978-0-415-55465-7: £295.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

US $113.00

• Includes extensive coverage of the Developing World and Eastern European publications.

September 2009: 246x174: 752pp Hb: 978-0-415-45808-5: £105.00 before publication £125.00 thereafter eBook: 978-0-203-87000-6

ORDER NOW!

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US $450.00

www.routledge.com/reference

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

NEW

Radicalism and the Revolt Against Reason

The Social Theories of Georges Sorel with a Translation of his Essay on the Decomposition of Marxism

4-VOLUME SET

NEW

The Information Society

The Handbook of Genetics & Society

Edited by Robin Mansell, London School of Economics, UK

Mapping the New Genomic Era

Series: Critical Concepts in Sociology

Irving Louis Horowitz, Rutgers University, USA

Edited by Paul Atkinson, both at Cardiff University, UK, Peter Glasner and Margaret Lock, McGill University, Canada

Series: Routledge Revivals

Series: Genetics and Society

Radicalism and the Revolt Against Reason is a work that continues to have a steady and large scale impact on political and social theory fifty years since its first appearance. A study of how radical thought modifies its actions and ideologies in a time of unrealized and frustrated expectations, the focus is on Georges Sorel and the Europe of the fin de siècle, a time when socialist revolution was forcefully set aside by liberal reform.

An authoritative Handbook which offers a discussion of the social, political, ethical and economic consequences and implications of the new biosciences. The Handbook takes an interdisciplinary approach providing a synoptic overview of contemporary international social science research on genetics, genomics and the new life sciences. It brings together leading scholars with expertise across a wide-ranging spectrum of research fields related to the production, use, commercialisation and regulation of genetics knowledge. It Handbook is structured into seven cross-cutting themes in contemporary social science research on genetics with introductions written by internationally renowned section editors who take an interdisciplinary approach to offer fresh insights on recent developments and issues in often controversial fields of study.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Preliminary Observations on the Revolt Against Reason Part 2: Men and Movements in Fin de Siècle France 1. Charles Péguy: The Unity of Revelation and Revolution 2. Fernand Pelloutier: Irrational State Against Rational Man 3. Henri Bergson: The Liberation of Will from Intelligence Part 3: State, Society and Socialism 1. The Magical Force of the State 2. Socialism and the Future of State Authority 3. Democracy and the Role of Coercion in Human Affairs 4. Bureaucracy and Mass Politics Part 4: Sacred and Secular History 1. From Factual History to the Philosophy of History 2. From the Philosophy of History to History as Myth 3. Illusion and Reality in Human Progress 4. History and Histrionics: The Role of Violence Part 5: The Role of Violence 1. Political Mythology and the Higher Truths 2. Science and the Inhibition of Social Activity 3. The Heroism and Virility of Sublimity Part 6: The Agonies of Pragmatic Socialism 1. From Political Sociology to the Sociology of Politics 2. Sorel and the Dilemma of Authoritarian Politics 3. The Paradox of Power and the Collapse of Pragmatic Socialism July 2009: 216x138: 302pp Hb: 978-0-415-55285-1: £75.00

US $131.00

8-VOLUME SET

The Foundations of Modern Nursing in America Various The Foundations of Modern Nursing in America reprints a distinguished selection of important texts published in this field over the last century, authored by some of the most eminent names in nursing. The collection deals with issues such as the education and training of nurses, hospital management, the history of anesthesia, and issues of race and ethics in the nursing profession. Selected Contents: Volume I: A Textbook of Nursing Volume II: Hospital Management Volume III: Nursing Problems and Obligations Bound with A Sound Economic Basis for Schools of Nursing Volume IV: The Evolution of Public Health Nursing Volume V: Ethics for Modern Day Nurses bound with The Practical Nurse Volume VI: The Education of Nurses Volume VII: History of Anesthesia Bound with Black Women in the Nursing Profession Volume VIII: A Lavinia Dock Reader Bound with the East Harlem Health Center Demonstration 2008: 246x174: 4,168pp Hb: 978-0-415-47821-2: £995.00 *Co-published in Japan with Edition Synapse

Selected Contents: Genetics and Society: Perspectives from the Twenty-first Century Part 1: Biomedical Applications of New Genetic Technologies 1. Introduction 2. Biomedicalising Genetic Health, Diseases and Identities 3. Stem Cells, Translational Research and the Sociology of Science 4. Reproductive Genetics: From Choice to Ambivalence and Back Again 5. Localizing Genetic Testing and Screening in Cyprus and Germany: Contingencies, Continuities, Ordering Effects and Bio-cultural Intimacy 6. Nutrigenomics Part 2: Commercialisation Genomes and Markets 7. Introduction 8. Making Europe Unsafe for Agbiotech 9. Genetic Information and Insurance Underwriting: Contemporary Issues and Approaches in the Global Economy 10. On a Critical Path: Genomics, the Crisis of Pharmaceutical Productivity and the Search for Sustainability 11. States, Markets and Networks in Bioeconomy Knowledge Value Chains Part 3: Representations of Genomics 12. Introduction 13. Stakeholder Representations in Genomics 14. Human Genetics and Cloning in the Media: Mapping the Research Field 15. Cultural Imaginaries and Laboratories of the Real: Representing the Genetic Sciences 16. Genes In Our kNot Part 4: Regulation: Expressing the Gene 17. Introduction 18. Law and Regulation 19. Forensic DNA Databases and Biolegality: The Co-Production of Law, Surveillance Technology and Suspect Bodies 20. Bio-Banks and the Challenges of Governance, Legitimacy and Benefit Part 5: Bioethics and Genetics 21. Introduction 22. Rethinking Privacy in the Genetics Age 23. Bioethics and Human Genetic Engineering 24. Towards a Bioethics of Disability and Impairment 25. Ethical Perspectives on Animal Biotechnology Part 6: Diversity and Justice 26. Introduction 27. Religion and Nationhood: Collective Identities and the New Genetics 28. Extravagance or the Good and the Bad of Genetic Diversity 29. Eugenics 30. Human Dignity and Biotechnology Policy Part 7: New Forms of Knowledge Production 31. Introduction 32. Centralising Labels to Distribute Data: The Regulatory Role of Genomic Consortia 33. Innovative Genetic Technologies, Governance and Social Accountability 34. Genomic Platforms and Hybrid Formations July 2009: 246x174: 500pp Hb: 978-0-415-41080-9: £98.95 eBook: 978-0-203-92738-0

‘The information society’ refers to a constellation of developments arising from the growing use of communication technologies in the acquisition, storage, and processing of information, and the role of information in supporting the creation and exchange of knowledge. Research on information societies really began to take off in the 1970s when Daniel Bell wrote about ‘the information age’. While there were earlier works that focused on the growing importance of information in the economy, it was not until the mid-1990s and the spread of the Internet that this field of study experienced a huge expansion across a broad range of disciplines in the social sciences and beyond. A critical mass of scholarship has now accumulated, establishing ‘the information society’ and ‘information societies’ as a terrain of substance and complexity, the exploration and understanding of which requires increasingly sophisticated navigation skills. As research in and around the area continues to flourish as never before, this new title in Routledge’s Major Works series, Critical Concepts in Sociology, meets the need for an authoritative reference work to make sense of a rapidly growing and ever more complex corpus of literature, and to provide a map of the area as it has emerged and developed over the last thirty years or so. The Information Society is fully indexed and has a comprehensive introduction, newly written by the editor, which places the material in its historical and intellectual context. It is an essential work of reference and is destined to be valued by scholars and students—as well as policy-makers and practitioners in the field—as a vital one-stop research resource. Selected Contents: Volume I: History and Perspectives Part 1: History and Early Debates Part 2: Further Reflections and Critical Perspectives Volume II: Knowledge, Economics, and Organization Part 3: Knowledge and Economics Part 4: Open Networks Part 5: Inequality and the Digital Divide Part 6: Widespread Organizational Change Volume III: Democracy, Governance, and Regulation Part 7: Democracy, Networks, and Power Part 8: Governing Networks Volume IV: Everyday Life Part 9: Everyday Life Online and Offline Part 10: Gender and the Cyborg Part 11: Privacy and Surveillance April 2009: 234x156: 1,984pp Hb: 978-0-415-44308-1: £675.00

US $155.00

US $2,100.00

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

US $1,184.00

SOCIOLOGY AND HEALTH STUDIES

Handbook of Youth and Young Adulthood New Perspectives and Agendas

SPORT

Encyclopedia of Social Theory

FORTHCOMING

Edited by Austin Harrington, Barbara L. Marshall and Hans-Peter Müller

Routledge Companion to Sports History

Edited by Andy Furlong, Glasgow University, UK

2005: 246x174: 760pp Hb: 978-0-415-29046-3: £145.00

The parameters within which young people live their lives have changed radically. Changes in education and the labour market have led to an increased complexity of the youth phase and to an overall protraction in dependency and transitions.

International Encyclopedia of Economic Sociology

Written by leading academics from several countries, this Handbook introduces up to date perspectives on a wide range of issues that affect and shape youth and young adulthood. It provides a an authoritative and multi-disciplinary overview of a field of study that offers unique insight on social change in a advanced societies and is aimed at academics, students and researchers and policy-makers. The Handbook introduces some of the key theoretical perspectives used within youth studies and sets out future research agendas. Each of the ten sections covers an important area of researchfrom education and the labour market to youth cultures, health and crime whilst discussing change and continuity in the lives of young people. This work introduces readers to some of the most important work in the field while highlighting the underlying perspectives that have been used to understand the complexity of modern youth and young adulthood. February 2009: 246x174: 496pp Hb: 978-0-415-44540-5: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88196-5

Series: Routledge International Handbooks

Edited by Jens Beckert and Milan Zafirovski 2005: 246x174: 800pp Hb: 978-0-415-28673-2: £160.00

International Encyclopedia of Men and Masculinities

3-VOLUME SET

Encyclopedia of Criminology Edited by J. Mitchell Miller and Richard A. Wright 2005: 276x219: 1,976pp Hb: 978-1-57958-387-3: £440.00

Edited by Carl Skutsch 2004: 276x219: 1,520pp Hb: 978-1-57958-392-7: £385.00

US $545.00

3RD EDITION

The Social Science Encyclopedia 2004: 246x174: 1,184pp Hb: 978-0-415-32096-2: £225.00 eBook: 978-0-203-49616-9

US $235.00

International Behavioural and Social Sciences Library Classics from the Tavistock Press 2007: 216x138 Hb: 978-0-415-44379-1: £8,500.00

US $450.00

The field of sports history is no longer a fledgling area of study. There is a great vitality in the field and it has matured dramatically over the past decade. Reflecting changes to traditional approaches, sport historians need now to engage with contemporary debates about history, to be encouraged to position themselves and their methodologies in relation to current epistemological issues, and to promote the importance of reflecting on the literary or poetic dimensions of producing history. These contemporary developments, along with a wealth of international research from a range of theoretical perspectives, provide the backdrop to the new Routledge Companion to Sports History. This book provides a comprehensive guide to the international field of sports history as it has developed as an academic area of study. Readers are guided through the development of the field across a range of thematic and geographical contexts and are introduced to the latest cutting edge approaches within the field. Including contributions from many of the world’s leading sports historians, the Routledge Companion to Sports History is the most important single volume for researchers and students in, and entering, the sports history field. It is an essential guide to contemporary research themes, to new ways of doing sports history, and to the theoretical and methodological foundations of this most fascinating of subjects. Selected Contents: 1. Theory in Sports History 2. Practicing Sorcery: Revisiting the Sports Historians Craft 3. Sport Historians, the City and the New Social History 4. ’Borderlands, Frontiers, and the Writing of Sport History: Confronting the ‘Metropolitan Fallacy’’ 5. Marxist Approaches 6. Sports History and Sociology of Sport 7. Origins: Sport in the Ancient Western World 8. Gender 9. Race 10. Body Cultures 11. Science and Technology 12. Entrepreneurship and Sport History 13. Religion 14. Politics 15. International Relations 16. Imperialism 17. Nationalism 18. Postcolonialism 19. Globalization 20. Action Sports 21. Africa (SubSaharan) 22. Australia 23. Canada 24. The Caribbean 25. China 26. Central and Eastern Europe 27. England and Wales 28. France 29. Germany 30. The Indian Subcontinent 31. Ireland 32. Japan 33. The Low Countries (Belgium, Netherlands, Luxembourg) 34. The Middle East 35. Mexico and Central America 36. New Zealand (Aotearoa) 37. Nordic Countries 38. Russia/Soviet Union 39. South America 40. South East Asia 41. The United States of America

112-VOLUME SET

US $1,7000.00

Encyclopedia of Domestic Violence Edited by Nicky Ali Jackson, Purdue University Calumet, USA 2007: 276x219: 704pp Hb: 978-0-415-96968-0: £100.00

US $845.00

Encyclopedia of the World’s Minorities

Edited by Michael Flood, Judith Kegan Gardiner, Bob Pease and Keith Pringle 2007: 246x174: 744pp Hb: 978-0-415-33343-6: £120.00 eBook: 978-0-203-41306-7

US $305.00

Edited by Adam Kuper

US $190.00

Edited by Steven W. Pope and John R. Nauright

US $275.00

US $190.00

3-VOLUME SET

December 2009: 246x174: 608pp Hb: 978-0-415-77339-3: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88541-3

Encyclopedia of Police Science

US $170.00

Edited by Jack Raymond Greene 2006: 234x156: 1,678pp Hb: 978-0-415-97000-6: £285.00

ORDER NOW!

US $410.00

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

SPORT

INDEX

FORTHCOMING

20th-Century Technology, Encyclopedia of...............................36

Routledge Handbook of Sports Development

Edited by Barrie Houlihan and Mick Green, both at Loughborough University, UK Sports development has become a prominent concern within both the academic study of sport and within the organisation and administration of sport. The Routledge Handbook of Sports Development is the first book to comprehensively map the wide-ranging territory of sports development as an activity and as a policy field, and to offer a definitive survey of current academic knowledge and professional practice. Spanning the whole spectrum of activity in sports development, from youth sport and mass participation to the development of elite athletes, the book identifies and defines the core functions of sports development, exploring the interface between sports development and cognate fields such as education, coaching, community welfare and policy. The book presents important new studies of sports development around the world, illustrating the breadth of practice within and between countries, and examines the most important issues facing practitioners within sports development today, from child protection to partnership working. With unparalleled depth and breadth of coverage, The Routledge Handbook of Sports Development is the definitive guide to policy, practice and research in sports development. It is essential reading for all students, researchers and professionals with an interest in this important and rapidly evolving discipline. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Origins of Sports Development Part 2: Understanding the Contemporary Context of Sports Development Part 3: Sports Development and Young People Part 4: Sports Development and Adult Mass Participation Part 5: Development Through Sport Part 6: Sports Development and Elite Athletes Part 7: Issues in the Practice of Sports Development Part 8: Measuring the Impact of Sports Development Conclusion: The Future of Sports Development December 2010: 246x174: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-47996-7: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-88558-1

US $155.00

Abbas, Tahir.............................................................................25 Abdullah Saeed .......................................................................58 Abramson, Glenda...................................................................54 Adam Smith ............................................................................18 Adverse Impact: Implications for Organizational Staffing and High Stakes Selection .....................................................72 Afflerbach, Peter......................................................................29 Africa South of the Sahara 2010 ...............................................1 African Thought, Encyclopedia of ............................................58 Aggleton, Peter .......................................................................85 Agricultural Economics ............................................................16 Aitken, Ian...............................................................................54 Akbarzadeh, Shahram ...............................................................9 Akio Kobayashi........................................................................14 Albarran, Alan .........................................................................51 Albert Jongman .......................................................................61 Alexander, Robin .....................................................................27 Allan, Stuart ............................................................................52 Allen, Tim ................................................................................64 Allington, Richard ....................................................................28 al-Roubaie, Amer.....................................................................19 Alternative Dispute Resolution: A Practical Guide.....................21 Alvi, Shafiq ..............................................................................19 Amer al-Roubaie......................................................................19 American Gospel Music, Encyclopedia of .................................54 American Journalism, Encyclopedia of .....................................54 American Philosophy: An Encyclopedia ....................................58 American Women during World War II: An Encyclopedia.........35 Ancient Greece, Encyclopedia of................................................6 Andon, Nick ............................................................................29 Andrade, Heidi ........................................................................28 Andrews, Richard ....................................................................25 Anheier, Helmut K. ..................................................................22 Annesley, Claire .......................................................................67 Ansari, Ali M. ............................................................................8 Anthropological Linguistics: Theories and Practices ..................41 Anthropology and Ethnography Series.......................................6 Anthropology of Religion.........................................................78 Antonio Gramsci: Conservative Schooling for Radical Politics ...66 Apple, Michael W. ...................................................................27 Arab-Israeli Conflict .................................................................68 Arkin, Robert M.......................................................................71 Aslib Directory of Information Sources in the United Kingdom ...39 Assessing Information Needs in the Age of the Digital Consumer...................................................................37 Assessment of Library Collections in a Consortial Environment: Experiences From Ohio.....................................38 Atkinson, Paul .........................................................................89 Auditing Organizational Communication: A Handbook of Research, Theory and Practice..................................................74 Austin, Peter K. .......................................................................41

B Back, Sudie E. ..........................................................................73 Badmington, Neil.....................................................................51 Bailey, David J. .........................................................................61 Bairner, Alan............................................................................60 Baker, Mona ............................................................................45 Bakker, Arnold.........................................................................70 Ball, Martin J......................................................................43–44 Ball, Stephen J. ........................................................................27 Ballou, Dale .............................................................................30 Banerjee, Tridib ..........................................................................7 Barbarin, Oscar A. ...................................................................72 Barberet, Rosemary..................................................................83 Barker, Drucilla.........................................................................19 Barrett, Justin L........................................................................78 Bar-Tal, Daniel..........................................................................69 Baumann, Gerd .......................................................................85 Beck, Christina S......................................................................53 Beckert, Jens............................................................................90 Beckinsale, Robert P. ..........................................................32–33 Bell, Stuart...............................................................................19 Beloff, Max..............................................................................65 Bennett, John ..........................................................................26 Berends, Mark .........................................................................30 Bernaz, Nadia ..........................................................................16 Berrios, German.......................................................................34 Bertram, Tony ..........................................................................26 Besnoy, Amy ............................................................................38 Bestor, Theodore C. ...................................................................9 Bestor, Victoria ..........................................................................9 Beyer, Peter..............................................................................82 Bhavna Dave............................................................................10 Bilingualism and Multilingualism ..............................................44 Bingham, D. Jeffrey .................................................................79

Birr Moje, Elizabeth .................................................................29 Bishop, Alan ............................................................................27 Blacks in American Film, Television, and Video .........................50 Bloor, David .............................................................................83 Blyth, Mark..............................................................................68 Bolton, Kingsley.......................................................................45 Bonk, Jonathan........................................................................82 Book of Trades: A Collection of the Nineteenth-Century Handbooks ..............................................................................14 Book Publishing .......................................................................50 Books for Children and Youth in Nineteenth-Century America Series II: A Collection of Conduct Books for Young Women and Men in 19th-Century America ........................................49 Bornstein, Marc H....................................................................72 Botchway, Francis ....................................................................22 Bould, Mark.............................................................................48 Bowden, Brett .........................................................................67 Boykoff, Max ...........................................................................59 Bradbury, Malcolm...................................................................48 Brady, Kathleen T. ....................................................................73 Brass, Paul R. ...........................................................................11 Brentano, Franz .......................................................................56 Bresler, Liora ............................................................................23 Breslin, Shaun..........................................................................64 Bridging the Gap: Connecting Users to Digital Contents..........52 British Library of Political and Economic Science.........................6 Broadway Travellers, The..........................................................46 Brown, Iem..............................................................................67 Brulotte, Gaëtan ......................................................................49 Bryant, Clifton D......................................................................85 Bryce, Trevor ..............................................................................6 Bucknor, Michael Andrew ........................................................46 Bucy, Erik .................................................................................53 Buddhism ................................................................................82 Buddhism, Encyclopedia of ......................................................82 Building the Financial Foundations of the Euro: Experiences and challenges ......................................................................22 Bukowski, William M. ..............................................................75 Bundgaard, Peer F....................................................................44 Burgess, J. Peter ......................................................................61 Burnett, Gary...........................................................................36 Bushnell Greiner, Mary.............................................................25 Butler, Andrew M. ...................................................................48 Buxton, Julia ............................................................................60 Byzantine World, The.................................................................6

C Cairns, Edward ........................................................................71 Calvert, Peter...........................................................................67 Calvo, Paco..............................................................................57 Cambridge Primary Review Research Surveys, The ...................27 Cameron, Ross ........................................................................57 Card, Geoffrey B........................................................................7 Career Paths and Career Development of Business Librarians...38 Carroll, Patrick J.......................................................................71 Casiday, Augustine ..................................................................78 Cassidy, Cheryl.........................................................................35 Castles, Francis ........................................................................66 Celebrity ..................................................................................85 Central and South Eastern Europe 2010 ................................1, 3 Challenges to Library Learning, The: Solutions for Librarians ...........................................................................40 Charles Dickens .......................................................................49 Chatterjee, Charles ............................................................20–22 Cheney, George.......................................................................51 China's International Relations in Asia .....................................10 Chorley, R.J. .......................................................................32–33 Chris Argyris ............................................................................21 Christenson, Sandra L. .............................................................28 Chronology of International Organizations, A ..........................69 Circa..................................................................................62, 69 Cissna, Kenneth N. ..................................................................52 Civil Society, Philanthropy and the Third Sector A Dictionary of ..22 Civilization ...............................................................................67 Cizek, Gregory J. .....................................................................28 Claeys, Gregory .......................................................................59 Claridge, Henry........................................................................46 Clarke, Bruce ...........................................................................46 Clarke, Peter............................................................................81 Clarke, Peter B.........................................................................82 Classics from the Tavistock Press Series ....................................90 Clinical Linguistics....................................................................43 Cluttering: A Handbook of Research, Intervention and Education .........................................................................70 Coats, Karen............................................................................26 Cognitive Neuroscience ...........................................................73 Cold War, Encyclopedia of the .................................................68 Collected Writings on China ....................................................14 Communication Yearbook 33 ..................................................53

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

INDEX

Community and Ideology: An Essay in Applied Social Philosophy ...................................................................87 Companion to Urban Design .....................................................7 Companions for PhD and DPhil Research Series .......................24 Compendium of Tests, Scales and Questionnaires, A: The Practitioner's Guide to Measuring Outcomes after Acquired Brain Impairment...................................................................70 Competencies for Science Librarians ........................................39 Computer-Assisted Language Learning ....................................45 Comrie, Bernard ......................................................................45 Conaghan, Joanne...................................................................21 Confucian Studies......................................................................9 Connell, Joanne.......................................................................31 Connor, Elizabeth ........................................................37–38, 40 Contemporary Chinese Culture, Encyclopedia of .....................50 Contemporary Chinese Society and Politics..............................13 Cook, David.............................................................................79 Cordell, Karl ............................................................................59 Cosmopolitanism .....................................................................83 Coulthard, Malcolm.................................................................42 Cox, Jessica .............................................................................35 Cramer, Gail L..........................................................................16 Crawford, Sean .......................................................................56 Criminology, Encyclopedia of ...................................................90 Crisp, Richard J. .......................................................................69 Critical Assessments of Leading Linguists Series .......................42 Critical Assessments of Leading Philosophers Series .................55 Critical Assessments of Major Writers Series ......................46–47 Critical Concepts in Asian Philosophy Series...............................9 Critical Concepts in Asian Studies Series ............................12–13 Critical Concepts in Criminology Series ..............................87–88 Critical Concepts in Economics Series ..........................16, 18–20 Critical Concepts in Historical Studies Series.......................33–34 Critical Concepts in International Relations Series ..............61, 63 Critical Concepts in Islamic Studies Series ....................33, 79–81 Critical Concepts in Language Studies Series .....................41, 44 Critical Concepts in Law Series ..............................17, 19, 21, 63 Critical Concepts in Linguistics Series .................................42–45 Critical Concepts in Literary and Cultural Studies Series ....................................................................47, 50 Critical Concepts in Media and Cultural Studies Series.............50 Critical Concepts in Philosophy Series ..........................54, 56, 59 Critical Concepts in Political Science Series ..................58, 63, 67 Critical Concepts in Psychology Series .........................69, 71, 73 Critical Concepts in Religious Studies Series .......................77–80 Critical Concepts in Sociology Series............................83, 85, 89 Critical Concepts in the Environment Series .............................21 Critical Concepts in the Modern Politics of the Middle East Series..59 Critical Concepts in the Social Sciences Series....................62, 86 Critical Concepts in Tourism Series...........................................31 Critical Concepts in Urban Studies .............................................7 Critical Evaluations in Business and Management Series ....20–21 Critical Evaluations in Cultural Theory Series ............................51 Critical Issues in Modern Politics Series ..........................8, 10–12 Critical Legal Theory ................................................................17 Critical Thinking Within the Library Program............................53 Crow, Gary M..........................................................................29 Curriculum Studies Handbook -The Next Moment ...................29 Cush, Denise ...........................................................................82 Cutcliffe, John R. .....................................................................84 Cyclopaedia of Modern Travel: A Record of Adventure, Exploration and Discovery......................................13

D Daley, Caroline.........................................................................35 Das, Veena ................................................................................9 Dave, Bhavna...........................................................................10 Davis, Clive M..........................................................................83 Davis, Edward L. ......................................................................50 Davis, Sandra L. .......................................................................83 Dawson, Hope.........................................................................42 de Haan, Michelle....................................................................74 Debashish Munshi ...................................................................51 Delanty, Gerard........................................................................83 Democracy, Reform, and Authoritarianism in the Arab World ..59 Devereux, Cecily ......................................................................35 Dewey, Martin .........................................................................29 Dictionary of .... see under individual topics, e.g.Civil Society, Philanthropy and the Third Sector A Dictionary of Digital Scholarship ...................................................................39 Dimock, Elizabeth ....................................................................35 Directory of EU Information Sources, The.................................37 Directory of Museums, Galleries and Buildings of Historic Interest in the United Kingdom..............................................38 Directory of Trade and Professional Associations in the European Union, The...................................................22 Directory of University Libraries in Europe 2006, The ...............40 Dobson, Keith S.......................................................................70 Documentary Film, Encyclopedia of the ...................................54 Documents in International Economic Law ..............................22

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

Doddington, Christine .............................................................27 Doll, Beth ................................................................................28 Domestic Violence, Encyclopedia of .........................................90 Donnell, Alison ........................................................................46 Douglas, Ian ............................................................................32 Douzinas, Costas .....................................................................17 Doveling, Katrin.......................................................................51 Drout, Michael D.C..................................................................49 Dubicki, Eleonora I...................................................................39 Dumper, Michael .....................................................................68 Dunlosky, John ........................................................................29 Dunn, Antony J..................................................................32–33 Dunn Cavelty, Myriam .............................................................64 Durkheim, Emile ......................................................................86

E Early Biographical Sources on Lafcadio Hearn ..........................13 Eastern Christianity, Encyclopedia of ........................................81 Eastern Europe, Russia and Central Asia 2010 .......................2–3 Eccles, Jacquelynne..................................................................28 Ecological Economics ...............................................................21 Economic Reform in Modern China .........................................18 Economic Sociology, International Encyclopedia of...................90 Economics ...............................................................................22 Educational Assessment and Evaluation ...................................23 Edwards, Louise.......................................................................12 E-Journals Access and Management ........................................40 Elbeheri, Gad...........................................................................30 Electronic Theses and Dissertations: Developing Standards and Changing Practices for Libraries and Universities.............39 Elements of Social Justice, The.................................................88 Emerging Research Library, The: The Research Library in the 21st Century ....................................................36 Emile Durkheim: Selected Writings in Social Theory .................86 Encisco, Patricia .......................................................................26 Encyclopaedia of .... see under individual topics, e.g. Ancient Greece, Encyclopedia of Encyclopedias of Contemporary Culture Series ........................50 Endangered Languages............................................................41 English Language Teaching ......................................................29 Enlightenment, The .................................................................34 Entwistle, Harold .....................................................................66 Environment Encyclopedia and Directory 2009, The.................32 Environmental Law ..................................................................19 Ernest Hemingway...................................................................46 Erotic Literature, Encyclopedia of .............................................49 Espelage, Dorothy L. ................................................................26 Ethics And Integrity In Libraries ................................................38 Ethics of War and Conflict .......................................................59 Ethnic Conflict, A Dictionary of................................................69 Europa Directory of International Organizations 2009................4 Europa Directory of Literary Awards and Prizes ........................49 Europa International Foundation Directory 2009, The ................5 Europa Regional Surveys of the World Set 2010, The ................3 Europa World of Learning 2010, The.........................................4 Europa World Year Book 2009...................................................1 European Association for Methodology Series .........................70 European Union, A Dictionary of the .......................................69 European Union and Global Governance, The: A Handbook....61 European Union Encyclopedia and Directory 2010 .....................5 Evans, Craig.............................................................................82 Evans, Mary .............................................................................83 Event Tourism ..........................................................................31 Everatt, John............................................................................30 Experimental Economics ..........................................................17 Eyre, Deborah..........................................................................30

F Far East and Australasia 2010, The ........................................2–3 Farr, James L. ...........................................................................71 Farrell, Theo.............................................................................63 Feather, John ...........................................................................50 Feldwick, W. ............................................................................13 Feminist Economics..................................................................19 Feminist International Relations ...............................................61 Feminist Legal Studies..............................................................21 Ferdinand de Saussure .............................................................42 Fiscal Policy Making in the European Union: An Assessment of Current Practice and Challenges.....................20 Fisher, Terri D. ..........................................................................83 Fletcher Harding, Sara..............................................................77 Flinn, Andrew ..........................................................................38 Flood, Michael .........................................................................90 Formative Writings...................................................................56 Forrest, James J.F. ....................................................................68 Förster, Jens .............................................................................75 Foulston, Lynn .........................................................................82 Foundation and Construction of Ethics, The ............................56 Foundations of Modern Nursing in America, The.....................89

+44 (0)1235 400524

Fouskas, Vassilis .......................................................................61 Fowler, John ............................................................................84 Fowler, Robert .........................................................................39 Freeden, Michael .....................................................................20 Freedom of Information: Open Access, Empty Archives? ....................................................................38 Frey, Lawrence R. .....................................................................52 Friedrich Nietzsche...................................................................55 Frontiers of Social Psychology Series ............................69, 75–76 Furlong, Andy..........................................................................90 Furlong, Michael J. ..................................................................31

G Gallegos, Bernado P. ................................................................25 Gammage, Philip .....................................................................26 Gandin, Luis Armando .............................................................27 Gane, Mike..............................................................................87 Ganguly, Rajat .........................................................................69 Ganguly, Sumit ........................................................................63 Garrett, Paul ............................................................................41 Gaunder, Alisa ...........................................................................8 Gender ....................................................................................83 Genetics and Society Series......................................................89 Genocide .................................................................................33 Geography, Companion Encyclopedia of: From the Local to the Global ..........................................................32 Ghanea, Nazila ........................................................................80 Gifted and Talented Education.................................................30 Gilman, Rich ............................................................................31 Giora, Rachel ...........................................................................43 Glasner, Peter ..........................................................................89 Global Arms Trade, The: A Handbook......................................61 Global Public Relations Handbook, The: Theory, Research, and Practice ...........................................................53 Globalization, A Dictionary of ..................................................67 Globalization, Encyclopedia of .................................................67 Gökay, Bülent ..........................................................................61 Goldmann, Lucien ...................................................................57 Goode, David ..........................................................................32 Goodman, Joyce......................................................................23 Google Scholar and More: New Google Applications and Tools for Libraries and Library Users ................................40 Gottlieb, Roger ........................................................................77 Gracyk, Theodore ....................................................................54 Graesser, Arthur C. ..................................................................29 Gray, John ...............................................................................27 Gray, William Glenn.................................................................68 Great Powers, The: Essays in Twentieth Century Politics...........65 Green, Mick.............................................................................91 Greene, Jack Raymond ............................................................90 Greenfield, Shelley F.................................................................73 Grilo, Carlos M. .......................................................................71 Grindstaff, Laura......................................................................84 Groves-Price, Paula ..................................................................25 Gunnar, Megan R. ...................................................................74

H Hacker, Douglas J. ...................................................................29 Hadith, The: Articulating the Beliefs and Constructs of Classical Islam ...................................................................80 Hadley, Elizabeth Amelia..........................................................50 Hall, John R. ............................................................................84 Hall, Susan...............................................................................39 Handbook for Classical Research ...............................................6 Handbook of Adolescent Transition Education .........................23 Handbook of Advanced Multilevel Analysis, The ......................70 Handbook of Asian Education .................................................26 Handbook of Asian Security Studies ........................................63 Handbook of Bullying in Schools: An International Perspective...26 Handbook of Child and Adolescent Behavior Disorders............22 Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy, The: Psychoanalytic Approaches ............................................74 Handbook of Child Development and Early Education: Research to Practice .............................................72 Handbook of Chinese International Relations, A ......................64 Handbook of Cognitive-Behavioral Therapies...........................70 Handbook of Communication Ethics........................................51 Handbook of Cultural Developmental Science .........................72 Handbook of Cultural Sociology ..............................................84 Handbook of Defence Politics: International and Comparative Perspectives ......................................................68 Handbook of Developmental Social Neuroscience....................74 Handbook of Deviant Behavior, The.........................................85 Handbook of Education Policy Research...................................30 Handbook of Emotions and the Mass Media ...........................51 Handbook of Employee Selection ............................................71 Handbook of Formative Assessment ........................................28 Handbook of Genetics & Society, The: Mapping the New Genomic Era ...........................................................89

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

INDEX

Handbook of Globalization Studies..........................................88 Handbook of Imagination and Mental Simulation....................76 Handbook of Individual Differences in Social Behavior ...............72 Handbook of Infant Mental Health ..........................................71 Handbook of Information Management ..................................37 Handbook of Latinos and Education: Theory, Research, and Practice ...........................................................27 Handbook of Local and Regional Development........................32 Handbook of Metacognition in Education ...............................29 Handbook of Motivation at School ..........................................29 Handbook of New Security Studies ..........................................61 Handbook of Peer Interactions, Relationships, and Groups ......75 Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play, The ................76 Handbook of Polytomous Item Response Theory Models .........76 Handbook of Positive Psychology in Schools ............................31 Handbook of Practice and Research in Study Abroad, The: Higher Education and the Quest for Global Citizenship.......................29 Handbook of Prejudice, Stereotyping, and Discrimination ........75 Handbook of Prevention Science .............................................28 Handbook of Reading Research ...............................................29 Handbook of Research in the Social Foundations of Education...25 Handbook of Research on Children's and Young Adult Literature.26 Handbook of Research on Reading Disabilities.........................28 Handbook of Research on School Choice ................................30 Handbook of Research on Schools, Schooling and Human Development.............................................................28 Handbook of Research on the Education of School Leaders.....29 Handbook of School-Family Partnerships .................................28 Handbook of Security Studies ..................................................64 Handbook of Sexuality-Related Measures ................................83 Handbook of Social Entrepreneurship ......................................17 Handbook of Spanish Language Media, The............................51 Handbook of Terrorism Research: Research, Theories and Concepts ........................................................................61 Handbook of the Uncertain Self ..............................................71 Handbook of Urban Ecology....................................................32 Handbook of US-Middle East Relations ....................................65 Handbook of Youth and Young Adulthood: New Perspectives and Agendas .............................................90 Handbook on Peace Education ................................................71 Hanioglu, M. Sükrü .................................................................34 Hanks, Patrick..........................................................................43 Hanks, Reuel R. .........................................................................8 Hanley, Ryan Patrick.................................................................34 Hannavy, John .........................................................................54 Happiness and Well-being .......................................................71 Hargie, Owen ..........................................................................74 Hargreaves, Linda ....................................................................27 Harrington, Austin ...................................................................90 Harrison, John .........................................................................87 Hashem Pesaran ......................................................................20 Haynes, Jeffrey ..................................................................61, 79 Hedge, Patricia ........................................................................29 Heelas, Paul .............................................................................77 Hempstead, Colin ....................................................................36 Henry, Annette M. ...................................................................25 Herman, Eti .............................................................................37 Hicken, Allen ...........................................................................11 Hinduism, Encyclopedia of .......................................................82 Historical Jesus, Encyclopedia of the ........................................82 Historical Linguistics.................................................................42 History & Philosophy of Science ...............................................58 History of Education ................................................................31 History of Feminism Series .................................................34–35 History of Psychiatry, A ............................................................34 History of the Study of Landforms, The: For the Development of Geomorphology ..........................................32 History of the Study of Landforms, The: Volume 1 Geomorphology Before Davis ................................................33 History of the Study of Landforms, The: Volume 2 The Life and Work of William Morris Davis ............................33 Ho Mok, Ka .............................................................................30 Hoare, Jim ...............................................................................62 Hobhouse, L.T..........................................................................88 Hoffman, James.......................................................................25 Holbert, R. Lance .....................................................................53 Holden, Patrick ........................................................................58 Hoover, Lona ...........................................................................39 Horne, Ann..............................................................................74 Horowitz, Irving Louis ..............................................................89 Hosen, Nadirsyah.....................................................................81 Houck, Mike ............................................................................32 Houlihan, Barrie.......................................................................91 Hox, Joop ................................................................................70 Hoyle, Carolyn .........................................................................88 Hoyle, Rick H. ..........................................................................72 Hubbard, Philip........................................................................45 Huebner, E. Scott.....................................................................31 Huggett, Richard .....................................................................32 Huisman, Jeroen ......................................................................30 Human Rights, A Dictionary of ................................................69

Humanitarianism, A Dictionary of ............................................64 Huppert, Felicia........................................................................71 Hussein, Saddam .....................................................................65 Hyrkas, Kristiina .......................................................................84

I ICA Communication Series ......................................................51 Information Society, The ..........................................................89 Information Worlds: Behavior, Technology, and Social Context in the Age of the Internet ..............................36 Inglis, David .............................................................................83 Intergroup Conflicts and Their Resolution: Social Psychological Perspective .............................................69 International Behavioural and Social Sciences Library .................90 International Bibliography of the Social Sciences: Anthropology: 2008 .................................................6 International Bibliography of the Social Sciences: Economics: 2008 ....................................................16 International Bibliography of the Social Sciences: Political Science: 2008 ...........................................................63 International Bibliography of the Social Sciences: Sociology: 2008.....................................................................88 International Directory of Government 2009 .............................4 International Institute for Strategic Studies ................................5 International Law.....................................................................63 International Law and Diplomacy.............................................22 International Library of the Philosophy of Education Series ......25 International Organizations Funding Directory: Grants and Projects Involving Non-Governmental Organizations ........................................................................22 International Political Economy: Critical Concepts in Political Science .................................................................58 International Relations, A Dictionary of....................................64 International Trade Organizations and Agreements, A Dictionary of ......................................................................58 International Who's Who 2010, The........................................14 International Who's Who in Classical Music 2010....................14 International Who's Who in Poetry 2009 .................................15 International Who's Who in Popular Music 2010.....................15 International Who's Who of Authors & Writers 2010 ................15 International Who's Who of Women 2010 ..............................15 Introduction to Health Sciences Librarianship ...........................40 Introduction to Instructional Services in Academic Libraries, An ..........................................................................40 Introduction To Staff Development In Academic Libraries, An ..38 Iran............................................................................................9 Irele, Abiola .............................................................................58 Irish Feminisms, 1810-1930 .....................................................34 Islam........................................................................................80 Islam and Education ................................................................25 Islam in South Asia ..................................................................79 Islam in Southeast Asia ............................................................81 Islam in the West.....................................................................81 Islamic Banking and Finance ....................................................19 Islamic Law ..............................................................................79 Islamic Medical and Scientific Tradition ....................................33 Islamic Political Thought and Governance ................................58 Italian Literary Studies, Encyclopedia of....................................49

J Jackson, Nicky Ali ....................................................................90 Jacobsen, Knut A.....................................................................12 Jaeger, Paul T. ..........................................................................36 James Joyce .............................................................................47 Japan.......................................................................................63 Japan Weekly Mail, The: A Political, Commercial, and Literary Journal, 1870-1917............................................14 Japan Weekly Mail, The, Series I: 1870-1899, Part 4, 1885-1889...49 Jaspers, Karl.............................................................................57 Jefiyo, Biodun ..........................................................................58 Jenkins, Christine.....................................................................26 Jewitt, Carey............................................................................44 Jihad and Martyrdom...............................................................79 Jimerson, Shane.......................................................................26 Johnson, Alison .......................................................................42 Jones, Harriet...........................................................................38 Jones, Ken ...............................................................................23 Jones, Wayne...........................................................................40 Jonung, Lars ............................................................................22 Joseph, Brian D........................................................................42 Joseph, John E. ..................................................................42–43 J.R.R. Tolkien Encyclopedia: Scholarship and Critical Assessment...49 Junko Umemoto ......................................................................13

K Ka Ho Mok ..............................................................................30 Kachru, Braj.............................................................................45 Kamil, Michael L. .....................................................................29

Kania, Andrew.........................................................................54 Kasher, Asa........................................................................42, 59 Kegan Gardiner, Judith ............................................................90 Kershner, Ruth .........................................................................27 Keynes' Economics: Methodological Issues ..............................20 Kipnis, Andrew ........................................................................13 Kirkpatrick, Andy .....................................................................41 Klassen, Pamela .......................................................................81 Klein, William M.P....................................................................76 Knight, Deborah ......................................................................30 Knight, Stephen.......................................................................50 Kobayashi, Akio.......................................................................14 Koepping, Elizabeth.................................................................80 Kohli, Atul .................................................................................7 Konijn, Elly A. ..........................................................................51 Kozlowski, Steve W.J. ..............................................................73 Kratochwill, Thomas ................................................................22 Kuiper, Edith ............................................................................19 Kuper, Adam ...........................................................................90 Kurian, George ..................................................................62, 64 Kwok Pui-Lan ..........................................................................80

L Lachs, John..............................................................................58 Landfill Engineering ...................................................................7 Language Acquisition ..............................................................43 Language and Politics ..............................................................43 Lanyado, Monica .....................................................................74 Larch, Martin ...........................................................................20 Laursen, Brett ..........................................................................75 Law of International Business...................................................20 Lawson, Tony...........................................................................20 Le Poidevin, Robin ...................................................................57 Leaman, Oliver.........................................................................82 Learning, Training, and Development in Organizations................73 Leary, Mark R...........................................................................72 Lee, Hermione .........................................................................48 Lee, Sul H. .........................................................................36, 52 Lee, Yoke-Lian .........................................................................60 Legal Aspects of Trade Finance ................................................22 Leiter, Michael .........................................................................70 Leonardo, Descartes, Max Weber.............................................57 Lesser, Anthony .......................................................................66 Lever-Tracey, Constance ...........................................................84 Lewin, Ross..............................................................................29 Li Mingjiang.............................................................................10 Li Wei ......................................................................................44 Liberalisms: Essays in Political Philosophy .................................67 Libraries and Graduate Students: Building Connections.............................................................39 Lin, Nan...................................................................................86 Linguistics Encyclopedia, The ...................................................44 Linley, Alex...............................................................................71 Liow, Joseph ......................................................................63, 81 Literature in Protestant England, 1560-1660............................48 Llewellyn, Mark .......................................................................35 Lo, Ming-cheng .......................................................................84 Lock, Margaret ........................................................................89 Looney, Robert.........................................................................65 Loukaitou-Sideris, Anastasia.......................................................7 Lu, Yiyi ....................................................................................11 Lukács and Heidegger: Towards a New Philosophy ..................57 Lupone, George.......................................................................38 Lyden, John .............................................................................81

M McCann, Philip ........................................................................18 McCarthy, Michael...................................................................41 McGill, Stuart ..........................................................................41 McGill-Franzen, Anne ..............................................................28 McGillivray, Donald ..................................................................19 McGonigal, Andrew ................................................................57 McGowan, Lee ........................................................................69 Machado-Casas, Margarita ......................................................27 McMahon, Darrin ....................................................................34 McMahon, Linnet ....................................................................76 McNeil, W.K. ...........................................................................54 Magnusson, Lars......................................................................16 Major Themes in Education Series ...................23, 25, 27, 29–30 Major Themes in Health and Social Welfare Series ...................83 Major Writings in Middle Eastern Studies Series.......................68 Malewski, Erik .........................................................................29 Malmkjaer, Kirsten ...................................................................44 Mansell, Robin.........................................................................89 Marketing and Promoting Electronic Resources: Creating the E-Buzz!............................................................................39 Markman, Keith D. ..................................................................76 Marrone, Gaetana ...................................................................49 Marshall, Barbara.....................................................................61

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

INDEX

Marshall, Barbara L. .................................................................90 Martin, Hubert...........................................................................6 Martin, Jane ............................................................................23 Martin, Susan K. ......................................................................35 Martinez, Corinne....................................................................27 Massis, Bruce E. .......................................................................40 Mathematics Education ...........................................................27 Mauer, Victor...........................................................................64 Mauss, Marcel .........................................................................86 May, Steve ...............................................................................51 Medical Librarian 2.0: Use of Web 2.0 Technologies in Reference Services .............................................................40 Medical Library Downsizing: Administrative, Professional, and Personal Strategies for Coping with Change...................40 Meece, Judith ..........................................................................28 Men and Masculinities, International Encyclopedia of ................90 Mestrovic Deyrup, Marta .........................................................39 Metaphor and Figurative Language .........................................43 Metaphysical Theory of the State, The .....................................88 Michael Porter .........................................................................20 Michel Foucault .......................................................................87 Middle East and North Africa 2010........................................2–3 Migration ................................................................................62 Military Balance 2009, The ........................................................5 Miller, J. Mitchell......................................................................90 Miller, William..........................................................................40 Millson-Martula, Christopher ...................................................53 Milton, Colin ...........................................................................47 Ming-cheng Lo ........................................................................84 Mingjiang, Li............................................................................10 Missions and Missionaries, Encyclopedia of..............................82 Mitchell, James E. ....................................................................71 Mitra, Subrata K. .....................................................................62 Miyake, Okiko .........................................................................13 Modern Defence and Strategy, A Dictionary of ........................65 Modern Indian Culture and Society .........................................12 Modern Jewish Culture, Encyclopedia of .................................54 Modern Political Thought, Encyclopedia of ..............................59 Modern Politics, A Dictionary of ..............................................58 Molnar, Gyozo .........................................................................60 Morphew, Christopher.............................................................30 Morris, Richard ........................................................................22 Morton-Cameron, W. H...........................................................13 Morvillo, Nancy........................................................................77 Mosenthal, Peter B. .................................................................29 Moses, A. Dirk .........................................................................33 Motion, Andrew ......................................................................47 Moyar, Dean ............................................................................55 Müller, Hans-Peter ...................................................................90 Multiculturalism .......................................................................85 Munshi, Debashish ..................................................................51 Murillo, Enrique G., Jr..............................................................27 Mustafa Shah ..........................................................................80

N Nan Lin....................................................................................86 Nauright, John R......................................................................90 Nelson, Todd D. .......................................................................75 Nering, Michael .......................................................................76 New Dimensions in Foreign Policy............................................65 New Religious Movements, Encyclopedia of ............................81 Newman, David .........................................................................8 Nicholas, David ........................................................................37 Nicola, Irma .............................................................................37 Nineteenth-Century Photography, Encyclopedia of...................54 Nissel, Alan T. ..........................................................................63 Nogueira Martins, João............................................................20 Nonlinear Science, Encyclopedia of ..........................................36 Nonneman, Gerd.....................................................................59 Nonomura, Toshika..................................................................49 Novels of Virginia Woolf, The ..................................................48

O O'Connor, Brian.......................................................................54 Official Guide to Eastern Asia, An: Trans-continental Connections between Europe and Asia, Prepared by Imperial Japanese Government Railways................................14 Ogawa, Rodney T. ...................................................................29 Oikawa, Yoshinobu..................................................................14 Okada, Richard H.......................................................................9 O'Keeffe, Anne........................................................................41 Okereke, Chukwumerije ..........................................................61 Okiko Miyake ..........................................................................13 Oleson, Kathryn C. ..................................................................71 On Durkheim's Rules of Sociological Method...........................87 Organized Crime .................................................................1, 87 Orientalism ..............................................................................50 Origin of Our Knowledge of Right and Wrong, The.................56 Ortega, Lourdes.......................................................................42

ORDER NOW!

See Order Form at the back of this catalogue

Orthodox Christian World, The ................................................78 Ostini, Remo............................................................................76 Ottoman Empire and Its Aftermath, The: The Emergence of the Modern Middle East and Balkans................34 Outsourcing Records Management ..........................................36 Outtz, James............................................................................72

P Page, Stephen J. ......................................................................31 Pares, Susan ............................................................................62 Parker, Richard...................................................................82, 85 Pascal, Christine.......................................................................26 Pearson, P. David .....................................................................29 Pease, Bob...............................................................................90 Pellen, Rita...............................................................................40 Perkins, Chris...........................................................................32 Perrin, Colin.............................................................................17 Pesaran, Hashem .....................................................................20 Peters, Joel ................................................................................8 Pfohl, William ..........................................................................28 Philip Kotler .............................................................................17 Philip Larkin .............................................................................47 Philip Roth ...............................................................................47 Phillips, John............................................................................49 Phillipson, Chris .......................................................................83 Philosophy of Mind..................................................................56 Philosophy of Race, The...........................................................54 Philosophy of Religion .............................................................56 Phinnemore, David ..................................................................69 Picken, Gavin...........................................................................79 Pierse, Mary.............................................................................34 Pike, Andy ...............................................................................32 Plank, David N. ........................................................................30 Plant, Raymond ...........................................................66, 85, 87 Plutarch and Athens ..................................................................6 Police Science, Encyclopedia of ................................................90 Political and Economic Dictionary of Africa, A..........................67 Political and Economic Dictionary of Central and South-Eastern Europe, A.................................................62 Political and Economic Dictionary of East Asia, A .....................62 Political and Economic Dictionary of Eastern Europe, A............62 Political and Economic Dictionary of Latin America, A..............67 Political and Economic Dictionary of South Asia, A ..................62 Political and Economic Dictionary of South-East Asia, A...........62 Political and Economic Dictionary of the Middle East, A...........62 Political and Economic Dictionary of the USA, A ......................62 Political and Economic Dictionary of Western Europe, A ..........67 Political Philosophy and Social Welfare: Essays on the Normative Basis of Welfare Provisions..............................66 Political Science .......................................................................64 Politics and International Relations of Modern Korea, The: Understanding the Politics and Economics of the Republic of Korea (ROK) and the Democratic Peoples' Republic of Korea (DPRK) ......................................................10 Politics and Social Insight .........................................................66 Politics of Climate Change, The: A Survey ...............................59 Politics of Conflict, The: A Survey ............................................61 Politics of Development, The: A Survey ....................................61 Politics of Fair Trade, The: A Survey..........................................60 Politics of Gender, The: A Survey .............................................60 Politics of Maritime Power, The: A Survey ................................61 Politics of Migration, The: A Survey .........................................61 Politics of Modern Central Asia................................................10 Politics of Modern China .........................................................11 Politics of Modern Iran...............................................................8 Politics of Modern Southeast Asia............................................11 Politics of Narcotic Drugs, The: A Survey..................................60 Politics of Oil, The: A Survey ....................................................61 Politics of Religion, The: A Survey ............................................61 Politics of Space, The: A Survey ...............................................60 Politics of Terrorism, The: A Survey ..........................................61 Politics of the Environment, The: A Survey ...............................61 Politics of the Olympics, The: A Survey ....................................60 Politics of Water, The: A Survey ...............................................60 Pope, Steven W. ......................................................................90 Pormann, Peter........................................................................33 Powell, Thomas W. ..................................................................43 Power, Eileen ...........................................................................46 Pragmatics II ............................................................................42 Pregadio, Fabrizio ....................................................................77 Present-Day Impressions of Japan: The History, People, Commerce, Industries and Resources of Japan and Japan's Colonial Empire, Kwantung, Chosen, Taiwan, Karafuto ...........13 Pressure Groups and Political Culture: A Comparative Study....66 Price, Eric.................................................................................61 Primitive Classification .............................................................86 Pringle, Keith ...........................................................................90 Proffitt, Jane ............................................................................36 Profiles of People in Power ......................................................69 Psychology of Ageing ..............................................................71

+44 (0)1235 400524

Psychology of Religion .............................................................78 Public Sector Economics ..........................................................20 Pui-Lan, Kwok .........................................................................80 Pujol, Michele ..........................................................................18 Puppa, Paolo ...........................................................................49

Qiang Zhai...............................................................................68 Qur'an, The: An Encyclopedia..................................................82

R Rabbitt, Patrick ........................................................................71 Radicalism and the Revolt Against Reason: The Social Theories of Georges Sorel with a Translation of his Essay on the Decomposition of Marxism................................89 Reappraising J.A. Hobson: Humanism and Welfare ..................20 Regionalism in Asia..................................................................12 Reid, Gavin ..............................................................................30 Religion and Human Rights......................................................80 Religion and Politics .................................................................79 Religion and Science ................................................................77 Religion and Society Series.......................................................82 Religion and the Environment..................................................77 Reschly, Amy L.........................................................................28 Restorative Justice....................................................................88 Richard Rorty ...........................................................................55 Robert Owen and the Owenites in Britain and America: The Quest for the New Moral World.......................87 Roberts, Adam.........................................................................48 Roberts, Kyle ...........................................................................70 Robertson, David ...............................................................58, 65 Robertson, Roland ...................................................................67 Robin Hood: Classic Fiction Library ..........................................50 Robinson, Catherine ................................................................82 Rojek, Chris .............................................................................85 Roland Barthes ........................................................................51 Rosen, Michael ........................................................................54 Ross, E. Denison ......................................................................46 Rossini, Manuela......................................................................46 Routledge Communication Series ......................................52–53 Routledge Companion to Caribbean Literatures in English, The...46 Routledge Companion to Dyslexia, The ...................................30 Routledge Companion to Early Christian Thought, The............79 Routledge Companion to Ethics, The .......................................54 Routledge Companion to Literature and Science, The.................46 Routledge Companion to Metaphysics, The .............................57 Routledge Companion to News and Journalism, The.................52 Routledge Companion to Nineteenth Century Philosophy, The....55 Routledge Companion to Philosophy and Music, The ................54 Routledge Companion to Philosophy of Psychology, The .........57 Routledge Companion to Religion and Film, The .....................81 Routledge Companion to Science Fiction, The .........................48 Routledge Companion to Sports History ..................................90 Routledge Doctoral Student's Companion, The .......................24 Routledge Doctoral Supervisor's Companion, The: Supporting Effective Research in Education and the Social Sciences.......................................................................24 Routledge Encyclopaedia of UK Education, Training and Employment The ............................................................24 Routledge Handbook of Applied Communication Research .....52 Routledge Handbook of Applied Linguistics, The .....................41 Routledge Handbook of Central Asian Politics ...........................8 Routledge Handbook of Climate Change and Society.................84 Routledge Handbook of Clinical Supervision: Fundamental International Themes ...............................................................84 Routledge Handbook of Corpus Linguistics, The ......................41 Routledge Handbook of Criminology: An International Perspective .83 Routledge Handbook of Ethnic Politics ....................................59 Routledge Handbook of Forensic Linguistics, The.....................42 Routledge Handbook of German Idealism, The........................54 Routledge Handbook of Global Public Health ..........................82 Routledge Handbook of Indian Politics ......................................7 Routledge Handbook of International Criminal Law.................16 Routledge Handbook of International Political Economy (IPE): IPE as a Global Conversation..........................68 Routledge Handbook of Japanese Culture and Society ................9 Routledge Handbook of Japanese Politics, The ..........................8 Routledge Handbook of Multimodal Analysis, The...................44 Routledge Handbook of Political Islam .......................................9 Routledge Handbook of Sexuality, Health and Rights.................85 Routledge Handbook of South Asian Culture and Society..........9 Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal ............................................11 Routledge Handbook of Sports Development ..........................91 Routledge Handbook of the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict ................8 Routledge Handbook of the Peoples and Places of Ancient Western Asia, The: The Near East from the Early Bronze Age to the fall of the Persian Empire ...................6 Routledge Handbook of World Englishes, The .........................41

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

www.routledge.com/reference

INDEX

Routledge Handbooks in Applied Linguistics Series ................41–42 Routledge International Handbook of Creative Learning, The ..23 Routledge International Handbook of Early Childhood Education, The .....................................................26 Routledge International Handbook of English, Language and Literacy Teaching The .....................................25 Routledge International Handbook of Higher Education, The...30 Routledge International Handbook of the Sociology of Education, The ..................................................................27 Routledge International Handbooks of Education Series ..........23 Routledge International Handbooks Series.............25, 27, 88, 90 Routledge Library Editions Series.................9, 18, 22, 31, 49–50, 55, 58, 63–64, 80, 82, 87 Routledge Library of Folklore and Popular Culture Series .........50 Routledge Literature Companions Series..................................48 Routledge Philosophy Companions Series ....................54–55, 57 Routledge Revivals Series .........................20, 32–33, 47–48, 55–57, 65–66, 85–89 Routledge Studies in Library and Information Science Series ......................................................36–37, 39–40 Routledge Worlds Series ......................................................6, 78 Rubin, Kenneth H. ...................................................................75 Rusong Wang ..........................................................................32

S Saddam Hussein ......................................................................65 Sadeh, Eligar............................................................................60 Saeed, Abdullah ......................................................................58 Salas, Eduardo .........................................................................73 Salomon, Gavriel .....................................................................71 Sánchez Muñoz, Juan ..............................................................27 Sandkühler, Hans Jörg .............................................................54 Saul Bellow..............................................................................48 Savranskaya, Svetlana ..............................................................68 Scaler-Scott, Kathleen ..............................................................70 Schabas, William .....................................................................16 Schaps, David ............................................................................6 Schieffelin, Bambi ....................................................................41 Schmid, Alex............................................................................61 Schneider, Barbara ...................................................................30 Scholte, Jan Aart .....................................................................67 Schott, Michael........................................................................40 Schottli, Jivanta........................................................................62 Schulte, William D., Jr..............................................................17 Science, Technology and Society, Encyclopedia of ....................36 Scobell, Andrew ......................................................................63 Scott, Alwyn ............................................................................36 Second-Language Acquisition ..................................................42 Security Studies .......................................................................63 Seddon, David ...................................................................62, 67 See Seng Tan ...........................................................................12 Sefton-Green, Julian ................................................................23 Seiz, Janet ...............................................................................18 Semiotics .................................................................................44 Serials Binding: A Simple and Complete Guidebook to Processes.........................................................37 Shafiq Alvi ...............................................................................19 Shah, Mustafa .........................................................................80 Shakespeare ............................................................................50 Siegel, Gretta...........................................................................39 Simons, Peter...........................................................................57 Simpson, James .......................................................................41 Sinfield, Alan ...........................................................................48 Singh, Prerna .............................................................................7 SIOP Organizational Frontiers Series ...................................72–73 Skorupski, John .......................................................................54 Skutsch, Carl ...........................................................................90 Smith, Cindy J. ........................................................................83 Social and Foreign Affairs in Iraq..............................................65 Social and Moral Theory in Casework ......................................85 Social Capital.......................................................................7, 86 Social Cognition: The Basis of Human Interaction ....................75 Social Democratic Image of Society, The: A Study of the Achievements and Origins of Scandinavian Social Democracy in Comparative Perspective........................66 Social Issues of Ageing ............................................................83 Social Psychology.....................................................................69 Social Psychology of Consumer Behavior .................................76 Social Science Encyclopedia, The..............................................90 Social Theory, Encyclopedia of .................................................90 Socialism and Saint-Simon .......................................................86 Sociolinguistics Around the World: A Handbook......................44 Sociology and Philosophy ........................................................86 Sociology of Scientific Knowledge, The....................................83 Sommer, Marni........................................................................82 Songs and Tales for Children: A Collection of Chapbooks in 19th-Century Britain ..........................................................13 Sourcebook for Political Communication Research: Methods, Measures, and Analytical Techniques .......................................53 South America, Central America and the Caribbean 2010.........3

South Asia 2010 ........................................................................3 Spash, Clive .............................................................................21 Spencer, John ..........................................................................53 Spirituality ...................................................................35, 77, 80 Springer, Mathew G. ...............................................................30 Sriramesh, Krishnamurthy ........................................................53 Stephenson, Paul .......................................................................6 Stern, David.............................................................................39 Stevens, Phillips, Jr ...................................................................78 Stjernfelt, Frederik ...................................................................44 Strack, Fritz..............................................................................75 Strategic Planning in Academic Libraries: A Practical Guide......37 Strategic Survey 2009 ................................................................5 Studies in Curriculum Theory Series .........................................29 Studies in Social History ...........................................................35 Suhr, Julie A.............................................................................76 Suri, Jeremi..............................................................................68 Survey of Arab-Israeli Relations ................................................67 Svanberg, Ingvar......................................................................81 Swearer, Susan M. ...................................................................26 Swenson-Wright, John.............................................................10 Sykes, Gary..............................................................................30 Sylvester, Christine ...................................................................61 Symons, John ..........................................................................57

T Tahir Abbas..............................................................................25 Tale of Genji, The.......................................................................9 Talisse, Robert B.......................................................................58 Tallon, Andrew ..........................................................................7 Tan, Andrew T.H. ...............................................................61–62 Taoism, The Encyclopedia of ....................................................77 Tartaglia, James .......................................................................55 Tate, Robyn L. ..........................................................................70 Taylor, Bayard...........................................................................13 Taylor, David ............................................................................79 Taylor, Paul C. ..........................................................................54 Taylor-Gooby, Peter ..................................................................66 Territories of Indonesia, The .....................................................67 Territories of the People's Republic of China ............................69 Territories of the Russian Federation 2010, The........................67 Thomson, Pat.....................................................................23–24 Tight, Malcolm ........................................................................30 Tippins, Nancy T.......................................................................71 Tomaney, John .........................................................................32 Tomba, Luigi ............................................................................13 Torrance, Harry ........................................................................23 Tourish, Dennis ........................................................................74 Tozer, Steven............................................................................25 Translation Studies ...................................................................45 Travel Writing ..........................................................................47 Travers, David ..........................................................................63 Treatment of Eating Disorders, The: A Clinical Handbook..............................................................71 Tresch, Richard W. ...................................................................20 Trinidad Galván, Ruth ..............................................................27 Tu Weiming ...............................................................................9 Turner, Bryan S. .......................................................................88 Twentieth-Century Economic History .......................................16 Twentieth-Century Photography, Encyclopedia of ....................54

U Umemoto, Junko .....................................................................13 Unger, Jonathan ......................................................................13 United Nations.........................................................................63 Urban and Regional Economics................................................18 Urban Regeneration and Renewal..............................................7 USA and Canada 2010 ..............................................................3

V van Dijk, Ruud .........................................................................68 Varese, Federico.......................................................................87 Vaughn, Stephen L. .................................................................54 Velupillai, K. Vela .....................................................................17 Vercic, Dejan............................................................................53 Vertovec, Steven ................................................................62, 85 Villenas, Sofia A.......................................................................27 Vint, Sherryl.............................................................................48 Volti, Rudi................................................................................36 von Scheve, Christian ..............................................................51

Wang, Rusong .........................................................................32 Wanke, Michaela .....................................................................76 Ward, David.............................................................................70 Ward, Jamie.............................................................................73 Warner, Jeroen ........................................................................60 Warren, Lynne .........................................................................54 Warrier, Meera...................................................................60, 67 Wasik, Barbara Hanna .............................................................72 Wearmouth, Janice..................................................................30 Weatherford, Doris ..................................................................35 Webb, Kristine W.....................................................................23 Weber, Heloise.........................................................................61 Wegerich, Kai ..........................................................................60 Wehmeyer, Michael L. .............................................................23 Wei, Li .....................................................................................44 Wei Zhang...............................................................................18 Weil, Simone .....................................................................55–56 Weiler, Joseph..........................................................................63 Weiming, Tu ..............................................................................9 Wentzel, Kathryn.....................................................................29 Westerlund, David ...................................................................81 Western Europe 2010 ............................................................3–4 White, Lynn T...........................................................................11 Who's Who in International Affairs 2009.................................15 Wigfield, Allan.........................................................................29 Williams, Patrick ......................................................................50 Wilson, Isaiah, III......................................................................68 Wilson, John P. ........................................................................24 Wilson, Nigel .............................................................................6 Wolf, Shelby ............................................................................26 Wolf, Siegried..........................................................................62 Wolff, Stefan ...........................................................................59 Wolverton, Robert E., Jr...........................................................39 Women and Addiction: A Comprehensive Handbook ................73 Women and Belief, 1852-1928................................................35 Women and Christianity ..........................................................80 Women and Education ............................................................23 Women and Empire, 1750-1939: Primary Sources on Gender and Anglo-Imperialism .........................................35 Women and Religion ...............................................................81 Women in Asia ........................................................................12 Women's Economic Writing 1760-1900 ..................................18 Wood, John C. ............................................................17, 20–21 Wood, M. Sandra ....................................................................40 Wood, Michael C...............................................................20–21 Work Engagement: A Handbook of Essential Theory and Research .............................................................70 World Christianity....................................................................80 World Englishes .......................................................................45 World's Major Languages, The ................................................45 World's Minorities, Encyclopedia of the ...................................90 World's Religions, The: Continuities and Transformations ........82 Worthington, William ..............................................................36 Wright, Richard A. ...................................................................90 Wunderlich, Jens-Uwe .......................................................61, 67 Wyse, Dominic.........................................................................25

X Xinzhong Yao ............................................................................9

Y Yang, Charles ..........................................................................43 Yao, Xinzhong ...........................................................................9 Yarber, William L......................................................................83 Yiyi Lu .....................................................................................11 Yokohama Archives .................................................................49 Yong Zhao ...............................................................................26 Yongnian Zheng ......................................................................11 Yoon, Jina................................................................................28 York, Michael...........................................................................82 Yoshinobu Oikawa...................................................................14 Young, Michelle D. ..................................................................29 Youngs, Tim ............................................................................47

Z Zabel, Diane ............................................................................38 Zafirovski, Milan ......................................................................90 Zeanah, Charles H., Jr..............................................................71 Zhai, Qiang..............................................................................68 Zhang, Sheldon X. ...................................................................83 Zhang, Wei..............................................................................18 Zhao, Yong ..............................................................................26 Zheng, Yongnian .....................................................................11

Wainwright, William J..............................................................56 Waiting on God.......................................................................55 Walberg, Herbert J...................................................................30 Waley, Arthur ..........................................................................14 Walker, Melanie.......................................................................24

E-mail: reference@routledge.com

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates

www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

for more information

for e-mail updates in your field

eBooks are only available to order online

HOW TO ORDER BOOKS

ORDER BOOKS HERE QTY

TITLE

ISBN

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

CALL (credit cards) +44 (0) 1235 400524 QTY

TITLE

FAX +44 (0) 20 7017 6699 ISBN

INTERNET www.routledge.com/reference

QTY

EMAIL reference@routledge.com

TITLE

ISBN

(sales enquiries only, please do not include card details in your email. To order online please visit www.routledge.com)

QTY

eBooks are only available to order online at: www.ebookstore.tandf.co.uk

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

ISBN

QTY

POST

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

- Return this form to:

Taylor & Francis Group

ISBN

Bookpoint (T&F) Freepost RRXG-BBUL-LAER Abingdon, Oxon, OX14 4SB

QTY

(only affix stamp if posting from outside UK)

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

TITLE

ISBN

PRICE PER BOOK (£)

If posting please fill in your details below and complete the form

PERSONAL DETAILS

(PLEASE USE CAPS)

POSTAGE (see below)

GRAND TOTAL

POSTAGE AND PACKING

SURNAME

FIRST NAME

EUROPE

REST OF WORLD

5% of total order

10% of total order

15% of total order

Min Charge of £1, Max Charge £10 NEXT DAY +£6.50*

Min Charge of £2.95, Max Charge £20 NEXT DAY +£6.50

Min Charge of £6.50 Max Charge £30

*We only guarantee next day delivery for orders received before noon.

DEPARTMENT

Prices and publication dates are subject to change

INSTITUTION

SELECT PAYMENT METHOD (please tick or fill appropriate boxes & select card type)

VAT NUMBER (EU member States)

PLEASE SEND ME A PRE-PAYMENT INVOICE

ADDRESS

(my ref number) TOWN

COUNTY

POSTCODE

COUNTRY

CHEQUE payable to Taylor & Francis £ CREDIT CARD (NB Select card type)

TELEPHONE

MASTERCARD

VISA

AMEX

SWITCH

ISSUE NUMBER (Only applies if paying by Switch)

DATE

SIGNATURE

EXPIRY DATE

SECURITY NUMBER Last 3 digits of security number on back of card

Please tick this box if you would like to receive more information on our standing order system Please tick this box if you would like to receive mailings from Taylor & Francis Group companies

SUBJ0920 A B

ISBN: 978-0-418-23842-4

LIBRARY RECOMMENDATION PERSONAL DETAILS

(PLEASE USE CAPS)

TITLE SURNAME

ISBN

PRICE (£)

FIRST NAME

TITLE DEPARTMENT

ISBN

PRICE (£)

COURSE(S) FOR WHICH THE BOOK/S WOULD BE RELEVANT

TITLE ISBN

PRICE (£)

I RECOMMEND YOU PURCHASE THE BOOKS LISTED

Highlights International Library Philosophy of Education

Page 1

Page 25

Page 30

Page 33

Page 47

Page 65

Page 67

Page 81

www.routledge.com/reference Routledge, 2 Park Square, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN Tel: 020 7017 6000 Fax: 020 7017 6699 Email: reference@routledge.com Paper used in this catalogue is chlorine free and environmentally friendly. It is manufactured with pulp supplied from sustainable managed forests.